JP2012230422A - Liquid crystal display device - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a hold type display device with higher image quality of a dynamic image and a higher contrast ratio.SOLUTION: A display device includes a backlight and a display panel. The backlight is divided into a plurality of unit regions. The display panel includes more pixels than the number of unit regions. Display is performed by converting the frame rate of the image data input to a device, and moreover converting the driving frequency of the backlight in accordance with the display while a unit region part performing black display is set to a non-light-emitting state.

Description

The present invention relates to an apparatus and a driving method thereof. Specifically, the present invention relates to a semiconductor device and a driving method thereof. More specifically, the present invention relates to a liquid crystal display device and a driving method thereof, and more particularly to a liquid crystal display device having improved contrast and a driving method thereof, and a method of improving the quality of moving images.

In recent years, interest in thin display devices has increased. Instead of CRT displays, liquid crystal displays, plasma displays, projection displays, etc. have been developed.
It has become popular. Furthermore, field emission displays, inorganic electroluminescent displays, organic electroluminescent displays, electronic paper, and the like are being developed as next-generation display devices.

In the display unit provided in the display device as described above, pixels that are the minimum unit constituting an image are juxtaposed. Then, each pixel emits light with luminance according to the image data, so that an image is formed on the display unit.

When displaying a moving image using such a display device, a plurality of images are displayed several tens of times per second,
This is done by displaying it quickly. This period for displaying a plurality of images (or the period for inputting image data to the display device) is called one frame period.

Here, the driving method of the display device can be classified from the viewpoint of what temporal distribution the pixel luminance has within one frame period. In a hold-type driving method mainly used for an active matrix display device, the luminance of a pixel is constant within one frame period. On the other hand, in the impulse-type driving method used for CRT or the like, after intense light emission once in one frame period, the luminance of the pixel is immediately attenuated and no light is emitted. In the impulse type driving method, 1
Most of the frame period is a non-light emitting state.

When a moving image is displayed, a hold-type display device may appear to have a trailing edge when it is moving part of the image, or it may appear blurry when it is moving as a whole image. It has become clear that it has a problem (moving motion blur). This is because the human eye predicts the movement of the moving object and moves the line of sight ahead of the moving object, whereas the image displayed on the hold-type display device stops for one frame period. It is said that it is caused by the disagreement of continuing. In the impulse-type display device, an image is displayed for a moment and then disappears immediately. Therefore, such inconsistency between the appearance and the display does not occur, and the problem of moving image blur does not occur.

As a method of solving the problem of moving image blur in the hold type display device, the following two methods are mainly proposed (Patent Document 1). The first is to provide a period for displaying an original image and a period for displaying a black image within one frame period. By doing so, the display can be approximated to an impulse type and the afterimage of the eyes can be suppressed, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved (Patent Documents 2 and 3). The second is to shorten the length of one frame period (increase the frame frequency). By doing so, the movement of the image can follow the movement of the eyes, and the movement of the image becomes smooth, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved (Patent Document 4). Furthermore, as an improved technique of the first method, it is disclosed that the quality of a moving image can be improved by displaying an image darker than the original image instead of the black image (Patent Documents 5, 6, and 5). Non-patent documents 1, 2, 3). Furthermore, a method of changing the driving method according to the conditions is disclosed (Patent Documents 7 and 8).

Further, as one of the indexes representing the quality of an image that can be displayed by the display device, there is a contrast ratio. The contrast ratio is the brightness contrast ratio (the ratio between the maximum brightness and the minimum brightness) that the display device can emit. A display device with a higher contrast ratio has a larger dynamic range of brightness and can display a sharp and clear image. Methods for improving the contrast ratio in a display device using a backlight are disclosed in Patent Document 9, Non-Patent Document 4, and the like.

JP-A-4-302289 JP-A-9-325715 JP 2000-200063 A JP 2005-268912 A JP 2002-23707 A JP 2004-240317 A JP 2002-91400 A JP 2004-177575 A JP 2007-25187 A

SID'05 DIGEST, 60.2, pp1734, (2005) SID'06 DIGEST, 69.4, pp1950, (2006) SID'06 DIGEST, 69.5, pp1954, (2006) SID'06 DIGEST, 44.4, pp1520, (2006)

As described above, various methods for solving the problem of moving image blur in the hold type display device have been studied. However, the effect is still insufficient, and the moving image quality is equivalent to that of the impulse type. Has not reached. Further, flickering is increased in the method of artificially bringing the display for displaying a black image closer to the impulse type. Also, there is a problem that the luminance of the image is reduced by displaying the black image, and the power consumption is increased in order to obtain the same luminance as when the black image is not inserted. Since the method of increasing the frame frequency complicates data processing, a driving circuit capable of high-speed processing is required, and there are problems of increased manufacturing costs, heat generation and power consumption accompanying data processing.

Furthermore, as a method for improving the contrast ratio in a display device using a backlight,
Although various things are examined, the method for improving the quality of a moving image is also not examined.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and a main object is to provide a display device with improved quality (image quality) of still images and moving images and a driving method thereof.
More specifically, a display device free from the problem of moving image blur and a driving method thereof, a display device with improved contrast ratio and a driving method thereof, and a display device free from flicker and a driving method thereof are provided. Providing a display device with improved viewing angle and driving method thereof, providing a display device with improved response speed and driving method thereof,
And so on. It is another object of the present invention to provide a display device with reduced power consumption and a driving method thereof, to provide a display device with reduced manufacturing cost, and a driving method thereof.

One aspect of the present invention is a liquid crystal display device having a backlight and a display panel, and the backlight is divided into a plurality of unit regions whose brightness can be individually controlled, and the display panel is based on the number of the plurality of regions. An image that has a large number of pixels and is displayed on the display panel is displayed according to the intermediate state image data estimated by detecting the amount of change in the movement of the image data input to the liquid crystal display device. Including the image, the backlight has a period in which the brightness of each area is controlled according to the image displayed on the display panel, and the light emission state is the same cycle as the display cycle of the image displayed on the display panel Is a liquid crystal display device.

One aspect of the present invention is a liquid crystal display device having a backlight and a display panel, and the backlight is divided into a plurality of unit regions whose brightness can be individually controlled, and the display panel is more than the number of unit regions. The image that has a large number of pixels and is displayed on the display panel includes an image that gives the same display state in the entire display area, and the backlight has the brightness of each unit area according to the image displayed on the display panel. The liquid crystal display device is characterized in that the light emission state is controlled in a period longer than the display period of an image displayed on the display panel.

One aspect of the present invention is a liquid crystal display device having a backlight and a display panel, and the backlight is divided into a plurality of unit regions whose brightness can be individually controlled, and the display panel is more than the number of unit regions. The display state of an image that has a large number of pixels and is displayed on the display panel is controlled in the same cycle as the cycle of image data input to the liquid crystal display device, and the backlight is an image displayed on the display panel. Therefore, it has a period in which the brightness of each unit area is controlled, and
The liquid crystal display device is characterized in that the light emission state is controlled in a cycle shorter than the display cycle of the image displayed on the display panel, including an image giving the same light emission state in the entire light emitting region.

One aspect of the present invention is a liquid crystal display device having a backlight and a display panel, and the backlight is divided into a plurality of unit regions whose brightness can be individually controlled, and the display panel is more than the number of unit regions. The image that has a large number of pixels and is displayed on the display panel includes an image that gives the same display state in the entire display area, and the backlight has the brightness of each unit area according to the image displayed on the display panel. The image displayed on the backlight includes an image that gives the same light emission state in the entire light emission region, and the light emission state is in the same cycle as the display cycle of the image displayed on the display panel. A liquid crystal display device that is controlled.

One aspect of the present invention is a liquid crystal display device having a backlight and a display panel, and the backlight is divided into a plurality of unit regions whose brightness can be individually controlled, and the display panel is more than the number of unit regions. It has a large number of pixels, the backlight has three or more stages in which the brightness can be controlled, and the display panel has n stages in which the brightness can be controlled (n is an integer of 2 or more). The liquid crystal display device is characterized in that the number of brightness steps that can be displayed as a whole liquid crystal display device is greater than n steps.

In the present invention, the backlight has three or more stages in which the brightness can be controlled, and the display panel has n stages (n is an integer of 2 or more) in which the brightness can be controlled. The number of the brightness | luminance steps which can be displayed as the whole apparatus may be larger than n steps.

In the present invention, the backlight brightness may be controlled according to the average value of the brightness of the image provided by the image data input to the liquid crystal display device.

In the present invention, an overdrive voltage may be included among the voltages input to the display panel.

In the present invention, a voltage whose polarity is periodically switched among voltages input to the display panel may be included.

Note that various types of switches can be used. Examples include electrical switches and mechanical switches. In other words, anything that can control the current flow,
It is not limited to a specific thing. For example, as a switch, a transistor (for example, bipolar transistor, MOS transistor, etc.), a diode (for example, PN diode, P, etc.)
IN diode, Schottky diode, MIM (Metal Insulator)
Metal diode, MIS (Metal Insulator Semiconductor)
uctor) diodes, diode-connected transistors, etc.), thyristors, etc. can be used. Alternatively, a logic circuit combining these can be used as a switch.

An example of a mechanical switch is a digital micromirror device (DMD),
There is a switch using MEMS (micro electro mechanical system) technology. The switch has an electrode that can be moved mechanically, and operates by controlling connection and disconnection by moving the electrode.

In the case where a transistor is used as a switch, the transistor operates as a mere switch, and thus the polarity (conductivity type) of the transistor is not particularly limited. However, when it is desired to suppress off-state current, it is desirable to use a transistor having a polarity with smaller off-state current. As a transistor with low off-state current, a transistor having an LDD region, a transistor having a multi-gate structure, and the like can be given. Alternatively, an N-channel transistor is preferably used in the case where the transistor operates as a switch when the potential of the source terminal of the transistor is close to the potential of the low potential power supply (Vss, GND, 0 V, or the like). On the other hand, it is desirable to use a P-channel transistor when operating in a state where the potential of the source terminal is close to the potential of the high potential side power supply (Vdd or the like). This is because an N-channel transistor operates when the source terminal is close to the potential of the low-potential side power supply, and a P-channel transistor operates when the source terminal is close to the potential of the high-potential side power supply. This is because the absolute value of the voltage between them can be increased, so that the switch can be operated more accurately. This is because the source follower operation is rare and the output voltage is less likely to decrease.

Note that CMO using both N-channel and P-channel transistors
An S-type switch may be used as the switch. When a CMOS switch is used, a current flows when one of the P-channel transistor and the N-channel transistor is turned on, so that the switch can easily function as a switch. For example, the voltage can be appropriately output regardless of whether the voltage of the input signal to the switch is high or low. Further, since the voltage amplitude value of the signal for turning on or off the switch can be reduced, the power consumption can be reduced.

Note that when a transistor is used as the switch, the switch includes an input terminal (one of a source terminal or a drain terminal), an output terminal (the other of the source terminal or the drain terminal),
And a terminal for controlling conduction (gate terminal). On the other hand, when a diode is used as the switch, the switch may not have a terminal for controlling conduction. Therefore, the use of a diode as a switch rather than a transistor can reduce the wiring for controlling the terminal.

In addition, when it is explicitly described that A and B are connected, A and B are electrically connected, and A and B are functionally connected. , A and B are directly connected. Here, A and B are objects (for example, devices, elements, circuits, wirings, electrodes, terminals, conductive films, layers, etc.). Therefore, it is not limited to a predetermined connection relationship, for example, the connection relationship shown in the figure or text, and includes things other than the connection relation shown in the figure or text.

For example, when A and B are electrically connected, an element (for example, a switch, a transistor, a capacitor, an inductor, a resistor, a diode, or the like) that enables electrical connection between A and B is provided. 1 or more may be arranged between A and B. Alternatively, when A and B are functionally connected, a circuit (for example, a logic circuit (an inverter, a NAND circuit, a NOR circuit, etc.), a signal conversion circuit that enables functional connection between A and B (DA conversion circuit, AD conversion circuit, gamma correction circuit, etc.), potential level conversion circuit (power supply circuit (boost circuit, step-down circuit, etc.), level shifter circuit that changes signal potential level), voltage source, current source, switching circuit , Amplifier circuits (circuits that can increase signal amplitude or current amount, operational amplifiers, differential amplifier circuits, source follower circuits, buffer circuits, etc.), signal generation circuits, memory circuits,
One or more control circuits and the like may be arranged between A and B. Alternatively, when A and B are directly connected, A and B may be directly connected without sandwiching other elements or other circuits between A and B.

Note that in the case where it is explicitly described that A and B are directly connected, when A and B are directly connected (that is, another element or other circuit between A and B). ) And A and B are electrically connected (that is, A and B are connected with another element or another circuit sandwiched between them). ).

Note that in the case where it is explicitly described that A and B are electrically connected, another element is connected between A and B (that is, between A and B). Or when A and B are functionally connected (that is, they are functionally connected with another circuit between A and B). And A and B are directly connected (
That is, it is assumed that A and B are connected without interposing another element or another circuit). That is, when it is explicitly described that it is electrically connected, it is the same as when it is explicitly only described that it is connected.

Child, electronic ink, electrophoretic element, grating light valve (GLV), plasma display (PDP), digital micromirror device (DMD), piezoelectric ceramic display, carbon nanotube, etc.
A display medium whose reflectance, transmittance, and the like change can be used. An EL display is used as a display device using an EL element, and a field emission display (FED) or a SED type flat display (SED: Sur) is used as a display device using an electron-emitting device.
face-conduction electron-emitter display)
As a display device using a liquid crystal element, a liquid crystal display (a transmissive liquid crystal display,
There are electronic papers as display devices using a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display, a reflective liquid crystal display, a direct-view liquid crystal display, and a projection liquid crystal display) and electronic ink or electrophoretic elements.

Note that an EL element is an element having an anode, a cathode, and an EL layer sandwiched between the anode and the cathode. Note that the EL layer uses light emission (fluorescence) from singlet excitons,
Includes those that use light emission (phosphorescence) from triplet excitons, those that use light emission (fluorescence) from singlet excitons, and those that use light emission (phosphorescence) from triplet excitons , One formed by organic matter, one formed by inorganic matter, one containing organic and one formed by inorganic matter, polymer material, low molecular material, polymer material and low A material containing a molecular material can be used. However, it is not limited to this,
Various EL elements can be used.

The electron-emitting device is an element that draws electrons by concentrating a high electric field on a sharp cathode. For example, as an electron-emitting device, a Spindt type, a carbon nanotube (CNT) type, a metal-insulator-metal laminated MIM (Metal-Insulator-Metal) type, and a metal-insulator-semiconductor laminated MIS (Metal-Insulator). -Semicon
(ductor) type, MOS type, silicon type, thin film diode type, diamond type, surface conduction emitter SCD type, ode type, diamond type, surface conduction emitter SCD type, metal-insulator-semiconductor-metal thin film type, HEED, etc. A type, an EL type, a porous silicon type, a surface conduction (SED) type, or the like can be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various types of electron-emitting devices can be used.

Note that a liquid crystal element is an element that controls transmission or non-transmission of light by an optical modulation action of liquid crystal, and includes a pair of electrodes and liquid crystal. Note that the optical modulation action of the liquid crystal is controlled by an electric field applied to the liquid crystal (including a horizontal electric field, a vertical electric field, or an oblique electric field). Liquid crystal elements include nematic liquid crystal, cholesteric liquid crystal, smectic liquid crystal, discotic liquid crystal, thermotropic liquid crystal, lyotropic liquid crystal, lyotropic liquid crystal, low molecular liquid crystal, polymer liquid crystal, ferroelectric liquid crystal, antiferroelectric liquid crystal, main chain. Type liquid crystal, side chain type polymer liquid crystal, plasma addressed liquid crystal (PDLC), banana type liquid crystal, TN (Twisted)
Nematic) mode, STN (Super Twisted Nematic) mode, IPS (In-Plane-Switching) mode, FFS (Fringe)
Field Switching mode, MVA (Multi-domain Ver.)
tick alignment mode, PVA (Patterned Vertic)
al Alignment), ASV (Advanced Super View) mode, ASM (Axial Symmetrical Aligned Micro-ce)
ll) mode, OCB (Optical Compensated Birefring)
ence) mode, ECB (Electrically Controlled Bird)
efficiency mode, FLC (Ferroelectric Liquid)
Crystal) mode, AFLC (Antiferroelectric Liquid)
d Crystal) mode, PDLC (Polymer Dispersed Liq)
uid Crystal) mode, guest host mode, etc. can be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various liquid crystal elements can be used.

Electronic paper includes those displayed by molecules such as optical anisotropy and dye molecule orientation, those displayed by particles such as electrophoresis, particle movement, particle rotation, and phase change. It is displayed by moving, displayed by color development / phase change of molecules, displayed by light absorption of molecules, displayed by light emission when electrons and holes are combined, etc. . For example, as electronic paper, microcapsule type electrophoresis, horizontal movement type electrophoresis, vertical movement type electrophoresis, spherical twist ball, magnetic twist ball, cylindrical twist ball method, charged toner, electronic powder fluid, magnetophoretic type, magnetic heat sensitivity Formula, electrowetting, light scattering (transparent white turbidity), cholesteric liquid crystal / photoconductive layer, cholesteric liquid crystal, bistable nematic liquid crystal, ferroelectric liquid crystal, dichroic dye / liquid crystal dispersion type, movable film, leuco dye extinction Color, photochromic, electrochromic, electrodeposition, flexible organic EL, etc. can be used. However, it is not limited to this,
Various electronic papers can be used. Here, by using microcapsule electrophoresis, aggregation and precipitation of electrophoretic particles, which is a drawback of the electrophoresis system, can be solved. The electronic powder fluid has advantages such as high-speed response, high reflectivity, wide viewing angle, low power consumption, and memory properties.

Note that the plasma display encloses a rare gas with a substrate having an electrode formed on the surface and a substrate having an electrode and a minute groove formed on the surface and a phosphor layer formed in the groove facing each other at a narrow interval. It has a structure. In addition, a display can be performed by generating an ultraviolet-ray by applying a voltage between electrodes and making fluorescent substance light. As a plasma display, DC
It may be a type PDP or an AC type PDP. Here, as a plasma display panel, AS
W (Address While Sustain) drive, ADS (Address Display Sep) that divides subframe into reset period, address period, and sustain period
driven), CLEAR (Low Energy Address and R)
instruction of false control sequence) drive, AL
IS (Alternate Lightning of Surfaces) method, TER
An ES (Technology of Reciprocal Susfainer) drive or the like can be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various types of plasma displays can be used.

Note that a display device that requires a light source, such as a liquid crystal display (transmission type liquid crystal display, transflective type liquid crystal display, reflection type liquid crystal display, direct view type liquid crystal display, projection type liquid crystal display), or a grating light valve (GLV) is used. As a light source for a display device using a conventional display device or a digital micromirror device (DMD), electroluminescence, a cold cathode tube, a hot cathode tube, an LED, a laser light source, a mercury lamp, or the like can be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various light sources can be used.

Note that the structure of the transistor can take a variety of forms. It is not limited to a specific configuration. For example, a multi-gate structure having two or more gate electrodes may be used. When the multi-gate structure is employed, the channel regions are connected in series, so that a plurality of transistors are connected in series. With the multi-gate structure, the off-state current can be reduced and the reliability can be improved by improving the withstand voltage of the transistor. Or, when operating in the saturation region, the drain-source current does not change much even when the drain-source voltage changes, and the slope of the voltage / current characteristic is flat due to the multi-gate structure. it can. By using the characteristic that the slope of the voltage / current characteristic is flat, an ideal current source circuit and an active load having a very high resistance value can be realized. As a result, a differential circuit or a current mirror circuit with good characteristics can be realized. As another example, a structure in which gate electrodes are arranged above and below a channel may be used. With the structure in which the gate electrodes are arranged above and below the channel, the channel region increases, so that the current value can be increased or the S value can be reduced because a depletion layer can be easily formed. When gate electrodes are provided above and below a channel, a structure in which a plurality of transistors are connected in parallel is obtained.

Alternatively, a structure in which a gate electrode is disposed over a channel region may be employed, or a structure in which a gate electrode is disposed under a channel region may be employed. Alternatively, a normal stagger structure or an inverted stagger structure may be used, the channel region may be divided into a plurality of regions, the channel regions may be connected in parallel, or the channel regions may be connected in series. Good. Alternatively, a source electrode or a drain electrode may overlap with the channel region (or a part thereof). With the structure in which the source electrode or the drain electrode overlaps with the channel region (or part thereof), it is possible to prevent electric charges from being accumulated in part of the channel region and unstable operation. Alternatively, an LDD region may be provided. By providing the LDD region, the off-state current can be reduced or the reliability can be improved by improving the withstand voltage of the transistor. Alternatively, by providing an LDD region, when operating in the saturation region, even if the drain-source voltage changes, the drain-source current does not change so much and the slope of the voltage-current characteristic is flat. be able to.

Note that various types of transistors can be used, and the transistor can be formed using various substrates. Therefore, all of the circuits necessary for realizing a predetermined function may be formed on the same substrate. For example, all circuits necessary for realizing a predetermined function may be formed using a glass substrate, a plastic substrate, a single crystal substrate, or an SOI substrate, and are formed using various substrates. May be. Since all the circuits necessary to realize a given function are formed using the same substrate, the cost can be reduced by reducing the number of components, or the reliability can be improved by reducing the number of connection points with circuit components. Can be planned. Alternatively, a part of a circuit necessary for realizing a predetermined function is formed on a certain substrate, and another part of a circuit necessary for realizing the predetermined function is formed on another substrate. It may be. That is, not all the circuits necessary for realizing a predetermined function may be formed using the same substrate. For example, a part of a circuit necessary for realizing a predetermined function is formed using a transistor over a glass substrate, and another part of a circuit required for realizing a predetermined function is a single crystal substrate. An IC chip formed of a transistor formed using a single crystal substrate may be connected to a glass substrate by COG (Chip On Glass), and the IC chip may be disposed on the glass substrate. Alternatively, the IC chip may be connected to the glass substrate using TAB (Tape Automated Bonding) or a printed board. As described above, since a part of the circuit is formed on the same substrate, the cost can be reduced by reducing the number of components, or the reliability can be improved by reducing the number of connection points with circuit components. Alternatively, since the power consumption of a circuit with a high drive voltage and a high drive frequency is high, such a circuit is not formed on the same substrate. Instead, for example, a single crystal substrate is used. If a circuit for that portion is formed and an IC chip constituted by the circuit is used, an increase in power consumption can be prevented.

One pixel means one element whose brightness can be controlled. Therefore, as an example, one pixel represents one color element, and brightness is expressed by one color element.
Therefore, at that time, in the case of a color display device composed of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) color elements, the minimum unit of an image is an R pixel, a G pixel, and a B pixel. It is assumed to be composed of three pixels. Note that the color elements are not limited to three colors, and three or more colors may be used, or colors other than RGB may be used. For example, RGBW (W is white) may be added by adding white. Alternatively, one or more colors such as yellow, cyan, magenta, emerald green, vermilion, and the like may be added to RGB. Alternatively, for example, a color similar to at least one of RGB may be added to RGB. For example, R, G, B1, and B2 may be used. B1 and B2 are both blue, but have slightly different frequencies. Similarly, R1, R2, G, and B may be used. By using such color elements, it is possible to perform display closer to the real thing. By using such color elements, power consumption can be reduced. As another example, when brightness is controlled using a plurality of areas for one color element, one area may be set as one pixel. Therefore, as an example, when performing area gradation or sub-pixel (
Sub-pixels), there are multiple brightness control areas for each color element,
The gradation is expressed as a whole, but one area for controlling the brightness may be one pixel. Therefore, in that case, one color element is composed of a plurality of pixels. Or, even if there are multiple areas for controlling brightness in one color element,
One color element may be one pixel. Therefore, in that case, one color element is composed of one pixel. Alternatively, when the brightness is controlled using a plurality of areas for one color element, the size of the area contributing to display may differ depending on the pixel. Alternatively, the viewing angle may be widened by slightly varying the signal supplied to each of the areas where the brightness is controlled, which is plural for each color element. That is, 1
For one color element, the potentials of the pixel electrodes in each of the plurality of regions may be different from each other. As a result, the voltage applied to the liquid crystal molecules is different for each pixel electrode. Therefore, the viewing angle can be widened.

In addition, when it is explicitly described as one pixel (for three colors), it is assumed that three pixels of R, G, and B are considered as one pixel. When it is explicitly described as one pixel (for one color), it is assumed that when there are a plurality of areas for one color element, they are considered as one pixel.

Note that the pixels may be arranged (arranged) in a matrix. Here, the arrangement (arrangement) of pixels in a matrix includes a case where pixels are arranged side by side in a vertical direction or a horizontal direction, or a case where they are arranged on a jagged line. Therefore,
For example, when full-color display is performed with three color elements (for example, RGB), the case where stripes are arranged or the case where dots of three color elements are arranged in a delta is included. further,
Including cases where Bayer is arranged. The color elements are not limited to three colors, and may be more than that, for example, RGBW (W is white), or RGB in which one or more colors of yellow, cyan, magenta, and the like are added. The size of the display area may be different for each dot of the color element. Thereby, it is possible to reduce power consumption or extend the life of the display element.

Note that an active matrix method in which an active element is included in a pixel or a passive matrix method in which an active element is not included in a pixel can be used.

In the active matrix system, not only transistors but also various active elements (active elements and nonlinear elements) can be used as active elements (active elements and nonlinear elements). For example, MIM (Metal Insulator Metal) or TFD (
It is also possible to use (Thin Film Diode) or the like. Since these elements have few manufacturing steps, manufacturing cost can be reduced or yield can be improved. Furthermore, since the size of the element is small, the aperture ratio can be improved, and low power consumption and high luminance can be achieved.

Note that as a method other than the active matrix method, a passive matrix type that does not use active elements (active elements, nonlinear elements) can be used. Since no active element (active element or nonlinear element) is used, the number of manufacturing steps is small, and manufacturing cost can be reduced or yield can be improved. Since no active element (active element or nonlinear element) is used, the aperture ratio can be improved, and low power consumption and high luminance can be achieved.

Note that a transistor is an element having at least three terminals including a gate, a drain, and a source. The transistor has a channel region between the drain region and the source region, and the drain region, the channel region, and the source region. A current can be passed through. Here, since the source and the drain vary depending on the structure and operating conditions of the transistor, it is difficult to limit which is the source or the drain. Therefore, in this document (the specification, the claims, the drawings, and the like), a region functioning as a source and a drain may not be referred to as a source or a drain. In that case, as an example, there are cases where they are referred to as a first terminal and a second terminal, respectively. Alternatively, they may be referred to as a first electrode and a second electrode, respectively. Alternatively, they may be referred to as a source region and a drain region.

Note that the transistor may be an element having at least three terminals including a base, an emitter, and a collector. Similarly in this case, the emitter and the collector may be referred to as a first terminal and a second terminal.

Note that a gate refers to the whole or part of a gate electrode and a gate wiring (also referred to as a gate line, a gate signal line, a scan line, a scan signal line, or the like). A gate electrode refers to a portion of a conductive film that overlaps with a semiconductor forming a channel region with a gate insulating film interposed therebetween. Note that part of the gate electrode is an LDD (Lightly Dow
In some cases, it may overlap with a ped drain region or a source region (or drain region) through a gate insulating film. A gate wiring is a wiring for connecting the gate electrodes of each transistor, a wiring for connecting the gate electrodes of each pixel, or a wiring for connecting the gate electrode to another wiring. Say.

However, the portion that functions as the gate electrode and also functions as the gate wiring (region,
There are also conductive films, wirings, and the like. Such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) may be called a gate electrode or a gate wiring. That is, there is a region where the gate electrode and the gate wiring cannot be clearly distinguished. For example, when a part of the gate wiring extended and the channel region overlap, the portion (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) functions as the gate wiring, but also as the gate electrode It is functioning. Therefore, such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) may be called a gate electrode or a gate wiring.

Note that a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) formed using the same material as the gate electrode and connected to form the same island (island) as the gate electrode may be called a gate electrode. Similarly, a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) formed using the same material as the gate wiring and connected by forming the same island (island) as the gate wiring may be referred to as a gate wiring. In a strict sense, such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) may not overlap with the channel region or may not have a function of being connected to another gate electrode. However, due to specifications at the time of manufacture, etc., the part (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) that is formed of the same material as the gate electrode or gate wiring and forms the same island as the gate electrode or gate wiring ) Therefore, such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) may also be referred to as a gate electrode or a gate wiring.

Note that, for example, in a multi-gate transistor, one gate electrode and another gate electrode are often connected to each other with a conductive film formed using the same material as the gate electrode. Such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) is a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) for connecting the gate electrode to the gate electrode, and may be called a gate wiring. These transistors can be regarded as a single transistor, and may be referred to as a gate electrode. That is, a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) that is formed using the same material as the gate electrode or gate wiring and is connected to form the same island (island) as the gate electrode or gate wiring is connected to the gate electrode or gate wiring. You can call it. Further, for example, a conductive film in a portion where the gate electrode and the gate wiring are connected and formed of a material different from the gate electrode or the gate wiring may be referred to as a gate electrode. You may call it.

Note that a gate terminal means a part of a part of a gate electrode (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) or a part electrically connected to the gate electrode (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like). .

Note that in the case of calling a gate wiring, a gate line, a gate signal line, a scanning line, a scanning signal line, or the like, the gate of the transistor may not be connected to the wiring. In this case, the gate wiring, the gate line, the gate signal line, the scanning line, and the scanning signal line are simultaneously formed with the wiring formed in the same layer as the gate of the transistor, the wiring formed of the same material as the gate of the transistor, or the gate of the transistor. It may mean a deposited wiring. Examples include a storage capacitor wiring, a power supply line, a reference potential supply wiring, and the like.

Note that a source refers to a source region, a source electrode, and a source wiring (a source line, a source signal line,
Data line, data signal line, etc.) or a part of them. The source region refers to a semiconductor region containing a large amount of P-type impurities (such as boron and gallium) and N-type impurities (such as phosphorus and arsenic). Therefore, a region containing a little P-type impurity or N-type impurity, that is, a so-called LDD (Lightly Doped Drain) region is not included in the source region. The source electrode is formed of a material different from that of the source region,
This refers to a portion of the conductive layer that is electrically connected to the source region. However, the source electrode may be referred to as a source electrode including the source region. The source wiring is a wiring for connecting the source electrodes of the transistors, a wiring for connecting the source electrodes of each pixel, or a wiring for connecting the source electrode to another wiring. Say.

However, the part that functions as a source electrode and also functions as a source wiring (
Regions, conductive films, wirings, etc.). Such a part (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.)
It may be called a source electrode or a source wiring. That is, there is a region where the source electrode and the source wiring cannot be clearly distinguished. For example, in the case where a part of a source wiring that is extended and the source region overlap with each other, the portion (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) functions as a source wiring, but as a source electrode Will also work. Thus, such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) may be called a source electrode or a source wiring.

Note that a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) that is formed using the same material as the source electrode and forms the same island (island) as the source electrode, or a portion (region) that connects the source electrode and the source electrode , Conductive film, wiring, etc.) may also be referred to as source electrodes. Further, a portion overlapping with the source region may be called a source electrode. Similarly, a region formed of the same material as the source wiring and connected by forming the same island as the source wiring may be called a source wiring. Such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) may not have a function of connecting to another source electrode in a strict sense. However, there is a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) that is formed using the same material as the source electrode or the source wiring and connected to the source electrode or the source wiring because of specifications in manufacturing. Therefore, such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) may also be called a source electrode or a source wiring.

Note that, for example, a conductive film in a portion where the source electrode and the source wiring are connected and formed using a material different from that of the source electrode or the source wiring may be referred to as a source electrode or a source wiring. You may call it.

Note that a source terminal refers to a part of a source region, a source electrode, or a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) electrically connected to the source electrode.

Note that in the case of calling a source wiring, a source line, a source signal line, a data line, a data signal line, or the like, the source (drain) of the transistor may not be connected to the wiring. in this case,
The source wiring, the source line, the source signal line, the data line, and the data signal line are a wiring formed in the same layer as the source (drain) of the transistor, a wiring formed of the same material as the source (drain) of the transistor, or the transistor It may mean a wiring formed simultaneously with the source (drain). Examples include a storage capacitor wiring, a power supply line, a reference potential supply wiring, and the like.

  The drain is the same as the source.

Note that a semiconductor device refers to a device having a circuit including a semiconductor element (such as a transistor, a diode, or a thyristor). Furthermore, a device that can function by utilizing semiconductor characteristics may be called a semiconductor device. Alternatively, a device including a semiconductor material is referred to as a semiconductor device.

Note that a display element is an optical modulation element, a liquid crystal element, a light emitting element, an EL element (an organic EL element,
An inorganic EL element or an EL element including an organic substance and an inorganic substance), an electron emission element, an electrophoretic element, a discharge element, a light reflection element, a light diffraction element, a digital micromirror device (DMD), and the like. However, it is not limited to this.

Note that a display device refers to a device having a display element. Note that the display device may include a plurality of pixels including a display element. Note that the display device may include a peripheral driver circuit that drives a plurality of pixels. Note that the peripheral driver circuit that drives the plurality of pixels may be formed over the same substrate as the plurality of pixels. The display device is a peripheral drive circuit disposed on the substrate by wire bonding or bumps, so-called chip-on-glass (COG).
IC chips connected by the TAB or IC chips connected by TAB or the like may be included. Note that the display device may include a flexible printed circuit (FPC) to which an IC chip, a resistor element, a capacitor element, an inductor, a transistor, and the like are attached. In addition,
The display device may be connected via a flexible printed circuit (FPC) or the like, and may include a printed wiring board (PWB) to which an IC chip, a resistor element, a capacitor element, an inductor, a transistor, and the like are attached. Note that the display device may include an optical sheet such as a polarizing plate or a retardation plate. The display device includes a lighting device, a housing, a voice input / output device,
An optical sensor or the like may be included. Here, an illumination device such as a backlight unit is
A light guide plate, prism sheet, diffusion sheet, reflection sheet, light source (LED, cold cathode tube, etc.), cooling device (water cooling type, air cooling type) and the like may be included.

Note that the lighting device refers to a device including a backlight unit, a light guide plate, a prism sheet, a diffusion sheet, a reflective sheet, a light source (such as an LED, a cold cathode tube, a hot cathode tube), a cooling device, and the like.

Note that a light-emitting device refers to a device having a light-emitting element or the like. In the case where the display element includes a light-emitting element, the light-emitting device is one example of the display device.

In addition, a reflection apparatus means the apparatus which has a light reflection element, a light diffraction element, a light reflection electrode, etc.

Note that a liquid crystal display device refers to a display device having a liquid crystal element. Liquid crystal display devices include
There are direct view type, projection type, transmission type, reflection type, and transflective type.

Note that a driving device refers to a device having a semiconductor element, an electric circuit, and an electronic circuit. For example, a transistor that controls input of a signal from a source signal line into a pixel (sometimes referred to as a selection transistor or a switching transistor), a transistor that supplies voltage or current to a pixel electrode, or a voltage or current to a light-emitting element A transistor that supplies the voltage is an example of a driving device. Further, a circuit for supplying a signal to the gate signal line (sometimes referred to as a gate driver or a gate line driver circuit) and a circuit for supplying a signal to the source signal line (sometimes referred to as a source driver or source line driver circuit). ) Is an example of a driving device.

Note that a display device, a semiconductor device, a lighting device, a cooling device, a light-emitting device, a reflecting device, a driving device, and the like may overlap with each other. For example, the display device may include a semiconductor device and a light-emitting device. Alternatively, the semiconductor device may include a display device and a driving device.

In addition, when it is explicitly described that B is formed on A or B is formed on A, it is limited that B is formed in direct contact with A. Not. The case where it is not in direct contact, that is, the case where another object is interposed between A and B is also included. Here, A and B are objects (for example, devices, elements, circuits, wirings, electrodes, terminals, conductive films, layers,
Etc.).

Therefore, for example, when it is explicitly described that the layer B is formed on the layer A (or on the layer A), the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer A. And the case where another layer (for example, layer C or layer D) is formed in direct contact with the layer A, and the layer B is formed in direct contact therewith. Note that another layer (for example, the layer C or the layer D) may be a single layer or a multilayer.

Furthermore, the same applies to the case where B is explicitly described as being formed above A, and is not limited to the direct contact of B on A. This includes the case where another object is interposed in. Therefore, for example, when the layer B is formed above the layer A, the case where the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer A and the case where another layer is formed in direct contact with the layer A. (For example, the layer C or the layer D) is formed, and the layer B is formed in direct contact therewith. Note that another layer (for example, the layer C or the layer D) may be a single layer or a multilayer.

In addition, when it is explicitly described that B is formed in direct contact with A, it includes a case in which B is formed in direct contact with A. It shall not be included when an object is present.

  The same applies to the case where B is below A or B is below A.

In addition, about what is explicitly described as singular, it is preferable that it is singular.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of them is also possible. Similarly, a plurality that is explicitly described as a plurality is preferably a plurality. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number can be singular.

Since the frame rate of the input image data can be converted into various display frame rates, an optimal display frame rate and driving method can be selected according to the situation, and a display device with a high contrast ratio can be obtained. In addition, it is possible to obtain a display device with improved moving image quality and a driving method thereof.

Furthermore, the display frame rate should be larger than the frame rate of the input image data,
Alternatively, it is possible to obtain a display device that does not have a problem of moving image blur and a method for driving the display device by performing pseudo impulse driving or the like. Further, a flicker-free display device and a driving method thereof can be obtained by shortening the brightness change cycle or reducing the change amount. Furthermore, in particular, in a liquid crystal display device, a display device with an improved viewing angle and a driving method thereof can be obtained by selecting an optimal liquid crystal mode. further,
In particular, in a liquid crystal display device, a display device with improved response speed and a driving method thereof can be obtained by temporarily applying a voltage exceeding the original voltage to the device.
Further, in addition to the above effects, a display device with reduced power consumption and a driving method thereof can be obtained by various means such as suppressing the brightness or reducing the driving frequency of the device. Furthermore, a display device with a reduced manufacturing cost and a driving method thereof can be obtained by various means such as using a circuit that does not require a high driving frequency and simplifying the manufacturing process.

FIG. 6 illustrates one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates one embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a peripheral circuit configuration of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a peripheral circuit configuration of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a peripheral circuit configuration of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a peripheral circuit configuration of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a circuit configuration of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 3 is a timing chart of the semiconductor device according to the present invention. 3 is a timing chart of the semiconductor device according to the present invention. 8A and 8B illustrate a method for driving a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 8A and 8B illustrate a method for driving a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 8A and 8B illustrate a method for driving a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 8A and 8B illustrate a method for driving a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 8A and 8B illustrate a method for driving a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 8A and 8B illustrate a method for driving a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a block diagram of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 4A and 4B illustrate peripheral components of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a block diagram of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a circuit configuration of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a circuit configuration of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a circuit configuration of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 8A and 8B illustrate a method for driving a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 8A and 8B illustrate a method for driving a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 8A and 8B illustrate a method for driving a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 8A and 8B illustrate a method for driving a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 8A and 8B illustrate a method for driving a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a top view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a top view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a top view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a top view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a top view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 2A and 2B are a top view and a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 2A and 2B are a top view and a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 3 is a timing chart of the semiconductor device according to the present invention. 3 is a timing chart of the semiconductor device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a circuit configuration of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a circuit configuration of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a circuit configuration of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a circuit configuration of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a circuit configuration of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 2A and 2B are a top view and a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 2A and 2B are a top view and a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 2A and 2B are a top view and a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 4A and 4B illustrate a light-emitting element of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a semiconductor device manufacturing apparatus according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a semiconductor device manufacturing apparatus according to the present invention. 4A and 4B illustrate a light-emitting element of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 4A and 4B illustrate a light-emitting element of a semiconductor device according to the present invention. 4A and 4B illustrate a structure of a semiconductor device according to the invention. 4A and 4B illustrate a structure of a semiconductor device according to the invention. 4A and 4B illustrate a structure of a semiconductor device according to the invention. 4A and 4B illustrate a structure of a semiconductor device according to the invention. 4A and 4B illustrate a structure of a semiconductor device according to the invention. 4A and 4B each illustrate an electronic device using a semiconductor device according to the invention. 4A and 4B each illustrate an electronic device using a semiconductor device according to the invention. 4A and 4B each illustrate an electronic device using a semiconductor device according to the invention. 4A and 4B each illustrate an electronic device using a semiconductor device according to the invention. 4A and 4B each illustrate an electronic device using a semiconductor device according to the invention. 4A and 4B each illustrate an electronic device using a semiconductor device according to the invention. 4A and 4B each illustrate an electronic device using a semiconductor device according to the invention. 4A and 4B each illustrate an electronic device using a semiconductor device according to the invention. 4A and 4B each illustrate an electronic device using a semiconductor device according to the invention. 4A and 4B each illustrate an electronic device using a semiconductor device according to the invention. 4A and 4B each illustrate an electronic device using a semiconductor device according to the invention. 4A and 4B each illustrate an electronic device using a semiconductor device according to the invention. 4A and 4B each illustrate an electronic device using a semiconductor device according to the invention. 4A and 4B each illustrate an electronic device using a semiconductor device according to the invention. 4A and 4B each illustrate an electronic device using a semiconductor device according to the invention. 4A and 4B each illustrate an electronic device using a semiconductor device according to the invention.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. However, the present invention can be implemented in many different modes, and those skilled in the art can easily understand that the modes and details can be variously changed without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention. Is done. Therefore, the present invention is not construed as being limited to the description of this embodiment mode.

(Embodiment 1)
In this embodiment, an example of a method for improving the quality of an image displayed on a display device will be described. Specifically, a method for improving the quality of an image displayed on a display device using a backlight will be described. More specifically, a method of detecting temporal changes (image movement) of input image data and using these intermediate images as an interpolated image, and a backlight divided into a plurality of areas are displayed. A method for controlling the brightness of each of the plurality of areas in accordance with the image data to be recorded will be described.

First, the backlight in this embodiment is described (see FIG. 1A). The backlight in the present embodiment is a light emitting device that illuminates the display panel from behind the image display area, and the light emitting area is divided into a plurality of unit areas, and the brightness in each unit area can be individually controlled. Have FIG. 1A illustrates a structure example of a backlight. here,
Although the case where the light emitting area is divided into tiles as in FIG. 1A will be described, the division state of the light emitting area in this embodiment is not limited thereto. For example, when the unit area is rectangular, in addition to the tile shape, a brick shape (delta arrangement) can be taken. Further, the unit area may be a parallelogram, a triangle, a hexagon, or a combination of pentagon and hexagon (soccer ball shape). As described above, the division state of the light emitting region can take various forms.

When the light emitting area is divided into tiles, each unit area is individually given a name for explanation. Here, the horizontal division number of the light emitting region is referred to as I, the vertical division number of the light emitting region is referred to as J, the horizontal position of the region is referred to as Xi, and the vertical position of the region is referred to as Yj. Here, i is an integer from 1 to I, and j is an integer from 1 to J. And
For example, when the upper left of the light emitting area is used as a reference, the unit area located i th from the left and j th from the top is referred to as a unit area XiYj. In this embodiment, I =
The description will be made assuming that J = 8. However, the values of I and J are not limited to this, and various values can be used.

Next, the display panel in this embodiment is described (see FIG. 1B). The display panel in the present embodiment is a light valve device (light transmission amount control device) that is illuminated by a backlight from the rear of the image display region, and the image display region is divided into a plurality of pixels, and light in each pixel is displayed. The transmission amount (also referred to as the transmittance) of each can be individually controlled. FIG. 1B illustrates a structure example of the display panel. Here, detailed description of the division state of the image display area is omitted, but the number of pixels of the display panel is larger than the number of unit areas of the backlight. For example, in the case of a display panel included in a display device used as a television receiver, it is preferable that the horizontal division number is 1920 × 3 or more and the vertical division number is 1050 or more. In this way, since a fine image can be displayed in the image display area, the image quality of the display device can be improved. Here, the reason why the number of horizontal divisions is set to x3 is that color display is performed by displaying R, G, and B, respectively. This may be divided not vertically but vertically. In this case, the preferred number of divisions is 1920 or more as the number of divisions in the horizontal direction and 1050 × 3 or more as the number of divisions in the vertical direction. Further, for example, in the case of a display panel included in a display device used as a monitor of a personal computer, the number of divisions can be various. For example, as the number of divisions in the horizontal direction, 1920, 1680, 1440, 1280, etc.
Examples of the vertical division number include 1200, 1050, 900, 1024, and the like. Here, the division of R, G, and B (× 3) is omitted.

Next, an example of a method for improving the quality of an image displayed on a display device using such a backlight and a display panel will be described. Specifically, a temporal change (image movement) of input image data is detected, an intermediate state image is displayed on the display panel as an interpolated image, and the brightness of each unit area of the backlight is also displayed. Now, a method for controlling according to the displayed image data will be described.

First, an image displayed in the image display area of the display panel will be described. The image displayed in the image display area has a period for display according to the input image data. Assume that the input image data has a certain cycle, and the image displayed in the image display area is also rewritten according to the cycle. FIG. 1B shows how the image displayed in the image display area changes with the passage of time. The display panel shown in FIG.
It is assumed that an image 111 is displayed at a certain time. Then, it is assumed that the image 117 is displayed at the time when the period Tin of the image data input thereafter has elapsed. That is,
FIG. 1B shows a state of change of an image displayed in the image display area with time on the horizontal axis.

The method described in this embodiment is characterized in that an image different from input image data is displayed while changing from the image 111 to the image 117. Specifically, FIG.
As shown in B), the image 114 can be displayed. Here, it is assumed that the timing at which the image 114 is displayed is the time when ½ times the period Tin of the input image data has elapsed since the image 111 was displayed. Note that the timing at which the image 114 is displayed is not limited to this, and may be various timings, but detailed description thereof is omitted here. Further, the image 114 is an image in an intermediate state by detecting a temporal change (image movement) of input image data. Note that the image 114 is not limited to this, and various images can be used, but detailed description thereof is omitted here.

Next, details of an image displayed in the image display area of the display panel will be described. The image 111 that is initially displayed includes an object 112 and a background 113. Next displayed image 114
Includes an object 115 and a background 116. The next image 117 displayed is the object 11.
8 and background 119 is included. Here, it is assumed that the image 111 and the image 117 are images displayed according to image data input to the display device.

Here, in the method in which the image displayed in the image display area is rewritten when the period Tin of the input image data has elapsed, the period Tin of the input image data is displayed after the image 111 is displayed. When the time elapses, the image 117 is displayed, so that the state in which the object 111 moves to the position represented by the object 118 is expressed. Therefore, the state in which the object 111 moves to the position represented by the object 118 is not displayed smoothly.

However, in the method described in this embodiment, the image 111 and the image 1 are displayed when a time ½ of the period Tin of the input image data has elapsed after the image 111 is displayed.
The intermediate state image (image 114) created by detecting the movement of 17 images is displayed,
Further, after the image 114 is displayed, the position at which the object 111 is represented by the object 118 is displayed by displaying the image 117 when a time ½ times the period Tin of the input image data has elapsed. The movement will be expressed. Therefore, the object 111 becomes the object 11
The state of moving to the position represented by 8 is displayed smoothly because the object 115 is displayed via the intermediate state display.

In this method, the period at which the image displayed in the image display area of the display panel is rewritten is ½ times the period Tin of the input image data. In other words, since the display frame rate of the image display area of the display panel is twice the input frame rate of the input image data, this is called double speed driving. By displaying in this way, the movement of the moving object in the image display area becomes smoother, so that the motion blur caused by the hold type of the display device can be reduced, and the quality of the displayed image, especially the moving image, is improved. it can.

Furthermore, in the method described in this embodiment, the backlight emission region is divided into a plurality of unit regions, and the brightness in each unit region can be individually controlled. The image quality can be improved. Specifically, by controlling the brightness of each unit area of the backlight individually according to the image displayed on the display panel, the dark part of the image is displayed darker and the bright part of the image is displayed brighter. (Contrast ratio can be improved). This is particularly effective, for example, when the display panel uses a liquid crystal element. This is because a display panel using a liquid crystal element has a property of slightly transmitting the light of the backlight when displaying black. That is, even if the liquid crystal element is controlled to display black, if the backlight emits light, the light leaks and slightly emits light, so that black cannot be displayed really black. This phenomenon is called black float.

If the method described in this embodiment is used, black floating can be reduced. because,
This is because if the unit area of the backlight corresponding to the part that controls the liquid crystal element so as to display black is not made to emit light, the black floating in the area can be eliminated. By doing so, the contrast ratio can be improved.

The black floating phenomenon itself is not limited to the liquid crystal display device. In any display device, a phenomenon that black does not become black can occur. Since the method described in this embodiment is characterized in that light emission of the light-emitting element is stopped when displaying black, the method described in this embodiment is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and various methods can be used. It can be applied to a display device.

Furthermore, in the method described in this embodiment, the individual brightness control of the unit area of the backlight can be performed in synchronization with the display cycle of the image displayed in the image display area of the display panel. That is, if the display panel is driven at double speed, the backlight can also be driven at double speed in synchronization with the display panel. By doing so, it is possible to realize a sharp image with a high contrast ratio in a still image even in a moving image. In other words, the backlight emission area is divided into a plurality of unit areas, and the brightness of each unit area can be controlled individually, thereby improving the contrast ratio of still images and further increasing the display panel speed. By driving, moving image blur can be reduced, and the backlight is driven at double speed in synchronization with the display panel, so that a still image with a high contrast ratio and a reduced moving image blur can be obtained. be able to.

Although detailed description is omitted here, the driving frequency is not limited to double speed, and various types can be used. For example, driving frequency of integer multiple such as 3 × speed, 4 × speed, 5 × speed, 6 × speed, 7 × speed, and 8 × speed, as well as rational driving frequency of 3/2 speed, 4/3 speed, 5/2 speed, etc. It can also be. At any driving frequency, by synchronizing the driving frequency of the display panel and the backlight, it is possible to obtain a display with a high contrast ratio in a still image and a reduced moving image blur.

Here, a method for controlling the brightness of each unit area of the backlight in accordance with the displayed image data will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG.
) Represents the change in the brightness of the unit area of the backlight, taking time along the horizontal axis, as in FIG. 1B. Here, for the sake of simplicity, it is assumed that the object 112, the object 115, and the object 118 in the image 111, the image 114, and the image 117 are white, and the background 113, the background 116, and the background 119 are black.

First, in the light emitting region 101, the region 102 (here, the unit regions X2Y3, X2Y4, X2Y5, X2Y6, X3Y3, X3Y4, X3) corresponding to the position of the object 112.
Y5, X3Y6, X4Y3, X4Y4, X4Y5, and X4Y6) are emitted, and the remaining region 103 is not illuminated. By doing so, the background 113 can be prevented from being blacked out, and the object 112 can be displayed brightly, so that the contrast ratio can be improved. The object 112 moves to the right as time passes, and the light emission state of the unit area of the backlight is changed in accordance with this movement. Specifically, the region 105 (here, the unit regions X3Y3, X3Y4, X3Y5, X3Y6, X4Y3, the position corresponding to the position of the object 115,
X4Y4, X4Y5, X4Y6, X5Y3, X5Y4, X5Y5, and X5Y6) are emitted, and the remaining region 106 is not illuminated. Similarly, a region 108 (here, unit regions X4Y3, X4Y4, X4Y5, X4Y6, X5Y) corresponding to the position of the object 118
3, including X5Y4, X5Y5, X5Y6, X6Y3, X6Y4, X6Y5, X6Y6)
Is emitted, and the remaining region 109 is not illuminated. As described above, the brightness of each unit area of the backlight can be controlled in accordance with the displayed image data.

Note that the method of controlling the brightness of each unit area of the backlight in accordance with the image data to be displayed is not limited to this, and various methods can be used. For example,
When an intermediate state image is included as an image to be displayed on the display panel, the backlight emission state when displaying the intermediate state image is not adjusted to the intermediate state image, but the front and back backlight emission states It can also be estimated from the difference. In this case, the process for estimating the light emission state of the backlight when displaying the intermediate state image can be performed in the same procedure as the process for estimating the intermediate state image. Electric power can be reduced.

Next, a method for driving the backlight and the display panel in synchronization will be described in detail (
(Refer FIG. 2 (A) and (B)). FIG. 2A is a diagram showing the timing of rewriting the brightness of the unit area of the backlight, where the horizontal axis is time and the vertical axis is the vertical position of the backlight. FIG. 2B is a diagram showing the timing of rewriting the transmittance of the display panel, with the horizontal axis being time and the vertical axis being the vertical position of the display panel.

In FIG. 2A, the light emission state of the unit area of the backlight is rewritten at the timing indicated by the solid line. Here, it is assumed that unit areas having the same vertical position are rewritten at the same timing regardless of the horizontal position (line sequential). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and rewriting may be performed in order according to the horizontal position (dot sequential). In particular, when rewriting is performed in a dot sequential manner on the display panel, it is preferable that the unit area of the backlight is also dot sequential in accordance with this. The group 201 is a group of all the unit areas of the backlight being rewritten. In FIG. 2A, as indicated by the group 201, the period in which all of the backlight unit areas are rewritten is a period that is ½ times the period Tin of the input image data. This is because the backlight is driven at double speed. As already described, the driving frequency is not limited to this, and various driving frequencies can be used. When the rewriting indicated by the group 201 is completed, the rewriting indicated by the group 202 is started. Similarly, when the rewriting indicated by the group 202 is completed, the rewriting indicated by the group 203 is started. The rest is repeated.

In FIG. 2B, the transmittance of the pixel of the display panel is rewritten at the timing indicated by the solid line. Here, it is assumed that all pixels having the same vertical position are rewritten at the same timing regardless of the horizontal position (line sequential). As already described, the present invention is not limited to this, and rewriting may be performed in a dot sequence. In any case, it is important to match the rewrite timing of the display panel and the backlight. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the discrepancy between the state of the display panel and the backlight, so that it is possible to reduce a display failure such as a ghost. A solid line 211 schematically represents the timing at which all the pixels of the display panel are rewritten. To be precise, as in FIG. 2A, it has a staircase shape with the number of pixels in the vertical direction, but here it is shown with diagonal lines for simplicity. FIG. 2 (B
), As indicated by the solid line 211, the period in which all pixels of the display panel are rewritten is a period that is ½ times the period Tin of the input image data. This is because the display panel is driven at double speed. As already described, the driving frequency is not limited to this, and various driving frequencies can be used. In any case, it is important to match the rewrite timing of the display panel and the backlight. The reason is the same as described above. Then, when the rewriting indicated by the solid line 211 is completed, the rewriting indicated by the solid line 212 is started. Similarly, when the rewriting indicated by the solid line 212 is completed, the rewriting indicated by the solid line 213 is started. The rest is repeated.

Note that, as an indicator of whether the rewrite timing of the backlight and the display panel is synchronized, the solid line 211 is a solid line included in the group 201 when the FIG. 2A and FIG. Judgment can be made based on whether or not all of them are involved. Here, it is important that the timing that can be said to be synchronized has a certain range. In other words, the rewrite timing of the backlight and the display panel has a certain range at the timing that can be said to be synchronized, and thus it can be said that the margin during operation is large. That is, FIG. 2 (A) and FIG.
By operating at the timing shown in B), the stability of the operation can be improved.

Next, a method for setting the brightness state of the backlight according to the gradation value included in the image data will be described. In the backlight according to this embodiment, the brightness can be set in a plurality of stages independently in each unit region. For example, the number of gradation values included in image data is N (N is a positive integer), and the number of steps of backlight brightness is n (n is a positive integer).
The case will be described. Here, N and n are positive integers. For example,
In the case of n = 1, the number of steps of brightness of the backlight is 1. However, it is possible to select two types of light emission states of the backlight, non-light emission and light emission. Similarly, when n = 2, the number of steps of the backlight brightness is 2 (the brightest state and the moderately bright state)
However, it is assumed that a total of three types of light emission states of the backlight, that is, non-light emission and light emission (two types of brightness) can be selected. Thus, as the light emission state of the backlight,
Assume that it is possible to select a total of n + 1 types of non-light emitting state and n types of light emitting states.
Note that by setting N> n, the number of steps of the brightness of the backlight can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost of the backlight and the backlight driving circuit can be reduced.
Here, a case where N> n is described.

First, let L be the brightness in the brightest state among the brightness levels of the backlight.
Furthermore, the brightness L _k in the k-th brightest state counted from the dark side can be set to the brightness shown in the following Equation 1.

Here, k is an integer from 0 to n. That is, the brightness of the backlight can be proportional to k.

Then, _k giving the backlight brightness L k is determined. In order to determine k, first, in each unit area of the backlight, the maximum one among the gradation values of all the pixels included in the display panel area corresponding to the unit area (the maximum gradation value in the unit area). : G _lm ). Note that _Glm is an integer from 0 to N-1. Then, the value of k is determined based on the range of the maximum gradation value _Glm in the unit area. The range is a range represented by a minimum value G _kmin and a maximum value G _kmax (G _kmin ≦ G _lm ≦ G
_kmmax ), and the minimum value G _kmin and the maximum value G _kmax are represented by the following formulas 2 and 3.
Given by.

For example, when N = 256 and n = 1, k is 0 or 1. When k = 0, G _lm is in a range of −255 ≦ G _lm ≦ 0. Here, G _lm is 0 or more and 2
Since it is an integer of 55 or less, G _lm giving k = 0 is only 0. At this time, the brightness of the backlight is preferably L _k = 0 according to Equation 1. That is, when the maximum gradation value G _lm in the unit area is 0, it is preferable that the brightness of the unit area is 0 (non-light emission). On the other hand, when k = 1, G _lm is in the range of 1 ≦ G _lm ≦ 256. Here, since G _lm is an integer of 0 or more and 255 or less, G giving k = 0
_lm is when 1 ≦ G _lm ≦ 255. At this time, the brightness of the backlight is preferably set to L _k = L according to Equation 1.

Here, the method of setting the backlight brightness state according to the gradation value included in the image data includes a method in which the backlight brightness level n is set to 1, and a backlight brightness level. The method in which n is larger than 1 can be roughly divided into two. The method of setting the backlight brightness level n to 1 is a method of setting the backlight brightness to two states of non-light emission and light emission. In this way, the unit area of the backlight is changed only when the maximum gradation value G _lm in the unit area is 0 (when the gradation values of the pixels included in the unit area are all 0). In the non-light emitting state, the maximum gradation value G _l in the unit area
_{When m} is other than 0, a driving method for performing normal display can be used. By performing this driving method, it is possible to prevent black floating at the time of black display, so that the contrast ratio can be improved. By performing this driving method and synchronizing the driving frequencies of the display panel and the backlight, it is possible to obtain a display with a high contrast ratio in a still image and with reduced moving image blur.

On the other hand, in the method in which the number n of backlight brightness levels is greater than 1, various driving methods can be employed. For example, if N = 256 and n = 2,
The number of gradations that can be displayed can be approximately 1.5 times. This is because when k = 2, when the brightness of the backlight is L _k = L, in addition to displaying 256 levels of brightness, when k = 1, the brightness of the backlight is L _k = This is because when L / 2 is set, brightness that cannot be displayed when L _k = L can be displayed. Specifically, since 256 levels of brightness can be displayed on the lower gradation side (0 to 127 gradation range) than half the brightness, 256 (low gradation side) +128 as a whole. (High gradation side) = 38
Four levels of brightness can be displayed. The human eye is particularly sensitive to differences in brightness on the low gradation side. Therefore, the fact that the gradation expression on the low gradation side can be made finer by this makes it possible to further improve the image quality, particularly when displaying a video (such as a movie) mainly composed of dark images. And, while performing this driving method, by synchronizing the driving frequency of the display panel and the backlight, the gradation expression on the low gradation side is made fine while maintaining the high contrast ratio in the still image, and the motion blur is also generated. A reduced display can be obtained.

Furthermore, if the number n of backlight brightness levels is increased, the number of gradations that can be displayed can be further improved. In general, the number of gradations G _n that can be displayed by setting the number of backlight brightness levels to _n follows Formula 4.

This is because when k = 1, the number of gradations that can be displayed is N, and when k = 2, the number of gradations that can be newly displayed without overlapping with that when k = 1 is N / 2. When k = 3, the number of gradations that can be newly displayed without overlapping with k = 1 to 2 is N / 3, and when k = s, k = 1 to s−1. The number of gradations that can be newly displayed without overlapping with N /
s, and when k = n, the number of gradations that can be newly displayed without overlapping with k = 1 to n−1 is N / n, and the total number of gradations is as follows. This is because the sum of the number of gradations that can be newly displayed at k is obtained (see FIG. 3A: where FIG. 3A shows n = 3).
in the case of). Here, s is an integer of 1 to n.

Specifically, when n = 3, the number of gradations that can be displayed is (1 + 1/2 + 1/3) times N, that is, 1.83 times, and when n = 4, the number of gradations that can be displayed is N ( 1 + 1/2 + 1/3 + 1 /
4) times, that is, 2.08 times, and when n = 5, the number of gradations that can be displayed is (1 + 1/2) of N
+ 1/3 + 1/4 + 1/5) times or 2.28 times, and when n = 6, the number of gradations that can be displayed is (1 + 1/2 + 1/3 + 1/4 + 1/5 + 1/6) times or 2.45 times N When n = 7, the number of gradations that can be displayed is N (1 + 1/2 + 1/3 + 1/4 + 1/5 + 1).
/ 6 + 1/7) times or 2.59 times, and when n = 8, the number of gradations that can be displayed is N (
1 + 1/2 + 1/3 + 1/4 + 1/5 + 1/6 + 1/7 + 1/8) times or 2.72 times. Although the rest is omitted, it can be calculated similarly. By increasing the number n of the backlight brightness levels, the gradation expression on the low gradation side can be further refined. Therefore, particularly when displaying a video (such as a movie) mainly composed of dark images. Therefore, it is possible to improve the image quality. By performing this driving method and synchronizing the driving frequency of the display panel and the backlight, the gradation expression on the low gradation side is further refined while still having a high contrast ratio in the still image, and the moving image blur is performed. In addition, a reduced display can be obtained.

Furthermore, as another specific example, when N = 256 and n = 8, that is, the gradation value included in the image data is 256 levels (8 bits), and the backlight brightness level is 8 levels. In this case, it is preferable that the relationship between the maximum gradation value G _lm in the unit area and the brightness of the backlight is set as follows according to Equations 1 to 3. When G _lm = 0, it is preferable to set L _k = 0. When 1 ≦ G _lm ≦ 32, it is preferable that L _k = L / 8. 33 ≦
When G _lm ≦ 64, L _k = 2L / 8 (L / 4) is preferable. 65 ≦ G _lm
When ≦ 96, it is preferable that L _k = 3L / 8. When 97 ≦ G _lm ≦ 128, it is preferable to set L _k = 4L / 8 (L / 2). When 129 ≦ G _lm ≦ 160,
It is preferable to set L _k = 5L / 8. When 161 ≦ G _lm ≦ 192, L _k = 6 L /
8 (2L / 3) is preferable. When 193 ≦ G _lm ≦ 224, L _k = 7 L /
8 is preferable. When 225 ≦ G _lm ≦ 255, it is preferable that L _k = 8L / 8 (L). In this way, the gradation value included in the image data is 256 steps (8 bits).
When the number n of backlight brightness levels is set to 8, the number of gradations that can be displayed can be set to approximately 696 levels according to Equation 4. Furthermore, since the gradation expression can be made finer as the gradation level is lower, the image quality can be further improved particularly when displaying a video (such as a movie) mainly composed of dark images. By performing this driving method and synchronizing the driving frequency of the display panel and the backlight, the gradation expression on the low gradation side is further refined while still having a high contrast ratio in the still image, and the moving image blur is performed. In addition, a reduced display can be obtained.

Furthermore, as another specific example, when N = 1024 and n = 8, that is, the gradation value included in the image data is set to 1024 levels (10 bits), and the backlight brightness level is set to 8 levels. In this case, it is preferable that the relationship between the maximum gradation value G _lm in the unit area and the brightness of the backlight is set as follows according to Equations 1 to 3. When G _lm = 0, it is preferable to set L _k = 0. When 1 ≦ G _lm ≦ 128, it is preferable to set L _k = L / 8. When 129 ≦ G _lm ≦ 256, it is preferable to set L _k = 2L / 8 (L / 4).
When 257 ≦ G _lm ≦ 384, it is preferable that L _k = 3L / 8. 385 ≦ G _{l
When m} ≦ 512, it is preferable to set L _k = 4L / 8 (L / 2). 513 ≦ G _lm
When ≦ 640, it is preferable that L _k = 5L / 8. When 641 ≦ G _lm ≦ 768, it is preferable to set L _k = 6L / 8 (2L / 3). When 769 ≦ G _lm ≦ 896, it is preferable that L _k = 7L / 8. When 897 ≦ G _lm ≦ 1023, L _k
= 8L / 8 (L) is preferable. Thus, the gradation value included in the image data is set to 1
When the number n of the backlight brightness level is 8 and the backlight brightness level n is 8, the number of gradations that can be displayed can be set to approximately 2785 levels according to Equation 4. Furthermore, since the gradation expression can be made finer as the gradation level is lower, the image quality can be further improved particularly when displaying a video (such as a movie) mainly composed of dark images. By performing this driving method and synchronizing the driving frequency of the display panel and the backlight, the gradation expression on the low gradation side is further refined while still having a high contrast ratio in the still image, and the moving image blur is performed. In addition, a reduced display can be obtained.

Next, another method for setting the backlight brightness state according to the gradation value included in the image data will be described. In the description so far, of the brightness levels of the backlight,
Although the brightness in the brightest state is L, L can be changed according to the gradation value included in the image data. Specifically, L is increased as the average value of brightness in one image is smaller (see FIG. 3B), and L is decreased as the average value of brightness in one image is larger (see FIG. 3B). (See FIG. 3C). By doing so, in a bright image with a dark part, the bright part can be made clearer. On the other hand, in an overall bright image, glare due to the overall brightness can be reduced.
In other words, by doing this, the contrast of the sensory image can be improved, so that the image quality can be further improved and the glare can be reduced. By performing this driving method and synchronizing the driving frequencies of the display panel and the backlight, it is possible to obtain a display with a high contrast ratio in a still image and with reduced moving image blur. In addition, by increasing the number of steps of the brightness of the backlight, the image quality can be further improved by making the gradation expression on the low gradation side finer.

Further, the brightness state of each unit area of the backlight can be set not only by the gradation value included in the image data but also by associating the brightness between the unit areas of the backlight (FIG. 4A). (See (B)). 4A shows an image displayed on the display panel, and FIG. 4B shows a light emission state of the backlight corresponding to the display panel shown in FIG. 4A.

An image 401 displayed on the display panel illustrated in FIG. 4A includes an object 402 and a background 403. At this time, each unit area of the backlight emits only the unit areas X4Y4, X5Y4, X4Y5, and X5Y5 (center part) according to the gradation value included in the image data, and the other unit areas are in a non-light emitting state. May be. In this case, the dark part of the image is dark,
Since bright areas can be displayed brightly, the contrast ratio can be improved. On the other hand, when setting the brightness between the unit areas of the backlight in association with each other, as shown in FIG. 4B, the center part emits light and the surrounding unit areas X4Y3, X5Y3,
X3Y4, X3Y5, X6Y4, X6Y5, X4Y6, and X5Y6 (first peripheral portion) are caused to emit light with brightness smaller than the brightness of the central portion. Furthermore, X4Y2, X5Y2, X3Y3, X6Y3, X2Y4, X7Y4, X2Y5, which are unit areas further around the first peripheral portion,
X7Y5, X3Y6, X6Y6, X4Y7, and X5Y7 (second peripheral portion) may emit light with a brightness smaller than that of the first peripheral portion. Further, the brightness of the unit area further surrounding the second peripheral part (third peripheral part) and the unit area further surrounding the fourth peripheral part (fourth peripheral part) can be adjusted in the same manner. The same applies to the peripheral portions beyond that. In this way, when there is a difference in brightness between the neighboring unit areas of the backlight that exceeds a certain threshold value, the adjacent unit areas are set so that the difference does not exceed the threshold value. The brightness can be adjusted. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a phenomenon in which the boundary portion of the unit area is raised and displayed in a portion where the difference in brightness is abrupt, and smooth display can be performed. In addition, by synchronizing the display panel and backlight drive frequency while performing this driving method, the phenomenon that the boundary portion of the unit area is raised and displayed while having a high contrast ratio in a still image is avoided. Display with reduced motion blur. In addition, by increasing the number of steps of the brightness of the backlight, it is possible to further improve the image quality by further reducing the gradation expression on the low gradation side.

Next, the relationship between the brightness to be displayed and the voltage applied to each pixel included in the display panel will be described. When the backlight brightness level n is 1, there are two types of light emission states of the backlight: non-light emission or light emission, but the light emission state of the unit area where the brightness to be displayed is 0 is non-light emission, The other unit areas emit light. At this time, the voltage applied to each pixel of the display panel may be a value according to the image data, or may be an overdrive voltage obtained from the image data. When the voltage applied to each pixel included in the display panel is a value according to the image data, the driving circuit of the display device can be simplified, so that the manufacturing cost and power consumption can be reduced. On the other hand, when the voltage applied to each pixel of the display panel is an overdrive voltage, the response time of the display element can be shortened, so that image failure such as afterimage, tailing, and ghost during video display Can be reduced.

Although a detailed description of overdrive driving is omitted here, it is an effective driving method for improving the quality of moving images, particularly in a display device using a liquid crystal element. Specifically, this is a driving method in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is shortened by temporarily applying a voltage larger than the voltage that gives the original transmittance. Here, a voltage that is temporarily applied and that is larger than the voltage that provides the original transmittance is referred to as an overdrive voltage.

Further, consider a case where the number n of backlight brightness levels is 2 or more. At this time, it has already been described that the number of brightness levels that can be displayed can be increased by reducing the brightness of the backlight. However, in this case, care must be taken when overdrive driving is performed. Specifically, in normal overdrive driving, the overdrive voltage is obtained according to the image data input to the display device, but the backlight brightness level n
Is equal to or greater than 2, the overdrive voltage is obtained not by the image data itself input to the display device but by the gradation value (or voltage value) actually written to the display panel. For example, in the case of N = 256 and n = 2, that is, the gradation value included in the image data is 256 levels (8 bits), and the backlight brightness level is 3 levels (non-light emitting, medium brightness, Consider the case of maximum brightness. In particular, when the brightness of the backlight is moderate, for example, when displaying the gradation 51 of the image data, the gradation value on the display panel side is set to 1.
02, and the brightness of the backlight can be set to L / 2. At this time, as the data for obtaining the overdrive voltage, not the gradation (51) of the image data but the gradation value on the display panel side (102) is preferably used. This is because the gradation value 102 is actually applied to the display panel. Therefore, when the gradation 51 of the image data is used as the overdrive voltage, the required overdrive voltage is shifted from the optimum overdrive voltage. This is because of this.

That is, in the case where the backlight brightness level n is 2 or more, in order to obtain the optimum overdrive voltage, not only the gradation value of the image data but also the gradation value actually written to the display panel (or It can be said that information on the voltage value is necessary. For this reason, in a display device in which the number n of backlight brightness levels can be two or more, the circuit for overdrive driving (overdrive circuit) is information on the brightness of the backlight or actually the display panel. The information of the gradation value (or voltage value) to be written may be inputted. In this way, the overdrive voltage can be appropriately obtained even in a display device in which the backlight brightness level n is 2 or more. As a result, the quality of moving images can be improved even in a display device using an element having a long response time such as a liquid crystal element. By performing this driving method and synchronizing the driving frequencies of the display panel and the backlight, it is possible to obtain a display with a high contrast ratio in a still image and with reduced moving image blur. In addition, by increasing the number of steps of the brightness of the backlight, it is possible to further improve the image quality by further reducing the gradation expression on the low gradation side. Furthermore, by adjusting the brightness of the unit area according to the difference in brightness between the unit areas of the backlight, it is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the boundary part of the unit area is raised and displayed. .

Note that when the drive frequency of the display panel and the backlight is synchronized, the display panel may be driven in reverse in synchronization with these. This is effective, for example, when using source line inversion or gate line inversion. This is because these driving methods are relatively prone to flicker. By doing so, the frequency of inversion driving can be increased, and flickering of the display panel can be reduced. As specific numerical values, when the frame rate of the input image data is 60 Hz and the drive frequency of the display panel and the backlight is 120 Hz, the frequency of inversion drive can be set to 60 Hz (synchronous). Here, synchronizing the inversion drive frequency with the display panel and backlight drive frequency means writing a positive voltage to a certain pixel, writing a negative voltage in the next write, and then writing a positive voltage in the next write. It refers to the state of writing voltage. When the display device uses a liquid crystal element, this can avoid applying a DC voltage to the liquid crystal element, so that the life of the liquid crystal element can be extended and flicker can be reduced. it can.

Further, the inversion driving of the display panel may not be synchronized with the driving frequency of the display panel and the backlight. Specifically, the driving frequency of the inversion driving of the display panel can be set to 1 / integer of the driving frequency of the display panel and the backlight. This is effective, for example, when using dot inversion. This is because dot inversion can effectively reduce flicker even when the drive frequency is relatively low. In this way, the driving frequency of the inversion driving of the display panel can be reduced, so that power consumption can be reduced. As specific values, when the frame rate of the input image data is 60 Hz and the drive frequency of the display panel and the backlight is 120 Hz, the frequency of inversion drive is 30 Hz.
(Half). Here, setting the inversion driving frequency to half the driving frequency of the display panel and the backlight means that after writing a positive voltage to a certain pixel, the positive voltage is written in the next writing, and the negative voltage is written in the next writing. In this case, a negative voltage is written in the next write, and a positive voltage is written in the next write. When the display device uses a liquid crystal element, this can avoid applying a DC voltage to the liquid crystal element, so that the life of the liquid crystal element can be extended and flicker can be reduced. it can. Furthermore, power consumption can be reduced.

Note that the backlight division state described in this embodiment can take various states other than a rectangle. If the number of divisions is large, the brightness can be controlled more finely, so that the image quality can be improved. On the other hand, if the number of divisions is small, the number of unit areas to be controlled is reduced accordingly, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Here, some special divided states among the divided states of the backlight will be described.
First, in the rectangular division, the division number is 1 in either the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.
Will be described (see FIGS. 5A and 5B). FIG. 5A shows an example of the light emission state of the backlight at this time. FIG. 5B shows an image displayed on the display panel at this time. The light emitting area 501 is in a light emitting state according to the image 502. The image 502 includes an object 503 and a background 504. Here, as the method for setting the brightness state of the backlight by the gradation value included in the image data, the various methods described so far can be used. For example, L can be increased as the average value of brightness in one image is smaller, and L can be decreased as the average value of brightness in one image is increased. By performing this driving method and synchronizing the driving frequencies of the display panel and the backlight, it is possible to obtain a display with a high contrast ratio in a still image and with reduced moving image blur. Furthermore, the image quality can be further improved by increasing the number of steps of the brightness of the backlight to further refine the gradation expression on the low gradation side. Furthermore, the phenomenon that the boundary portion of the unit region is raised and displayed can be avoided by adjusting the brightness of the unit region according to the difference in brightness between the unit regions of the backlight. Further, by obtaining the overdrive voltage according to the gradation value actually input to the display panel, the overdrive voltage can be appropriately obtained even in a display device in which the number n of backlight brightness levels is 2 or more. Therefore, even in a display device using an element having a long response time such as a liquid crystal element, the quality of a moving image can be improved.
Note that the divided state of the backlight is preferably divided so as to be parallel to the gate lines in the display panel. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately synchronize the driving of the backlight and the driving of the display panel, so that it is possible to reduce image trouble such as ghost.

Next, of the rectangular divisions, the division number is 1 in either the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.
Will be described (see FIGS. 5C and 5D). FIG. 5C shows an example of the light emission state of the backlight at this time. FIG. 5D shows an image displayed on the display panel at this time. The light emitting area 511 is in a light emitting state according to the image 512. The image 512 includes an object 513 and a background 514. Here, as the method for setting the brightness state of the backlight by the gradation value included in the image data, the various methods described so far can be used. For example, L can be increased as the average value of brightness in one image is smaller, and L can be decreased as the average value of brightness in one image is increased. By performing this driving method and synchronizing the driving frequencies of the display panel and the backlight, it is possible to obtain a display with a high contrast ratio in a still image and with reduced moving image blur. Furthermore, the image quality can be further improved by increasing the number of steps of the brightness of the backlight to further refine the gradation expression on the low gradation side. Further, by obtaining the overdrive voltage according to the gradation value actually input to the display panel, even in a display device in which the backlight brightness level n is 2 or more,
Since the overdrive voltage can be obtained appropriately, the quality of moving images can be improved even in a display device using an element having a long response time such as a liquid crystal element.

Next, a circuit configuration for realizing the driving method in the present embodiment will be described (FIG. 6).
Thru | or FIG. 9). Although the display device in this embodiment includes a display panel and a backlight, the display device can further include a circuit for driving them. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 6, the display panel 601, the backlight 602, the display panel control circuit 603, the backlight control circuit 604, and the data processing circuit 605 can be provided. Here, the display panel control circuit 603 is a circuit that controls the display panel 601, and the backlight control circuit 604 is a circuit that controls the backlight 602. Further, the data processing circuit 605 outputs various signals (in this case, control signals and image data) input to the display device.
This is a circuit that performs data processing for input to the display panel control circuit 603 and the backlight control circuit 604.

The display panel control circuit 603 can include a timing controller 701, a source driver (or data driver) 702, and a gate driver (or scan driver) 703 (see FIG. 7). The display panel control circuit 603 includes a data processing circuit 60.
The display panel image data and display panel frequency control signal output from 5 are input as display panel input signals. The display panel input signal is input to the timing controller 701, and the timing controller 701 sends the source driver image data and the source driver control signal to the source driver 702 in accordance with the display panel input signal.
Further, the timing controller 701 sends a gate driver control signal to the gate driver 703 in accordance with the display panel input signal. The source driver 702 drives source lines included in the display panel according to the control of the timing controller 701. The gate driver 703 drives gate lines included in the display panel according to the control of the timing controller 701.

The backlight control circuit 604 can select the configuration depending on the backlight driving method. For example, when the unit areas of the backlight 602 are directly controlled, the backlight control circuit 604 includes the backlight controller 801 and i ×
j backlight driving circuits 802 (see FIG. 8A). In this case, the backlight image data and the backlight frequency control signal output from the data processing circuit 605 are input to the backlight control circuit 604 as a backlight input signal. The backlight input signal is input to the backlight controller 801, and the backlight controller 801 sends a backlight drive circuit control signal to each of the i × j backlight drive circuits 802 in accordance with the backlight input signal. Each of the i × j backlight driving circuits 802 drives a unit area of the backlight 602 and determines a light emission state. As described above, the advantage of directly controlling the unit areas of the backlight 602 is that the unit areas of the backlight 602 can be individually controlled, and thus the degree of freedom in driving is high. For example, all the unit areas can be driven simultaneously, can be driven in synchronism with the driving of the display panel, and only an arbitrary unit area can be controlled differently. Furthermore, such free control can be appropriately selected according to the driving state of the display panel, the surrounding environment, user settings, and the like.

Further, for example, a configuration (active matrix) in which unit areas of the backlight 602 are selected in order and a driving state of each unit area is written may be employed. In that case, the backlight control circuit 604 is connected to the backlight controller 81.
1, a backlight data driver 812, a backlight scan driver 813,
(See FIG. 8B). In this case, the backlight image data and the backlight frequency control signal output from the data processing circuit 605 are input to the backlight control circuit 604 as a backlight input signal. The backlight input signal is input to the backlight controller 811, and the backlight controller 811 sends the image data for the backlight data driver and the backlight data driver control signal to the backlight data driver 812 according to the backlight input signal. . Further, the backlight controller 811 sends a backlight scan driver control signal to the backlight scan driver 813 in accordance with the backlight input signal. The backlight data driver 812 drives a data line included in the backlight according to the control of the backlight controller 811. The backlight scan driver 813 drives scan lines included in the backlight according to the control of the backlight controller 811. Furthermore, in this case, each unit region included in the backlight can include a memory element. By doing so, the light emission state of each unit region can be stored at least for the backlight driving period. As described above, an advantage of driving the unit area of the backlight by the active matrix is that the reliability of the apparatus is improved due to the small number of connection wirings. Furthermore, this makes it possible to reduce the area of the frame of the backlight (the outer edge portion of the light emitting region). Further, when the display panel is an active matrix, it is possible to unify the driving method, and thus there is an advantage that it is easy to synchronize the driving frequencies of the display panel and the backlight.

The data processing circuit 605 is a circuit that performs processing for bringing the control signal and image data input to the display device into a state where the display panel control circuit 603 and the backlight control circuit 604 can handle them. Further, the data processing circuit 605 can have various additional functions. For example, a function for matching an input signal to the display device with a signal handled in the data processing circuit 605, a function for generating an intermediate state image by motion compensation, a display panel control circuit 603, and a backlight control circuit 604 The ability to synchronize the drive frequency,
A function of converting display panel image data into image data for overdrive driving can be provided. The data processing circuit 605 having such functions includes an interface circuit 901, a motion estimation circuit 902, a memory 903, an image generation circuit 904, a frequency conversion circuit 905, a backlight image data generation circuit 906, Key data conversion circuit 9
07, a lookup table (LUT) 908, and a memory 909 (see FIG. 10).

Various signals (control signals and image data here) input to the display device are input to the data processing circuit 605, the signals are input to the interface circuit 901, and the interface circuit 901 includes the signal and data processing circuit 605. The processing is performed so that the signals handled within are matched. For example, the image data is formatted in accordance with the vertical synchronization signal and the horizontal synchronization signal, and processing such as raising or lowering the voltage of the signal is included. The interface circuit 901 sends the image data to the motion estimation circuit 902, the memory 903, and the frequency conversion circuit 905. Further, the frequency control signal may be sent to the frequency conversion circuit 905.

The memory 903 is for sending the delayed image data to the motion estimation circuit 902.
The motion estimation circuit 902 is a circuit for detecting image motion from the image data sent from the interface circuit 901 and the delayed image data sent from the memory 903. Then, the motion estimation circuit 902 sends image motion information to the image generation circuit 904. The image generation circuit 904 is a circuit that generates intermediate image data from the image motion information sent from the motion estimation circuit 902. Further, the image generation circuit 904 sends the generated intermediate image data to the frequency conversion circuit 905.

The frequency conversion circuit 905 is a circuit that arranges the image data sent from the interface circuit 901 and the intermediate image data sent from the image generation circuit 904 in a predetermined order, and further converts the frequency. For example, when the image data sent from the interface circuit 901 and the intermediate image data sent from the image generation circuit 904 are alternately arranged, the frequency of the data output from the frequency conversion circuit 905 is multiplied by the frequency of each input signal. It can be. Then, the frequency conversion circuit 905 sends the frequency-converted image data to the backlight image generation circuit 906, the chairman data conversion circuit 907, and the memory 909, respectively.
Further, the frequency conversion circuit 905 may be configured to send a backlight frequency control signal and a display panel frequency control signal to the backlight control circuit 604 and the display panel control circuit 603, respectively.

The backlight image generation circuit 906 generates backlight image data from the image data sent from the frequency conversion circuit 905. Here, the method described in this embodiment can be used as a method of generating the backlight image.

The memory 909 is for sending the delayed image data to the gradation data conversion circuit 907. The gradation data conversion circuit 907 includes the image data sent from the frequency conversion circuit 905,
This is a circuit for converting image data sent from the memory 909 into image data for overdrive driving. Although a detailed description of the conversion method is omitted here, the frequency conversion circuit 9
Based on the image data sent from 05 and the image data sent from the memory 909, the LUT
Reference numeral 908 can be used for conversion. Alternatively, the image data may be processed by a logic circuit such as a subtractor, a multiplier, and an adder without using the LUT 908. By doing so, the memory constituting the LUT 908 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Similarly, from the viewpoint of reducing the memory, the memory 903 and the memory 909 can be shared. Furthermore, the size of the memory 909 can be reduced by inserting an encoder and a decoder before and after the memory 909.

Note that the configuration of the drive circuit described above is merely an example, and each circuit is not necessarily used as its configuration requirement. Therefore, even when some of the above-described circuits are omitted, some are duplicated, or some functions are added and modified, the display device according to this embodiment can be used.

Note that an organic EL element can be used as a light-emitting element for the backlight in this embodiment. In this case, a large-area light-emitting element can be manufactured at low cost by a coating method, a droplet discharge method, or the like. Further, an inorganic EL element can be used as a light-emitting element in the backlight in this embodiment. In this case, a high-output light-emitting element with little deterioration can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 2)
In the present embodiment, an example different from the method described in Embodiment 1 will be described among methods for improving the quality of an image displayed on a display device. Specifically, the present invention relates to a method for improving the quality of an image displayed on a display device using a backlight. More specifically, as an image displayed on the display panel, in addition to an image according to image data input to the display device, a method of providing a period for displaying a blank image, and a backlight divided into a plurality of regions The present invention also relates to a method for controlling the brightness of each of a plurality of areas in accordance with displayed image data.

Here, the blank image is an image having the same brightness in the entire display area. Note that the blank image in the present embodiment can be displayed by a display panel or can be displayed by a backlight. Blank images include a black image in which the entire display area is displayed in black, a gray image in which the entire display area has medium brightness, and a white image in which the entire display area has the maximum brightness. Can be mentioned. Of course, by controlling the brightness of R, G, and B of the blank image, the blank image can be made a colored image.

As the backlight and the display panel in the method described in this embodiment, the backlight and the display panel described in Embodiment 1 can be used. Therefore, although detailed description thereof is omitted here, the features and advantages of using such a backlight and a display panel are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

First, an image displayed in the image display area of the display panel in the present embodiment will be described. The image displayed in the image display area has a period for display according to the input image data. Assume that the input image data has a certain cycle, and the image displayed in the image display area is also rewritten according to the cycle. FIG. 11B shows how the image displayed in the image display area changes with the passage of time. FIG.
Assume that the display panel shown in (B) displays an image 1011 at a certain point in time. And
Assume that an image 1017 is displayed when the time period Tin of the input image data has elapsed. That is, FIG. 11B shows a change in the image displayed in the image display area with time on the horizontal axis.

The method described in this embodiment is also characterized in that another image is displayed while changing from the image 1011 to the image 1017 as in the first embodiment. Specifically, FIG.
As shown in (B), an image 1014 can be displayed. Here, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the image 1014 is a blank image. Furthermore, it is assumed that the timing at which the image 1014 is displayed is the time when ½ times the period Tin of the input image data has elapsed since the image 1011 was displayed. Note that the timing at which the image 1014 is displayed is not limited to this, and may be various timings, but detailed description thereof is omitted here.

Next, details of an image displayed in the image display area of the display panel will be described. The image 1011 displayed first includes an object 1012 and a background 1013. The image 1014 displayed next is a blank image. The next image 1017 displayed is an object 1018,
A background 1019 is included. Here, it is assumed that the image 1011 and the image 1017 are images displayed in accordance with image data input to the display device.

Note that while the image 1011 changes to the image 1017, another image is not displayed and the image 1011 is displayed.
In the method of continuing to display the image 1011, after the image 1011 is displayed, the image 1011 continues to be displayed for a period of the period Tin of the input image data, and when the time has elapsed for the period Tin of the input image data. Thus, an image 1017 is displayed. At this time, the human eye observing the displayed image tries to follow the movement of the object by predicting that the object continues to move. As a result, the tracking of the object by the human eye and a shift in the displayed image occur, and the human eye perceives the image as blurred.

However, in the method described in this embodiment, after the image 1011 is displayed, an image 1014 that is a blank image is displayed when a time ½ times the cycle Tin of the input image data has elapsed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the deviation between the tracking of the object by the human eye and the displayed image, so that it is possible to prevent the image blurring from being perceived. As a result, it is possible to reduce the motion blur caused by the display device being a hold type,
In particular, the quality of the video can be improved.

Furthermore, in the method described in this embodiment, the backlight emission region is divided into a plurality of unit regions, and the brightness in each unit region can be individually controlled. The image quality can be improved. Specifically, by controlling the brightness of each unit area of the backlight individually according to the image displayed on the display panel, the dark part of the image is displayed darker and the bright part of the image is displayed brighter. (Contrast ratio can be improved). This is particularly effective, for example, when the display panel uses a liquid crystal element. This is because a display panel using a liquid crystal element has a property of slightly transmitting the light of the backlight when displaying black. That is, even if the liquid crystal element is controlled to display black, if the backlight emits light, the light leaks and slightly emits light, so that black cannot be displayed really black. This phenomenon is called black float.

If the method described in this embodiment is used, black floating can be reduced. because,
This is because if the unit area of the backlight corresponding to the part that controls the liquid crystal element so as to display black is not made to emit light, the black floating in the area can be eliminated. By doing so, the contrast ratio can be improved.

The black floating phenomenon itself is not limited to the liquid crystal display device. In any display device, a phenomenon that black does not become black can occur. Since the method described in this embodiment is characterized in that light emission of the light-emitting element is stopped when displaying black, the method described in this embodiment is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and various methods can be used. It can be applied to a display device.

Furthermore, in the method described in this embodiment, in addition to the image displayed in the image display area of the display panel including a blank image, individual control of the brightness of the unit area of the backlight is input. By performing in synchronization with the period Tin of image data to be obtained, a special effect can be obtained. In other words, the contrast ratio is improved by reducing the motion blur by including the display of the blank image in the display of the display panel, and performing the individual control of the brightness of the unit area of the backlight according to the image data. In addition, the frequency with which the backlight is driven can be ½ times the frequency with which the display panel is driven, so that power consumption can be reduced at the same time.

Although detailed description is omitted here, the drive frequency of the display panel is not limited to double speed,
Various things can be used. For example, the driving frequency is an integer multiple such as 3 × speed, 4 × speed, 5 × speed, 6 × speed, 7 × speed, 8 × speed, etc. 3/2 × speed, 4/3 × speed, 5/2 × speed, etc.
The driving frequency can also be increased several times. At any driving frequency, the frequency with which the backlight is driven is lower than the frequency with which the display panel is driven, so that power consumption can be reduced.

Here, a method of controlling the brightness of each unit area of the backlight while displaying a blank image on the display panel will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 11A shows the change in the brightness of the unit area of the backlight, with time on the horizontal axis, as in FIG. 11B. Here, for the sake of simplicity, image 1011,
Object 1012, object 1015, and object 101 in image 1014 and image 1017
In the following description, 8 is white or gray, and the background 1013, the background 1016, and the background 1019 are black.

First, in the light emitting region 1001, a region 100 that is a position corresponding to the position of the object 1012.
2 (here, unit regions X2Y3, X2Y4, X2Y5, X2Y6, X3Y3, X3Y4
, X3Y5, X3Y6, X4Y3, X4Y4, X4Y5, X4Y6)
The remaining area 1003 does not emit light. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the background 1013 from floating in the black and the object 1012 can be displayed brightly, so that the contrast ratio can be improved. After that, a blank image is displayed on the display panel, but the light emission state of the unit area of the backlight is not changed. After that, an area 1008 (here, unit areas X4Y3, X4Y4, X4Y5, X4Y6, X5Y) corresponding to the position of the object 1018.
3, including X5Y4, X5Y5, X5Y6, X6Y3, X6Y4, X6Y5, X6Y6)
Is emitted, and the remaining region 1009 is not illuminated. In this manner, the brightness of each unit area of the backlight can be controlled while displaying a blank image on the display panel.

Next, timing for driving the backlight and the display panel will be described in detail (see FIGS. 12A to 12D). FIGS. 12A and 12C are diagrams showing the timing of rewriting the brightness of the unit area of the backlight, where the horizontal axis is time and the vertical axis is the vertical position of the backlight. FIGS. 12B and 12D are diagrams showing the timing of rewriting the transmittance of the display panel, with the horizontal axis being time and the vertical axis being the vertical position of the display panel. Note that FIG.
The backlight drive timing shown in FIG. 2 (A) is implemented in combination with the display panel drive timing shown in FIG. 12 (B). Similarly, the driving timing of the backlight shown in FIG. 12C is assumed to be combined with the driving timing of the display panel shown in FIG.

12A and 12C, the unit state of the backlight is rewritten in the light emission state at the timing indicated by the solid line. Here, it is assumed that unit areas having the same vertical position are rewritten at the same timing regardless of the horizontal position (line sequential). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and rewriting may be performed in order according to the horizontal position (dot sequential). In particular, when rewriting is performed in a dot sequential manner on the display panel, it is preferable that the unit area of the backlight is also dot sequential in accordance with this. Groups 1101 and 1103
, 1121 and 1123 collectively indicate that all the unit areas of the backlight are rewritten.

In FIG. 12A, as indicated by the group 1101, the period during which the entire backlight unit area is rewritten is a period that is ½ times the period Tin of the input image data. This is because the driving of the backlight is matched with the driving of the display panel shown in FIG. As already described, the period during which the entire unit area of the backlight is rewritten is not limited to this, and various types can be used. When the rewriting indicated by the group 1101 is completed, the backlight is not driven until a period ½ of the period Tin of the input image data elapses. Thereafter, rewriting indicated by the group 1103 is started. The rest is repeated.

In FIG. 12C, as indicated by the group 1121, the period during which the entire backlight unit area is rewritten is the same as the period Tin of the input image data. This is because the driving of the backlight is matched with the driving of the display panel shown in FIG.
As already described, the period during which the entire unit area of the backlight is rewritten is not limited to this, and various types can be used. When the rewrite indicated by the group 1101 is completed, the rewrite indicated by the group 1123 is started. The rest is repeated.

In FIGS. 12B and 12D, the transmittance of the pixels of the display panel is rewritten at the timing indicated by the solid line. Here, it is assumed that all pixels having the same vertical position are rewritten at the same timing regardless of the horizontal position (line sequential). As already described, the present invention is not limited to this, and rewriting may be performed in a dot sequence. In any case, it is important to match the rewrite timing of the display panel and the backlight. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the discrepancy between the state of the display panel and the backlight, so that it is possible to reduce a display failure such as a ghost.

In FIG. 12B, a solid line 1111 schematically represents the timing at which all the pixels of the display panel are rewritten. To be precise, as in FIG. 12A, it has a staircase pattern with the number of pixels in the vertical direction. In FIG. 12B, solid line 1
As indicated by reference numeral 111, the cycle in which all the pixels of the display panel are rewritten is a period that is ½ times the cycle Tin of the input image data. This is because the display panel is driven at double speed to display a blank image. As already described, the driving frequency is not limited to this, and various driving frequencies can be used. In any case, it is important to match the rewrite timing of the display panel and the backlight. The reason is the same as described above. When the rewriting indicated by the solid line 1111 is completed, the rewriting indicated by the solid line 1112 is started. Similarly, when the rewriting indicated by the solid line 1112 is completed,
Rewriting indicated by a solid line 1113 is started. The rest is repeated.

In FIG. 12D, a solid line 1131 schematically represents the timing at which all the pixels of the display panel are rewritten. To be precise, as in FIG. 12C, it has a staircase pattern of the number of pixels in the vertical direction, but here it is shown by hatching for simplicity. In FIG. 12D, solid line 1
As indicated by reference numeral 131, the cycle in which all the pixels of the display panel are rewritten is the same as the cycle Tin of the input image data. Nevertheless, a blank image can be displayed when the drive indicated by the solid line 1131 is started and then 1/2 of the cycle Tin of the input image data.
This is because the drive indicated by the solid line 1132 is started when the double period has elapsed. As shown in FIG. 12D, several methods are conceivable in order to perform a plurality of different driving operations at the same time. For example, one gate selection period is divided into two periods,
There is a method of assigning different vertical position driving to each period. Furthermore, when the image to be displayed is a blank image, the pixel potential may be set to the same potential for a plurality of pixels by a common power supply line. By doing so, a plurality of different drives can be performed at the same time, so that the drive shown in FIG. 12D can be realized. In the driving shown in FIG. 12D, since the apparent cycle is the same as the cycle Tin of the input image data, the drive frequency can be reduced, and as a result, power consumption can be reduced. As already described, the driving frequency is not limited to this, and various driving frequencies can be used. In any case, it is important to match the rewrite timing of the display panel and the backlight. The reason is the same as described above. When the rewriting indicated by the solid line 1131 is completed, the rewriting indicated by the solid line 1133 is started. The rest is repeated.

Note that the timing at which the drive timing indicated by the solid line 1132 in FIG. 12D starts is ½ of the cycle Tin of the input image data after the drive indicated by the solid line 1131 is started.
Other than the point in time when the period of double has passed, it can be various. For example, the range can be a range indicated by an arrow adjacent to the solid line 1132. Here, a solid line 113
The time point at which the drive timing indicated by 2 is started is preferably the time point at which a period of 1/4 to 3/4 times the period Tin of the input image data has elapsed since the drive indicated by the solid line 1131 is started. . By setting the time point at which the drive timing indicated by the solid line 1132 starts within this range, it is possible to effectively reduce moving image blur while suppressing flicker.

Note that as an index of whether the backlight and the display panel are rewritten at the right timing, FIG. 12 (A) and FIG. 12 (B), or FIG. 12 (C) and FIG. In addition, it can be determined whether the solid line 1111 or the solid line 1131 intersects with all the solid lines included in the group 1101 or the group 1121. Here, it is important to have a certain range of timing that can be said to match. In other words, the rewriting timing of the backlight and the display panel has a certain range at the timing that can be said to be suitable, so that it can be said that the margin during operation is large. That is, FIG. 12 (A) and FIG.
By operating at the timing shown in FIG. 2 (B) or FIG. 12 (C) and FIG. 12 (D), the stability of the operation can be improved.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 3)
In the present embodiment, an example different from the method described in the first and second embodiments will be described among methods for improving the quality of an image displayed on the display device. Specifically, the present invention relates to a method for improving the quality of an image displayed on a display device using a backlight. More specifically, as the image displayed on the backlight, in addition to the image according to the image displayed on the display panel, a method of providing a period for displaying a blank image, and the backlight is divided into a plurality of regions, The present invention relates to a method for controlling the brightness of each of a plurality of areas in accordance with displayed image data.

As the backlight and the display panel in the method described in this embodiment, the backlight and the display panel described in Embodiment 1 can be used. Therefore, although detailed description thereof is omitted here, the features and advantages of using such a backlight and a display panel are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

First, an image displayed in the image display area of the display panel in the present embodiment will be described. The image displayed in the image display area has a period for display according to the input image data. Assume that the input image data has a certain cycle, and the image displayed in the image display area is also rewritten according to the cycle. FIG. 13B shows how the image displayed in the image display area changes over time. FIG.
Assume that the display panel shown in (B) displays an image 1211 at a certain point in time. And
It is assumed that an image 1217 is displayed when time has passed since the period Tin of the image data to be input. That is, FIG. 13B shows the state of change of the image displayed in the image display area with time on the horizontal axis.

In the method described in this embodiment, unlike the first and second embodiments, the image 121 is displayed.
While changing from 1 to an image 1217, another image is not displayed and the image 1211 is continuously displayed, while a blank image is displayed on the backlight.

Next, details of an image displayed in the image display area of the display panel will be described. An image 1211 that is initially displayed includes an object 1212 and a background 1213. The image 1214 to be displayed next includes an object 1215 and a background 1216, but the content of the image 1214 is the image 1211.
Is the same. The image 1217 displayed next is an object 1218 and a background 12.
19 is included. Here, it is assumed that the image 1211 and the image 1217 are images that are displayed according to the image data input to the display device.

Note that in the method described in this embodiment, the image 121 displayed when a time ½ times the cycle Tin of the input image data has elapsed after the image 1211 is displayed.
4 is the same as the image 1211, but a blank image is displayed on the backlight at that time. Become. In particular, if the blank image of the backlight at this time is a black image, the image actually perceived by human eyes is a black image regardless of the contents of the image 1214. As a result, it is possible to reduce moving image blur due to the hold type display device, and to improve the quality of the display image, particularly the moving image.

Furthermore, in the method described in this embodiment, the backlight emission region is divided into a plurality of unit regions, and the brightness in each unit region can be individually controlled. The image quality can be improved. Specifically, by controlling the brightness of each unit area of the backlight individually according to the image displayed on the display panel, the dark part of the image is displayed darker and the bright part of the image is displayed brighter. (Contrast ratio can be improved). This is particularly effective, for example, when the display panel uses a liquid crystal element. This is because a display panel using a liquid crystal element causes black floating even when displaying black.

If the method described in this embodiment is used, black floating can be reduced. because,
This is because if the unit area of the backlight corresponding to the part that controls the liquid crystal element so as to display black is not made to emit light, the black floating in the area can be eliminated. By doing so, the contrast ratio can be improved.

The black floating phenomenon itself is not limited to the liquid crystal display device. In any display device, a phenomenon that black does not become black can occur. Since the method described in this embodiment is characterized in that light emission of the light-emitting element is stopped when displaying black, the method described in this embodiment is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and various methods can be used. It can be applied to a display device.

Furthermore, in the method described in this embodiment, in addition to the image displayed on the backlight including a blank image, the display panel is controlled by the cycle Tin of the input image data.
A special effect can be produced by performing in synchronization with. In other words, the contrast ratio is improved by reducing the moving image blur by including the display of the blank image in the backlight display, and performing the individual control of the brightness of the unit area of the backlight according to the image data. In addition, the frequency with which the display panel is driven can be ½ times the frequency with which the backlight is driven, so that power consumption can be reduced at the same time.

Although detailed description is omitted here, the driving frequency of the backlight and the display panel is not limited to double speed, and various ones can be used. For example, the drive frequency is an integer multiple such as 3 × speed, 4 × speed, 5 × speed, 6 × speed, 7 × speed, 8 × speed, etc. 3/2 speed, 4/3 speed, 5/2 speed, etc. It can also be a frequency. At any drive frequency, the frequency with which the display panel is driven is less than the frequency with which the backlight is driven, and thus power consumption is reduced.

Here, a method for controlling the brightness of each unit area of the backlight while displaying a blank image on the backlight will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 13A shows the change in the brightness of the unit area of the backlight, taking time along the horizontal axis, as in FIG. 13B. Here, for simplicity, the image 1211
, Object 1212, object 1215 and object 12 in image 1214 and image 1217
In the following description, it is assumed that 18 is white or gray, and the background 1213, background 1216, and background 1219 are black.

First, in the light emitting region 1201, a region 120 that is a position corresponding to the position of the object 1212.
2 (here, unit regions X2Y3, X2Y4, X2Y5, X2Y6, X3Y3, X3Y4
, X3Y5, X3Y6, X4Y3, X4Y4, X4Y5, X4Y6)
The remaining area 1203 does not emit light. By doing so, the background 1213 can be prevented from being blacked out, and the object 1212 can be displayed brightly, so that the contrast ratio can be improved. Thereafter, a blank image is displayed on the backlight, but the image displayed on the display panel is not changed. Then, after that, an area 1208 (here, unit areas X4Y3, X4Y4, X4Y5, X4Y6, X5Y3, which corresponds to the position of the object 1218,
X5Y4, X5Y5, X5Y6, X6Y3, X6Y4, X6Y5, and X6Y6) are emitted, and the remaining region 1209 is not illuminated. Thus, the brightness of each unit area of the backlight can be controlled while displaying a blank image on the backlight.

Next, timing for driving the backlight and the display panel will be described in detail (see FIGS. 14A to 14D). FIGS. 14A and 14C are diagrams showing the timing of rewriting the brightness of the unit area of the backlight, where the horizontal axis represents time and the vertical axis represents the vertical position of the backlight. FIGS. 14B and 14D are diagrams showing the timing of rewriting the transmittance of the display panel, with the horizontal axis being time and the vertical axis being the vertical position of the display panel. Note that FIG.
The backlight drive timing shown in FIG. 4 (A) is implemented in combination with the display panel drive timing shown in FIG. 14 (B). Similarly, the driving timing of the backlight shown in FIG. 14C is assumed to be combined with the driving timing of the display panel shown in FIG.

14A and 14C, in the unit area of the backlight, the light emission state is rewritten at the timing indicated by the solid line. Here, it is assumed that unit areas having the same vertical position are rewritten at the same timing regardless of the horizontal position (line sequential). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and rewriting may be performed in order according to the horizontal position (dot sequential). In particular, when rewriting is performed in a dot sequential manner on the display panel, it is preferable that the unit area of the backlight is also dot sequential in accordance with this. Groups 1301 and 1302
Reference numerals 1303, 1321, 1322, and 1323 collectively indicate that all the unit areas of the backlight are rewritten.

In FIG. 14A, as indicated by the group 1301, the period in which all of the backlight unit areas are rewritten is a period that is ½ times the period Tin of the input image data. This is because the backlight is driven at double speed in order to display a blank image. As already described, the period during which the entire unit area of the backlight is rewritten is not limited to this, and various types can be used. When the rewriting indicated by the group 1301 is completed, the rewriting indicated by the group 1302 is started. When the rewrite indicated by the group 1302 is completed, the rewrite indicated by the group 1303 is started. The rest is repeated.

In FIG. 14C, as indicated by the group 1321, the period during which the entire backlight unit area is rewritten is the same as the period Tin of the input image data. Nevertheless, the blank image can be displayed when the group 1322 has elapsed after a period of ½ times the cycle Tin of the input image data since the drive indicated by the group 1321 is started.
This is because the driving indicated by is started. As shown in FIG. 14C, several methods can be considered in order to perform a plurality of different driving operations at the same time. For example, there is a method in which one gate selection period is divided into two periods, and different vertical driving positions are assigned to the respective periods. Further, when the image displayed on the backlight is a blank image, the pixel potential may be set to the same potential in a plurality of pixels by a common power supply line. By doing so, a plurality of different drivings can be performed at the same time, so that the driving shown in FIG. 14C can be realized. In the driving shown in FIG. 14C, the apparent cycle is the cycle Tin of the input image data.
Therefore, the drive frequency can be reduced, and as a result, power consumption can be reduced. As already described, the period during which the entire unit area of the backlight is rewritten is not limited to this, and various types can be used. When the rewriting indicated by the group 1321 is completed, the rewriting indicated by the group 1323 is started. The rest is repeated.

14B and 14D, the pixel of the display panel is rewritten with transmittance at the timing indicated by the solid line. Here, it is assumed that all pixels having the same vertical position are rewritten at the same timing regardless of the horizontal position (line sequential). As already described, the present invention is not limited to this, and rewriting may be performed in a dot sequence. In any case, it is important to match the rewrite timing of the display panel and the backlight. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the discrepancy between the state of the display panel and the backlight, so that it is possible to reduce a display failure such as a ghost.

In FIG. 14B, a solid line 1311 schematically represents the timing at which all the pixels of the display panel are rewritten. To be precise, as in FIG. 14 (A), it has a staircase shape with the number of pixels in the vertical direction, but here it is shown with diagonal lines for simplicity. In FIG. 14B, solid line 1
As indicated by 311, the period during which all pixels of the display panel are rewritten is a period that is ½ times the period Tin of the input image data. This is because the drive of the display panel is matched with the drive of the display panel shown in FIG. Note that as described above, the period during which all the pixels of the display panel are rewritten is not limited to this, and various types can be used. In any case, it is important to match the rewrite timing of the display panel and the backlight. The reason is the same as described above. When the rewriting indicated by the solid line 1311 is completed, the display panel is not driven until a period of ½ times the period Tin of the input image data has elapsed. Thereafter, rewriting indicated by a solid line 1313 is started. The rest is repeated.

In FIG. 14D, a solid line 1331 schematically represents the timing at which all the pixels of the display panel are rewritten. Exactly speaking, as in FIG. 14C, it has a staircase pattern of the number of pixels in the vertical direction, but here it is shown by hatching for simplicity. In FIG. 14D, solid line 1
As indicated by reference numeral 331, the cycle in which all the pixels of the display panel are rewritten is the same as the cycle Tin of the input image data. In the driving shown in FIG. 14D, the cycle is the same as the cycle Tin of the input image data, so that the driving frequency can be reduced, and as a result, power consumption can be reduced. As already described, the driving frequency is not limited to this, and various driving frequencies can be used. In any case, it is important to match the rewrite timing of the display panel and the backlight. The reason is the same as described above. When the rewriting indicated by the solid line 1331 is completed, the rewriting indicated by the solid line 1333 is started. The rest is repeated.

Note that when the drive timing indicated by the group 1322 in FIG. 14C is started, the period Tin of the input image data after the drive indicated by the group 1321 is started.
Other than the time point when 1/2 of the period has elapsed, various values can be used. For example, the range can be a range indicated by an arrow adjacent to the group 1322. Here, the time when the drive timing indicated by the group 1322 is started is a time when a period of 1/4 to 3/4 times the period Tin of the input image data has elapsed since the start of the drive indicated by the group 1321. Preferably there is. By setting the time point at which the drive timing indicated by the group 1322 is started within this range, it is possible to effectively reduce moving image blur while suppressing flicker.

Note that as an indicator of whether the backlight and the display panel are rewritten at the right timing, FIG. 14A and FIG. 14B, or FIG. 14C and FIG. In addition, it can be determined whether the solid line 1311 or the solid line 1331 intersects with all the solid lines included in the group 1301 or the group 1321. Here, it is important to have a certain range of timing that can be said to match. In other words, the rewriting timing of the backlight and the display panel has a certain range at the timing that can be said to be suitable, so that it can be said that the margin during operation is large. That is, FIG. 14 (A) and FIG.
By operating at the timing shown in FIG. 4 (B) or FIG. 14 (C) and FIG. 14 (D), the stability of the operation can be improved.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 4)
In this embodiment, among methods for improving the quality of an image displayed on a display device, an example different from the method described in Embodiments 1 to 3 will be described. Specifically, the present invention relates to a method for improving the quality of an image displayed on a display device using a backlight. More specifically,
In addition to the image displayed on the display panel according to the image displayed on the display panel, a period for displaying a blank image is provided, and the image displayed on the display panel is determined according to the input image data. A method for providing a blank image display period,
The present invention also relates to a method of dividing a backlight into a plurality of areas and controlling the brightness of each of the plurality of areas in accordance with displayed image data.

As the backlight and the display panel in the method described in this embodiment, the backlight and the display panel described in Embodiment 1 can be used. Therefore, although detailed description thereof is omitted here, the features and advantages of using such a backlight and a display panel are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

First, an image displayed in the image display area of the display panel in the present embodiment will be described. The image displayed in the image display area has a period for display according to the input image data. Assume that the input image data has a certain cycle, and the image displayed in the image display area is also rewritten according to the cycle. FIG. 15B shows how the image displayed in the image display area changes over time. FIG.
Assume that the display panel shown in (B) displays an image 1411 at a certain point in time. And
Then, it is assumed that an image 1417 is displayed at the time when the period Tin of the input image data has elapsed. That is, FIG. 15B shows a change in the image displayed in the image display area with time on the horizontal axis.

In the method described in this embodiment, a blank image is displayed while changing from the image 1411 to the image 1417 as in the first embodiment, and on the other hand, a blank image is also displayed on the backlight. It is said.

Next, details of an image displayed in the image display area of the display panel will be described. An image 1411 displayed first includes an object 1412 and a background 1413. The image 1414 displayed next includes an object 1415 and a background 1416. Next image 141 displayed
7 includes an object 1418 and a background 1419. Here, the image 1411 and the image 14
Reference numeral 17 denotes an image displayed in accordance with image data input to the display device.

Note that in the method described in this embodiment, a blank image is displayed at the time when 1/2 time of the period Tin of input image data has elapsed after the image 1411 is displayed, and Since the blank image is displayed on the backlight at that time, the actually displayed image can be surely set as the blank image. In other words, when the response speed of the display panel is slow, such as using a liquid crystal element, a ghost caused by the human eye perceiving a transient state until the display panel image is a blank image, It can be effectively reduced. By doing so, it is possible to reduce moving image blur due to the hold type of the front display device, and to improve the quality of the display image, particularly the moving image, and to reduce ghost.

Furthermore, in the method described in this embodiment, the backlight emission region is divided into a plurality of unit regions, and the brightness in each unit region can be individually controlled. The image quality can be improved. Specifically, by controlling the brightness of each unit area of the backlight individually according to the image displayed on the display panel, the dark part of the image is displayed darker and the bright part of the image is displayed brighter. (Contrast ratio can be improved). This is particularly effective, for example, when the display panel uses a liquid crystal element. This is because a display panel using a liquid crystal element causes black floating even when displaying black.

If the method described in this embodiment is used, black floating can be reduced. because,
This is because if the unit area of the backlight corresponding to the part that controls the liquid crystal element so as to display black is not made to emit light, the black floating in the area can be eliminated. By doing so, the contrast ratio can be improved.

The black floating phenomenon itself is not limited to the liquid crystal display device. In any display device, a phenomenon that black does not become black can occur. Since the method described in this embodiment is characterized in that light emission of the light-emitting element is stopped when displaying black, the method described in this embodiment is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and various methods can be used. It can be applied to a display device.

Although detailed description is omitted here, the driving frequency of the backlight and the display panel is not limited to double speed, and various ones can be used. For example, the drive frequency is an integer multiple such as 3 × speed, 4 × speed, 5 × speed, 6 × speed, 7 × speed, 8 × speed, etc. 3/2 speed, 4/3 speed, 5/2 speed, etc. It can also be a frequency. The higher the drive frequency, the greater the degree of improvement in moving image quality and the reduction of ghosts.
On the other hand, the lower the drive frequency, the lower the power consumption.

Here, a method of controlling the brightness of each unit area of the backlight while displaying a blank image on the backlight and the display panel will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 15A shows the change in the brightness of the unit area of the backlight, taking time along the horizontal axis, as in FIG. 15B. Here, for simplicity, the object 1412 and the object 141 in the image 1411, the image 1414, and the image 1417 are shown.
5 and object 1418 are white or gray, background 1413, background 1416 and background 1419
Will be described as black.

First, in the light emitting region 1401, a region 140 that is a position corresponding to the position of the object 1412.
2 (here, unit regions X2Y3, X2Y4, X2Y5, X2Y6, X3Y3, X3Y4
, X3Y5, X3Y6, X4Y3, X4Y4, X4Y5, X4Y6)
The remaining area 1403 does not emit light. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the background 1413 from being blacked out and the object 1412 can be displayed brightly, so that the contrast ratio can be improved. Thereafter, a blank image is displayed on the backlight and the display panel. After that, an area 1408 corresponding to the position of the object 1418 (here, the unit areas X4Y3, X4Y4, X4Y5, X4Y6, X5Y3, X5Y4, X5Y5, X5Y6,
X6Y3, X6Y4, X6Y5, and X6Y6) are emitted, and the remaining region 1409 is not illuminated. In this way, while displaying a blank image on the backlight and the display panel,
The brightness of each unit area of the backlight can be controlled.

Next, timing for driving the backlight and the display panel will be described in detail (see FIGS. 16A and 16B and FIGS. 2A and 2B). FIG. 16A is a diagram showing the timing of rewriting the brightness of the unit area of the backlight, where the horizontal axis is time and the vertical axis is the vertical position of the backlight. FIG. 16B is a diagram illustrating the timing of rewriting the transmittance of the display panel with the horizontal axis representing time and the vertical axis representing the vertical position of the display panel. Note that the backlight driving timing shown in FIG. 16A is implemented in combination with the driving timing of the display panel shown in FIG.

In FIG. 16A, in the unit area of the backlight, the light emission state is rewritten at the timing indicated by the solid line. Here, it is assumed that unit areas having the same vertical position are rewritten at the same timing regardless of the horizontal position (line sequential). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and rewriting may be performed in order according to the horizontal position (dot sequential). In particular,
When rewriting is performed in a dot sequential manner on the display panel, it is preferable that the unit area of the backlight is also dot sequential in accordance with this. Groups 1501, 1502 and 150
3 is a summary of the rewriting of all the unit areas of the backlight.

In FIG. 16A, as indicated by the group 1501, the period during which the entire backlight unit area is rewritten is the same as the period Tin of the input image data. Nevertheless, a blank image can be displayed when the period 150% of the period Tin of the input image data has elapsed since the start of the drive indicated by the group 1501.
This is because the driving indicated by is started. As shown in FIG. 16A, several methods are conceivable in order to perform a plurality of different driving operations at the same time. For example, there is a method in which one gate selection period is divided into two periods, and different vertical driving positions are assigned to the respective periods. Further, when the image displayed on the backlight is a blank image, the pixel potential may be set to the same potential in a plurality of pixels by a common power supply line. By doing so, a plurality of different drivings can be performed at the same time, so that the driving shown in FIG. 16A can be realized. In the driving shown in FIG. 16A, the apparent cycle is the cycle Tin of the input image data.
Therefore, the drive frequency can be reduced, and as a result, power consumption can be reduced. As already described, the period during which the entire unit area of the backlight is rewritten is not limited to this, and various types can be used. When the rewriting indicated by the group 1501 is completed, the rewriting indicated by the group 1503 is started. The rest is repeated.

In FIG. 16B, the transmittance of the pixel of the display panel is rewritten at the timing indicated by the solid line. Here, it is assumed that all pixels having the same vertical position are rewritten at the same timing regardless of the horizontal position (line sequential). As already described, the present invention is not limited to this, and rewriting may be performed in a dot sequence. In any case, it is important to match the rewrite timing of the display panel and the backlight. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the discrepancy between the state of the display panel and the backlight, so that it is possible to reduce a display failure such as a ghost.

In FIG. 16B, a solid line 1511 schematically represents the timing at which all the pixels of the display panel are rewritten. To be precise, as in FIG. 16A, it has a staircase shape with the number of pixels in the vertical direction, but here it is shown by hatching for simplicity. In FIG. 16B, solid line 1
As indicated by 511, the cycle in which all pixels of the display panel are rewritten is the same as the cycle Tin of the input image data. In the driving shown in FIG. 16B, the cycle is the same as the cycle Tin of the input image data, so that the driving frequency can be reduced, and as a result, power consumption can be reduced. As already described, the driving frequency is not limited to this, and various driving frequencies can be used. In any case, it is important to match the rewrite timing of the display panel and the backlight. The reason is the same as described above. When the rewriting indicated by the solid line 1511 is completed, the rewriting indicated by the solid line 1513 is started. The rest is repeated.

16A and 16B, the driving timing indicated by the group 1502 and the solid line 1512 is started at 1 of the cycle Tin of the input image data after the driving indicated by the group 1501 and the solid line 1511 is started. Other than the point when the period of / 2 times has passed, various things can be used. For example, group 1502 and solid line 1
The range may be as indicated by an arrow adjacent to 512. Here, group 15
02 and the driving timing indicated by the solid line 1512 starts at the group 150.
It is preferable that a period of ¼ to ¾ times the period Tin of the input image data has elapsed since the drive indicated by 1 and the solid line 1511 is started. By setting the time point at which the drive timings indicated by the group 1502 and the solid line 1512 are started within this range, it is possible to effectively reduce moving image blur while suppressing flicker.

Note that, similarly to the methods in the second and fourth embodiments, in order to display a blank image, the backlight and the display panel can be driven at double speed. In this case, the drive timing is the same as in FIGS. 2A and 2B in the first embodiment. Therefore, although detailed description is omitted, the difference from the drive timing shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B is that FIG.
In (A) and (B), driving for displaying a blank image is performed at driving timings represented by a group 202 and a solid line 212, which are driving timings for displaying an intermediate image. In this way, a blank image can be displayed on the backlight and the display panel.

Note that as an indicator of whether the backlight and the display panel are rewritten at the right timing, FIG. 16A and FIG. 16B, or FIG. 2A and FIG. In addition, a solid line 1511 or a solid line 211 indicates a group 1501 or a group 20.
It can be judged whether it intersects with all the solid lines included in 1. Here, it is important to have a certain range of timing that can be said to match. In other words, the rewrite timing of the backlight and the display panel has a certain range at the timing that can be said to be correct,
It can be said that the margin during operation is large. That is, FIG. 16 (A) and FIG. 16 (B)
Alternatively, the operation stability can be improved by operating at the timing shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 5)
In this embodiment, an SOI (Silicon On Insulator) substrate will be described. Specifically, a method for manufacturing an SOI substrate which is transferred from a single crystal semiconductor substrate to a different substrate (hereinafter also referred to as a “base substrate”) will be described.

Note that a transistor manufactured using an SOI substrate has characteristics that a parasitic capacitance is small and a short channel effect is hardly generated as compared with a transistor manufactured using an ordinary single crystal semiconductor substrate. Furthermore, it has characteristics of high mobility, low driving voltage, small deterioration over time and characteristic variation as compared with normal thin film transistors (including thin film transistors using amorphous silicon and polycrystalline silicon). By applying an SOI substrate capable of manufacturing a transistor having such characteristics to various devices, various problems of conventional devices can be solved.

For example, by making a transistor (a CPU, a central processing unit, a semiconductor memory, or the like) that can improve performance by making a transistor finer by using an SOI substrate,
Since the short channel effect of the transistor can be suppressed, the transistor can be further miniaturized and the performance can be improved.

Further, for example, by manufacturing a device (such as a display device) suitable for using a thin film transistor using an SOI substrate, the aperture ratio of the pixel can be improved and power consumption can be reduced (
The size of the transistor can be reduced), the power consumption can be reduced by reducing the driving voltage, the reliability can be improved (aging deterioration can be reduced), and the quality of the display image can be further improved. (Transistor characteristics variation can be reduced)
Various characteristics of the display device can be improved.

Specifically, a liquid crystal display device manufactured using an SOI substrate can significantly improve the characteristics. For example, when the pixel transistor is manufactured using an SOI substrate, the aperture ratio of the liquid crystal display device can be increased, so that power consumption can be reduced. Further, by manufacturing peripheral driver circuits such as a gate driver and a source driver using an SOI substrate, the driving voltage of the circuit can be reduced, so that power consumption can be reduced. further,
By manufacturing the image data processing circuit, the timing generation circuit, and the like using an SOI substrate, the driving voltage of the circuit can be reduced, so that power consumption can be reduced. Here, it is more effective when the liquid crystal display device has a configuration capable of overdrive driving. This is because the processing of image data is frequently performed by overdrive driving, and thus the effect of reducing power consumption by reducing the driving voltage becomes more remarkable. Further, even in the case of a circuit using a memory such as a lookup table, the effect of reducing power consumption by reducing the drive voltage is remarkable. Similarly, an SOI substrate is also used in the case where the frame rate of the image data input to the liquid crystal display device can be converted and the display can be changed to a higher frame rate for display (double speed drive). The effect of making is great.
This is because the driving frequency of the pixel circuit and the peripheral driving circuit is remarkably increased by the double speed driving, but in this case, since the driving voltage can be reduced by using an SOI substrate, the power consumption can be greatly reduced. .

Next, a method for manufacturing an SOI substrate will be described.

An SOI substrate 1700 has a structure in which a plurality of stacked bodies each including an insulating layer 1720 and a single crystal semiconductor layer (hereinafter also referred to as an SOI layer 1730) are sequentially stacked over one surface of a base substrate 1710 (see FIG. F) and (G)). The SOI layer 1730 is formed of the insulating layer 1720.
Is provided on the base substrate 1710 to form a so-called SOI structure.
Here, one SOI substrate 1700 may be formed by providing a plurality of SOI layers on one base substrate 1710. Note that the structure illustrated in FIGS. 17F and 17G illustrates an example in which two base layers 1710 are provided with two SOI layers 1730.

The SOI layer 1730 is a single crystal semiconductor, and typically, single crystal silicon can be used. In addition, a crystalline semiconductor layer that is a compound semiconductor such as silicon, germanium, gallium arsenide, or indium phosphide, which can be separated from a single crystal semiconductor substrate or a polycrystalline semiconductor substrate by using a hydrogen ion implantation separation method, can also be used. .

Note that the size of the SOI layer 1730 constituting the SOI substrate may be approximately the same as a desired panel size. Here, the “panel size” indicates the size of the display portion of the display panel and the peripheral frame portion (non-display portion) around the display portion. The “size” indicates an area.

The panel size may be appropriately selected depending on the application, but for example, it can be a small and medium panel size of less than 10 inches diagonal. When a mobile phone is assumed as a small and medium-sized panel, the size of the display unit (screen size) is, for example, 2.2 inches (56 mm) diagonal and 2.4 diagonals.
Inch (61 mm), diagonal 2.6 inches (66 mm), and the like are known. When these panel sizes are used, the screen size may be a size that takes into account the size of the frame portion around the display portion (screen frame size).

The shape of the SOI layer 1730 is not particularly limited; however, a rectangular shape (including a square) is preferable because processing is easy and the base substrate 1710 can be attached with a high degree of integration. In the case of a panel of a display device such as a display, the SOI layer 1730 preferably has an aspect ratio of 4: 3. By setting the SOI layer 1730 to a desired panel size, it is possible to manage the yield for each panel when manufacturing various display devices by incorporating a display panel manufactured using a completed SOI substrate. Further, it is possible to prevent the element from being damaged when the individual panels are divided. Therefore, the yield can be improved. Further, by setting the SOI layer 1730 to a desired panel size, an element for each panel can be formed using one SOI layer, and variation in characteristics can be suppressed.

As the base substrate 1710, a substrate having an insulating surface or an insulating substrate is used. Specific examples include various glass substrates, quartz substrates, ceramic substrates, and sapphire substrates used in the electronics industry such as aluminosilicate glass, aluminoborosilicate glass, and barium borosilicate glass. A glass substrate is preferably used as the base substrate 1710. For example, the sixth generation (17500 mm × 1850 mm), the seventh generation (1870 mm × 2200 mm)
A large-area mother glass substrate, which is said to be the eighth generation (2200 mm × 2400 mm), is used. A large-area mother glass substrate is used as the base substrate 1710, and the present invention is applied to
By manufacturing the I substrate, the area of the SOI substrate can be increased. In addition, by setting each SOI layer to a desired panel size, the number of display panels (number of chamfers) that can be manufactured with one base substrate can be increased. Therefore, the productivity of the final product (display device) manufactured by incorporating the display panel can be improved.

An insulating layer 1720 is provided between the base substrate 1710 and the SOI layer 1730.
Although the insulating layer 1720 may have a single-layer structure or a stacked structure, a surface to be bonded to the base substrate 1710 (hereinafter also referred to as a “bonding surface”) has a smooth surface and is a hydrophilic surface. FIG. 17F illustrates an example in which a bonding layer 1722 is formed as the insulating layer 1720. As the bonding layer 1722 that has a smooth surface and can form a hydrophilic surface, a silicon oxide layer is suitable. In particular, a silicon oxide layer formed by chemical vapor deposition using organosilane is preferable. As the organosilane, tetraethoxysilane (abbreviation: TEOS: chemical formula Si (OC ₂ H ₅ ))
₄ ), tetramethylsilane (TMS: chemical formula Si (CH ₃ ) ₄ ), trimethylsilane ((
CH ₃ ) ₃ SIH), tetramethylcyclotetrasiloxane (TMCTS), octamethylcyclotetrasiloxane (OMCTS), hexamethyldisilazane (HMDS), triethoxysilane (SiH (OC ₂ H ₅ ) ₃ ), trisdimethylaminosilane (SiH (N
Silicon-containing compounds such as (CH ₃ ) ₂ ) ₃ ) can be used.

The bonding layer 1722 having a smooth surface and forming a hydrophilic surface has a thickness of 5 nm to 500 nm.
It is preferable to provide in the range. By setting the thickness of the bonding layer 1722 within the above range, it is possible to smooth the surface roughness of the deposition surface and ensure the smoothness of the growth surface of the film. In addition, distortion with the substrate to be bonded (the base substrate 1710 in FIG. 17F) can be reduced. Note that a silicon oxide layer similar to the bonding layer 1722 may be provided for the base substrate 1710. The SOI substrate according to the present invention is preferably formed using organic silane as a raw material on one or both of surfaces to be bonded when the SOI layer 1730 is bonded to a substrate having an insulating surface or a base substrate 1710 which is an insulating substrate. By providing a bonding layer made of a silicon oxide layer, a strong bond can be formed.

FIG. 17G illustrates an example in which the insulating layer 1720 has a stacked structure. Specifically, an example in which a stacked structure of a bonding layer 1722 and a nitrogen-containing insulating layer 1724 is formed as the insulating layer 1720 is shown. Note that a nitrogen-containing insulating layer 1724 is provided between the SOI layer 1730 and the bonding layer 1722 so that the bonding layer 1722 is formed on the bonding surface with the base substrate 1710. The nitrogen-containing insulating layer 1724 is formed using a silicon nitride layer, a silicon nitride oxide layer, or a silicon oxynitride layer with a single-layer structure or a stacked structure. For example, the SOI layer 173
A nitrogen-containing insulating layer 1724 can be formed by stacking a silicon oxynitride layer and a silicon nitride oxide layer from the 0 side. The bonding layer 1722 is provided to form a bond with the base substrate 1710, whereas the nitrogen-containing insulating layer 1724 has an impurity such as mobile ions or moisture that is doped with the SOI layer 1730.
It is preferable to provide for preventing diffusion and contamination.

Note that the silicon oxynitride layer has a composition having a higher oxygen content than nitrogen, and the concentration ranges of oxygen are 55 atomic% to 65 atomic%, nitrogen is 1 atomic% to 20 atomic%, S
i includes 25 atom% to 35 atom% and hydrogen in the range of 0.1 atom% to 10 atom%. Further, the silicon nitride oxide layer has a composition having a nitrogen content higher than that of oxygen, and the concentration ranges of oxygen are 15 atomic% to 30 atomic%, nitrogen is 20 atomic% to 35 atomic%, Si In the range of 25 atomic% to 35 atomic% and hydrogen in the range of 15 atomic% to 25 atomic%.

19D and 19E illustrate an example in which an insulating layer 1750 including a bonding layer is formed over the base substrate 1710. The insulating layer 1750 may have a single-layer structure or a stacked structure, but the SOI layer 17
The joint surface with 30 has a smooth surface to form a hydrophilic surface. The base substrate 17
A barrier layer is preferably provided between 10 and the bonding layer in order to prevent diffusion of mobile ions such as alkali metal or alkaline earth metal from the glass substrate used as the base substrate 1710.

FIG. 19E illustrates an example in which a stacked structure of a barrier layer 1752 and a bonding layer 1754 is formed as the insulating layer 1750. As the bonding layer 1754, a silicon oxide layer similar to the bonding layer 1722 may be provided. Further, a bonding layer may be provided as appropriate for the SOI layer 1730. FIG. 19 (
E) shows an example in which the bonding layer 1722 is also provided in the SOI layer 1730. With such a structure, when the base substrate 1710 and the SOI layer 1730 are bonded to each other, a bond is formed between the bonding layers, so that a stronger bond can be formed. The barrier layer 1752
A single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure is formed using a silicon oxide layer, a silicon nitride layer, a silicon oxynitride layer, or a silicon nitride oxide layer. Preferably, an insulating layer containing nitrogen is used.

FIG. 19D illustrates an example in which a bonding layer is provided over the base substrate 1710. In particular,
A stacked structure of a barrier layer 1752 and a bonding layer 1754 is provided over the base substrate 1710 as the insulating layer 1750. The SOI layer 1730 is provided with a silicon oxide layer 1726. When the SOI layer 1730 is bonded to the base substrate 1710, the silicon oxide layer 1726 forms a bond with the bonding layer 1754. The silicon oxide layer 1726 is preferably formed by a thermal oxidation method. Alternatively, chemical oxide can be used for the silicon oxide layer 1726. The chemical oxide can be formed, for example, by treating the surface of the semiconductor substrate with ozone-containing water. Chemical oxide is preferable because it is formed reflecting the flatness of the surface of the semiconductor substrate.

Next, a method for manufacturing an SOI substrate according to the present invention will be described. First, an example of a method for manufacturing the SOI substrate illustrated in FIG.

First, a semiconductor substrate 1701 is prepared (see FIGS. 17A and 18A). A commercially available semiconductor substrate may be used as the semiconductor substrate 1701, and examples thereof include a silicon substrate, a germanium substrate, and a compound semiconductor substrate such as gallium arsenide and indium phosphide. As a commercially available silicon substrate, those having a diameter of 5 inches (125 mm), a diameter of 6 inches (150 mm), a diameter of 8 inches (200 mm), and a diameter of 12 inches (300 mm) are typical, and the shape is circular. Is almost. Further, the film thickness can be appropriately selected up to about 1.5 mm.

Next, ions 1704 accelerated by an electric field are implanted from the surface of the semiconductor substrate 1701 to a predetermined depth to form an ion doping layer 1703 (see FIGS. 17A and 18A).
The implantation of ions 1704 is performed in consideration of the film thickness of an SOI layer to be transferred to the base substrate later. Preferably, the thickness of the SOI layer is 5 nm to 500 nm, more preferably 10 nm to 2 nm.
The thickness is set to 00 nm. The accelerating voltage and the ion dose at the time of ion implantation are appropriately selected in consideration of the thickness of the SOI layer to be transferred. As the ion 1704, hydrogen, helium, or a halogen ion such as fluorine can be used. Note that as the ions 1704, it is preferable to implant an ion species including one atom or a plurality of identical atoms generated by plasma excitation of a source gas selected from hydrogen, helium, or a halogen element. When hydrogen ions are implanted, H ⁺ , H ₂ ⁺ , H ₃ ⁺ ions are included, and if the ratio of H ₃ ⁺ ions is increased, the ion implantation efficiency can be increased and the implantation time is shortened. This is preferable because it can be performed. Moreover, peeling can be easily performed by setting it as such a structure.

Note that in order to form the ion doping layer 1703 at a predetermined depth, ions 1704 may need to be implanted under a high dose condition. At this time, depending on conditions, the semiconductor substrate 1
The surface of 701 becomes rough. Therefore, on the surface where ions of the semiconductor substrate are implanted,
As a protective layer, a silicon nitride layer or a silicon nitride oxide layer is formed to a thickness of 50 nm to 200 nm.
It may be provided in the range.

Next, a bonding layer 1722 is formed over the semiconductor substrate 1701 (FIGS. 17B and 18B).
reference). The bonding layer 1722 is formed on a surface where the semiconductor substrate 1701 forms a bond with the base substrate. As the bonding layer 1722 formed here, a silicon oxide layer formed by a chemical vapor deposition method using organosilane as a source gas as described above is preferable. In addition, a silicon oxide layer formed by a chemical vapor deposition method using silane as a source gas can be used. In film formation by chemical vapor deposition, an ion doping layer 1 formed on the semiconductor substrate 1701 is used.
A temperature at which degassing does not occur from 703 is applied. For example, a film forming temperature of 350 ° C. or lower is applied. Note that a heat treatment temperature higher than a film formation temperature by a chemical vapor deposition method is applied to heat treatment for peeling the SOI layer from a semiconductor substrate such as a single crystal semiconductor substrate or a polycrystalline semiconductor substrate.

Here, the semiconductor substrate 1701 can be processed into a desired size and shape (FIG. 17 (
C) and FIG. 18C). Specifically, it can be processed to have a desired panel size. FIG. 18C illustrates an example in which a circular semiconductor substrate 1702 is divided to form a rectangular semiconductor substrate 1702. At this time, the bonding layer 1722 and the ion doping layer 1
703 is also divided. In this way, the ion doping layer 1703 is formed to a predetermined depth.
Is formed, a bonding layer 1722 is formed on the surface (bonding surface with the base substrate), and a semiconductor substrate 1702 having a desired panel size can be obtained.

The semiconductor substrate 1702 is preferably a panel size of various display devices.
The panel size may be appropriately selected depending on the final product to be incorporated.
The panel size can be a small-to-medium panel size less than one inch. For example, when applied to a mobile phone having a screen size diagonal of 2.4 inches, the panel size is set to a screen size diagonal of 2.4 inches in consideration of the screen frame size. In addition, the shape of the semiconductor substrate 1702 may be appropriately selected depending on the use such as the final product, but when applied to a display device such as a display, it is preferably a rectangle having an aspect ratio of about 3: 4. In addition, it is preferable that the semiconductor substrate 1702 have a rectangular shape because processing in a later manufacturing process is facilitated and the semiconductor substrate 1701 can be efficiently cut out. The semiconductor substrate 1701 can be divided using a cutting device such as a dicer or a wire saw, laser cutting, plasma cutting, electron beam cutting, or any other cutting means.

Note that the order of steps until the bonding layer is formed on the surface of the semiconductor substrate can be changed as appropriate. In this example, an ion doping layer is formed on a semiconductor substrate, a bonding layer is formed on the surface of the semiconductor substrate, and then the semiconductor substrate is processed into a desired panel size. On the other hand, for example, after processing a semiconductor substrate to a desired panel size, an ion doping layer is formed on the semiconductor substrate having the desired panel size, and a bonding layer is formed on the surface of the semiconductor substrate having the desired panel size. it can.

Next, the base substrate 1710 and the semiconductor substrate 1702 are attached to each other. In FIG. 17D,
An example in which the base substrate 1710 and the surface of the semiconductor substrate 1702 where the bonding layer 1722 is formed is brought into close contact, the base substrate 1710 and the bonding layer 1722 are bonded, and the base substrate 1710 and the semiconductor substrate 1702 are bonded to each other is shown. In addition, it is preferable that the surface (bonding surface) for forming the bond is sufficiently cleaned. A bond is formed by closely attaching the base substrate 1710 and the bonding layer 1722. In this bonding, van der Waals force acts, and the base substrate 1710
By pressing the semiconductor substrate 1702 and the semiconductor substrate 1702 together, a strong bond by hydrogen bonding can be formed.

In order to form a favorable bond between the base substrate 1710 and the bonding layer 1722, the bonding surface may be activated. For example, one or both of the surfaces on which the junction is formed are irradiated with an atomic beam or an ion beam. When an atomic beam or an ion beam is used, an inert gas neutral atom beam or inert gas ion beam such as argon can be used. In addition, the bonding surface can be activated by performing plasma irradiation or radical treatment. Such surface treatment makes it easy to form a bond between different materials even at a temperature of 400 ° C. or lower.

Further, after the base substrate 1710 and the semiconductor substrate 1702 are bonded to each other through the bonding layer 1722, heat treatment or pressure treatment is preferably performed. By performing the heat treatment or the pressure treatment, the bonding strength can be improved. The temperature for the heat treatment is preferably equal to or lower than the heat resistant temperature of the base substrate 1710. In the pressure treatment, pressure is applied in a direction perpendicular to the bonding surface, and the pressure resistance of the base substrate 1710 and the semiconductor substrate 1702 is taken into consideration.

Next, heat treatment is performed, and the semiconductor substrate 1702 is formed using the ion doping layer 1703 as a cleavage plane.
Part of the substrate is peeled from the base substrate 1710 (see FIG. 17E). The temperature of the heat treatment is preferably higher than the deposition temperature of the bonding layer 1722 and lower than the heat resistance temperature of the base substrate 1710.
For example, by performing heat treatment at 400 ° C. to 600 ° C., the ion doping layer 170 is heated.
3 changes in the deposition of the minute cavities formed in 3, and can be cleaved along the ion doping layer 1703. Since the bonding layer 1722 is bonded to the base substrate 1710, the same crystalline SOI layer 1730 as the semiconductor substrate 1702 remains over the base substrate 1710.

Thus, an SOI structure in which the SOI layer 1730 is provided over the base substrate 1710 with the bonding layer 1722 interposed therebetween is formed. Note that the SOI substrate can have a structure in which a plurality of SOI layers are provided over a single base substrate with a bonding layer interposed therebetween. For example, a desired number of semiconductor substrates 1702 in which an ion doping layer is formed and a bonding layer is formed on the surface and processed into a desired panel size are prepared. Then, after a desired number of semiconductor substrates 1702 are bonded to the base substrate 1710 as shown in FIG. 20A, the SOI substrate is peeled off by heat treatment as shown in FIG. 20B. Can be manufactured. Note that an SOI substrate can also be manufactured by repeating the step of attaching and peeling one or a certain number of semiconductor substrates 1702 without performing the peeling by heat treatment all at once.

In addition, it is preferable that the semiconductor substrate 1702 be regularly arranged on the base substrate 1710 because a subsequent process becomes easy. For example, by using a control device such as a CCD camera or a computer, the semiconductor substrates 1702 can be regularly arranged and bonded together. In addition, alignment may be performed by forming a marker or the like on the base substrate 1710 or the semiconductor substrate 1702. In FIG. 20, a gap is provided between adjacent SOI layers to some extent, but a configuration in which the gaps are provided so as not to leave a gap as much as possible is also possible.

Note that the SOI layer obtained by peeling may be subjected to chemical mechanical polishing (CMP) in order to planarize the surface. Further, planarization may be performed by irradiating the surface of the SOI layer with a laser beam without using physical polishing means such as CMP. When irradiating a laser beam, the oxygen concentration is 10 ppm.
It is preferable to carry out under the following nitrogen atmosphere. This is because the surface of the SOI layer may be roughened when laser beam irradiation is performed in an oxygen atmosphere. Further, CMP or the like may be performed for the purpose of thinning the obtained SOI layer.

Next, a process for forming an SOI layer as illustrated in FIG. 19D by providing a bonding layer on the base substrate side will be described.

FIG. 19A shows a step of forming an ion doping layer 1703 by implanting ions 1704 accelerated by an electric field to a semiconductor substrate 1701 provided with a silicon oxide layer 1726 to a predetermined depth. Although the silicon oxide layer 1726 can be formed by a CVD method or a sputtering method, it is preferably formed by a thermal oxidation method. Further, the silicon oxide layer 172
6 may be a chemical oxide formed by treating the surface of a semiconductor substrate with ozone-containing water or the like. The semiconductor substrate 1701 can be the same as that in the above-described case of FIG. Further, implantation of ions of halogen such as hydrogen, helium, or fluorine is similar to the case of FIG. A silicon oxide layer 17 is formed on the surface of the semiconductor substrate 1701.
By forming 26, it is possible to prevent the surface of the semiconductor substrate from being damaged and the flatness from being impaired when ions are implanted.

FIG. 19B illustrates a base substrate 171 on which a barrier layer 1752 and a bonding layer 1754 are formed.
0 and the surface of the semiconductor substrate 1702 where the silicon oxide layer 1726 is formed are brought into close contact with each other to form a bond. The bonding layer 1754 over the base substrate 1710 and the semiconductor substrate 170
A bond is formed by closely contacting the two silicon oxide layers 1726. Note that an ion doping layer 1703 is formed over the semiconductor substrate 1702, and a silicon oxide layer 172 is formed on the surface.
6 is obtained by processing a semiconductor substrate 1701 having 6 formed thereon into a desired panel size. The barrier layer 1752 is formed by a CVD method or a sputtering method using a silicon oxide layer, a silicon nitride layer,
A single-layer structure or a stacked structure may be formed using a silicon oxynitride layer or a silicon nitride oxide layer. As the bonding layer 1754, a silicon oxide layer similar to the bonding layer 1722 described above may be formed.

Then, as illustrated in FIG. 19C, part of the semiconductor substrate 1702 is peeled off. Heat treatment for separation is performed in a manner similar to that in the case of FIG. 17E, and the ion-doping layer 1703 is used as a cleavage plane to separate from the base substrate 1710. After the separation treatment, the SOI substrate 1730 having the same crystallinity as the semiconductor substrate 1702 remains over the base substrate 1710, whereby an SOI substrate can be obtained. Here, the SOI substrate includes a barrier layer 1752 and a bonding layer 175 over the base substrate 1710.
4. A structure in which an SOI layer 1730 is provided through a silicon oxide layer 1726 can be employed. Note that after the peeling treatment, CMP, laser beam irradiation, or the like may be performed in order to planarize or thin the obtained SOI layer.

By the method for manufacturing an SOI substrate described in this embodiment, an SOI layer 1730 having a strong bonding strength at a bonding portion can be obtained even when the heat resistance temperature of the base substrate 1710 is 600 ° C. or lower. Further, since a temperature process of 600 ° C. or lower may be applied, the base substrate 17
As 10, it is possible to apply various glass substrates used in the electronic industry called alkali-free glass such as aluminosilicate glass, aluminoborosilicate glass, and barium borosilicate glass. Of course, a ceramic substrate, a sapphire substrate, a quartz substrate, or the like can also be applied. That is, a single crystal semiconductor layer can be formed over a substrate whose one side exceeds 1 meter. A display device such as a liquid crystal display or a semiconductor integrated circuit can be manufactured using such a large-area substrate.

The SOI substrate described in this embodiment has a structure in which a panel-size SOI layer is provided over a base substrate. In this manner, a desired display panel can be formed using one SOI layer, and yield can be improved. In addition, since a desired display panel can be formed using one SOI layer, variation in elements forming the display panel can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the SOI substrate described in this embodiment mode can manage the yield for each panel even when a defect occurs in the crystal of the SOI layer when the SOI layer is transferred to the base substrate. In addition, since the SOI layer is transferred to the base substrate in a panel size, stress such as stress can be reduced even when different materials are bonded to each other, and the yield can be improved.

Further, the SOI substrate described in this embodiment can have a large area by providing a plurality of SOI layers over a base substrate. Therefore, a large number of display panels can be manufactured in a single manufacturing process, and productivity of a final product manufactured by incorporating the display panel can be improved.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 6)
In this embodiment, a structure and a manufacturing method of a transistor will be described.

21A to 21G illustrate an example of a structure and a manufacturing method of a transistor. FIG.
FIG. 1A illustrates an example of a structure of a transistor. 21B to 21G illustrate an example of a method for manufacturing a transistor.

Note that the structure and manufacturing method of the transistor are not limited to those illustrated in FIGS. 21A to 21G, and various structures and manufacturing methods can be used.

First, an example of a transistor structure is described with reference to FIG. FIG.
FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of a transistor having a plurality of different structures. Here, in FIG. 21A, a plurality of transistors having different structures are shown side by side, but this is an expression for explaining the structure of the transistors, and the transistors are actually formed in FIG. They do not have to be juxtaposed as in A), and can be created as needed.

Next, characteristics of each layer constituting the transistor will be described.

As the substrate 110111, a glass substrate such as barium borosilicate glass or alumino borosilicate glass, a quartz substrate, a ceramic substrate, a metal substrate including stainless steel, or the like can be used. In addition, polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene naphthalate (PE
N), it is also possible to use a substrate made of a synthetic resin having flexibility such as plastic or acrylic represented by polyethylene-tersulfone (PES). By using a flexible substrate, a semiconductor device that can be bent can be manufactured. If the substrate has flexibility, the area of the substrate and the shape of the substrate are not greatly limited.
As 111, for example, if one side is 1 meter or more and a rectangular shape is used, the productivity can be remarkably improved. Such an advantage is a great advantage compared to the case of using a circular silicon substrate.

The insulating film 110112 functions as a base film. An alkali metal or alkaline earth metal such as Na is provided from the substrate 110111 in order to prevent adverse effects on the characteristics of the semiconductor element. As the insulating film 110112, an insulating film containing oxygen or nitrogen, such as silicon oxide (SiOx), silicon nitride (SiNx), silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) (x> y), or silicon nitride oxide (SiNxOy) (x> y) It is possible to provide a single layer structure or a laminated structure thereof.
For example, in the case where the insulating film 110112 is provided with a two-layer structure, a silicon nitride oxide film may be provided as a first insulating film and a silicon oxynitride film may be provided as a second insulating film. As another example, when the insulating film 110112 is provided with a three-layer structure, a silicon oxynitride film is provided as a first insulating film,
A silicon nitride oxide film may be provided as a second insulating film, and a silicon oxynitride film may be provided as a third insulating film.

The semiconductor layers 110113, 110114, and 110115 can be formed using an amorphous semiconductor or a semi-amorphous semiconductor (SAS). Alternatively, a polycrystalline semiconductor layer may be used. SAS is a semiconductor having an intermediate structure between amorphous and crystalline structures (including single crystals and polycrystals) and having a third state which is stable in terms of free energy and has a short-range order. It includes a crystalline region having lattice distortion. At least some areas in the membrane
A crystal region of 0.5 to 20 nm can be observed. When silicon is the main component, the Raman spectrum is shifted to a lower wave number side than 520 cm ⁻¹ . In X-ray diffraction, diffraction peaks of (111) and (220) that are derived from the silicon crystal lattice are observed. As a compensation for dangling bonds (dangling bonds), hydrogen or halogen is contained at least 1 atomic% or more. The SAS is formed by glow discharge decomposition (plasma CVD) of a material gas. Examples of the material gas include SiH ₄ , Si ₂ H ₆ , SiH ₂ Cl ₂ , and SiHC.
l ₃ , SiCl ₄ , SiF ₄ or the like can be used. Alternatively, GeF ₄ may be mixed. The material gas H2, or, _{H 2} and He, Ar, Kr, may be diluted with selected one or more kinds of rare gas elements and Ne. The dilution rate is in the range of 2 to 1000 times. The pressure is generally in the range of 0.1 Pa to 133 Pa, and the power supply frequency is 1 MHz to 120 MHz, preferably 13 MHz to 60 MHz. The substrate heating temperature may be 300 ° C. or less. As the impurity element in the film, impurity is 1 × ¹⁰ 20 cm of atmospheric constituents, such as carbon ^- desirably set to lower than or equal to 1, in particular, oxygen concentration is 5 × ¹⁰ 19 / cm ³ or less, preferably 1 × 10 ¹⁹ / c
m ³ or less. Here, an amorphous semiconductor layer is formed using a known material (a sputtering method, an LPCVD method, a plasma CVD method, or the like) with a material (eg, SixGe1-x) containing silicon (Si) as a main component. The crystalline semiconductor layer is crystallized by a known crystallization method such as a laser crystallization method, a thermal crystallization method using an RTA or furnace annealing furnace, or a thermal crystallization method using a metal element that promotes crystallization.

The insulating film 110116 includes silicon oxide (SiOx), silicon nitride (SiNx), and silicon oxynitride (
A single-layer structure of an insulating film containing oxygen or nitrogen such as SiOxNy) (x> y) or silicon nitride oxide (SiNxOy) (x> y), or a stacked structure thereof can be used.

The gate electrode 110117 can have a single-layer conductive film or a stacked structure of two-layer or three-layer conductive films. As a material of the gate electrode 110117, a known conductive film can be used. For example, an elemental film of an element such as tantalum (Ta), titanium (Ti), molybdenum (Mo), tungsten (W), chromium (Cr), silicon (Si), or an element nitride film (typically nitrided) Tantalum film, tungsten nitride film, titanium nitride film), alloy film combining elements (typically Mo—W alloy, Mo—Ta alloy), or element silicide film (typically tungsten silicide film) , Titanium silicide film) or the like can be used. Note that the single film, nitride film, alloy film, silicide film, and the like described above may be used as a single layer or may be stacked.

The insulating film 110118 is formed by a known means (such as sputtering or plasma CVD) by using silicon oxide (SiOx), silicon nitride (SiNx), silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) (x> y).
, An insulating film containing oxygen or nitrogen such as silicon nitride oxide (SiNxOy) (x> y) or DLC (
A single-layer structure of a film containing carbon such as diamond-like carbon) or a laminated structure thereof can be used.

The insulating film 110119 is formed of siloxane resin, silicon oxide (SiOx), silicon nitride (
SiNx), silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) (x> y), silicon nitride oxide (SiNxOy)
(X> y) such as an insulating film having oxygen or nitrogen, a film containing carbon such as DLC (Diamond Like Carbon), or epoxy, polyimide, polyamide, polyvinyl phenol, benzocyclobutene, acrylic, etc. A single layer or a stacked structure of an organic material can be used. Note that a siloxane resin corresponds to a resin including a Si—O—Si bond.
Siloxane has a skeleton structure formed of a bond of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O). As a substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (for example, an alkyl group or an aromatic hydrocarbon) is used. A fluoro group can also be used as a substituent. Alternatively, an organic group containing at least hydrogen and a fluoro group may be used as a substituent. Note that the insulating film 110119 can be provided directly so as to cover the gate electrode 110117 without providing the insulating film 110118.

The conductive film 110123 is made of Al, Ni, C, W, Mo, Ti, Pt, Cu, Ta, Au, M
A single element film of an element such as n, an element nitride film, an alloy film in which elements are combined, or an element silicide film can be used. For example, as an alloy containing a plurality of elements, an Al alloy containing C and Ti, an Al alloy containing Ni, an Al alloy containing C and Ni, an Al alloy containing C and Mn, or the like can be used. For example, in the case of providing a stacked structure, a structure in which Al is sandwiched between Mo or Ti can be used. By carrying out like this, the tolerance with respect to the heat | fever and chemical reaction of Al can be improved.

Next, characteristics of each structure will be described with reference to cross-sectional views of a plurality of transistors having different structures shown in FIG.

110101 is a single drain transistor and can be manufactured by a simple method.
There are advantages in that the manufacturing cost is low and the yield can be increased. Here, the semiconductor layer 11011
3 and 110115 have different impurity concentrations, the semiconductor layer 110113 is used as a channel region, and the semiconductor layer 110115 is used as a source region and a drain region. in this way,
The resistivity of the semiconductor layer can be controlled by controlling the amount of impurities. Semiconductor layer and conductive film 110
The electrical connection state with 123 can be brought close to ohmic connection. Note that as a method of separately forming semiconductor layers having different amounts of impurities, a method of doping impurities into the semiconductor layers using the gate electrode 110117 as a mask can be used.

A transistor 110102 has a taper angle of a certain level or more in the gate electrode 110117 and can be manufactured by a simple method, and thus has an advantage that the manufacturing cost is low and the yield is high. Here, the semiconductor layers 110113, 110114, and 110115 have different impurity concentrations, the semiconductor layer 110113 is a channel region, the semiconductor layer 110114 is a lightly doped drain (LDD) region, and the semiconductor layer 1101.
15 is used as a source region and a drain region. Thus, the resistivity of the semiconductor layer can be controlled by controlling the amount of impurities. The electrical connection state between the semiconductor layer and the conductive film 110123 can be made close to ohmic connection. Since the LDD region is included, a high electric field is hardly applied to the inside of the transistor, and deterioration of the element due to hot carriers can be suppressed. Note that as a method of separately forming semiconductor layers having different amounts of impurities, the gate electrode 1101 can be used.
A method of doping impurities into the semiconductor layer using 17 as a mask can be used. 11
In 0102, since the gate electrode 110117 has a taper angle of a certain level or more,
The concentration of the impurity doped into the semiconductor layer through the gate electrode 110117 can be given a gradient, and an LDD region can be easily formed.

110103 is a transistor in which the gate electrode 110117 is composed of at least two layers, and the lower gate electrode is longer than the upper gate electrode. In the present specification, the shapes of the upper gate electrode and the lower gate electrode are referred to as a hat shape. Gate electrode 110
Since the shape of 117 is a hat shape, an LDD region can be formed without adding a photomask. Note that, like 110103, the LDD region is the gate electrode 11.
The structure overlapping with 0117, especially the GOLD structure (Gate Overlapped)
LDD). The following method may be used as a method of making the shape of the gate electrode 110117 a hat shape.

First, when patterning the gate electrode 110117, the gate electrode in the lower layer and the gate electrode in the upper layer are etched by dry etching so that the side surfaces are inclined (tapered). Subsequently, the upper gate electrode is processed to be nearly vertical by anisotropic etching. As a result, a gate electrode having a hat-shaped cross section is formed. After that, the semiconductor layer 11011 used as the channel region is doped twice by doping the impurity element.
3. A semiconductor layer 110114 used as an LDD region and a semiconductor layer 110115 used as a source electrode and a drain electrode are formed.

Note that the LDD region overlapping the gate electrode 110117 is defined as the Lov region and the gate electrode 11.
An LDD region that does not overlap with 0117 will be referred to as a Loff region. Where Lof
The f region has a high effect of suppressing the off-current value, but has a low effect of relaxing the electric field near the drain and preventing the deterioration of the on-current value due to hot carriers. On the other hand, the Lov region relaxes the electric field near the drain and is effective in preventing deterioration of the on-current value, but has a low effect of suppressing the off-current value. Therefore, it is preferable to manufacture a transistor having a structure corresponding to a required characteristic for each of various circuits. For example, in the case where a semiconductor device is used as a display device, it is preferable to use a transistor having a Loff region as the pixel transistor in order to suppress an off-state current value.
On the other hand, as the transistor in the peripheral circuit, it is preferable to use a transistor having a Lov region in order to relax the electric field in the vicinity of the drain and prevent deterioration of the on-current value.

110104 is in contact with the side surface of the gate electrode 110117 and is connected to the side wall 110121.
A transistor having By having the side wall 110121, an area overlapping with the side wall 110121 can be an LDD area.

110105 performs LDD (Lof) by doping a semiconductor layer using a mask.
f) A transistor in which a region is formed. Thus, the LDD region can be formed reliably and the off-state current value of the transistor can be reduced.

110106 performs LDD (Lov) by doping a semiconductor layer using a mask.
) Transistor in which a region is formed. Thus, the LDD region can be formed reliably, the electric field in the vicinity of the drain of the transistor can be relaxed, and the deterioration of the on-current value can be reduced.

Next, an example of a method for manufacturing a transistor will be described with reference to FIGS.

Note that the structure and manufacturing method of the transistor are not limited to those illustrated in FIGS. 21A to 21C, and various structures and manufacturing methods can be used.

In this embodiment, the insulating film 1 is formed on the surface of the substrate 110111, on the surface of the insulating film 110112, on the surface of the semiconductor layer 110113, on the surface of 110114, and on the surface of 110115.
On the surface of 10116, on the surface of the insulating film 110118, or on the surface of the insulating film 110119,
By oxidizing or nitriding using plasma treatment, the semiconductor layer or the insulating film can be oxidized or nitrided. In this manner, the surface of the semiconductor layer or the insulating film is modified by oxidizing or nitriding the semiconductor layer or the insulating film using plasma treatment, and compared with an insulating film formed by a CVD method or a sputtering method. Since a denser insulating film can be formed, defects such as pinholes can be suppressed and the characteristics of the semiconductor device can be improved.

First, the surface of the substrate 110111 is cleaned using hydrofluoric acid (HF), alkali, or pure water.
As the substrate 110111, a glass substrate such as barium borosilicate glass or alumino borosilicate glass, a quartz substrate, a ceramic substrate, a metal substrate including stainless steel, or the like can be used. In addition, polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene naphthalate (PE
N), it is also possible to use a plastic substrate typified by polyethersulfone (PES) or a substrate made of flexible synthetic resin such as acrylic. Here, the substrate 11
A case where a glass substrate is used as 0111 is shown.

Here, an oxide film or a nitride film may be formed on the surface of the substrate 110111 by performing plasma treatment on the surface of the substrate 110111 to oxidize or nitride the surface of the substrate 110111 (FIG. 21B). . Hereinafter, an insulating film such as an oxide film or a nitride film formed by performing plasma treatment on the surface is also referred to as a plasma treatment insulating film. In FIG. 21B,
The insulating film 110131 is a plasma processing insulating film. In general, when a semiconductor element such as a thin film transistor is provided on a substrate such as glass or plastic, an impurity element such as alkali metal or alkaline earth metal such as Na contained in glass or plastic is mixed in the semiconductor element. Contamination may affect the characteristics of the semiconductor element. But,
By nitriding the surface of a substrate made of glass or plastic, N contained in the substrate
Impurity elements such as alkali metal or alkaline earth metal such as a can be prevented from entering the semiconductor element.

Note that when the surface is oxidized by plasma treatment, an oxygen atmosphere (eg, oxygen (O ₂
) And a rare gas (including at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe) atmosphere, oxygen and hydrogen (H ₂ ) and a rare gas atmosphere, or dinitrogen monoxide and a rare gas atmosphere. )
Plasma treatment is performed at On the other hand, when the semiconductor layer is nitrided by plasma treatment, in a nitrogen atmosphere (for example, nitrogen (N ₂ ) and a rare gas (including at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe) atmosphere, or Plasma treatment is performed in an atmosphere of nitrogen, hydrogen, and a rare gas, or NH ₃ and a rare gas. As the rare gas, for example, Ar can be used. Alternatively, a gas in which Ar and Kr are mixed may be used. Therefore, the plasma processing insulating film includes a rare gas (including at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe) used for the plasma processing. For example, when Ar is used, Ar is contained in the plasma processing insulating film.

In the plasma treatment, the electron density is 1 × 10 ¹¹ cm ⁻³ or more and 1 in the gas atmosphere.
× 10 ¹³ cm ⁻³ or less, and the plasma electron temperature is preferably 0.5 ev to 1.5 eV. Since the electron density of the plasma is high and the electron temperature in the vicinity of the object to be processed is low, damage to the object to be processed by the plasma can be prevented. Since the electron density of plasma is as high as 1 × 10 ¹¹ cm ⁻³ or higher, an oxide or a nitride film formed by oxidizing or nitriding an irradiation object using plasma treatment can be formed by CVD or sputtering. Compared with a film formed by a method or the like, a film having excellent uniformity in film thickness and the like and a dense film can be formed. Alternatively, since the electron temperature of plasma is as low as 1 eV or less, oxidation or nitridation can be performed at a lower temperature than conventional plasma treatment or thermal oxidation. For example, even if the plasma treatment is performed at a temperature that is 100 degrees or more lower than the strain point temperature of the glass substrate, the oxidation or nitridation treatment can be sufficiently performed. Note that a high frequency such as a microwave (2.45 GHz) can be used as a frequency for forming plasma. Note that the plasma treatment is performed using the above conditions unless otherwise specified.

Note that FIG. 21B illustrates the case where a plasma treatment insulating film is formed by performing plasma treatment on the surface of the substrate 110111; however, in this embodiment, the substrate 11011 is used.
This includes the case where a plasma processing insulating film is not formed on the surface of 1.

Note that in FIGS. 21C to 21G, a plasma treatment insulating film formed by performing plasma treatment on the surface of an object to be processed is not illustrated, but in this embodiment mode, the substrate 11 is not illustrated.
0111, insulating film 110112, semiconductor layers 110113, 110114, 110115,
This includes the case where a plasma treatment insulating film formed by performing plasma treatment exists on the surface of the insulating film 110116, the insulating film 110118, or the insulating film 110119.

Next, an insulating film 110112 is formed over the substrate 110111 by a known method (a sputtering method, an LPCVD method, a plasma CVD method, or the like) (FIG. 21C). As the insulating film 110112, silicon oxide (SiOx) or silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) (x> y) can be used.

Here, a plasma treatment insulating film may be formed on the surface of the insulating film 110112 by performing plasma treatment on the surface of the insulating film 110112 and oxidizing or nitriding the insulating film 110112. By oxidizing the surface of the insulating film 110112, the surface of the insulating film 110112 can be modified to obtain a dense film with few defects such as pinholes. By oxidizing the surface of the insulating film 110112, a plasma processing insulating film with a low N atom content can be formed. Therefore, when a semiconductor layer is provided in the plasma processing insulating film, the interface between the plasma processing insulating film and the semiconductor layer Improved characteristics. Note that the plasma treatment insulating film includes a rare gas (
Including at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe). Note that the plasma treatment can be similarly performed under the above-described conditions.

Next, island-shaped semiconductor layers 110113 and 110114 are formed over the insulating film 110112 (
FIG. 21 (D)). The island-shaped semiconductor layers 110113 and 110114 are formed on the insulating film 110112 by using a known method (sputtering method, LPCVD method, plasma CVD method, or the like) with silicon (S
An amorphous semiconductor layer is formed using a material having i) as a main component (for example, Si _x Ge _1-x or the like), the amorphous semiconductor layer is crystallized, and the semiconductor layer is selectively etched. Can be provided. The amorphous semiconductor layer is crystallized by a laser crystallization method, a thermal crystallization method using an RTA or a furnace annealing furnace, a thermal crystallization method using a metal element that promotes crystallization, or a combination of these methods. It can carry out by well-known crystallization methods, such as a method. Note that here, the end portion of the island-shaped semiconductor layer is provided in a shape close to a right angle (θ = 85 to 100 °). Alternatively, the semiconductor layer 110114 serving as a low-concentration drain region is doped with impurities using a mask.
It may be formed by pinging.

Here, the surface of the semiconductor layers 110113 and 110114 is subjected to plasma treatment, so that the semiconductor layer 1
By oxidizing or nitriding the surfaces of 10113 and 110114, the semiconductor layer 11011 is obtained.
3, a plasma treatment insulating film may be formed on the surface of 110114. For example, the semiconductor layer 11
When Si is used for 0113 and 110114, silicon oxide (SiOx) or silicon nitride (SiNx) is formed as the plasma processing insulating film. Alternatively, the semiconductor layers 110113 and 110114 may be oxidized by plasma treatment and then nitrided by performing plasma treatment again. In this case, silicon oxide (SiOx) is formed in contact with the semiconductor layers 110113 and 110114, and silicon nitride oxide (SiNxOy) (x>
y) is formed. Note that in the case of oxidizing the semiconductor layer by plasma treatment, in an oxygen atmosphere (for example, in an atmosphere of oxygen (O ₂ ) and a rare gas (including at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe), or Plasma treatment is performed in oxygen and hydrogen (H ₂ ) and a rare gas atmosphere or dinitrogen monoxide and a rare gas atmosphere. On the other hand, when the semiconductor layer is nitrided by plasma treatment, nitrogen (N ₂ ) and a rare gas (He, Ne, Ar, Kr, X
including at least one of e), nitrogen, hydrogen and rare gas atmosphere or NH
3 and a rare gas atmosphere). As the rare gas, for example, Ar can be used. Alternatively, a gas in which Ar and Kr are mixed may be used. Therefore, the plasma processing insulating film includes a rare gas (including at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe) used for the plasma processing. For example, when Ar is used, A is used for the plasma processing insulating film.
r is included.

Next, an insulating film 110116 is formed (FIG. 21E). The insulating film 110116 is formed using a known means (a sputtering method, an LPCVD method, a plasma CVD method, or the like) using silicon oxide (SiOx).
), Silicon nitride (SiNx), silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) (x> y), silicon nitride oxide (
A single-layer structure of an insulating film containing oxygen or nitrogen such as SiNxOy) (x> y) or a stacked structure thereof can be used. Note that in the case where a plasma treatment insulating film is formed on the surfaces of the semiconductor layers 110113 and 110114 by performing plasma treatment on the surfaces of the semiconductor layers 110113 and 110114, the plasma treatment insulating film can be used as the insulating film 110116. .

Here, the plasma treatment insulating film may be formed on the surface of the insulating film 110116 by performing plasma treatment on the surface of the insulating film 110116 and oxidizing or nitriding the surface of the insulating film 110116. Note that the plasma treatment insulating film is formed of a rare gas (He, Ne,
Including at least one of Ar, Kr, and Xe). Note that the plasma treatment can be similarly performed under the above-described conditions.

Alternatively, the insulating film 110116 may be oxidized by performing plasma treatment once in an oxygen atmosphere and then nitrided by performing plasma treatment again in a nitrogen atmosphere. In this manner, by performing plasma treatment on the insulating film 110116 and oxidizing or nitriding the surface of the insulating film 110116, the surface of the insulating film 110116 can be modified and a dense film can be formed. Since the insulating film obtained by performing the plasma treatment is denser and has fewer defects such as pinholes than an insulating film formed by a CVD method or a sputtering method, characteristics of the thin film transistor can be improved.

Next, the gate electrode 110117 is formed (FIG. 21F). The gate electrode 110117 can be formed using a known means (a sputtering method, an LPCVD method, a plasma CVD method, or the like).

In 110101, by performing impurity doping after forming the gate electrode 110117, the semiconductor layer 110115 used as a source region and a drain region can be formed.

In 110102, by performing impurity doping after forming the gate electrode 110117, a semiconductor layer 110115 used as an LDD region and a semiconductor layer 110115 used as a semiconductor layer source region and a drain region can be formed.

In 110103, by performing impurity doping after forming the gate electrode 110117, a semiconductor layer 110115 used as an LDD region and a semiconductor layer 110115 used as a semiconductor layer source region and a drain region can be formed.

In 110104, a side wall 110121 is formed on the side surface of the gate electrode 110117.
110114 is used as an LDD region by performing impurity doping.
The semiconductor layer 110115 used as the semiconductor layer source region and the drain region can be formed.

The side wall 110121 is made of silicon oxide (SiOx) or silicon nitride (SiNx).
Can be used. As a method of forming the side wall 110121 on the side surface of the gate electrode 110117, for example, after forming the gate electrode 110117, silicon oxide (
A method of etching a silicon oxide (SiOx) or silicon nitride (SiNx) film by anisotropic etching after forming a film of SiOx) or silicon nitride (SiNx) by a known method can be used. Thus, silicon oxide (SiO 2) is formed only on the side surface of the gate electrode 110117.
x) or a silicon nitride (SiNx) film can be left, so that the side wall 110121 can be formed on the side surface of the gate electrode 110117.

In 110105, a mask 110122 is formed so as to cover the gate electrode 110117, and then impurity doping is performed, so that it is used as an LDD (Loff) region 11.
A semiconductor layer 110115 used as a semiconductor layer source region and a drain region can be formed.

In 110106, by performing impurity doping after forming the gate electrode 110117, 110114 used as an LDD (Lov) region and a semiconductor layer 110115 used as a semiconductor layer source region and drain region can be formed. .

Next, an insulating film 110118 is formed (FIG. 21G). The insulating film 110118 is formed of silicon oxide (SiOx) or silicon nitride (S) by a known means (such as sputtering or plasma CVD).
iNx), silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) (x> y), silicon nitride oxide (SiNxOy) (
It can be provided with a single layer structure of an insulating film containing oxygen or nitrogen such as x> y) or a film containing carbon such as DLC (diamond like carbon), or a laminated structure thereof.

Here, a plasma treatment insulating film may be formed on the surface of the insulating film 110118 by performing plasma treatment on the surface of the insulating film 110118 and oxidizing or nitriding the surface of the insulating film 110118. Note that the plasma treatment insulating film is formed of a rare gas (He, Ne,
Including at least one of Ar, Kr, and Xe). Note that the plasma treatment can be similarly performed under the above-described conditions.

Next, an insulating film 110119 is formed. The insulating film 110119 is formed by a known means (sputtering method, plasma CVD method, or the like) using silicon oxide (SiOx), silicon nitride (SiNx), silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) (x> y), silicon nitride oxide (SiNxOy) ( In addition to insulating films containing oxygen or nitrogen such as x> y) and films containing carbon such as DLC (Diamond Like Carbon), epoxy, polyimide, polyamide, polyvinyl phenol, benzocyclobutene In addition, a single layer structure of an organic material such as acrylic or a siloxane resin, or a laminated structure thereof can be used. Note that a siloxane resin corresponds to a resin including a Si—O—Si bond. Siloxane has a skeleton structure formed of a bond of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O). As a substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (for example, an alkyl group or an aromatic hydrocarbon) is used. A fluoro group can also be used as a substituent. Alternatively, an organic group containing at least hydrogen and a fluoro group may be used as a substituent. Note that the plasma processing insulating film contains a rare gas (including at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe) used for the plasma processing. For example, when Ar is used, the plasma processing insulating film is used. Ar is contained in the film.

In the case where an organic material such as polyimide, polyamide, polyvinyl phenol, benzocyclobutene, or acrylic, or a siloxane resin is used as the insulating film 110119, the insulating film 110119 is used.
The surface of the insulating film can be modified by oxidizing or nitriding the surface of the insulating film by plasma treatment. By modifying the surface, the strength of the insulating film 110119 is improved, and it is possible to reduce physical damage such as generation of cracks at the time of opening formation or the like and film reduction at the time of etching. The surface of the insulating film 110119 is modified, so that the insulating film 110
When the conductive film 110123 is formed over 119, adhesion with the conductive film is improved. For example,
In the case where siloxane resin is used as the insulating film 110119 and nitridation is performed using plasma treatment, the surface of the siloxane resin is nitrided, so that a plasma-treated insulating film containing nitrogen or a rare gas is formed, and physical strength is improved. .

Next, in order to form the conductive film 110123 electrically connected to the semiconductor layer 110115,
Contact holes are formed in the insulating film 110119, the insulating film 110118, and the insulating film 110116. The contact hole may be tapered. Thus, the coverage of the conductive film 110123 can be improved.

FIG. 25 illustrates a cross-sectional structure of a bottom-gate transistor and a cross-sectional structure of a capacitor.

A first insulating film (insulating film 110502) is formed over the entire surface of the substrate 110501. The first insulating film has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate side from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the characteristics of the transistor. That is, the first insulating film functions as a base film. Therefore, a highly reliable transistor can be manufactured. Note that as the first insulating film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy) is used.
) Or a stack of these layers can be used.

A first conductive layer (a conductive layer 110503 and a conductive layer 110504) is formed over the first insulating film. The conductive layer 110503 includes a portion functioning as the gate electrode of the transistor 110520. The conductive layer 110504 includes a portion functioning as the first electrode of the capacitor 110521. The first conductive layer includes Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, N
d, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, NA-Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, Ge, or an alloy thereof can be used. Alternatively, a stack of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

A second insulating film (insulating film 110504) is formed so as to cover at least the first conductive layer. The second insulating film functions as a gate insulating film. Note that as the second insulating film, a single layer such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy), or a stacked layer thereof can be used.

Note that a silicon oxide film is preferably used as the second insulating film in contact with the semiconductor layer. This is because the trap level at the interface between the semiconductor layer and the second insulating film is reduced.

Note that in the case where the second insulating film is in contact with Mo, it is preferable to use a silicon oxide film as the second insulating film in a portion in contact with Mo. This is because the silicon oxide film does not oxidize Mo.

A semiconductor layer is formed by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like on a part of the second insulating film which is formed so as to overlap with the first conductive layer. A part of the semiconductor layer is extended to a portion of the second insulating film that is not formed so as to overlap the first conductive layer. The semiconductor layer includes a channel formation region (a channel formation region 1105
10), an LDD region (LDD region 110508, LDD region 110509), and an impurity region (impurity region 110505, impurity region 110506, impurity region 110507). The channel formation region 110510 functions as a channel formation region of the transistor 110520. The LDD region 110508 and the LDD region 110509 function as an LDD region of the transistor 110520. Note that the LDD region 110508 and the LDD region 110509 are not necessarily required. The impurity region 110505 is formed in the transistor 11
0520 includes a portion functioning as one of a source electrode and a drain electrode. Impurity region 1
50506 includes a portion functioning as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 110520. The impurity region 110507 includes a portion functioning as the second electrode of the capacitor 110521.

A third insulating film (insulating film 110511) is formed on the entire surface. A contact hole is selectively formed in a part of the third insulating film. The insulating film 110511 has a function as an interlayer film. As the third insulating film, an inorganic material (silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon oxynitride, or the like), a low dielectric constant organic compound material (photosensitive or non-photosensitive organic resin material), or the like can be used. Alternatively, a material containing siloxane can be used. Siloxane is a material in which a skeleton structure is formed by a bond of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O). As a substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (for example, an alkyl group or an aromatic hydrocarbon) is used. Alternatively, a fluoro group may be used as a substituent. Alternatively, an organic group containing at least hydrogen and a fluoro group may be used as a substituent.

A second conductive layer (a conductive layer 110512 and a conductive layer 110513) is formed over the third insulating film. The conductive layer 110512 is connected to the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 110520 through a contact hole formed in the third insulating film. Therefore, the conductive layer 110512 includes a portion functioning as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 110520. The conductive layer 110513 includes a portion functioning as the first electrode of the capacitor 110521. As the second conductive layer, Ti, Mo, Ta
, Cr, W, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, NA-Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, G
e or an alloy thereof can be used. Alternatively, a stack of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

Note that as a step after the second conductive layer is formed, various insulating films or various conductive films may be formed.

The structure of the transistor and the capacitor in the case where an amorphous silicon (a-Si: H) film is used for the semiconductor layer of the transistor will be described.

FIG. 22 shows a cross-sectional structure of a top gate transistor and a cross-sectional structure of a capacitor.

A first insulating film (insulating film 110202) is formed over the entire surface of the substrate 110201. The first insulating film has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate side from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the characteristics of the transistor. That is, the first insulating film functions as a base film. Therefore, a highly reliable transistor can be manufactured. Note that as the first insulating film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy) is used.
) Or a stack of these layers can be used.

Note that the first insulating film is not necessarily formed. In this case, the number of processes can be reduced. The manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure can be simplified, the yield can be improved.

A first conductive layer (a conductive layer 110203, a conductive layer 110204, and a conductive layer 110205) is formed over the first insulating film. The conductive layer 110203 includes a portion functioning as one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 110220. Conductive layer 11020
4 includes a portion functioning as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 110220. The conductive layer 110205 includes a portion functioning as the first electrode of the capacitor 110221. The first conductive layer includes Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, N
d, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, NA-Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, Ge, or an alloy thereof can be used. Alternatively, a stack of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

A first semiconductor layer (semiconductor layer 110) is formed over the conductive layer 110203 and the conductive layer 110204.
206 and semiconductor layer 110207). The semiconductor layer 110206 includes a portion that functions as one of a source electrode and a drain electrode. The semiconductor layer 110207 includes
A portion functioning as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode is included. Note that as the first semiconductor layer, silicon containing phosphorus or the like can be used.

The second layer is formed between the conductive layer 110203 and the conductive layer 110204 and over the first insulating film.
The semiconductor layer (semiconductor layer 110208) is formed. Then, the semiconductor layer 110208
Is extended to the top of the conductive layer 110203 and the conductive layer 110204. The semiconductor layer 110208 includes a portion functioning as a channel region of the transistor 110220. Note that as the second semiconductor layer, an amorphous semiconductor layer such as amorphous silicon (a-Si: H) or a semiconductor layer such as a microcrystalline semiconductor (μ-Si: H) can be used. .

In order to cover at least the semiconductor layer 110208 and the conductive layer 110205, the second insulating film (
An insulating film 110209 and an insulating film 110210) are formed. The second insulating film is a gate
A function as an insulating film. Note that as the second insulating film, a single layer such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy), or a stacked layer thereof can be used.

Note that a silicon oxide film is preferably used as the second insulating film in contact with the second semiconductor layer. This is because the trap level at the interface between the second semiconductor layer and the second insulating film is reduced.

Note that in the case where the second insulating film is in contact with Mo, it is preferable to use a silicon oxide film as the second insulating film in a portion in contact with Mo. This is because the silicon oxide film does not oxidize Mo.

A second conductive layer (a conductive layer 110211 and a conductive layer 110212) is formed over the second insulating film. The conductive layer 110211 includes a portion functioning as a gate electrode of the transistor 110220. The conductive layer 110212 functions as the second electrode or the wiring of the capacitor 110221. As the second conductive layer, Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, A
l, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, NA-Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, Ge, or an alloy thereof can be used. Alternatively, a stack of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

Note that as a step after the second conductive layer is formed, various insulating films or various conductive films may be formed.

FIG. 23 shows a cross-sectional structure of an inverted staggered (bottom gate) transistor and a cross-sectional structure of a capacitor. In particular, the transistor illustrated in FIG. 23 has a structure called a channel etch type.

A first insulating film (insulating film 110302) is formed over the entire surface of the substrate 110301. The first insulating film has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate side from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the characteristics of the transistor. That is, the first insulating film functions as a base film. Therefore, a highly reliable transistor can be manufactured. Note that as the first insulating film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy) is used.
) Or a stack of these layers can be used.

Note that the first insulating film is not necessarily formed. In this case, the number of processes can be reduced. The manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure can be simplified, the yield can be improved.

A first conductive layer (a conductive layer 110303 and a conductive layer 110304) is formed over the first insulating film. The conductive layer 110303 includes a portion functioning as a gate electrode of the transistor 110320. The conductive layer 110304 includes a portion functioning as the first electrode of the capacitor 110321. As the first conductive layer, Ti, Mo, TB, Cr, W, Bl, N
d, Cu, Bg, Bu, Pt, NA-Si, Zn, Fe, BB, Ge, or an alloy thereof can be used. Alternatively, a stack of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

A second insulating film (insulating film 110302) is formed so as to cover at least the first conductive layer. The second insulating film functions as a gate insulating film. Note that as the second insulating film, a single layer such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy), or a stacked layer thereof can be used.

Note that a silicon oxide film is preferably used as the second insulating film in contact with the semiconductor layer. This is because the trap level at the interface between the semiconductor layer and the second insulating film is reduced.

Note that in the case where the second insulating film is in contact with Mo, it is preferable to use a silicon oxide film as the second insulating film in a portion in contact with Mo. This is because the silicon oxide film does not oxidize Mo.

The first semiconductor layer (semiconductor layer 11) is formed on a part of the second insulating film which is formed so as to overlap with the first conductive layer by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like.
0306) is formed. A part of the semiconductor layer 110308 is extended to a portion of the second insulating film that is not formed so as to overlap with the first conductive layer. Semiconductor layer 11
0306 includes a portion functioning as a channel region of the transistor 110320. Note that as the semiconductor layer 110306, an amorphous semiconductor layer such as amorphous silicon (A-Si: H) or a semiconductor layer such as a microcrystalline semiconductor (μ-Si: H) can be used.

The second semiconductor layer (semiconductor layer 110307 and semiconductor layer 110 is formed over part of the first semiconductor layer.
307) is formed. The semiconductor layer 110307 includes a portion that functions as one of a source electrode and a drain electrode. The semiconductor layer 110308 includes a portion that functions as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode. Note that as the second conductor layer, silicon containing phosphorus or the like can be used.

A second conductive layer (a conductive layer 110309, a conductive layer 1) is formed over the second semiconductor layer and the second insulating film.
10310 and a conductive layer 110311). The conductive layer 110309 includes a portion functioning as one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 110320. The conductive layer 110310 includes a portion functioning as the other of the source and the drain electrode of the transistor 110320. The conductive layer 110312 includes a portion functioning as the second electrode of the capacitor 110321. As the second conductive layer, Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, N
d, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, NA-Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, Ge, or an alloy thereof can be used. Alternatively, a stack of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

Note that as a step after the second conductive layer is formed, various insulating films or various conductive films may be formed.

Here, an example of a process characterized by a channel etch transistor will be described. The first semiconductor layer and the second semiconductor layer can be formed using the same mask. In particular,
The first semiconductor layer and the second semiconductor layer are continuously formed. The first semiconductor layer and the second semiconductor layer are formed using the same mask.

Another example of a process characterized by a channel etch transistor will be described. The channel region of the transistor can be formed without using a new mask. In particular,
After the second conductive layer is formed, part of the second semiconductor layer is removed using the second conductive layer as a mask. Alternatively, part of the second semiconductor layer is removed using the same mask as the second conductive layer. Then, the first semiconductor layer formed under the removed second semiconductor layer becomes a channel region of the transistor.

FIG. 24 shows a cross-sectional structure of an inverted staggered (bottom gate) transistor and a cross-sectional structure of a capacitor. In particular, the transistor illustrated in FIG. 24 has a structure called a channel protection type (channel stop type).

A first insulating film (insulating film 110402) is formed over the entire surface of the substrate 110401. The first insulating film has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate side from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the characteristics of the transistor. That is, the first insulating film functions as a base film. Therefore, a highly reliable transistor can be manufactured. Note that as the first insulating film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy) is used.
) Or a stack of these layers can be used.

Note that the first insulating film is not necessarily formed. In this case, the number of processes can be reduced. The manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure can be simplified, the yield can be improved.

A first conductive layer (a conductive layer 110403 and a conductive layer 110404) is formed over the first insulating film. The conductive layer 110403 includes a portion functioning as a gate electrode of the transistor 110420. The conductive layer 110404 includes a portion functioning as the first electrode of the capacitor 110421. As the first conductive layer, Ti, Mo, TC, Cr, W, Cl, N
d, Cu, Cg, Cu, Pt, NC, Si, Zn, Fe, CC, Ge, or an alloy thereof can be used. Alternatively, a stack of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

A second insulating film (insulating film 110402) is formed so as to cover at least the first conductive layer. The second insulating film functions as a gate insulating film. Note that as the second insulating film, a single layer such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy), or a stacked layer thereof can be used.

Note that a silicon oxide film is preferably used as the second insulating film in contact with the semiconductor layer. This is because the trap level at the interface between the semiconductor layer and the second insulating film is reduced.

Note that in the case where the second insulating film is in contact with Mo, it is preferable to use a silicon oxide film as the second insulating film in a portion in contact with Mo. This is because the silicon oxide film does not oxidize Mo.

The first semiconductor layer (semiconductor layer 11) is formed on a part of the second insulating film which is formed so as to overlap with the first conductive layer by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like.
0406) is formed. A part of the semiconductor layer 110408 is extended to a portion of the second insulating film which is not formed so as to overlap with the first conductive layer. Semiconductor layer 11
0406 includes a portion functioning as a channel region of the transistor 110420. Note that as the semiconductor layer 110406, an amorphous semiconductor layer such as amorphous silicon (C—Si: H) or a semiconductor layer such as a microcrystalline semiconductor (μ-Si: H) can be used.

A third insulating film (insulating film 110412) is formed over part of the first semiconductor layer. The insulating film 110412 has a function of preventing the channel region of the transistor 110420 from being removed by etching. That is, the insulating film 110412 functions as a channel protective film (channel stop film). Note that as the third insulating film, a single layer such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy), or a stacked layer thereof can be used.

A second semiconductor layer (semiconductor layer 110) is formed on a part of the first semiconductor layer and a part of the third insulating film.
407 and semiconductor layer 110408). The semiconductor layer 110407 includes a portion that functions as one of a source electrode and a drain electrode. The semiconductor layer 110408 includes:
A portion functioning as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode is included. Note that as the second conductor layer, silicon containing phosphorus or the like can be used.

A second conductive layer (a conductive layer 110409, a conductive layer 110410, and a conductive layer 110411) is formed over the second semiconductor layer. The conductive layer 110409 includes the transistor 110420.
A portion functioning as one of the source electrode and the drain electrode. The conductive layer 110410 includes
A portion functioning as the other of the source and the drain electrode of the transistor 110420 is included. The conductive layer 110411 includes a portion functioning as the second electrode of the capacitor 110421. As the second conductive layer, Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, A
u, Pt, NC, Si, Zn, Fe, Ca, Ge, or an alloy thereof can be used. Alternatively, a stack of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

Note that as a step after the second conductive layer is formed, various insulating films or various conductive films may be formed.

Here, an example of a process characterized by a channel protection transistor will be described. The first semiconductor layer, the second semiconductor layer, and the second conductive layer can be formed using the same mask.
At the same time, a channel region can be formed. Specifically, the first semiconductor layer is formed,
Next, a third insulating film (a channel protective film and a channel stop film) is formed using a mask, and then a second semiconductor layer and a second conductive layer are successively formed. Then, after the second conductive layer is formed, the first semiconductor layer, the second semiconductor layer, and the second conductive layer are formed using the same mask. However, since the first semiconductor layer below the third insulating film is protected by the third insulating film, it is not removed by etching. This portion (the third of the first semiconductor layer
The portion where the insulating film is formed becomes a channel region.

Next, an example in which a semiconductor substrate is used as a substrate for manufacturing a transistor will be described. Since a transistor manufactured using a semiconductor substrate has high mobility, the transistor size can be reduced. As a result, increase the number of transistors per unit area (
In the same circuit configuration, the larger the degree of integration, the smaller the substrate size, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, since the circuit scale can be increased as the degree of integration increases with the same substrate size, the manufacturing cost remains substantially the same and higher functions can be provided. In addition, since the variation in characteristics is small, the manufacturing yield can be increased. Furthermore, since the operating voltage is low, power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, high mobility is possible due to high mobility.

A circuit formed by integrating transistors manufactured using a semiconductor substrate is mounted on a device in the form of an IC chip or the like, so that the device can have various functions. For example, peripheral drive circuits (data drivers (source drivers), scan drivers (gate drivers), timing controllers, image processing circuits, interface circuits, power supply circuits, oscillation circuits, etc.) of display devices are manufactured using a semiconductor substrate. By integrating transistors, a peripheral driver circuit that is small in size, low in power consumption, and capable of high-speed operation can be manufactured at low cost and high yield. Note that a circuit formed by integrating transistors manufactured using a semiconductor substrate may have a single polarity transistor. By doing so, the manufacturing process can be simplified, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Other circuits that are configured by integrating transistors manufactured using a semiconductor substrate include:
For example, it can be used for a display panel. More specifically, LCOS (Liquid
It can be used for reflective liquid crystal panels such as Crystal On Silicon, DMD (Digital Micromirror Device) elements in which micromirrors are integrated, EL panels, and the like. By manufacturing these display panels using a semiconductor substrate, a display panel that is small in size, low in power consumption, and capable of high speed operation can be manufactured at low cost and high yield. Note that the display panel includes a display panel formed on an element having a function other than driving of the display panel, such as a large scale integrated circuit (LSI).

A method for manufacturing a transistor using a semiconductor substrate will be described below.

First, regions 110604 and 110606 (hereinafter also referred to as regions 110604 and 110606) in which elements are separated are formed in the semiconductor substrate 110600 (see FIG. 26A). The regions 110604 and 110606 provided in the semiconductor substrate 110600 are respectively formed on the insulating film 11.
0602 (also referred to as a field oxide film). Here, a single crystal Si substrate having n-type conductivity is used as the semiconductor substrate 110600, and the semiconductor substrate 11060 is used.
An example in which a p-well 110607 is provided in a zero region 110606 is shown.

The semiconductor substrate 110600 can be used without particular limitation as long as it is a semiconductor substrate. For example, a single crystal Si substrate having an n-type or p-type conductivity, a compound semiconductor substrate (GaAs substrate, InP substrate, GaN substrate, SiC substrate, sapphire substrate, ZnSe substrate, etc.), bonding method or SIMOX (Separation by Implanted) Oxyge
n) An SOI (Silicon on Insulator) substrate manufactured by the method can be used.

The regions 110604 and 110606 are formed by a selective oxidation method (LOCOS (Local Oxida).
or the trench isolation method can be used as appropriate.

The p-well formed in the region 110606 of the semiconductor substrate 110600 is the semiconductor substrate 110600.
It can be formed by selectively introducing an impurity element having p-type conductivity into 600. As the p-type impurity element, boron (B), aluminum (Al), gallium (Ga), or the like can be used.

Note that in this embodiment, since a semiconductor substrate having n-type conductivity is used as the semiconductor substrate 110600, no impurity element is introduced into the region 110604, but an impurity element exhibiting n-type is introduced. Thus, an n-well may be formed in the region 110604. As the impurity element exhibiting n-type, phosphorus (P), arsenic (As), or the like can be used. On the other hand, p
In the case of using a semiconductor substrate having a type conductivity type, an n-type impurity element may be introduced into the region 110604 to form an n-well, and the impurity element may not be introduced into the region 110606.

Next, insulating films 110632 and 110634 are formed so as to cover the regions 110604 and 110606.
(See FIG. 26B).

For example, the insulating films 110632 and 110634 can be formed using silicon oxide films by oxidizing the surfaces of the regions 110604 and 110606 provided in the semiconductor substrate 110600 by performing heat treatment. After a silicon oxide film is formed by a thermal oxidation method, the surface of the silicon oxide film is nitrided by performing a nitriding process, thereby forming a stacked structure of a silicon oxide film and a film containing oxygen and nitrogen (silicon oxynitride film). It may be formed.

In addition, as described above, the insulating films 110632 and 110634 may be formed by plasma treatment. For example, the regions 110604 and 110 provided in the semiconductor substrate 110600
By performing oxidation treatment or nitridation treatment on the surface of 606 by high-density plasma treatment, silicon oxide (SiOx) film or silicon nitride (SiNx) is formed as the insulating films 110632 and 110634.
It can be formed of a film. As another example, region 110604 by high density plasma treatment,
After performing oxidation treatment on the surface of 110606, nitriding treatment may be performed by performing high density plasma treatment again. In this case, a silicon oxide film is formed in contact with the surfaces of the regions 110604 and 110606, a (silicon oxynitride film) is formed over the silicon oxide film, and the insulating film 1106
32 and 110634 are films in which a silicon oxide film and a silicon oxynitride film are stacked. As another example, a silicon oxide film may be formed on the surface of the regions 110604 and 110606 by a thermal oxidation method, and then oxidation treatment or nitridation treatment may be performed by high-density plasma treatment.

Insulating film 1106 formed in regions 110604 and 110606 of semiconductor substrate 110600
32 and 110634 function as a gate insulating film in a transistor to be completed later.

Next, the insulating films 110632 and 110634 formed in the regions 110604 and 110606 are formed.
A conductive film is formed so as to cover (see FIG. 26C). Here, an example is shown in which a conductive film 110636 and a conductive film 110638 are sequentially stacked as the conductive film. of course,
The conductive film may be formed with a single layer or a stacked structure of three or more layers.

As the conductive films 110636 and 110638, tantalum (Ta), tungsten (W),
Titanium (Ti), Molybdenum (Mo), Aluminum (Al), Copper (Cu), Chromium (C
r), niobium (Nb), or the like, or an alloy material or a compound material containing these elements as a main component. Alternatively, a metal nitride film obtained by nitriding these elements can be used. In addition, a semiconductor material typified by polycrystalline silicon doped with an impurity element such as phosphorus, silicide introduced with a metal material, or the like can be used.

Here, tantalum nitride is used as the conductive film 110636, and the conductive film 110638 is used.
As a laminated structure using tungsten. In addition, as the conductive film 110636, a single layer or a stacked film selected from tungsten nitride, molybdenum nitride, or titanium nitride can be used. As the conductive film 110638, a single layer or a stacked film selected from tantalum, molybdenum, and titanium can be used.

Next, the conductive films 110636 and 110638 provided in a stacked manner are selectively etched and removed, whereby the conductive films 110636 and 110606 are partially formed in the regions 110604 and 110606.
110638 is left to form gate electrodes 110640 and 110642, respectively (
(See FIG. 27A).

Next, a resist mask 110648 is selectively formed so as to cover the region 110604, and the region 11060 is formed using the resist mask 110648 and the gate electrode 110642 as a mask.
Impurity region 110652 is formed by introducing an impurity element into 6 (FIG. 27B
)reference). As the impurity element, an impurity element imparting n-type conductivity or an impurity element imparting p-type conductivity is used. As the impurity element exhibiting n-type, phosphorus (P), arsenic (As), or the like can be used. As the p-type impurity element, boron (B), aluminum (Al), gallium (Ga), or the like can be used. Here, phosphorus (P) is used as the impurity element. Note that after the impurity element is introduced, heat treatment may be performed to diffuse the impurity element and repair the crystal structure.

In FIG. 27B, an impurity region 110605 and a channel formation region 1106 which form a source region or a drain region in the region 110606 by introducing an impurity element.
50 is formed.

Next, a resist mask 110666 is selectively formed so as to cover the region 110606, and the region 11060 is formed using the resist mask 110666 and the gate electrode 110640 as masks.
Impurity region 110670 is formed by introducing an impurity element into 4 (FIG. 27C
)reference). As the impurity element, an impurity element imparting n-type conductivity or an impurity element imparting p-type conductivity is used. As the impurity element exhibiting n-type, phosphorus (P), arsenic (As), or the like can be used. As the p-type impurity element, boron (B), aluminum (Al), gallium (Ga), or the like can be used. Here, an impurity element (eg, boron (B)) having a conductivity type different from that of the impurity element introduced into the region 110606 in FIG. 27C is introduced. As a result, the impurity region 1 forming a source region or a drain region in the region 110604
10670 and a channel formation region 110668 are formed. After introducing the impurity element,
Heat treatment may be performed to diffuse the impurity element and repair the crystal structure.

Next, a second insulating film 110672 is formed so as to cover the insulating films 110632 and 110634 and the gate electrodes 110640 and 110642. Further, areas 110604 and 11060
6 is formed with a wiring 11067 which is electrically connected to the impurity regions 110652 and 110670 respectively formed (see FIG. 27D).

The second insulating film 110672 is formed using silicon oxide (SiOx), CVD, sputtering, or the like.
Silicon nitride (SiNx), silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) (x> y), silicon nitride oxide (Si
NxOy) (x> y) or other insulating film having oxygen or nitrogen, carbon containing film such as DLC (diamond-like carbon), organic material such as epoxy, polyimide, polyamide, polyvinylphenol, benzocyclobutene, acrylic, or siloxane It can be provided in a single layer or laminated structure made of a siloxane material such as a resin. The siloxane material is Si
It corresponds to a material containing a —O—Si bond. Siloxane has a skeleton structure formed of a bond of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O). As a substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (for example, an alkyl group or an aromatic hydrocarbon) is used. A fluoro group can also be used as a substituent. Alternatively, an organic group containing at least hydrogen and a fluoro group may be used as a substituent.

The wiring 11067 is formed of aluminum (Al), tungsten (W), titanium (Ti), tantalum (Ta), molybdenum (Mo), nickel (Ni), platinum (Pt), copper (Cu) by CVD or sputtering. ), Gold (Au), silver (Ag), manganese (Mn), neodymium (Nd), carbon (C), silicon (Si), or an alloy material or compound containing these elements as a main component The material is a single layer or a laminate. The alloy material containing aluminum as a main component corresponds to, for example, a material containing aluminum as a main component and containing nickel, or an alloy material containing aluminum as a main component and containing nickel and one or both of carbon and silicon. The wiring 11067 includes, for example, a barrier film and aluminum silicon (A
It is preferable to adopt a laminated structure of (l-Si) film and barrier film, and a laminated structure of barrier film, aluminum silicon (Al-Si) film, titanium nitride film, and barrier film. The barrier film is titanium,
It corresponds to a thin film made of titanium nitride, molybdenum, or molybdenum nitride. Aluminum and aluminum silicon are suitable as a material for forming the wiring 110684 because they have low resistance values and are inexpensive. For example, when an upper barrier layer and a lower barrier layer are provided, generation of hillocks of aluminum or aluminum silicon can be prevented. For example, when a barrier film made of titanium, which is a highly reducing element, is formed, even if a thin natural oxide film is formed on the crystalline semiconductor film, the natural oxide film is reduced. As a result, the wiring 11067 can be electrically and physically well connected to the crystalline semiconductor film.

Note that the structure of the transistor is not limited to the illustrated structure. For example, a transistor structure such as an inverted stagger structure or a fin FET structure can be employed. The fin FET structure is preferable because the short channel effect accompanying the miniaturization of the transistor size can be suppressed.

Next, another example using a semiconductor substrate as a substrate for manufacturing a transistor will be described.

First, an insulating film is formed over the substrate 110800. Here, single crystal S having n-type conductivity is used.
i is used as the substrate 110800, and the insulating film 110802 and the insulating film 110804 are formed over the substrate 110800 (see FIG. 28A). For example, heat treatment is performed on the substrate 110800 to form silicon oxide (SiOx) as the insulating film 110802. In addition, CV
A silicon nitride (SiNx) film is formed using the D method or the like.

The substrate 110800 can be used without any particular limitation as long as it is a semiconductor substrate. For example,
n-type or p-type single crystal Si substrate, compound semiconductor substrate (GaAs substrate, In
A P substrate, a GaN substrate, a SiC substrate, a sapphire substrate, a ZnSe substrate, or the like), an SOI (Silicon on Insulator) substrate manufactured using a bonding method or a SIMOX (Separation by IMplanted Oxygen) method, or the like can be used.

The insulating film 110804 may be provided by nitriding the insulating film 110802 by high-density plasma treatment after the insulating film 110802 is formed. Note that the insulating film may have a single layer structure or a stacked structure including three or more layers.

Next, a pattern of a resist mask 110806 is selectively formed, and the resist mask 1
By selectively performing etching using 10806 as a mask, a recess 110808 is selectively formed in the substrate 110800 (see FIG. 28B). Etching of the substrate 110800 and the insulating films 110802 and 110804 can be performed by dry etching using plasma.

Next, after removing the pattern of the resist mask 110806, an insulating film 110810 is formed so as to fill the depression 110808 formed in the substrate 110800 (see FIG. 28C).

The insulating film 110810 is formed using silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) (x>y> 0), silicon nitride oxide (SiN) by a CVD method, a sputtering method, or the like.
xOy) (x>y> 0) or the like. Here, the insulating film 110810
As described above, a silicon oxide film is formed using TEOS (tetraethylorthosilicate) gas by an atmospheric pressure CVD method or a low pressure CVD method.

Next, grinding treatment, polishing treatment or CMP (Chemical Mechanical Po)
The surface of the substrate 110800 is exposed by performing a (listening) process. Then, the surface of the substrate 110800 is divided by the insulating film 110810 formed in the recess 110808 of the substrate 110800. Here, the divided areas are referred to as areas 110812 and 11081, respectively. Note that the insulating film 110811 is obtained by removing part of the insulating film 110810 by grinding, polishing, or CMP.

Subsequently, by selectively introducing an impurity element having p-type conductivity, the substrate 110
A p-well 110815 is formed in the 800 region 11081. As the p-type impurity element, boron (B), aluminum (Al), gallium (Ga), or the like can be used. Here, boron (B) is introduced into the region 110813 as the impurity element. In addition,
After introducing the impurity element, heat treatment may be performed to diffuse the impurity element and repair the crystal structure.

Note that in the case where a semiconductor substrate having n-type conductivity is used as the substrate 110800, the region 11
Although no impurity element is introduced into 0812, an n-well may be formed in the region 110812 by introducing an impurity element exhibiting n-type conductivity. As the impurity element exhibiting n-type, phosphorus (P), arsenic (As), or the like can be used.

On the other hand, in the case where a semiconductor substrate having p-type conductivity is used, an n-type impurity element is introduced into the region 110812 to form an n-well, and no impurity element is introduced into the regions 110812 and 110813. It is good.

Next, an insulating film 110832 is formed on the surfaces of the regions 110812 and 11081 of the substrate 110800.
110834 are formed (see FIG. 29B).

The insulating films 110832 and 110834 can be formed using silicon oxide films by oxidizing the surfaces of the regions 110812 and 110813 provided in the substrate 110800 by performing heat treatment, for example. Alternatively, after a silicon oxide film is formed by a thermal oxidation method, the surface of the silicon oxide film is nitrided by performing nitriding treatment, so that a silicon oxide film and a film containing oxygen and nitrogen (silicon oxynitride film) are stacked. You may form with a structure.

In addition, as described above, the insulating films 110832 and 110834 may be formed by plasma treatment. For example, regions 110812 and 11081 provided in the substrate 110800
By performing oxidation treatment or nitridation treatment on the surface of the substrate by high-density plasma treatment, the insulating film 11
As 0832 and 110834, a silicon oxide (SiOx) film or a silicon nitride (SiNx) film can be formed. As another example, the regions 110812, 11 are formed by high-density plasma treatment.
After performing the oxidation treatment on the surface of 0813, the nitriding treatment may be performed by performing high density plasma treatment again. In this case, a silicon oxide film is formed in contact with the surfaces of the regions 110812 and 11081, a (silicon oxynitride film) is formed over the silicon oxide film, and the insulating film 11083
2 and 11034 are films in which a silicon oxide film and a silicon oxynitride film are stacked. As another example,
After silicon oxide films are formed on the surfaces of the regions 110812 and 11081 by a thermal oxidation method, oxidation treatment or nitridation treatment may be performed by high-density plasma treatment.

Note that the insulating film 1108 formed in the regions 110812 and 11081 of the substrate 110800
32 and 11034 function as gate insulating films in transistors to be completed later.

Next, a conductive film is formed so as to cover the insulating films 110832 and 110834 formed in the regions 110812 and 11083 provided in the substrate 110800 (see FIG. 29C). Here, an example is shown in which a conductive film 110836 and a conductive film 110838 are sequentially stacked as the conductive film. Needless to say, the conductive film may be formed of a single layer or a stacked structure of three or more layers.

As the conductive films 110836 and 110838, tantalum (Ta), tungsten (W),
Titanium (Ti), Molybdenum (Mo), Aluminum (Al), Copper (Cu), Chromium (C
r), niobium (Nb), or the like, or an alloy material or a compound material containing these elements as a main component. Alternatively, a metal nitride film obtained by nitriding these elements can be used. In addition, a semiconductor material typified by polycrystalline silicon doped with an impurity element such as phosphorus, silicide introduced with a metal material, or the like can be used.

Here, tantalum nitride is used for the conductive film 110836, and tungsten is used for the conductive film 110838. In addition, as the conductive film 110836, a single layer or a stacked film selected from tantalum nitride, tungsten nitride, molybdenum nitride, or titanium nitride can be used. As the conductive film 110838, a single layer or a stacked film selected from tungsten, tantalum, molybdenum, and titanium can be used.

Next, the conductive films 110836 and 110838 provided in a stacked manner are selectively etched and removed, whereby the conductive films 110836 and 110838 are left in part of the regions 110812 and 110813 of the substrate 110800, respectively. Functional conductive films 110840 and 110842 are formed (see FIG. 29D). Here, the conductive film 110
In the region that does not overlap with 840 and 110842, the surface of the substrate 110800 is exposed.

Specifically, in the region 110812 of the substrate 110800, a portion of the insulating film 11083 that does not overlap with the conductive film 110840 is selectively removed, so that the conductive film 110840 and the insulating film 1 are removed.
The end portion of 10832 is formed so as to substantially match. Further, region 11 of substrate 110800
In 0813, a portion of the insulating film 11083 that does not overlap with the conductive film 110842 is selectively removed, so that the end portions of the conductive film 110842 and the insulating film 110834 are approximately aligned.

In this case, a portion of the insulating film that does not overlap with the conductive films 110840 and 110842 may be removed at the same time, or the resist mask remaining after the conductive films 110840 and 110842 are formed or the conductive films 110840 and 110842 are used as a mask. A portion of the insulating film that does not become necessary may be removed.

Next, an impurity element is selectively introduced into the regions 110812 and 110813 of the substrate 110800 (see FIG. 30A). Here, a low-concentration impurity element imparting n-type conductivity is selectively introduced into the region 110833 using the conductive film 110842 as a mask, and a low-concentration impurity element imparting p-type conductivity is selected into the region 110812 using the conductive film 110840 as a mask. Introduced. n
As the impurity element imparting the mold, phosphorus (P), arsenic (As), or the like can be used.
As an impurity element imparting p-type conductivity, boron (B), aluminum (Al), gallium (
Ga) or the like can be used. Note that after the impurity element is introduced, heat treatment may be performed to diffuse the impurity element and repair the crystal structure.

Next, sidewalls 110854 that are in contact with the side surfaces of the conductive films 110840 and 110842 are formed. Specifically, a film containing an inorganic material such as silicon, silicon oxide, or silicon nitride, or a film containing an organic material such as an organic resin is formed in a single layer or stacked layers by a plasma CVD method, a sputtering method, or the like. Form. Then, the insulating film can be selectively etched by anisotropic etching mainly in the vertical direction so as to be in contact with the side surfaces of the conductive films 110840 and 110842. Note that the sidewall 110854 has an LDD (Lighttl
It is used as a mask for doping when forming a (y Doped drain) region.
Here, the sidewall 110854 is formed so as to be in contact with the side surface of the insulating film or the floating gate electrode formed below the conductive films 110840 and 110842.

Subsequently, an impurity element functioning as a source region or a drain region is formed by introducing an impurity element into the regions 110812 and 11083 of the substrate 110800 using the sidewall 110854 and the conductive films 110840 and 110842 as masks (FIG. 30 (
B)). Here, a sidewall 1108 is formed in a region 110813 of the substrate 110800.
54 and the conductive film 110842 as a mask, an impurity element imparting a high concentration of n-type is introduced,
An impurity element imparting high concentration p-type is introduced into the region 110812 with the sidewall 110854 and the conductive film 110840 as masks.

As a result, in the region 110812 of the substrate 110800, an impurity region 110858 that forms a source region or a drain region and a low-concentration impurity region 110860 that forms an LDD region.
Thus, a channel formation region 110856 is formed. Then, the region 11 of the substrate 110800
0813 includes an impurity region 110864 for forming a source region or a drain region, and an LD.
A low concentration impurity region 110866 for forming the D region and a channel formation region 110862 are formed.

Although an example in which the LDD region is formed using a sidewall is shown here, the present invention is not limited to this. The LDD region may be formed using a mask or the like without using the sidewall, or the LDD region may not be formed. When the LDD region is not formed, the manufacturing process can be simplified, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Note that here, in the region which does not overlap with the conductive films 110840 and 110842, the substrate 11
The impurity element is introduced with the surface of 0800 exposed. Therefore, the substrate 110
Channel formation regions 110 formed in 800 regions 110812 and 11081, respectively.
856 and 110862 can be formed by a conductive film 110840 and 110842 in a self-aligning manner.

Next, a second insulating film 110877 is formed so as to cover insulating films, conductive films, and the like provided in the regions 110812 and 11081 of the substrate 110800, and the opening 1 is formed in the insulating film 110877.
10878 is formed (see FIG. 30C).

The second insulating film 110877 is formed of silicon oxide (SiOx), CVD, sputtering, or the like.
Silicon nitride (SiNx), silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) (x> y), silicon nitride oxide (Si
NxOy) (x> y) or other insulating film having oxygen or nitrogen, carbon containing film such as DLC (diamond-like carbon), organic material such as epoxy, polyimide, polyamide, polyvinylphenol, benzocyclobutene, acrylic, or siloxane It can be provided in a single layer or laminated structure made of a siloxane material such as a resin. The siloxane material is Si
It corresponds to a material containing a —O—Si bond. Siloxane has a skeleton structure formed of a bond of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O). As a substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (for example, an alkyl group or an aromatic hydrocarbon) is used. A fluoro group can also be used as a substituent. Alternatively, an organic group containing at least hydrogen and a fluoro group may be used as a substituent.

Next, a conductive film 110880 is formed in the opening 110878 using a CVD method, and the conductive films 110882a to 110882a are formed over the insulating film 110877 so as to be electrically connected to the conductive film 110880.
110882d is selectively formed (see FIG. 30D).

The conductive films 110880 and 110882a to 110882d are formed of aluminum (Al), tungsten (W), titanium (Ti), tantalum (T) by a CVD method, a sputtering method, or the like.
a), molybdenum (Mo), nickel (Ni), platinum (Pt), copper (Cu), gold (Au)
, Silver (Ag), manganese (Mn), neodymium (Nd), carbon (C), silicon (Si)
Or an alloy material or a compound material containing these elements as a main component,
A single layer or a stacked layer is formed. An alloy material containing aluminum as a main component is, for example, a material containing aluminum as a main component and nickel, or aluminum as a main component, nickel,
It corresponds to an alloy material containing one or both of carbon and silicon. Conductive films 110880, 1108
82a to 110882d may adopt, for example, a laminated structure of a barrier film, an aluminum silicon (Al—Si) film, and a barrier film, or a laminated structure of a barrier film, an aluminum silicon (Al—Si) film, a titanium nitride film, and a barrier film. . Note that the barrier film corresponds to a thin film formed of titanium, titanium nitride, molybdenum, or molybdenum nitride. Aluminum and aluminum silicon are suitable materials for forming the conductive film 110880 because they have low resistance and are inexpensive. For example, when an upper barrier layer and a lower barrier layer are provided, generation of hillocks of aluminum or aluminum silicon can be prevented. For example, when a barrier film made of titanium, which is a highly reducing element, is formed, even if a thin natural oxide film is formed on the crystalline semiconductor film, the natural oxide film is reduced and the crystalline semiconductor film is excellent. Contact can be made. Here, the conductive film 110880 can be formed by selectively growing tungsten (W) by a CVD method.

Through the above steps, a p-type transistor formed in the region 110812 of the substrate 110800 and an n-type transistor formed in the region 110810 can be obtained.

Note that the structure of the transistor constituting the transistor of the present invention is not limited to the illustrated structure. For example, a transistor structure such as an inverted stagger structure or a fin FET structure can be employed. The fin FET structure is preferable because the short channel effect accompanying the miniaturization of the transistor size can be suppressed.

Up to this point, the structure of the transistor and the method for manufacturing the transistor have been described. here,
Wiring, electrodes, conductive layers, conductive films, terminals, vias, plugs, etc. are made of aluminum (Al), tantalum (Ta), titanium (Ti), molybdenum (Mo), tungsten (W), neodymium (Nd), chromium ( Cr), nickel (Ni), platinum (Pt), gold (Au), silver (Ag)
, Copper (Cu), magnesium (Mg), scandium (Sc), cobalt (C
o), zinc (Zn), niobium (Nb), silicon (Si), phosphorus (P), boron (B), arsenic (As), gallium (Ga), indium (In), tin (Sn)
), One or more elements selected from the group consisting of oxygen (O), or a compound or alloy material (for example, indium tin oxide) containing one or more elements selected from the group. (ITO), indium zinc oxide (IZO), indium tin oxide containing silicon oxide (ITSO), zinc oxide (ZnO), tin oxide (SnO), tin cadmium oxide (CTO),
Aluminum neodymium (Al-Nd), magnesium silver (Mg-Ag), molybdenum niobium (
Mo—Nb) and the like. Alternatively, the wiring, the electrode, the conductive layer, the conductive film, the terminal, and the like are preferably formed using a substance in which these compounds are combined. Or one or more elements selected from the group and a compound of silicon (silicide) (eg, aluminum silicon, molybdenum silicon, nickel silicide, etc.), one or more elements selected from the group and a compound of nitrogen ( For example, titanium nitride, tantalum nitride,
(Molybdenum nitride or the like) is preferable.

Note that silicon (Si) includes n-type impurities (such as phosphorus) or p-type impurities (such as boron).
May be included. When silicon contains impurities, the conductivity can be improved or the same behavior as a normal conductor can be achieved. Therefore, it becomes easy to use as wiring, electrodes, and the like.

Note that silicon having various crystallinity such as single crystal, polycrystal (polysilicon), and microcrystal (microcrystal silicon) can be used. Alternatively, silicon having no crystallinity such as amorphous (amorphous silicon) can be used. By using single crystal silicon or polycrystalline silicon, resistance of a wiring, an electrode, a conductive layer, a conductive film, a terminal, or the like can be reduced. By using amorphous silicon or microcrystalline silicon, a wiring or the like can be formed by a simple process.

Note that since aluminum or silver has high conductivity, signal delay can be reduced.
Further, since etching is easy, patterning is easy and fine processing can be performed.

Note that since copper has high conductivity, signal delay can be reduced. When using copper,
In order to improve adhesion, it is desirable to have a laminated structure.

Molybdenum or titanium is preferable because it has advantages such as no defects, easy etching, and high heat resistance even when in contact with an oxide semiconductor (ITO, IZO, or the like) or silicon.

Tungsten is desirable because it has advantages such as high heat resistance.

Neodymium is desirable because it has advantages such as high heat resistance. In particular, when an alloy of neodymium and aluminum is used, the heat resistance is improved, and aluminum does not easily cause hillocks.

Silicon is preferable because it can be formed at the same time as a semiconductor layer included in a transistor and has high heat resistance.

In addition, ITO, IZO, ITSO, zinc oxide (ZnO), silicon (Si), tin oxide (S
nO) and tin cadmium oxide (CTO) have a light-transmitting property, and thus can be used for a portion that transmits light. For example, it can be used as a pixel electrode or a common electrode.

Note that IZO is desirable because it is easy to etch and process. It is difficult for IZO to leave a residue when it is etched. Therefore, when IZO is used as the pixel electrode, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of defects (short circuit, alignment disorder, etc.) in the liquid crystal element and the light emitting element.

Note that the wiring, electrode, conductive layer, conductive film, terminal, via, plug, and the like may have a single-layer structure,
It may have a multilayer structure. With a single-layer structure, a manufacturing process of wiring, electrodes, conductive layers, conductive films, terminals, and the like can be simplified, the number of process days can be reduced, and cost can be reduced. Alternatively, by using a multilayer structure, it is possible to reduce the demerits while making use of the merits of each material, and to form wirings, electrodes, and the like with good performance.
For example, by including a low resistance material (such as aluminum) in the multilayer structure, the resistance of the wiring can be reduced. As another example, it is possible to increase the heat resistance of wiring, electrodes, etc. while taking advantage of the low heat resistant material by making a laminated structure in which a low heat resistant material is sandwiched between high heat resistant materials. I can do it. For example, a layered structure in which a layer containing aluminum is sandwiched between layers containing molybdenum, titanium, neodymium, or the like is preferable.

Here, when wires, electrodes, etc. are in direct contact with each other, they may adversely affect each other. For example, one wiring, an electrode, or the like enters a material such as the other wiring, an electrode, etc., which changes the properties and cannot fulfill its original purpose. As another example, when a high resistance portion is formed or manufactured, a problem may occur and the manufacturing may not be performed normally. In such a case, it is preferable to sandwich or cover a material that reacts more easily by a laminated structure with a material that does not react easily. For example, when ITO and aluminum are connected, it is desirable to sandwich titanium, molybdenum, or a neodymium alloy between ITO and aluminum. As another example, when silicon and aluminum are connected, it is desirable to sandwich titanium, molybdenum, or a neodymium alloy between ITO and aluminum.

In addition, wiring means what the conductor is arrange | positioned. It may extend linearly or may be arranged short without extending. Therefore, the electrode is included in the wiring.

Note that carbon nanotubes may be used for wirings, electrodes, conductive layers, conductive films, terminals, vias, plugs, and the like. Furthermore, since the carbon nanotube has translucency, it can be used in a portion that transmits light. For example, it can be used as a pixel electrode or a common electrode.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 7)
In this embodiment, a structure of a display device is described.

The structure of the display device is described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31A is a top view of a display device.

Pixel portion 170101, scan line side input terminal 170103, and signal line side input terminal 170104
Are formed on the substrate 170100, scanning lines are formed on the substrate 170100 from the scanning line side input terminals 170103 in the row direction, and signal lines are formed on the substrate 170100 in the column direction from the signal line side input terminals 170104. 170100 is formed. The pixels 170102 are arranged in a matrix where the scanning lines and the signal lines intersect with the pixel portion 170101.

The scanning line side input terminals 170103 are formed on both sides of the substrate 170100 in the row direction.
The scanning lines extending from one scanning line side input terminal 170103 and the scanning lines extending from the other scanning line side input terminal 170103 are alternately formed. In this case, pixel 1
Since 70102 can be arranged with high density, a high-definition display device can be obtained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the scanning line side input terminal 170103 may be formed only on one side of the substrate 170100 in the row direction. In this case, the frame of the display device can be reduced. The region of the pixel portion 170101 can be enlarged. As another example, a scanning line extending from one scanning line side input terminal 170103 and the other scanning line side input terminal 170103 are provided.
And a scanning line extending from may be common. In this case, it is suitable for a display device having a large scanning line load, such as a large display device. Note that a signal is input to the scan line from the external driver circuit through the scan line side input terminal 170103.

The signal line side input terminal 170104 is formed on one side of the substrate 170100 in the column direction.
In this case, the frame of the display device can be reduced. The region of the pixel portion 170101 can be enlarged. However, the signal line side input terminal 170104 is not limited to this, and may be formed on both sides of the substrate 170100 in the column direction. In this case, the pixels 170102 can be arranged with high density. The signal is input from the external drive circuit to the signal line side input terminal 1.
It is input to the scanning line via 70104.

The pixel 170102 includes a switching element and a pixel electrode. In each pixel 170102, the first terminal of the switching element is connected to the signal line, and the second terminal of the switching element is connected to the pixel electrode. The on / off of the switching element is controlled by the scanning line. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various configurations can be used.
For example, the pixel 170102 may include a capacitor. In this case, the capacitor line is connected to the substrate 1
It is desirable to form on 70100. As another example, the pixel 170102 may include a current source such as a driving transistor. In this case, it is desirable to form the power supply line on the substrate 170100.

Note that as the substrate 170100, a single crystal substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a plastic substrate, a paper substrate, a cellophane substrate, a stone substrate, a wood substrate, a cloth substrate (natural fiber (silk,
Cotton, hemp), synthetic fibers (including nylon, polyurethane, polyester) or recycled fibers (including acetate, cupra, rayon, recycled polyester), leather substrates, rubber substrates,
A stainless steel substrate, a substrate having stainless steel, foil, or the like can be used. Alternatively, the skin (skin surface, dermis) or subcutaneous tissue of an animal such as a human may be used as the substrate. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various things can be used.

Note that as a switching element included in the pixel 170102, a transistor (eg, a bipolar transistor or a MOS transistor), a diode (eg, a PN diode, a PIN diode, a Schottky diode, or an MIM (Metal Insulato) is used.
r Metal diode, MIS (Metal Insulator Semico)
nductor, diode-connected transistor, etc.), thyristor, or the like can be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various things can be used. Note that in the case where a MOS transistor is used as a switching element included in the pixel 170102, the gate electrode is connected to the scan line, the first terminal is connected to the signal line, and the second terminal is connected to the pixel electrode.

So far, the case where the signal is input by the external drive circuit has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an IC chip can be mounted on a display device.

For example, as illustrated in FIG. 32A, the IC chip 170201 can be mounted on the substrate 170100 by a COG (Chip on Glass) method. In this case, I
Since the C chip 170201 can be inspected before being mounted on the substrate 170100, the yield of the display device can be improved. Reliability can be increased. Note that portions common to the configuration in FIG. 31A are denoted by common reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

As another example, as shown in FIG. 32B, TAB (Tape Automated B
IC chip 170201 is mounted by FPC (Flexible P)
printed circuit) 170200. In this case, IC
Since the chip 170201 can be inspected before being mounted on the FPC 170200, the yield of the display device can be improved. Reliability can be increased. Note that portions common to the configuration in FIG. 31A are denoted by common reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

Here, not only the IC chip is mounted on the substrate 170100 but also the drive circuit is mounted on the substrate 1701.
00 can be formed.

For example, the scan line driver circuit 170105 can be formed over the substrate 170100 as shown in FIG. In this case, the cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts. Reliability can be improved by reducing the number of connection points with circuit components. Since the scan line driver circuit 170105 has a low driving frequency, the scan line driver circuit 170105 can be easily formed using amorphous silicon or microcrystalline silicon as a semiconductor layer of the transistor. Note that an IC chip for outputting a signal to the signal line may be mounted on the substrate 170100 by a COG method. Alternatively, an FPC on which an IC chip for outputting a signal to a signal line is mounted by a TAB method may be provided on the substrate 170100. Note that the scan line driver circuit 170105
An IC chip for controlling the above may be mounted on the substrate 170100 by a COG method. Alternatively, an F chip in which an IC chip for controlling the scanning line driving circuit 170105 is mounted by a TAB method.
A PC may be placed on the substrate 170100. Note that portions common to the configuration in FIG. 31A are denoted by common reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

As another example, the scan line driver circuit 170105 and the signal line driver circuit 170106 can be formed over a substrate 170100 as shown in FIG. For this reason, the cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts. Reliability can be improved by reducing the number of connection points with circuit components. Note that an IC chip for controlling the scan line driver circuit 170105 may be mounted on the substrate 170100 by a COG method. Alternatively, the scanning line driving circuit 17
An FPC on which an IC chip for controlling 0105 is mounted by a TAB method is used as a substrate 170100.
You may arrange in. An IC chip for controlling the signal line driver circuit 170106 is formed on the substrate 17.
0100 may be mounted by the COG method. Alternatively, an FPC on which an IC chip for controlling the signal line driver circuit 170106 is mounted by a TAB method may be provided over the substrate 170100. Note that portions common to the configuration in FIG. 31A are denoted by common reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

Next, a configuration of another display device will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, a display device including a TFT substrate, a counter substrate, and a display layer sandwiched between the TFT substrate and the counter substrate will be described. FIG. 33 is a top view of the display device.

A pixel portion 170301, a scan line driver circuit 170302a, a scan line driver circuit 170302b, and a signal line driver circuit 170303 are formed over the substrate 170300. The pixel portion 170301, the scan line driver circuit 170302a, and the scan line driver circuit 170302 are included.
b and the signal line driver circuit 170303 are formed of a substrate 170300 by a sealant 170321.
And the substrate 170310 are sealed.

Further, an FPC 107320 is provided on the substrate 170300. The IC chip 107321 is mounted on the FPC 170320 by the TAB method.

A plurality of pixels are arranged in a matrix in the pixel portion 170301. A scan line extends from the scan line driver circuit 170302a in the row direction and is formed over the substrate 170300. A scan line extends from the scan line driver circuit 170302b in the row direction and is formed over the substrate 170300. The signal line extends from the signal line driver circuit 170303 in the column direction, and the substrate 17
0300.

A scan line driver circuit 170302a is formed on one side of the substrate 170300 in the row direction, and a scan line driver circuit 170302b is formed on the other side of the substrate 170300 in the row direction. The scanning lines extending from the scanning line driving circuit 170302a and the scanning lines extending from the scanning line driving circuit 170302b are alternately formed. Therefore, a high-definition display device can be obtained. Note that the invention is not limited thereto, and only one of the scan line driver circuit 170302a and the scan line driver circuit 170302b may be formed over the substrate 170300. In this case, the frame of the display device can be reduced. The region of the pixel portion 170301 can be enlarged. As another example, a scan line extending from the scan line driver circuit 170302a and a scan line extending from the scan line driver circuit 170302b may be common. In this case, it is suitable for a display device having a large scanning line load, such as a large display device.

The signal line driver circuit 170303 is formed on one side of the substrate 170300 in the column direction. For this reason, the frame of a display apparatus can be made small. The region of the pixel portion 170301 can be enlarged. However, the signal line driver circuit 170303 is not limited to this, and the substrate 17
0300 may be formed on both sides in the column direction. In this case, a high-definition display device can be obtained.

Note that as the substrate 170300, a single crystal substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a plastic substrate, a paper substrate, a cellophane substrate, a stone substrate, a wood substrate, a cloth substrate (natural fiber (silk,
Cotton, hemp), synthetic fibers (including nylon, polyurethane, polyester) or recycled fibers (including acetate, cupra, rayon, recycled polyester), leather substrates, rubber substrates,
A stainless steel substrate, a substrate having stainless steel, foil, or the like can be used. Alternatively, the skin (skin surface, dermis) or subcutaneous tissue of an animal such as a human may be used as the substrate. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various things can be used.

Note that as a switching element included in the display device, a transistor (for example, a bipolar transistor or a MOS transistor), a diode (for example, a PN diode, PIN)
Diode, Schottky diode, MIM (Metal Insulator Me
tal) diode, MIS (Metal Insulator Semiconductor)
tor) diodes, diode-connected transistors, etc.), thyristors, etc. can be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various things can be used.

So far, the case where the driving circuit is formed over the same substrate as the pixel portion has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and another substrate on which part or all of the driver circuit is formed may be mounted as an IC chip on the substrate on which the pixel portion is formed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 34A, an IC chip 170401 instead of the signal line driver circuit.
Can be mounted on the substrate 170300 by a COG method. In this case, an increase in power consumption can be prevented by mounting the IC chip 170401 on the substrate 170300 by a COG method instead of the signal line driver circuit. This is because the signal line driving circuit has a high driving frequency and thus consumes a large amount of power. Since the IC chip 170401 can be inspected before being mounted on the substrate 170300, the yield of the display device can be improved. Reliability can be increased. Since the scan line driver circuit 170302a and the scan line driver circuit 170302b have low driving frequencies, the scan line driver circuit 170302a and the scan line driver circuit 170302b can be easily formed using amorphous silicon or microcrystalline silicon as a semiconductor layer of a transistor. Can do. Thus, a display device can be manufactured using a large substrate. Note that portions common to the configuration in FIG. 33 are denoted by common reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

As another example, as shown in FIG. 34B, an IC chip 170 is used instead of the signal line driver circuit.
401 is mounted on the substrate 170300 by a COG method, an IC chip 170501a is mounted on the substrate 170300 by a COG method instead of the scanning line driver circuit 170302a, and an IC chip 170501b is mounted on the substrate 170300 by a COG method instead of the scanning line driver circuit 170302b. May be implemented. In this case, since the IC chip 170401, the IC chip 170501a, and the IC chip 170501b can be inspected before being mounted on the substrate 170300, the yield of the display device can be improved. Reliability can be increased. Substrate 170300
Amorphous silicon or microcrystalline silicon can be easily used as a semiconductor layer of the transistor formed in the above. Thus, a display device can be manufactured using a large substrate. Note that portions common to the configuration in FIG. 33 are denoted by common reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment can be applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in the drawings of another embodiment. Etc. can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 8)
In this embodiment, the operation of the display device will be described.

FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a display device.

The display device 180100 includes a pixel portion 180101, a signal line driver circuit 180103, and a scan line driver circuit 180104. In the pixel portion 180101, a plurality of signal lines S1 to Sm are arranged to extend from the signal line driver circuit 180103 in the column direction. Pixel portion 180101
A plurality of scanning lines G 1 to Gn are arranged extending in the row direction from the scanning line driving circuit 180104. The pixels 180102 are arranged in a matrix where the plurality of signal lines S1 to Sm and the plurality of scanning lines G1 to Gn intersect each other.

Note that the signal line driver circuit 180103 has a function of outputting a signal to each of the signal lines S1 to Sn. This signal may be called a video signal. Note that the scan line driver circuit 180104
Has a function of outputting a signal to each of the scanning lines G1 to Gm. This signal may be called a scanning signal.

Note that the pixel 180102 includes at least a switching element connected to the signal line. This switching element is controlled to be turned on and off by the potential of the scanning line (scanning signal). The pixel 180102 is selected when the switching element is on, and the pixel 180102 is not selected when the switching element is off.

When the pixel 180102 is selected (selected state), a video signal is input from the signal line to the pixel 180102. Then, the state of the pixel 180102 (eg, luminance, transmittance, storage capacitor voltage, etc.) changes in accordance with the input video signal.

When the pixel 180102 is not selected (non-selected state), the video signal is the pixel 1801.
02 is not entered. However, since the pixel 180102 holds a potential corresponding to the video signal input at the time of selection, the pixel 180102 maintains the voltage (for example, luminance, transmittance, storage capacitor voltage, etc.) corresponding to the video signal.

Note that the configuration of the display device is not limited to FIG. For example, a wiring (a scanning line, a signal line, a power supply line, a capacitor line, a common line, or the like) may be newly added depending on the structure of the pixel 180102. As another example, a circuit having various functions may be added.

FIG. 36 shows an example of a timing chart for explaining the operation of the display device.

The timing chart of FIG. 36 shows one frame period corresponding to a period for displaying an image for one screen. The period of one frame is not particularly limited, but is preferably at least 1/60 second or less so that a person viewing the image does not feel flicker.

The timing chart of FIG. 36 shows the first scanning line G1 and the i-th scanning line Gi (scanning line G1).
1 to Gm), i + 1-th scanning line Gi + 1 and m-th scanning line Gm are respectively selected.

Note that at the same time as the scanning line is selected, the pixel 180102 connected to the scanning line is also selected. For example, when the i-th scanning line Gi is selected, the pixel 180102 connected to the i-th scanning line Gi is also selected.

Each of the scanning lines G1 to Gm is sequentially selected from the first scanning line G1 to the m-th scanning line Gm (hereinafter also referred to as scanning). For example, during the period when the i-th scanning line Gi is selected, scanning lines other than the i-th scanning line Gi (G1 to Gi-1, Gi + 1 to Gm).
) Is not selected. In the next period, the (i + 1) th scanning line Gi + 1 is selected. Note that a period during which one scanning line is selected is referred to as one gate selection period.

Therefore, when a scanning line in a certain row is selected, a plurality of pixels 180 connected to the scanning line.
A video signal is input to the signal line 102 from each of the signal lines G1 to Gm. For example, i
While the scanning line Gi of the row is selected, the plurality of pixels 180102 connected to the scanning line Gi of the i-th row input arbitrary video signals from the signal lines S1 to Sn, respectively.
Thus, each of the plurality of pixels 180102 can be controlled independently by the scanning signal and the video signal.

Next, a case where one gate selection period is divided into a plurality of subgate selection periods will be described.
FIG. 37 shows a timing chart when one gate selection period is divided into two subgate selection periods (first subgate selection period and second subgate selection period).

Note that one gate selection period can be divided into three or more sub-gate selection periods.

The timing chart of FIG. 37 shows one frame period corresponding to a period for displaying an image for one screen. The period of one frame is not particularly limited, but is preferably at least 1/60 second or less so that a person viewing the image does not feel flicker.

One frame has two subframes (first subframe and second subframe).
It is divided into

The timing chart of FIG. 37 shows the i-th scanning line Gi, the i + 1-th scanning line Gi + 1, j
This shows the timing at which the scanning line Gj in the row (any one of the scanning lines Gi + 1 to Gm), the scanning line in the j + 1th row, and the scanning line Gj + 1 in the Gj + 1th row are selected.

Note that at the same time as the scanning line is selected, the pixel 180102 connected to the scanning line is also selected. For example, when the i-th scanning line Gi is selected, the pixel 180102 connected to the i-th scanning line Gi is also selected.

Note that each of the scanning lines G1 to Gm is sequentially scanned within each sub-gate selection period. For example, in a certain gate selection period, the i-th scanning line Gi is selected in the first sub-gate selection period, and the j-th scanning line Gj is selected in the second sub-gate selection period.
Then, in one gate selection period, it is possible to operate as if scanning signals for two rows were selected at the same time. At this time, different video signals are input to the signal lines S1 to Sn in the first sub-gate selection period and the second sub-gate selection period. Therefore,
A plurality of pixels 180102 connected to the i-th row and a plurality of pixels 1 connected to the j-th row
Separate video signals can be input to the 80102.

Next, a driving method for converting the frame rate of input image data (also referred to as input frame rate) and the display frame rate (also referred to as display frame rate) will be described. The frame rate is the number of frames per second, and the unit is Hz.

In the present embodiment, the input frame rate does not necessarily match the display frame rate. When the input frame rate and the display frame rate are different, the frame rate can be converted by a circuit (frame rate conversion circuit) that converts the frame rate of the image data. Thus, even when the input frame rate and the display frame rate are different, display can be performed at various display frame rates.

When the input frame rate is higher than the display frame rate, display can be performed by converting a part of the input image data into various display frame rates by discarding part of the input image data.
In this case, since the display frame rate can be reduced, the operating frequency of the drive circuit for display can be reduced, and power consumption can be reduced. On the other hand, when the input frame rate is smaller than the display frame rate, all or part of the input image data is displayed a plurality of times. Another image is generated from the input image data. What is input image data? By using means such as generating an irrelevant image, it is possible to perform display by converting to various display frame rates. In this case, the quality of the moving image can be improved by increasing the display frame rate.

In the present embodiment, a frame rate conversion method when the input frame rate is smaller than the display frame rate will be described in detail. Note that the frame rate conversion method when the input frame rate is larger than the display frame rate can be realized by executing the reverse procedure of the frame rate conversion method when the input frame rate is smaller than the display frame rate. it can.

In the present embodiment, an image displayed at the same frame rate as the input frame rate is referred to as a basic image. On the other hand, an image that is displayed at a frame rate different from the basic image and that is displayed in order to match the input frame rate and the display frame rate is referred to as an interpolated image. As the basic image, the same image as the input image data can be used. The same image as the basic image can be used as the interpolation image. Furthermore, an image different from the basic image can be created, and the created image can be used as an interpolation image.

When creating an interpolated image, a method of detecting temporal changes (image motion) of the input image data and using these intermediate images as an interpolated image, an image multiplied by a coefficient in the luminance of the basic image A plurality of different images from the input image data, and presenting the plurality of images sequentially in time (one of the plurality of images as a basic image,
There is a method of causing the observer to perceive that an image corresponding to the input image data is displayed by using the rest as an interpolation image. As a method of creating a plurality of different images from input image data, there are a method of converting a gamma value of the input image data, a method of dividing a gradation value included in the input image data, and the like.

The intermediate state image (intermediate image) is an image obtained by detecting temporal changes (image motion) of input image data and interpolating the detected motion. Obtaining an intermediate image by such a method is referred to as motion compensation.

Next, a specific example of the frame rate conversion method will be described. According to this method, an arbitrary rational number (n / m) times frame rate conversion can be realized. Here, n and m are integers of 1 or more. The frame rate conversion method in the present embodiment can be handled by dividing it into a first step and a second step. Here, the first step is a step of converting the frame rate to an arbitrary rational number (n / m) times. Here, a basic image may be used as the interpolation image, or an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation may be used as the interpolation image. In the second step, a plurality of different images (sub-images) are created from the input image data or each of the images subjected to frame rate conversion in the first step, and the plurality of sub-images are temporally continuous. It is a step for performing the method of displaying. By using the method according to the second step, even though a plurality of different images are actually displayed, it is possible to make the human eye perceive as if the original image was displayed.

The frame rate conversion method in the present embodiment may use both the first step and the second step, omit the first step, and use only the second step. Step 2 may be omitted and only the first step may be used.

First, as a first step, an arbitrary rational number (n / m) times frame rate conversion will be described. (See FIG. 38) In FIG. 38, the horizontal axis represents time, and the vertical axis represents various cases of n and m. The figure in FIG. 38 represents the schematic diagram of the image displayed, and represents the timing displayed by the horizontal position. Furthermore, it is assumed that the movement of the image is schematically represented by the points displayed in the figure. However, this is an example for explanation, and the displayed image is not limited to this. This method can be applied to various images.

The period Tin represents the cycle of the input image data. The period of the input image data corresponds to the input frame rate. For example, when the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the cycle of the input image data is 1/60 seconds. Similarly, if the input frame rate is 50 Hz,
The cycle of the input image data is 1/50 second. Thus, the period of the input image data (unit:
Second) is the reciprocal of the input frame rate (unit: Hz). Various input frame rates can be used. For example, 24 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 70 Hz,
48 Hz, 100 Hz, 120 Hz, 140 Hz, etc. can be mentioned. Where 2
4 Hz is a frame rate used for film movies and the like. 50 Hz is a frame rate used for PAL standard video signals and the like. 60 Hz is a frame rate used for NTSC video signals. 70 Hz is a frame rate used for a display input signal of a personal computer. 48Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz,
140 Hz is twice the frame rate. Note that the frame rate is not limited to double and may be various multiples. Thus, according to the method shown in this embodiment, frame rate conversion can be realized for input signals of various standards.

The procedure for frame rate conversion of an arbitrary rational number (n / m) times in the first step is as follows.
As procedure 1, the k-th interpolation image for the first basic image (k is an integer equal to or greater than 1; the initial value is 1
) Display timing is determined. The display timing of the k-th interpolation image is assumed to be the time when a period obtained by multiplying the cycle of the input image data by k (m / n) has elapsed since the first basic image was displayed.
As a procedure 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the k-th interpolation image is an integer. If it is an integer, the (k (m / n) +1) th basic image is displayed at the display timing of the kth interpolation image, and the first step ends. If it is not an integer, go to step 3.
As a procedure 3, an image used as the kth interpolation image is determined. Specifically, the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the k-th interpolation image is converted into the form of x + y / n. Here, x and y are integers, and y is a number smaller than n. When the k-th interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the k-th interpolation image is (x + 1).
) To the (x + 2) th basic image, an intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the movement of the image by (y / n). When the kth interpolation image is the same as the basic image, the (x + 1) th basic image can be used. A method for obtaining an intermediate image as an image corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion of the image by (y / n) will be described in detail in another part.
In step 4, the target interpolation image is moved to the next interpolation image. Specifically, the value of k is incremented by 1, and the procedure returns to procedure 1.

Next, in the procedure in the first step, the values of n and m are specifically shown and described in detail.

Note that the mechanism for executing the procedure in the first step may be implemented in the apparatus, or may be determined in advance at the design stage of the apparatus. If the mechanism for executing the procedure in the first step is mounted on the apparatus, the driving method can be switched so that the optimum operation according to the situation is performed. The situation here refers to the contents of the image data, the environment inside and outside the device (temperature, humidity, atmospheric pressure, light, sound, magnetic field, electric field, radiation dose,
Altitude, acceleration, moving speed, etc.), user settings, software version, etc. On the other hand, if the mechanism for executing the procedure in the first step is determined in advance at the device design stage, an optimal driving circuit can be used for each driving method, and the mechanism is determined. As a result, a reduction in manufacturing cost due to mass production effects can be expected.

When n = 1, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 1 (where n = 1 and m = 1 in FIG. 38), the operation in the first step is as follows. First, when k = 1, in step 1, the display timing of the first interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the first interpolated image is the period of the input image data after the first basic image is displayed.
/ N) It is the time when a period of 1 time, that is, 1 time has passed.

Next, in procedure 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the first interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1, it is an integer. Accordingly, at the display timing of the first interpolation image, the (k (m / n) +1), that is, the second basic image is displayed, and the first step is ended.

That is, when the conversion ratio is 1, the k-th image is a basic image, the (k + 1) -th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is one time the cycle of input image data.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 1 (n / m = 1), i-th (i is a positive integer)
Image data and (i + 1) th image data are sequentially input as input image data at a constant cycle, and the kth image (k is a positive integer) and the (k + 1) th image are input image data. Display apparatus that sequentially displays images at intervals equal to the period of the image, wherein the kth image is displayed according to the ith image data, and the k + 1th image is displayed according to the i + 1th image data. Is done.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 1, since the frame rate conversion circuit can be omitted, there is an advantage that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, when the conversion ratio is 1, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 1. Furthermore, when the conversion ratio is 1, there is an advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 1.

When n = 2 and m = 1, that is, when the conversion ratio (n / m) is 2 (location where n = 2 and m = 1 in FIG. 38), the operation in the first step is as follows. First, when k = 1, in step 1, the display timing of the first interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the first interpolated image is the period of the input image data after the first basic image is displayed.
/ N) This is the time when a period that is doubled, that is, halved has elapsed.

Next, in procedure 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the first interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1/2, it is not an integer. Therefore, go to step 3.

In procedure 3, an image to be used as the first interpolation image is determined. Therefore, the factor 1/2 is set to x
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of the coefficient 1/2, x = 0 and y = 1. When the first interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the first interpolation image is the (x +
1) That is, an intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion of the image from the first basic image to the (x + 2) or second basic image by y / n times, that is, ½ times. First
When the interpolated image is the same as the basic image, the (x + 1) th, that is, the first basic image can be used.

By the procedure so far, the display timing of the first interpolation image and the image to be displayed as the first interpolation image can be determined. Next, in procedure 4, the target interpolation image is moved from the first interpolation image to the second interpolation image. That is, k is changed from 1 to 2, and the procedure returns to step 1.

When k = 2, in step 1, the display timing of the second interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the second interpolated image is a point in time when the period of the input image data is multiplied by k (m / n), that is, 1 time has elapsed since the first basic image was displayed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the second interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1, it is an integer. Therefore, at the display timing of the second interpolation image, the (k (m / n) +1), that is, the second basic image is displayed, and the first step is ended.

That is, when the conversion ratio is 2 (n / m = 2), the kth image is a basic image, and the kth image
The +1 image is an interpolation image, the k + 2 image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is ½ times the cycle of the input image data.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 2 (n / m = 2), the i-th (i is a positive integer)
Image data and the (i + 1) th image data are sequentially input as input image data at a constant cycle, and the kth image (k is a positive integer), the (k + 1) th image, the k + 2th image, ,
A driving method of a display device that sequentially displays at intervals of 1/2 times the cycle of input image data, the kth image is displayed according to the ith image data, and the k + 1th image is the ith image data. The image data is displayed according to the image data corresponding to the motion obtained by halving the motion from the (i + 1) th image data, and the (k + 2) th image is displayed according to the (i + 1) th image data.

As another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 2 (n / m = 2), the i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and the (i + 1) -th image data are input. The image data is sequentially input at a constant cycle, and the kth (k is a positive integer) image, the (k + 1) th image, and the (k + 2) th image are ½ times the cycle of the input image data. The display apparatus sequentially drives the display apparatus with the k-th image being displayed according to the i-th image data, the k + 1-th image being displayed according to the i-th image data, and the k + 2 image being Are displayed in accordance with the (i + 1) th image data.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 2, it is also called double speed drive or simply double speed drive.
For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 120 Hz (
120 Hz drive). Then, the image is continuously displayed twice for one input image. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device,
It brings about a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect. This is related to the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to so-called dynamic capacitance, in which the capacitance of the liquid crystal element varies depending on the applied voltage. That is, by making the display frame rate larger than the input frame rate, it is possible to increase the frequency of the image data write operation, thereby reducing obstacles such as moving image tailing and afterimage caused by insufficient write voltage due to dynamic capacitance. be able to. Further, it is effective to combine the AC drive and 120 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 120 Hz and setting the AC drive frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 240 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes.

When n = 3, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 3 (n = 3, where m = 1 in FIG. 38), the operation in the first step is as follows. First, when k = 1, in step 1, the display timing of the first interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the first interpolated image is the period of the input image data after the first basic image is displayed.
/ N) is the time when a period of 1/3 times has elapsed.

Next, in procedure 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the first interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1/3, it is not an integer. Therefore, go to step 3.

In procedure 3, an image to be used as the first interpolation image is determined. Therefore, the coefficient 1/3 is set to x
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of the coefficient 1/3, x = 0 and y = 1. When the first interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the first interpolation image is the (x +
1) That is, an intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement of the image from the first basic image to the (x + 2) th or second basic image by y / n times, that is, 1/3 times. First
When the interpolated image is the same as the basic image, the (x + 1) th, that is, the first basic image can be used.

By the procedure so far, the display timing of the first interpolation image and the image to be displayed as the first interpolation image can be determined. Next, in procedure 4, the target interpolation image is moved from the first interpolation image to the second interpolation image. That is, k is changed from 1 to 2, and the procedure returns to step 1.

When k = 2, in step 1, the display timing of the second interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the second interpolated image is a point in time when a period in which the cycle of the input image data is k (m / n) times, that is, 2/3 times has elapsed since the first basic image is displayed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the second interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 2/3, it is not an integer. Therefore, go to step 3.

In procedure 3, an image to be used as the second interpolation image is determined. Therefore, the coefficient 2/3 is set to x
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of the coefficient 2/3, x = 0 and y = 2. When the second interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the second interpolation image is the (x +
1) That is, an intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion of the image from the first basic image to the (x + 2) or second basic image by y / n times, that is, 2/3 times, is used. Second
When the interpolated image is the same as the basic image, the (x + 1) th, that is, the first basic image can be used.

By the procedure so far, the display timing of the second interpolation image and the image to be displayed as the second interpolation image can be determined. Next, in procedure 4, the target interpolation image is moved from the second interpolation image to the third interpolation image. That is, k is changed from 2 to 3, and the procedure returns to step 1.

When k = 3, in step 1, the display timing of the third interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the third interpolated image is the time when the period of the input image data cycle k (m / n) times, that is, 1 time has elapsed since the display of the first basic image.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the third interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1, it is an integer. Therefore, at the display timing of the third interpolation image, the (k (m / n) +1), that is, the second basic image is displayed, and the first step is ended.

That is, when the conversion ratio is 3 (n / m = 3), the kth image is the basic image, and the kth image
The +1 image is an interpolation image, the k + 2 image is an interpolation image, the k + 3 image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 1/3 times the cycle of the input image data.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 3 (n / m = 3), the i-th (i is a positive integer)
Image data and the (i + 1) th image data are sequentially input as input image data at a constant cycle, and the kth image (k is a positive integer), the (k + 1) th image, the k + 2th image, , K
+3 images are sequentially displayed at intervals of 1/3 times the cycle of the input image data, and the k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and the (k + 1) -th image data is displayed. Is displayed in accordance with image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1-th image data by 1/3, and the k + 2 image is displayed from the i-th image to the i + 1-th image. Is displayed in accordance with image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement up to 2/3, and k + 3
Is displayed in accordance with the (i + 1) -th image data.

As another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 3 (n / m = 3), the i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and the (i + 1) -th image data are input. The image data is sequentially input at a constant cycle, and the k-th image (k is a positive integer), the k + 1-th image, the k + 2-th image, and the k + 3-th image are input in the cycle of the input image data. A driving method of a display device that sequentially displays at an interval of 1/3 times, the kth image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and the k + 1th image is displayed according to the i-th image data. The k + 2 image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and the k + 3 image is displayed according to the i + 1-th image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 3, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 3. Furthermore, when the conversion ratio is 3, there is an advantage that the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 3.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 3, it is also called triple speed driving. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 180 Hz (180 Hz drive). Then, for one input image, the image is continuously displayed three times. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, the AC drive of the liquid crystal display device and 180 Hz
It is also effective to combine driving. That is, the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device is set to 180H.
z, and the frequency of AC driving is an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 45 Hz, 9
By setting the frequency to 0 Hz, 180 Hz, 360 Hz, etc., flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes.

n = 3, m = 2, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 3/2 (the place where n = 3 and m = 2 in FIG. 38).
In this case, the operation in the first step is as follows. First, when k = 1, procedure 1
Then, the display timing of the 1st interpolation image with respect to a 1st basic image is determined. The display timing of the first interpolation image is the period of the input image data after the first basic image is displayed.
This is the time when (m / n) times, ie, 2/3 times, has elapsed.

Next, in procedure 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the first interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 2/3, it is not an integer. Therefore, go to step 3.

In procedure 3, an image to be used as the first interpolation image is determined. Therefore, the coefficient 2/3 is set to x
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of the coefficient 2/3, x = 0 and y = 2. When the first interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the first interpolation image is the (x +
1) That is, an intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion of the image from the first basic image to the (x + 2) or second basic image by y / n times, that is, 2/3 times, is used. First
When the interpolated image is the same as the basic image, the (x + 1) th, that is, the first basic image can be used.

By the procedure so far, the display timing of the first interpolation image and the image to be displayed as the first interpolation image can be determined. Next, in procedure 4, the target interpolation image is moved from the first interpolation image to the second interpolation image. That is, k is changed from 1 to 2, and the procedure returns to step 1.

When k = 2, in step 1, the display timing of the second interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the second interpolated image is a point in time when a period in which the period of the input image data is k (m / n) times, that is, 4/3 times has elapsed since the first basic image is displayed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the second interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 4/3, it is not an integer. Therefore, go to step 3.

In procedure 3, an image to be used as the second interpolation image is determined. Therefore, the coefficient 4/3 is set to x
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of the coefficient 4/3, x = 1 and y = 1. When the second interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the second interpolation image is the (x +
1) An intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement of an image from the second basic image to the (x + 2) or third basic image by y / n times, that is, 1/3 times. Second
When the interpolated image is the same as the basic image, the (x + 1) th, that is, the second basic image can be used.

By the procedure so far, the display timing of the second interpolation image and the image to be displayed as the second interpolation image can be determined. Next, in procedure 4, the target interpolation image is moved from the second interpolation image to the third interpolation image. That is, k is changed from 2 to 3, and the procedure returns to step 1.

When k = 3, in step 1, the display timing of the third interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the third interpolated image is the point in time when the period of the input image data period is multiplied by k (m / n), that is, twice after the first basic image is displayed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the third interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 2, it is an integer. Therefore, at the display timing of the third interpolation image, the (k (m / n) +1), that is, the third basic image is displayed, and the first step is ended.

That is, when the conversion ratio is 3/2 (n / m = 3/2), the kth image is a basic image, the k + 1th image is an interpolation image, and the k + 2 image is an interpolation image. The k + 3th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 2/3 times the cycle of the input image data.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 3/2 (n / m = 3/2), the i-th (i is a positive integer) image data, the (i + 1) -th image data, and the (i + 2) -th image data. Are sequentially input as input image data at a constant cycle, and the k-th image (k is a positive integer) and the (k + 1) -th image data.
, The k + 2 image, and the k + 3 image are sequentially displayed at intervals of 2/3 times the cycle of the input image data. The kth image is The (k + 1) -th image is displayed according to the image data corresponding to a motion that is 2/3 times the motion from the i-th image data to the (i + 1) -th image data. Are displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i + 1th image to the i + 2th image by 1/3, and the k + 3th image is displayed according to the i + 2th image data.

As another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 3/2 (n / m = 3/2), the i-th (i is a positive integer) image data, the i + 1-th image data, , The (i + 2) th image data are sequentially input as input image data at a constant cycle, and the kth image (k is a positive integer), the (k + 1) th image, the (k + 2) th image, and the (k + 3) th image data. And a display apparatus for sequentially displaying images at intervals of 2/3 times the cycle of input image data, wherein the kth image is displayed according to the ith image data, and the k + 1th image is displayed. Are displayed according to the i-th image data, the k + 2 image is displayed according to the i + 1-th image data, and the k + 3 image is displayed according to the i + 2-th image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 3/2, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 3/2. Further, when the conversion ratio is 3/2, the conversion ratio is 3 /
There is an advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case of larger than 2.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 3/2, it is also called 3/2 speed drive or 1.5 times speed drive. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 90
Hz (90 Hz drive). Then, for two input images, the images are continuously displayed three times. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. In particular, compared to driving methods with a large driving frequency such as 120 Hz driving (double speed driving) and 180 Hz driving (triple speed driving), the operation frequency of the circuit for obtaining an intermediate image can be reduced by motion compensation, so that an inexpensive circuit can be used. Manufacturing cost and power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, if the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so
It brings about a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect against obstacles such as afterimages. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine AC driving and 90 Hz driving of the liquid crystal display device. That is, while the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device is 90 Hz, the frequency of AC drive is an integer multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 3
By setting the frequency to 0 Hz, 45 Hz, 90 Hz, 180 Hz, etc., flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes.

Although the details of the procedure for positive integers n and m other than the above are omitted, the conversion ratio can be set as an arbitrary rational number (n / m) by following the frame rate conversion procedure in the first step. it can. Of the combinations of positive integers n and m, the conversion ratio (n /
Combinations that can be reduced by m) can be handled in the same manner as the conversion ratio after reduction.

For example, when n = 4, m = 1, that is, when the conversion ratio (n / m) is 4 (location of n = 4, m = 1 in FIG. 38), the k-th image is the basic image, and the (k + 1) -th image. Is an interpolated image, and the k-th image
The +2 image is an interpolation image, the k + 3 image is an interpolation image, the k + 4 image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 1/4 times the cycle of the input image data.

More specifically, when the conversion ratio is 4 (n / m = 4), the i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and the (i + 1) -th image data are input image data. As the input image, the kth image (k is a positive integer), the (k + 1) th image, the (k + 2) th image, the (k + 3) th image, and the (k + 4) th image. A driving method of a display device that sequentially displays at an interval of 1/4 times the cycle of data, wherein the k th image is displayed according to the i th image data, and the k + 1 th image is the i th image data. To the (i + 1) th image data is displayed in accordance with image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying by a quarter, and the (k + 2) th image is ½ the movement from the ith image data to the (i + 1) th image data. Displayed according to the image data corresponding to the doubled movement (K + 3) th image is displayed in accordance with image data corresponding to 3/4 times the motion motion from the image data to the (i + 1) of the image data of the i, the k
The +4 image is displayed according to the (i + 1) th image data.

As another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 4 (n / m = 4), the i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and the (i + 1) -th image data are input. The image data is sequentially input at a constant cycle, and the kth image (k is a positive integer), the k + 1th image, the k + 2th image, the k + 3th image, and the k + 4th image, A driving method of a display device that sequentially displays at intervals of 1/4 times the cycle of input image data, wherein the kth image is displayed according to the ith image data, and the k + 1th image is the ith image data. Displayed according to image data, k + 2
Are displayed according to the i-th image data, the k + 3 image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and the k + 4 image is displayed according to the i + 1-th image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 4, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 4. Further, when the conversion ratio is 4, there is an advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 4.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 4, it is also referred to as quadruple speed driving. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 240 Hz (240 Hz drive). Then, four images are continuously displayed for one input image. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. In particular, 120
Compared to driving methods with a low driving frequency such as Hz driving (double speed driving) and 180 Hz driving (triple speed driving), an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation with higher accuracy can be used as an interpolation image. The movement can be smoothed, and the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Further, it is effective to combine the AC drive and 240 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 240 Hz and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 40 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes.

Further, for example, n = 4, m = 3, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 4/3 (n = n in FIG. 38).
4 and m = 3), the kth image is a basic image, the k + 1th image is an interpolation image, the k + 2 image is an interpolation image, and the k + 3 image is an interpolation image. Yes, k + 4
The image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 3/4 times the cycle of the input image data.

More specifically, when the conversion ratio is 4/3 (n / m = 4/3), the i th (
The image data of i is a positive integer), the (i + 1) th image data, the (i + 2) th image data, and the (i + 3) th image data are sequentially input as input image data at a constant cycle, and the k (k
Is a positive integer) image, (k + 1) th image, (k + 2) th image, (k + 3) th image, and kth image
+4 images are sequentially displayed at intervals of 3/4 times the cycle of the input image data. The kth image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and the (k + 1) th image data is displayed. Is displayed in accordance with image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image data to the (i + 1) -th image data by 3/4.
Is displayed according to image data corresponding to a motion that is ½ times the motion up to the image of
The +3 image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i + 2 image to the i + 3 image by ¼, and the k + 4 image is displayed according to the i + 3 image data. .

As another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 4/3 (n / m = 4/3), the i-th (i is a positive integer) image data, the (i + 1) -th image data, , The (i + 2) th image data and the (i + 3) th image data are sequentially input as input image data at a constant cycle, and the kth
(K is a positive integer) image, (k + 1) th image, (k + 2) th image, (k + 3) th image,
A display device driving method for sequentially displaying k + 4 images at intervals of 3/4 times the cycle of input image data, wherein the kth image is displayed according to the i th image data, k + 1
Are displayed in accordance with the i-th image data, the k + 2 image is displayed in accordance with the (i + 1) th image data, the k + 3 image is displayed in accordance with the i + 2 image data, and the k + 4 image. Are displayed according to the (i + 3) th image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 4/3, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 4/3. Further, when the conversion ratio is 4/3, the conversion ratio is 4 /
There is an advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case of larger than 3.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 4/3, it is also referred to as 4/3 times speed driving or 1.25 times speed driving. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 8
0 Hz (80 Hz drive). Then, four images are continuously displayed for three input images. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. In particular, compared to driving methods with a large driving frequency such as 120 Hz driving (double speed driving) and 180 Hz driving (triple speed driving), the operation frequency of the circuit for obtaining an intermediate image can be reduced by motion compensation, so that an inexpensive circuit can be used. Manufacturing cost and power consumption can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Further, it is effective to combine the AC drive and 80 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, while the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device is 80 Hz, the frequency of AC driving is an integer multiple or a fraction thereof (for example,
By setting the frequency to 40 Hz, 80 Hz, 160 Hz, 240 Hz, etc., flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes.

Further, for example, n = 5, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 5 (n = 5 in FIG. 38).
m = 1), the kth image is a basic image, the k + 1th image is an interpolation image, the k + 2 image is an interpolation image, and the k + 3 image is an interpolation image. The k + 4 image is an interpolation image, the k + 5 image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

More specifically, when the conversion ratio is 5 (n / m = 5), the i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and the (i + 1) -th image data are input image data. Are sequentially input in a certain cycle, and are kth (k is a positive integer) image, k + 1th image, k + 2th image, k + 3th image, k + 4th image, and k + 5th image. Are sequentially displayed at intervals of 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data, the kth image is displayed according to the ith image data, and the k + 1th image is The k + 2 image is displayed from the i-th image data to the i + 1-th image data, according to the image data corresponding to the movement that is 1/5 times the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1-th image data. Image data equivalent to 2/5 times the movement of Accordingly, the (k + 3) -th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image data to the (i + 1) -th image data by 3/5. Is displayed according to image data corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion from the image data to the (i + 1) th image data by 4/5, and the k + 5th image is
Displayed according to the (i + 1) th image data.

As another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 5 (n / m = 5), the i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and the (i + 1) -th image data are input. The image data is sequentially input at a constant cycle, and the kth image (k is a positive integer), the k + 1th image, the k + 2th image, the k + 3th image, the k + 4th image, and the k + 5th image. , And a display device, in which the k-th image is the i-th display.
The (k + 1) -th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, the (k + 2) -th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and the (k + 3) -th image is displayed according to the i-th image data. The k + 4 image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and the k + 5 image is displayed according to the i + 1-th image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 5, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5. Furthermore, when the conversion ratio is 5, there is an advantage that the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 5, it is also referred to as 5 × speed driving. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 300 Hz (300 Hz drive). Then, the image is continuously displayed five times for one input image. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. In particular, 120
Compared to driving methods with a low driving frequency such as Hz driving (double speed driving) and 180 Hz driving (triple speed driving), an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation with higher accuracy can be used as an interpolation image. The movement can be smoothed, and the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine AC driving and 300 Hz driving of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 300 Hz and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 100 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes.

Further, for example, n = 5, m = 2, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 5/2 (n = n in FIG. 38).
5 and m = 2), the kth image is a basic image, the k + 1th image is an interpolation image, the k + 2 image is an interpolation image, and the k + 3 image is an interpolation image. Yes, k + 4
These images are interpolation images, the (k + 5) th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

More specifically, when the conversion ratio is 5/2 (n / m = 5/2), the i-th (
(i is a positive integer) image data, (i + 1) -th image data, and (i + 2) -th image data are sequentially input as input image data in a certain cycle, and the k-th (k is a positive integer) image. , The (k + 1) th image, the (k + 2) th image, the (k + 3) th image, the (k + 4) th image, and the (k + 5) th image are sequentially displayed at intervals of 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data. A driving method of a display device, wherein the kth image is displayed according to the ith image data, and the k + 1th image is
The k + 2 image is displayed from the i-th image data to the (i + 1) -th image data, according to the image data corresponding to a movement that is 2/5 times the movement from the i-th image data to the (i + 1) -th image data. The k + 3 image is displayed in accordance with the image data corresponding to the motion obtained by multiplying the motion by 4/5, and the k + 3 image is image data corresponding to the motion obtained by multiplying the motion from the (i + 1) th image data to the (i + 2) th image data by 1/5. The k + 4 image is displayed according to the image data corresponding to the motion obtained by multiplying the motion from the (i + 1) th image data to the (i + 2) th image data by 3/5, and the k + 5th image is the i + 2th image. Are displayed according to the image data.

As another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 5/2 (n / m = 5/2), the i-th (i is a positive integer) image data, the i + 1-th image data, , The (i + 2) th image data are sequentially input as input image data at a constant cycle, and the kth image (k is a positive integer), the (k + 1) th image, the (k + 2) th image, and the (k + 3) th image data. Image, k + 4th image, k + th
5 is a display device driving method for sequentially displaying 5 images at intervals of 1/5 times the cycle of input image data, wherein the kth image is displayed according to the ith image data, and the k + 1th image data is displayed. Is displayed according to the i-th image data, the k + 2 image is displayed according to the i-th image data, the k + 3 image is displayed according to the i + 1-th image data, and the k + 4-th image. Are displayed according to the (i + 1) th image data, and the (k + 5) th image is the i
Displayed in accordance with +2 image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 5/2, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5/2. Further, when the conversion ratio is 5/2, there is an advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 5, it is also called 5/2 speed driving or 2.5 times speed driving. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 150H.
z (150 Hz drive). Then, for two input images, the images are continuously displayed five times. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. In particular, compared to a driving method with a low driving frequency such as 120 Hz driving (double speed driving), an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation with higher accuracy can be used as an interpolated image. It is possible to significantly improve the quality of moving images. Furthermore, compared with a driving method having a high driving frequency such as 180 Hz driving (three times speed driving), the operation frequency of a circuit for obtaining an intermediate image can be reduced by motion compensation, so that an inexpensive circuit can be used, and manufacturing cost and power consumption can be reduced. Can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine AC driving and 150 Hz driving of the liquid crystal display device. That is, the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device is set to 150 Hz.
And the frequency of AC driving is an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 50
Hz, 75 Hz, 150 Hz, etc.) can reduce flicker that appears due to AC driving to a level that is not perceived by human eyes.

Thus, the conversion ratio can be set as an arbitrary rational number (n / m) by variously setting the positive integers n and m. Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the range where n is 10 or less, n = 1, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 1 (1 × speed driving, 60 Hz), n =
2, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 2 (double speed drive, 120 Hz), n = 3, m =
1, i.e., conversion ratio (n / m) = 3 (3 × speed drive, 180 Hz), n = 3, m = 2, ie, conversion ratio (n / m) = 3/2 (3/2 × speed drive, 90 Hz), n = 4, m = 1, i.e., conversion ratio (n / m) = 4 (4 × speed drive, 240 Hz), n = 4, m = 3, i.e., conversion ratio (n / m) = 4/3 (4/3) Double speed drive, 80 Hz), n = 5, m = 1, ie conversion ratio (
n / m) = 5/1 (5 × speed driving, 300 Hz), n = 5, m = 2, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m
m) = 5/2 (5/2 double speed drive, 150 Hz), n = 5, m = 3, that is, the conversion ratio (n /
m) = 5/3 (5/3 speed drive, 100 Hz), n = 5, m = 4, that is, the conversion ratio (n /
m) = 5/4 (5/4 double speed drive, 75 Hz), n = 6, m = 1, ie conversion ratio (n / m
) = 6 (6 × speed driving, 360 Hz), n = 6, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 6 /
5 (6/5 double speed drive, 72 Hz), n = 7, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7 (7
Double speed drive, 420 Hz), n = 7, m = 2, ie conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/2 (7/2
Double speed drive, 210 Hz), n = 7, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/3 (7/3
Double speed drive, 140 Hz), n = 7, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/4 (7/4
Double speed drive, 105 Hz), n = 7, m = 5, ie conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/5 (7/5
Double speed drive, 84 Hz), n = 7, m = 6, ie conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/6 (7/6 double speed drive, 70 Hz), n = 8, m = 1, ie conversion ratio (n / m) = 8 (8 × speed drive, 4
80 Hz), n = 8, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/3 (8/3 double speed drive, 1
60 Hz), n = 8, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/5 (8/5 double speed drive, 9
6 Hz), n = 8, m = 7, ie conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/7 (8/7 double speed drive, 68
. 6 Hz), n = 9, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9 (9 × speed drive, 540 Hz)
), N = 9, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/2 (9/2 double speed drive, 270 Hz)
), N = 9, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/4 (9/4 double speed drive, 135 Hz)
), N = 9, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/5 (9/5 double speed drive, 108 Hz)
), N = 9, m = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/7 (9/7 double speed drive, 77.1H)
z), n = 9, m = 8, ie conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/8 (9/8 double speed drive, 67.5)
Hz), n = 10, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10 (10 × speed driving, 600H
z), n = 10, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/3 (10/3 double speed drive, 2
00 Hz), n = 10, m = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/7 (10/7 double speed drive, 85.7 Hz), n = 10, m = 9, that is, conversion ratio (n / m ) = 10/9 (10 /
A combination of the above is conceivable. The frequency notation is an example when the input frame rate is 60 Hz. For other input frame rates, the value obtained by integrating the respective conversion ratios with the input frame rate is the drive frequency.

In the case where n is an integer greater than 10, specific numbers of n and m are not mentioned, but the frame rate conversion procedure in the first step can be applied to various n and m. Is clear.

Note that the conversion ratio can be determined depending on how much of the displayed image includes an image that can be displayed without performing motion compensation in the input image data. Specifically, the smaller m is, the larger the ratio of images that can be displayed without performing motion compensation on the input image data. If the frequency of motion compensation is low, the frequency of operation of the circuit that performs motion compensation can be reduced, so that power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, motion compensation can accurately reflect images that contain errors (image motion is accurately reflected). The possibility that an intermediate image) is not created can be reduced, and the image quality can be improved. As such a conversion ratio, in the range where n is 10 or less, for example, 1, 2, 3, 3/2, 4,
5,5 / 2,6,7,7 / 2,8,9,9 / 2,10. When such a conversion ratio is used, particularly when an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation is used as an interpolated image, the image quality can be increased and the power consumption can be reduced. This is because when m is 2, the number of images that can be displayed without performing motion compensation on the input image data is relatively large (there is only ½ of the total number of input image data). ,
This is because the frequency of performing motion compensation decreases. Furthermore, when m is 1, the number of images that can be displayed without performing motion compensation on the input image data is large (equal to the total number of input image data), and motion compensation is not performed. is there. On the other hand, as m is larger, an intermediate image created by highly accurate motion compensation can be used, so that there is an advantage that the motion of the image can be made smoother.

When the display device is a liquid crystal display device, the conversion ratio can be determined according to the response time of the liquid crystal element. Here, the response time of the liquid crystal element is the time from when the voltage applied to the liquid crystal element is changed until the liquid crystal element responds. In the case where the response time of the liquid crystal element varies depending on the amount of change in voltage applied to the liquid crystal element, the average value of response times in a plurality of typical voltage changes can be obtained. Alternatively, the response time of the liquid crystal element is MPRT (Movin
g Picture Response Time).
The conversion ratio can be determined by frame rate conversion so that the image display cycle is close to the response time of the liquid crystal element. Specifically, the response time of the liquid crystal element is preferably a time from a value obtained by integrating the cycle of the input image data and the reciprocal of the conversion ratio to a value about half of this value. By doing so, it is possible to obtain an image display cycle that matches the response time of the liquid crystal element, so that the image quality can be improved. For example, when the response time of the liquid crystal element is 4 milliseconds or more and 8 milliseconds or less, double speed driving (120 Hz driving) can be performed. This is because the image display cycle of 120 Hz drive is about 8 milliseconds, and half of the image display cycle of 120 Hz drive is about 4 milliseconds. Similarly, for example, in the case where the response time of the liquid crystal element is 3 milliseconds or more and 6 milliseconds or less, the triple-speed driving (180 Hz driving) can be performed, and the response time of the liquid crystal element is 5
In the case of milliseconds to 11 milliseconds, 1.5 times speed driving (90 Hz driving) can be performed, and in the case where the response time of the liquid crystal element is 2 milliseconds to 4 milliseconds, quadruple speed driving (240 Hz driving) When the response time of the liquid crystal element is 6 milliseconds or more and 12 milliseconds or less, 1
. 25-times speed driving (80 Hz driving) can be performed. The same applies to other drive frequencies.

Note that the conversion ratio can also be determined by the trade-off between the quality of moving images, power consumption, and manufacturing cost. That is, increasing the conversion ratio can improve the quality of the moving image, while reducing the conversion ratio can reduce power consumption and manufacturing cost. That is, each conversion ratio in the range where n is 10 or less has the following advantages.

When the conversion ratio is 1, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 1, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 1. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about one time the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 2, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 2, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 2. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about ½ times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 3. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/3 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 3/2, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 3/2, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 3/2. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 2/3 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 4, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 4, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 4. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/4 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 4/3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 4/3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 4/3. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/4 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 5, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 5/2, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5/2, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5/2. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 2/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 5/3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5/3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5/3. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 5/4, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5/4, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5/4. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 4/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 6, the moving image quality can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 6, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 6. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/6 times the period of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 6/5, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 6/5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 6/5. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 5/6 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/2, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/2, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7/2. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 2/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7/3. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/4, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/4, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7/4. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 4/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/5, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7/5. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 5/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/6, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/6, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7/6. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 6/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 8, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 8, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 8. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 8/3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 8/3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 8/3. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 8/5, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 8/5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 8/5. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 5/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 8/7, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 8/7, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 8/7. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 7/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/2, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/2, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9/2. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 2/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/4, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/4, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9/4. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 4/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/5, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9/5. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 5/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/7, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/7, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9/7. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 7/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/8, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/8, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9/8. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 8/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

A conversion ratio of 10 can improve the quality of the video compared to a conversion ratio of less than 10,
The power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 10. Furthermore, m
Therefore, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/10 times the cycle of the input image data,
The image quality can be improved.

When the conversion ratio is 10/3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 10/3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 10/3. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/10 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 10/7, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 10/7, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 10/7. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 7/10 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 10/9, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 10/9, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 10/9. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 9/10 times the cycle of the input image data.

It is obvious that each conversion ratio in the range where n is larger than 10 has the same advantage.

Next, as a second step, an image according to the input image data or each image whose frame rate is converted to an arbitrary rational number (n / m) times in the first step (referred to as an original image). ), A method of creating a plurality of different images (sub-images) and presenting the plurality of sub-images continuously in time will be described. In this way, even though a plurality of images are actually presented, it is possible to make human eyes perceive that one original image is displayed.

Here, among the sub-images created from one original image, the sub-image displayed first is referred to as a first sub-image. Here, it is assumed that the timing for displaying the first sub-image is the same as the timing for displaying the original image determined in the first step. on the other hand,
The sub image displayed after that will be referred to as a second sub image. The timing for displaying the second sub-image can be arbitrarily determined regardless of the timing for displaying the original image determined in the first step. Note that the image to be actually displayed is an image created from the original image by the method in the second step. Various images can be used as the original image for creating the sub-image. The number of sub-images is not limited to two and may be larger than two. In the second step, the number of sub-images is expressed as J (J is an integer of 2 or more). At this time, the sub-image displayed at the same timing as the original image determined in the first step is called the first sub-image, and the sub-image displayed subsequently is displayed. The second sub-image, the third sub-image, and the J-th sub-image will be referred to according to the order in which they are arranged.

There are various methods for creating a plurality of sub-images from one original image. The main methods include the following methods. One is a method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image. One is a method of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images. One is a method of using an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub-image.

Here, the method of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images can be further divided into a plurality of methods. The main methods are as follows. One is a method in which at least one sub-image is a black image (referred to as a black insertion method). One is
When the brightness of the original image is divided into a plurality of ranges and the brightness in the range is controlled, a method using only one sub-image among all the sub-images (referred to as a time-division gradation control method). ). One is a method in which one sub-image is a bright image in which the gamma value of the original image is changed and the other sub-image is a dark image in which the gamma value of the original image is changed (referred to as a gamma complement method). ).

Each of the methods listed above is briefly described. The method of using the original image as it is as the sub image uses the original image as it is as the first sub image. Further, the original image is used as it is as the second sub-image. When this method is used, a circuit for newly creating a sub-image is not operated or it is not necessary to use the circuit itself, so that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced. In particular, in a liquid crystal display device, the first
In this step, it is preferable to use this method after performing frame rate conversion using an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as an interpolated image. This is because the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation is used as an interpolated image, and the same image is repeatedly displayed while smoothing the motion of the moving image, resulting in a lack of writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance of the liquid crystal element. This is because obstacles such as tailing and afterimage can be reduced.

Next, in the method for distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, a method for setting the brightness of the image and the length of the period during which the sub-image is displayed will be described in detail. J represents the number of sub-images and is an integer of 2 or more. Lowercase j is distinct from uppercase J. Let j be an integer from 1 to J. In normal hold driving, the pixel brightness is L, the original image data period is T, the pixel brightness in the j-th sub-image is L _j , and the length of the period during which the j-th sub-image is displayed is T _j. Then, the product of L _j and T _j is taken, and the sum (L ₁ T ₁ + L ₂ T ₂ +... + L _J T _J ) from j = 1 to j = J is It is preferably equal to the product (LT) (brightness is unchanged). In addition, the _{T j, j} = 1
To j = J (T ₁ + T ₂ +... + T _J ) is preferably equal to T (the display cycle of the original image is maintained). Here, the fact that the brightness remains unchanged and the display cycle of the original image is maintained is referred to as a sub-image distribution condition.

Of the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, the black insertion method is a method in which at least one sub-image is a black image. By doing so, since the display method can be made to be an impulse type in a pseudo manner, it is possible to prevent the quality of the moving image from being deteriorated due to the hold type display method. Here, it is preferable to follow the sub-image distribution condition in order to prevent the brightness of the display image from being reduced due to the insertion of the black image. However, if the brightness of the display image is acceptable (such as dark surroundings), or if the user is set to allow the brightness of the display image to be reduced, the sub image It is not necessary to follow the distribution conditions. For example, one sub image may be the same as the original image, and the other sub image may be a black image. In this case, power consumption can be reduced compared to when the sub image distribution condition is followed. Furthermore, in a liquid crystal display device, when one sub-image is set to increase the overall brightness of the original image without limiting the maximum brightness, the brightness of the backlight is increased. Thus, the sub-image distribution condition may be realized. In this case, since the sub image distribution condition can be satisfied without controlling the voltage value written to the pixel, the operation of the image processing circuit can be omitted and the power consumption can be reduced.

The black insertion method is characterized in that L _{j of} all pixels is set to 0 in any one sub-image. By doing so, since the display method can be made to be an impulse type in a pseudo manner, it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the quality of the moving image due to the hold type display method.

Of the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, the time-division gradation control method divides the brightness of the original image into a plurality of ranges, and controls the brightness in the range. This is a method that uses only one of the sub-images. By doing so, the display method can be made to be a pseudo impulse type without lowering the brightness, so that the deterioration of the quality of the moving image due to the hold method being the display method can be prevented.

As a method of dividing the brightness of the original image into a plurality of ranges, the maximum brightness value (L _max )
There is a method of dividing by the number of sub-images. For example, in a display device in which the brightness from 0 to L _max can be adjusted in 256 steps (gradation 0 to gradation 255), when the number of sub-images is 2, gradation 0 to gradation 127 Is displayed, the brightness of one sub-image is adjusted in the range of gradation 0 to gradation 255, while the brightness of the other sub-image is set to gradation 0,
When displaying gradations 128 to 255, the brightness of one sub-image is set to gradation 255.
On the other hand, the brightness of the other sub-image is adjusted in the range of gradation 0 to gradation 255. By doing so, it can be perceived by the human eye as if the original image was displayed, and it can be made to be a pseudo impulse type. Can be prevented. Note that the number of sub-images may be greater than two. For example, when the number of sub-images is 3, the brightness level of the original image (gradation 0 to gradation 2
55) is divided into three. Depending on the number of brightness levels of the original image and the number of sub-images, the number of brightness levels may not be divisible by the number of sub-images, but they are included in the respective brightness ranges after division. Even if the number of brightness levels is not exactly the same, they may be appropriately distributed.

Note that the time-division gradation control method is also preferable because when the sub-image distribution condition is satisfied, the brightness is not reduced and the same image as the original image can be displayed.

Of the methods that distribute the brightness of the original image to multiple sub-images, the gamma interpolation method uses one sub-image as a bright image with the gamma characteristics of the original image changed and the other sub-image as the gamma of the original image. This is a method of obtaining a dark image with changed characteristics. By doing so, the display method can be made to be a pseudo impulse type without lowering the brightness, so that the deterioration of the quality of the moving image due to the hold method being the display method can be prevented. Here, the gamma characteristic is the degree of brightness with respect to the brightness level (gradation). Usually, the gamma characteristic is adjusted to be close to linear. This is because a smooth gradation can be obtained if the change in brightness is proportional to the gradation that is the brightness stage. In the gamma interpolation method, the gamma characteristic of one of the sub-images is shifted from the linearity, and is adjusted so that it is brighter than the linearity in the intermediate brightness (halftone) region (the halftone becomes a brighter image than the original). )
. Then, the gamma characteristic of the other sub-image is also shifted from the linearity, and is adjusted so as to be darker than the linear in the same halftone region (the halftone becomes an image darker than the original). Here, the amount by which one sub-image is lighter than linear and the amount by which the other sub-image is darker than linear are
It is preferable to make them approximately equal for all gradations. By doing so, it can be perceived by the human eye as if the original image was displayed, and deterioration in the quality of the moving image due to the hold type can be prevented. Note that the number of sub-images may be greater than two. For example, if the number of sub-images is 3, if the gamma characteristics of each of the three sub-images are adjusted so that the total amount from linear to bright and the total amount from linear to dark are approximately equal Good.

Note that the gamma complementing method is also preferable because it can display the same image as the original image without lowering brightness by satisfying the sub-image distribution condition. further,
In the gamma complement method, since the change in the brightness L _j of each sub-image with respect to the gradation follows the gamma curve, each sub-image can display the gradation smoothly by itself,
Finally, it has the advantage of improving the quality of the image perceived by the human eye.

The method of using an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub image is a method in which one sub image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation from the preceding and succeeding images. By doing so, the motion of the image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved.

Next, the relationship between the timing for displaying the sub image and the method for creating the sub image will be described. The timing for displaying the first sub-image is the same as the timing for displaying the original image determined in the first step, and the timing for displaying the second sub-image is the same as the timing determined in the first step. Although it can be arbitrarily determined regardless of the timing of displaying the image, the sub image itself may be changed according to the timing of displaying the second sub image. In this way, even when the timing for displaying the second sub-image is changed variously, it can be perceived by the human eye as if the original image was displayed. Specifically, if the timing for displaying the second sub-image is advanced, the first sub-image is brightened and the second
The sub-image can be made darker. Furthermore, when the timing for displaying the second sub-image is delayed, the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made lighter. This is because the brightness perceived by human eyes varies depending on the length of the period during which an image is displayed. More specifically, the brightness perceived by the human eye becomes brighter as the image display period is longer and darker as the image display period is shorter. That is, by increasing the timing for displaying the second sub-image, the length of the period for displaying the first sub-image is shortened, and the length of the period for displaying the second sub-image is increased. As it is, the first sub-image is dark and the second sub-image is bright and perceived by human eyes. As a result, an image different from the original image is perceived by the human eye.
The sub-image can be brighter and the second sub-image can be darker. Similarly, the second
By delaying the timing for displaying the second sub-image, the length of the period for displaying the first sub-image becomes longer, and the length of the period for displaying the second sub-image becomes shorter. The sub-image can be darker and the second sub-image can be brighter.

Based on the above description, the processing procedure in the second step is shown below.
As procedure 1, a method for creating a plurality of sub-images from one original image is determined. More specifically, a method of creating a plurality of sub-images includes a method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image, a method of distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images, and an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub-image. Can be selected from the methods used as
As procedure 2, the number J of sub-images is determined. J is an integer of 2 or more.
As procedure 3, the brightness L _j of the pixel in the j-th sub image and the length T _{j of the} period during which the j-th sub image is displayed are determined according to the method selected in procedure 1. According to the procedure 3, the length of the period during which each sub image is displayed and the brightness of each pixel included in each sub image are specifically determined.
As the procedure 4, the original image is processed according to the items determined in the procedures 1 to 3 and actually displayed.
In step 5, the target original image is moved to the next original image. And it returns to the procedure 1.

Note that the mechanism for executing the procedure in the second step may be implemented in the apparatus, or may be predetermined in the apparatus design stage. If a mechanism for executing the procedure in the second step is mounted on the apparatus, it is possible to switch the driving method so that the optimum operation according to the situation is performed. The situation here refers to the contents of the image data, the environment inside and outside the device (temperature, humidity, atmospheric pressure, light, sound, magnetic field, electric field, radiation dose,
Altitude, acceleration, moving speed, etc.), user settings, software version, etc. On the other hand, if the mechanism for executing the procedure in the second step is determined in advance at the device design stage, an optimum driving circuit for each driving method can be used, and the mechanism is determined. As a result, a reduction in manufacturing cost due to mass production effects can be expected.

Next, various driving methods determined by the procedure in the second step will be described in detail by specifically showing the values of n and m in the first step.

In the procedure 1 in the second step, when the method using the original image as it is as the sub image is selected, the driving method is as follows.

The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and the (i + 1) -th image data are sequentially prepared with a constant period T, and the period T is J (J is an integer of 2 or more) sub-image displays. Divided into periods, i
The image data is a data that allows each of a plurality of pixels to have a unique brightness L, and each of the j-th sub-images (j is an integer of 1 to J) has a unique brightness L _j . The display device includes a plurality of pixels juxtaposed and is displayed for the j-th sub-image display period T _j , and L, T, L _j , and T _j are represented by the display device satisfying the sub-image distribution condition. In all the j, the brightness L _j of each pixel included in the j-th sub-image is L _j = L for each pixel. Here, the original image data created in the first step can be used as the image data sequentially prepared at a fixed period T.
That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the driving method.

Then, when the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2 in the procedure 2 in the second step and T ₁ = T ₂ = T / 2 is determined in the procedure 3, the driving method is shown in FIG. It will be like that. In FIG. 39, the horizontal axis represents time, and the vertical axis represents various n and m used in the first step.

For example, in the first step, when n = 1, m = 1, that is, when the conversion ratio (n / m) is 1, the driving method as shown in the location of n = 1, m = 1 in FIG. Become. At this time, the display frame rate is twice the frame rate of the input image data (double speed driving). Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 120 Hz (120 Hz driving). Then, an image is continuously displayed twice for one input image data. Here, in the case of the double speed drive, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than the double speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is larger than the double speed. Furthermore, in the procedure 1 of the second step,
By selecting a method that uses the original image as a sub-image as it is, it is possible to stop the operation of a circuit that creates an intermediate image by motion compensation, or to omit the circuit itself from the device. Can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Further, it is effective to combine the AC drive and 120 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, while the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device is 120 Hz, the AC drive frequency is an integer multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz).
, 120 Hz, 240 Hz, etc.), flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about ½ times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 2, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m
) Is 2, the driving method is as shown at n = 2 and m = 1 in FIG. At this time, the display frame rate is four times (four times speed driving) the frame rate of the input image data. Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 240 Hz (240 Hz drive). Then, four images are continuously displayed for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Here, in the case of the quadruple speed drive, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than the quadruple speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is larger than the quadruple speed. Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device,
Since the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, it brings about a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. Further, it is effective to combine the AC drive and 240 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 240 Hz and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 240 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/4 times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 3, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m
) Is 3, the driving method is as shown in FIG. 39 where n = 3 and m = 1. At this time, the display frame rate is 6 times (6 × speed driving) the frame rate of the input image data. Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 360 Hz (360 Hz drive). Then, six images are continuously displayed for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Here, in the case of 6 × speed driving, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is lower than 6 × speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is higher than 6 × speed. Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device,
Since the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, it brings about a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. It is also effective to combine AC driving and 360 Hz driving of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 360 Hz and setting the frequency of AC driving to an integer multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 180 Hz, etc.), flicker that appears due to AC driving is It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/6 times the period of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 3, m = 2, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m
) Is 3/2, the driving method is as shown in FIG. 39 where n = 3 and m = 2.
At this time, the display frame rate is three times (three times speed driving) the frame rate of the input image data. Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 180 Hz (180 Hz drive). An image is displayed three times in succession for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Where 3
In the double speed drive, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than the triple speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is larger than the triple speed. Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Further, it is effective to combine the AC drive and 180 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 180 Hz and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 180 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/3 times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 4, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m
) Is 4, the driving method is as shown in FIG. 39 where n = 4 and m = 1. At this time, the display frame rate is 8 times (8 times speed driving) the frame rate of the input image data. Specifically, for example, when the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 480 Hz (480 Hz drive). Then, an image is continuously displayed 8 times for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Here, in the case of 8 × speed driving, the quality of moving images can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is lower than 8 × speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is higher than 8 × speed. Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device,
Since the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, it brings about a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. Further, it is effective to combine the AC drive and 480 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 480 Hz and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 240 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 4, m = 3, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m
) Is 4/3, the driving method is as shown in FIG. 39 where n = 4 and m = 3.
At this time, the display frame rate is 8/3 times the frame rate of the input image data (8
/ 3 times speed driving). Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 160 Hz (160 Hz drive). Then, the image is continuously displayed eight times for the three input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Here, in the case of 8/3 times speed driving, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than 8/3 times speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is larger than 8/3 times speed. Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage.
Furthermore, it is also effective to combine AC driving and 160 Hz driving of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 160 Hz and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 40 Hz, 80 Hz, 160 Hz, 320 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 5, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m
) Is 5, the drive method is as shown in FIG. 39 where n = 5 and m = 1. At this time, the display frame rate is 10 times (10 times speed driving) the frame rate of the input image data. Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 600 Hz (600 Hz drive). Then, the image is continuously displayed ten times for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. here,
In the case of 10 × speed driving, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than 10 × speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where it is larger than 10 × speed. Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. It is also effective to combine the AC drive and 600 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 600 Hz and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 100 Hz, 120 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/10 times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 5, m = 2, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m
) Is 5/2, the driving method is as shown in FIG. 39 where n = 5 and m = 2.
At this time, the display frame rate is 5 times (5 times speed driving) the frame rate of the input image data. Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 300 Hz (300 Hz drive). Then, the image is continuously displayed five times for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Here, in the case of 5 × speed driving, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is lower than 5 × speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is higher than 5 × speed. In addition, the second
In step 1 of step 1, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the apparatus. Power consumption and device manufacturing costs can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine AC driving and 300 Hz driving of the liquid crystal display device. That is, while the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device is 300 Hz, the AC driving frequency is an integer multiple or a fraction thereof (
For example, by setting the frequency to 30 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 100 Hz, etc., flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

As described above, in the procedure 1 in the second step, a method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected. In the procedure 2 in the second step, the number of sub-images is determined to be 2, and in the second step When T1 = T2 = T / 2 is determined in the procedure 3, the frame rate of the display frame rate is further doubled with respect to the frame rate conversion of the conversion ratio determined by the values of n and m in the first step. Therefore, the quality of the moving image can be further improved. Furthermore, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the display frame rate is lower than the display frame rate, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the display frame rate is higher than the display frame rate. Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage.
Furthermore, by increasing the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof, flickers that appear due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes. it can. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about (1 / (twice the conversion ratio)) times the cycle of the input image data.

Although detailed description is omitted, it is clear that the same advantages can be obtained in cases other than the conversion ratio raised above. For example, in the range where n is 10 or less, in addition to the above, n = 5, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/3 (10/3 double speed drive, 20
0 Hz), n = 5, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/4 (5/2 double speed drive, 15
0 Hz), n = 6, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 6 (12 × speed drive, 720 Hz)
), N = 6, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 6/5 (12/5 double speed drive, 144H)
z), n = 7, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7 (14 × speed drive, 840 Hz),
n = 7, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/2 (7 × speed driving, 420 Hz), n =
7, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/3 (14/3 double speed drive, 280 Hz), n
= 7, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/4 (7/2 double speed drive, 210 Hz), n
= 7, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/5 (14/5 double speed drive, 168 Hz),
n = 7, m = 6, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/6 (7/3 double speed drive, 140 Hz),
n = 8, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8 (16 × speed drive, 960 Hz), n = 8
, M = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/3 (16/3 double speed drive, 320 Hz), n =
8, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/5 (16/5 double speed drive, 192 Hz), n
= 8, m = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/7 (16/7 double speed drive, 137 Hz),
n = 9, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9 (18 × speed driving, 1080 Hz), n =
9, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/2 (9-times speed driving, 540 Hz), n = 9,
m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/4 (9/2 double speed drive, 270 Hz), n = 9,
m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/5 (18/5 double speed drive, 216 Hz), n = 9
, M = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/7 (18/7 double speed drive, 154 Hz), n =
9, m = 8, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/8 (9/4 double speed drive, 135 Hz), n =
10, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10 (20 × speed drive, 1200 Hz), n =
10, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/3 (20/3 double speed drive, 400 Hz)
, N = 10, m = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/7 (20/7 double speed drive, 171
Hz), n = 10, m = 9, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/9 (20/9 double speed drive)
133 Hz), a combination of the above. The frequency notation is an example when the input frame rate is 60 Hz. For other input frame rates, a value obtained by integrating twice the respective conversion ratios with the input frame rate is the drive frequency.

In the case where n is an integer greater than 10, specific numbers of n and m are not mentioned, but it is clear that the procedure in the second step can be applied to various n and m. .

When J = 2, it is particularly effective if the conversion ratio in the first step is greater than 2. This is because if the number of sub-images is relatively small in the second step, such as J = 2, the conversion ratio in the first step can be increased accordingly. Such a conversion ratio is 3, 4, 5, 5/2, 6, 7 in a range where n is 10 or less.
7/2, 7/3, 8, 8/3, 9, 9/2, 9/4, 10, 10/3.
When the display frame rate after the first step is such a value, an advantage of reducing the number of sub-images in the second step (reducing power consumption and manufacturing cost, etc.) by setting J = 3 or more. In addition, it is possible to achieve both the advantages (high quality of moving images, reduction of flicker, etc.) due to the large final display frame rate.

Here, in step 2, the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2, and in step 3, T ₁ =
Although the case where T ₂ = T / 2 has been described has been described, it is obvious that the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in the procedure 3 in the second step, when T ₁ <T ₂ is determined, the first sub-image can be made brighter and the second sub-image can be made darker. In addition, the second
If it is determined that T ₁ > T ₂ in the procedure 3 in step S1, the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made lighter. In this way, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. However, when the method of using the original image as it is as the sub image is selected in the procedure 1 as in the above driving method, it may be displayed as it is without changing the brightness of the sub image. This is because in this case, since the images used as the sub images are the same, the original image can be displayed properly regardless of the display timing of the sub images.

Further, in the procedure 2, it is obvious that the number J of sub-images may be determined to be other than 2 instead of 2. In this case, the display frame rate can be further increased to J times the frame rate conversion of the conversion ratio determined by the values of n and m in the first step, so that the quality of the moving image is further improved. Is possible. Furthermore, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the display frame rate is lower than the display frame rate, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the display frame rate is higher than the display frame rate. Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, by increasing the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof, flickers that appear due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes. it can. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about (1 / (J times the conversion ratio)) times the cycle of the input image data.

For example, when J = 3, the quality of the moving image can be improved more than when the number of sub-images is smaller than 3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the number of sub-images is larger than 3. Have advantages. Further, the response time of the liquid crystal element is (1 of the cycle of the input image data.
By applying to a liquid crystal display device that is approximately / (3 times the conversion ratio)) times, the image quality can be improved.

Furthermore, for example, when J = 4, the quality of the moving image can be improved particularly when the number of sub-images is smaller than 4, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost are reduced as compared with the case where the number of sub-images is larger than 4. It has the advantage of being able to. Furthermore, by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1 / (4 times the conversion ratio) of the cycle of the input image data, the image quality can be improved.

Furthermore, for example, when J = 5, the quality of the moving image can be improved particularly when the number of sub-images is smaller than 5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost are reduced as compared with the case where the number of sub-images is larger than 5. It has the advantage of being able to. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 1 / (5 times the conversion ratio) times the cycle of the input image data.

Furthermore, even if J is other than those listed above, it has similar advantages.

When J = 3 or more, the conversion ratio in the first step can take various values. In particular, when the conversion ratio in the first step is relatively small (2 or less), J = 3
The above is effective. This is because if the display frame rate after the first step is relatively small, J can be increased by that amount in the second step. Such a conversion ratio is 1, 2, 3/2, 4/3, in the range where n is 10 or less.
5/3, 5/4, 6/5, 7/4, 7/5, 7/6, 8/7, 9/5, 9/7, 9/8,
10/7, 10/9. Of these, the conversion ratio is 1, 2, 3/2, 4/3, 5 /
The case of 3, 5/4 is illustrated in FIG. As described above, when the display frame rate after the first step is a relatively small value, by setting J = 3 or more, the advantage of the small display frame rate in the first step (the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced). Reduction) and the advantages (high quality of moving images, reduction of flicker, etc.) due to a large final display frame rate can be achieved at the same time.

Next, another example of the driving method determined by the procedure in the second step will be described.

In the procedure 1 in the second step, when the black insertion method is selected among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images, the driving method is as follows.

The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and the (i + 1) -th image data are sequentially prepared with a constant period T, and the period T is J (J is an integer of 2 or more) sub-image displays. Divided into periods, i
The image data is a data that allows each of a plurality of pixels to have a unique brightness L, and each of the j-th sub-images (j is an integer of 1 to J) has a unique brightness L _j . The display device includes a plurality of pixels juxtaposed and is displayed for the j-th sub-image display period T _j , and L, T, L _j , and T _j are represented by the display device satisfying the sub-image distribution condition. A driving method for the brightness L of all pixels included in the j-th sub-image in at least one j
_j is L _j = 0. Here, the original image data created in the first step can be used as the image data sequentially prepared at a fixed period T. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the driving method.

It should be noted that the above driving method can be implemented in combination with respect to various n and m used in the first step.

Then, when the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2 in the procedure 2 in the second step and T ₁ = T ₂ = T / 2 is determined in the procedure 3, the driving method is shown in FIG. It will be like that. Since the features and advantages of the driving method (display timings at various n and m) shown in FIG. It is clear that the same advantage is obtained when the black insertion method is selected among the methods for distributing the image to a plurality of sub-images. For example, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved.
Furthermore, when the display frame rate is high, the quality of the moving image can be improved, and when the display frame rate is low, power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, flicker that appears due to AC drive can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye.

Among the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images in the procedure 1 of the second step, a characteristic advantage of selecting the black insertion method is that an intermediate image is created by motion compensation. Since the operation of the circuit can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the device,
The power consumption and the manufacturing cost of the device can be reduced. Furthermore, since the impulse-type display method can be made pseudo regardless of the gradation value included in the image data, the quality of the moving image can be improved.

Here, in step 2, the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2, and in step 3, T ₁ =
Although the case where T ₂ = T / 2 has been described has been described, it is obvious that the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in the procedure 3 in the second step, when T ₁ <T ₂ is determined, the first sub-image can be made brighter and the second sub-image can be made darker. In addition, the second
If it is determined that T ₁ > T ₂ in the procedure 3 in step S1, the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made lighter. In this way, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. However, when the black insertion method is selected in the method of distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images in the procedure 1 as in the above driving method, the brightness of the sub-image is not changed. Alternatively, it may be displayed as it is. because,
In this case, if the brightness of the sub-image is not changed, the entire brightness of the original image is only darkened and displayed. That is, by actively using this method for controlling the brightness of the display device, the brightness can be controlled while improving the quality of the moving image.

Further, in the procedure 2, it is obvious that the number J of sub-images may be determined to be other than 2 instead of 2. Since the advantages in that case have already been described, detailed description is omitted here. Of the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images in step 1 in the second step, the black insertion method is used. Obviously, the selected case has similar advantages. For example, the response time of the liquid crystal element is 1 / (J times the conversion ratio) of the cycle of the input image data
) The image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device of about double.

Next, another example of the driving method determined by the procedure in the second step will be described.

In the procedure 1 in the second step, when the time-division gradation control method is selected from among the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images, the driving method is as follows.

The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and the (i + 1) -th image data are sequentially prepared with a constant period T, and the period T is J (J is an integer of 2 or more) sub-image displays. Divided into periods, i
The image data is a data that allows each of a plurality of pixels to have a unique brightness L. The unique brightness L has a maximum value L _max , and j (j is 1 or more and J or less). (Integer) sub-image is formed by juxtaposing a plurality of pixels each having a unique brightness L _j , and is an image that is displayed only during the j-th sub-image display period T _j . L, T, L _j , T _j ,
A method of driving a display device that satisfies the sub-image distribution condition, and displays brightness in a brightness range of (j−1) × L _max / J to J × L _max / J when displaying the inherent brightness L. Is adjusted by adjusting the brightness in only one sub-image display period among the J sub-image display periods. Here, the original image data created in the first step can be used as the image data sequentially prepared at a fixed period T. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the driving method.

It should be noted that the above driving method can be implemented in combination with respect to various n and m used in the first step.

Then, when the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2 in the procedure 2 in the second step and T ₁ = T ₂ = T / 2 is determined in the procedure 3, the driving method is shown in FIG. It will be like that. Since the features and advantages of the driving method (display timing at various n and m) shown in FIG. 39 have already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted here, but in procedure 1 in the second step, the brightness of the original image It is clear that the same advantage is obtained when the time-division gradation control method is selected among the methods for distributing the image to a plurality of sub-images. For example,
When the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation,
Since the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. Furthermore, when the display frame rate is high, the quality of the moving image can be improved, and when the display frame rate is low, power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, flicker that appears due to AC drive can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye.

Among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images in the procedure 1 of the second step, the characteristic advantage of selecting the time-division gradation control method is that the intermediate image is obtained by motion compensation. Since the operation of the circuit for generating the circuit can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the apparatus, the power consumption and the manufacturing cost of the apparatus can be reduced. further,
Since a pseudo impulse display method can be used, the quality of moving images can be improved and the brightness of the display device does not decrease, so that power consumption can be further reduced.

Here, in step 2, the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2, and in step 3, T ₁ =
Although the case where T ₂ = T / 2 has been described has been described, it is obvious that the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in the procedure 3 in the second step, when T ₁ <T ₂ is determined, the first sub-image can be made brighter and the second sub-image can be made darker. In addition, the second
If it is determined that T ₁ > T ₂ in the procedure 3 in step S1, the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made lighter. In this way, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. In this way, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved.

Further, in the procedure 2, it is obvious that the number J of sub-images may be determined to be other than 2 instead of 2. Since the advantages in that case have already been described, detailed description is omitted here, but among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images in step 1 in the second step, time-division gradation Obviously, when the control method is selected, it has similar advantages. For example, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1 / (J times the conversion ratio) of the cycle of the input image data.

Next, another example of the driving method determined by the procedure in the second step will be described.

In the procedure 1 in the second step, when the gamma complement method is selected among the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images, the driving method is as follows.

The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and the (i + 1) -th image data are sequentially prepared with a constant period T, and the period T is J (J is an integer of 2 or more) sub-image displays. Divided into periods, i
The image data is a data that allows each of a plurality of pixels to have a unique brightness L, and each of the j-th sub-images (j is an integer of 1 to J) has a unique brightness L _j . The display device includes a plurality of pixels juxtaposed and is displayed for the j-th sub-image display period T _j , and L, T, L _j , and T _j are represented by the display device satisfying the sub-image distribution condition. In each sub-image, the characteristics of the change in brightness with respect to gradation are shifted from linear, the total amount of brightness shifted from linear to brighter, and brightness shifted from linear to darker. The total amount is roughly equal for all tones. Here, the original image data created in the first step can be used as the image data sequentially prepared at a fixed period T. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the driving method.

It should be noted that the above driving method can be implemented in combination with respect to various n and m used in the first step.

Then, when the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2 in the procedure 2 in the second step and T ₁ = T ₂ = T / 2 is determined in the procedure 3, the driving method is shown in FIG. It will be like that. Since the features and advantages of the driving method (display timing at various n and m) shown in FIG. 39 have already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted here, but in procedure 1 in the second step, the brightness of the original image It is clear that the same advantage is obtained when the gamma complement method is selected among the methods for distributing the image to a plurality of sub-images. For example, the first
If the interpolated image in this step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, when the display frame rate is high, the quality of the moving image can be improved, and when the display frame rate is low, power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, flicker that appears due to AC drive can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye.

In the procedure 1 of the second step, among the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, a characteristic advantage of selecting the gamma complement method is that an intermediate image is created by motion compensation. Since the operation of the circuit can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the apparatus, the power consumption and the manufacturing cost of the apparatus can be reduced. Furthermore, since the impulse-type display method can be made pseudo regardless of the gradation value included in the image data, the quality of the moving image can be improved. Further, the sub-image may be obtained by directly gamma-converting the image data. In this case, there is an advantage that the gamma value can be controlled variously depending on the magnitude of the motion of the moving image. Further, the image data may not be directly gamma-converted, and the sub-image with the changed gamma value may be obtained by changing the reference voltage of the digital-analog converter circuit (DAC). In this case, since the image data is not directly gamma-converted, a circuit for performing gamma conversion can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the apparatus, so that power consumption and manufacturing cost of the apparatus can be reduced. . Further, in the gamma complement method, since the change in the brightness L _j of each sub-image with respect to the gradation follows the gamma curve, each sub-image can display the gradation smoothly by itself, and finally the human The image quality perceived by the eyes is also improved.

Here, in step 2, the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2, and in step 3, T ₁ =
Although the case where T ₂ = T / 2 has been described has been described, it is obvious that the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in the procedure 3 in the second step, when T ₁ <T ₂ is determined, the first sub-image can be made brighter and the second sub-image can be made darker. In addition, the second
If it is determined that T ₁ > T ₂ in the procedure 3 in step S1, the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made lighter. In this way, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. As in the above driving method, the procedure 1
In the method of distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images, when the gamma method is selected, the gamma value may be changed when the brightness of the sub-image is changed. That is, the gamma value may be determined according to the display timing of the second sub-image. In this way, a circuit that changes the brightness of the entire image can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the apparatus, so that power consumption and manufacturing cost of the apparatus can be reduced.

Further, in the procedure 2, it is obvious that the number J of sub-images may be determined to be other than 2 instead of 2. Since the advantages in that case have already been described, detailed description is omitted here, but among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images in step 1 in the second step, time-division gradation Obviously, when the control method is selected, it has similar advantages. For example, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1 / (J times the conversion ratio) of the cycle of the input image data.

Next, another example of the driving method determined by the procedure in the second step will be described in detail.

In the procedure 1 in the second step, a method of using the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub-image is selected. In the procedure 2 in the second step, the number of sub-images is 2
And in the procedure 3 in the second step, when T1 = T2 = T / 2 is determined, the driving method determined by the procedure in the second step is as follows.

The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and the (i + 1) -th image data are sequentially prepared at a constant period T, and the k-th (k is a positive integer) image, the k + 1-th image, , A display device driving method for sequentially displaying k + 2 images at intervals of 1/2 times the period of the original image data, wherein the kth image is displayed according to the i th image data, The (k + 1) th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a motion obtained by halving the motion from the ith image data to the (i + 1) th image data, and the (k + 2) th image is displayed according to the (i + 1) th image data. Is displayed.
Here, the original image data created in the first step can be used as the image data sequentially prepared at a fixed period T. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the driving method.

It should be noted that the above driving method can be implemented in combination with respect to various n and m used in the first step.

In the procedure 1 in the second step, the characteristic advantage of selecting the method using the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub-image is that the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation in the procedure in the first step is selected. When the interpolated image is used, the method for obtaining the intermediate image used in the first step can be used as it is in the second step. That is, a circuit for obtaining an intermediate image by motion compensation can be used not only in the first step but also in the second step, so that the circuit can be used effectively and the processing efficiency can be improved. In addition, since the movement of the image can be further smoothed, the quality of the moving image can be further improved.

Here, in step 2, the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2, and in step 3, T ₁ =
Although the case where T ₂ = T / 2 has been described has been described, it is obvious that the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in the procedure 3 in the second step, when T ₁ <T ₂ is determined, the first sub-image can be made brighter and the second sub-image can be made darker. In addition, the second
If it is determined that T ₁ > T ₂ in the procedure 3 in step S1, the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made lighter. In this way, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. In this way, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. As in the above driving method, in step 2,
When a method using an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub-image is selected, the brightness of the sub-image need not be changed. This is because the image in the intermediate state is completed as an image by itself, so that even if the display timing of the second sub-image changes, the image perceived by human eyes does not change. In this case, a circuit that changes the brightness of the entire image can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the apparatus, so that power consumption and manufacturing cost of the apparatus can be reduced.

Further, in the procedure 2, it is obvious that the number J of sub-images may be determined to be other than 2 instead of 2. Since the advantages in that case have already been described, detailed description will be omitted here, but the same applies when the method using the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as the sub image is selected in step 1 in the second step. Obviously, it has many advantages. For example, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1 / (J times the conversion ratio) of the cycle of the input image data.

Next, a specific example of a frame rate conversion method when the input frame rate and the display frame rate are different will be described with reference to FIG. In the methods shown in FIGS. 41A to 41C, it is assumed that a circular area on the image is an area whose position changes depending on the frame, and a triangular area on the image is an area whose position hardly changes depending on the frame. Yes. However,
This is an example for explanation, and the displayed image is not limited to this. The methods of FIGS. 41A to 41C can be applied to various images.

FIG. 41A shows a case where the display frame rate is twice the input frame rate (conversion ratio is 2). When the conversion ratio is 2, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 2. Further, when the conversion ratio is 2, there is an advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 2. FIG.
A) schematically shows the temporal change of the displayed image with the horizontal axis as time. Here, the image of interest is referred to as a p-th image (p is a positive integer). The image displayed next to the image of interest is the (p + 1) th image,
For the sake of convenience, how far away from the image of interest the image that is displayed before the image of interest is displayed, such as the (p-1) -th image. I will do it. The image 180701 is the pth image, the image 180702 is the (p + 1) th image, the image 180703 is the (p + 2) th image, the image 180704 is the (p + 3) th image, the image1
It is assumed that 80705 is the (p + 4) th image. The period Tin represents the cycle of the input image data. Note that FIG. 41A shows the case where the conversion ratio is 2, and thus the period Tin
Is twice as long as the period from when the p-th image is displayed until the (p + 1) -th image is displayed.

Here, the (p + 1) -th image 180702 is changed from the p-th image 180701 to the (p + 2) -th image.
It may be an image created so as to be in an intermediate state between the p-th image 180701 and the (p + 2) -th image 180703 by detecting the amount of change in the image up to the image 180703. In FIG. 41A, the state of the image in the intermediate state is represented by a region (a circular region) whose position changes depending on the frame and a region (a triangular region) whose position hardly changes depending on the frame. That is, the position of the circular area in the (p + 1) th image 180702 is an intermediate position between the position in the pth image 180701 and the position in the (p + 2) image 180703. That is, the (p + 1) th image 180702 is obtained by performing motion compensation and interpolating image data. Thus, smooth display can be performed by performing motion compensation on an object having motion on an image and interpolating image data.

Further, the (p + 1) -th image 180702 includes the p-th image 180701 and the (p + 2) -th image.
The image may be an image in which the brightness of the image is controlled according to a certain rule. For example, as shown in FIG. 41 (A), the fixed rule is L when the representative luminance of the p-th image 180701 is L and the representative luminance of the (p + 1) -th image 180702 is Lc. Lc may have a relationship of L> Lc. Preferably
There may be a relationship of 0.1L <Lc <0.8L. More desirably, 0.2L <L
There may be a relationship of c <0.5L. Or conversely, there may be a relationship of L <Lc between L and Lc. Desirably, there may be a relationship of 0.1Lc <L <0.8Lc.
More desirably, there may be a relationship of 0.2Lc <L <0.5Lc. By doing so, the display can be made pseudo-impulse type, so that an afterimage of the eye can be suppressed.

Note that typical luminance of an image will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

In this way, there are two different causes for moving image blur (that is, the movement of the image is not smooth,
And the afterimage of the eye) can be solved at the same time to greatly reduce motion blur.

Further, for the (p + 3) -th image 180704, the (p + 2) -th image 180703 is also used.
It may also be created from the (p + 4) th image 180705 using a similar method. That is, the (p + 3) -th image 180704 is changed from the (p + 2) -th image 180703 to the (p + 2) -th image 180704.
By detecting the amount of change in the image up to +4) image 180705, the (p + 2) th image 1
The image may be an image created so as to be in an intermediate state between the 80703 and the (p + 4) th image 180705, and the image brightness may be controlled according to a certain rule.

FIG. 41B shows a case where the display frame rate is three times the input frame rate (conversion ratio is 3). FIG. 41B schematically shows a temporal change in the displayed image with the horizontal axis as time. An image 180711 is a p-th image, an image 1807
12 is a (p + 1) th image, and image 180713 is a (p + 2) th image, image 180714.
Is the (p + 3) th image, image 180715 is the (p + 4) th image, image 180716 is the (p + 5) th image, and image 180717 is the (p + 6) th image. The period Tin represents the cycle of the input image data. 41B shows a case where the conversion ratio is 3, the period Tin is three times the period from when the p-th image is displayed until the (p + 1) -th image is displayed. It becomes length.

Here, the (p + 1) -th image 180712 and the (p + 2) -th image 180713 detect the amount of change in the image from the p-th image 180711 to the (p + 3) -th image 180714, and thereby the p-th image 180711. It may also be an image created so as to be in an intermediate state between the (p + 3) -th image 180714. In FIG. 41B, the state of the image in the intermediate state is represented by a region (a circular region) whose position is changed by the frame and a region (a triangular region) whose position is hardly changed by the frame. That is, the position of the circular area in the (p + 1) th image 180712 and the (p + 2) image 180713 is set to a position intermediate between the position in the pth image 180711 and the position in the (p + 3) image 180714. Specifically, when the amount of movement of the circular area detected from the p-th image 180711 and the (p + 3) image 180714 is X, the position of the circular area in the (p + 1) -th image 180712 is It may be a position displaced about (1/3) X from the position in the p-th image 180711. Furthermore, the (p + 2) -th image 1807
The position of the circular area in 13 is (2/3) from the position in the p-th image 180711.
) The position may be displaced by about X. That is, the (p + 1) th image 180712 and the (p + 2) image 180713 are obtained by performing motion compensation and interpolating image data. Thus, smooth display can be performed by performing motion compensation on an object having motion on an image and interpolating image data.

Furthermore, the (p + 1) -th image 180712 and the (p + 2) -th image 180713 are created so as to be in an intermediate state between the p-th image 180711 and the (p + 3) -th image 180714, and the brightness of the image is constant. The image may be controlled according to the rules. For example, as shown in FIG. 41B, the certain rule is that the representative luminance of the p-th image 180711 is L, (
The typical luminance of the (p + 1) -th image 180712 is Lc1, and the (p + 2) -th image 180713.
When Lc2 is a representative luminance, L> Lc1 or L in L, Lc1, and Lc2
There may be a relationship of> Lc2 or Lc1 = Lc2. Desirably, 0.1 L <Lc
There may be a relationship of 1 = Lc2 <0.8L. More preferably, 0.2L <Lc =
There may be a relationship of Lc2 <0.5L. Or, conversely, in L, Lc1, and Lc2, there may be a relationship of L <Lc1 or L <Lc2 or Lc1 = Lc2. Desirably, there may be a relationship of 0.1Lc1 = 0.1Lc2 <L <0.8Lc1 = 0.8Lc2. More preferably, 0.2Lc1 = 0.2Lc2 <L <0.5Lc1 = 0.5
There may be a relationship of Lc2. By doing so, the display can be made pseudo-impulse type, so that an afterimage of the eye can be suppressed. Or you may make it the image which changes a brightness | luminance appear alternately. By doing so, the cycle in which the luminance changes can be shortened, and flicker can be reduced.

In this way, there are two different causes for moving image blur (that is, the movement of the image is not smooth,
And the afterimage of the eye) can be solved at the same time to greatly reduce motion blur.

Further, the (p + 4) image 180715 and the (p + 5) image 180716 may also be created from the (p + 3) image 180714 and the (p + 6) image 180717 using the same method. That is, the (p + 4) -th image 180715 and the (p + 5) -th image 180716 are detected by detecting the amount of change in the image from the (p + 3) -th image 180714 to the (p + 6) -th image 180717 (p + 3). Image 18071
The image may be an image created so as to be in an intermediate state between the fourth and (p + 6) th images 180717, and the image brightness may be controlled according to a certain rule.

When the method of FIG. 41B is used, the display frame rate is large, so that the movement of the image can follow the movement of the eyes well, and the movement of the image can be displayed smoothly. Can be greatly reduced.

In FIG. 41C, the display frame rate is 1.5 times the input frame rate (conversion ratio 1.5).
). FIG. 41C schematically shows the temporal change of the displayed image with the horizontal axis as time. Image 180721 is the pth image, image 1
80722 is the (p + 1) -th image, image 180723 is the (p + 2) -th image, and image 180
Suppose that 724 is the (p + 3) th image. Although not actually displayed, the image 180725 is input image data, and the (p + 1) th image 180722 and the (p
+2) image 180723 may be used to create the image. The period Tin represents the cycle of the input image data. Note that FIG. 41C illustrates a case where the conversion ratio is 1.5. Therefore, the period Tin is a period from the display of the pth image to the display of the (p + 1) th image. .5 times longer.

Here, the (p + 1) -th image 180722 and the (p + 2) -th image 180723 are transmitted from the p-th image 180721 through the image 180725 to the (p + 3) -th image 180724.
The image may be an image created so as to be in an intermediate state between the p-th image 180721 and the (p + 3) -th image 180724 by detecting the change amount of the image up to. In FIG. 41C, the state of the image in the intermediate state is represented by an area whose position changes depending on the frame (circular area) and an area whose position does not substantially change depending on the frame (triangular area).
That is, the position of the circular area in the (p + 1) -th image 180722 and the (p + 2) -th image 180723 is an intermediate position between the position in the p-th image 180721 and the position in the (p + 3) -th image 180724. That is, the (p + 1) th image 180
The 722 and the (p + 2) -th image 180723 are obtained by performing motion compensation and interpolating image data. Thus, smooth display can be performed by performing motion compensation on an object having motion on an image and interpolating image data.

Further, the (p + 1) -th image 180722 and the (p + 2) -th image 180723 are created so as to be in an intermediate state between the p-th image 180721 and the (p + 3) -th image 180724, and the brightness of the image is constant. The image may be controlled according to the rules. For example, as shown in FIG. 41C, the certain rule is that the representative luminance of the p-th image 180721 is L,
The typical luminance of the (p + 1) -th image 180722 is Lc1, and the (p + 2) -th image 180723.
When Lc2 is a representative luminance, L> Lc1 or L in L, Lc1, and Lc2
There may be a relationship of> Lc2 or Lc1 = Lc2. Desirably, 0.1 L <Lc
There may be a relationship of 1 = Lc2 <0.8L. More preferably, 0.2L <Lc =
There may be a relationship of Lc2 <0.5L. Or, conversely, in L, Lc1, and Lc2, there may be a relationship of L <Lc1 or L <Lc2 or Lc1 = Lc2. Desirably, there may be a relationship of 0.1Lc1 = 0.1Lc2 <L <0.8Lc1 = 0.8Lc2. More preferably, 0.2Lc1 = 0.2Lc2 <L <0.5Lc1 = 0.5
There may be a relationship of Lc2. By doing so, the display can be made pseudo-impulse type, so that an afterimage of the eye can be suppressed. Or you may make it the image which changes a brightness | luminance appear alternately. By doing so, the cycle in which the luminance changes can be shortened, and flicker can be reduced.

In this way, there are two different causes for moving image blur (that is, the movement of the image is not smooth,
And the afterimage of the eye) can be solved at the same time to greatly reduce motion blur.

Note that when the method in FIG. 41C is used, the display frame rate is low, so that the time for writing a signal to the display device can be extended. Therefore, the clock frequency of the display device can be reduced, so that power consumption can be reduced. In addition, since the processing speed for performing motion compensation can be reduced, power consumption can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, typical luminance of an image will be described. 42 (A) through (D
The diagram shown in () schematically represents the temporal change of the displayed image with the horizontal axis as time. FIG. 42E illustrates an example of a method for measuring the luminance of an image in a certain region.

As a method of measuring the luminance of an image, there is a method of measuring the luminance individually for each pixel constituting the image. When this method is used, it is possible to measure the brightness strictly to the details of the image.

However, since the method of measuring the luminance individually for each pixel constituting the image is very labor intensive, another method may be used. As another method for measuring the luminance of the image, there is a method of paying attention to a certain area in the image and measuring the average luminance of the area. By this method, the brightness of the image can be easily measured. In the present embodiment, the luminance obtained by the method of measuring the average luminance of a certain area in the image is referred to as the representative luminance of the image for convenience.

Then, in order to obtain the representative luminance of the image, a description will be given below of which region in the image is focused.

FIG. 42A illustrates an example of a method in which the luminance of a region (a triangular region) whose position does not substantially change with respect to a change in the image is set as a representative luminance of the image. The period Tin is the cycle of the input image data, the image 180801 is the pth image, the image 180802 is the (p + 1) th image, and the image 18
0803 is the (p + 2) -th image, the first region 180804 is the luminance measurement region in the p-th image 180801, the second region 180805 is the luminance measurement region in the (p + 1) -th image 180802, and the third region 180806 is the first region. The luminance measurement areas in the (p + 2) image 180803 are respectively shown. Here, the first to third regions may be substantially the same as the spatial position in the apparatus. That is, by measuring the representative luminance of the image in the first to third regions, it is possible to obtain the temporal change in the representative luminance of the image.

By measuring the representative luminance of the image, it can be determined whether or not the display is pseudo-impulse type. For example, the luminance measured in the first region 180804 is L,
When the luminance measured in the second region 180805 is Lc, if Lc <L, the display can be said to be a pseudo impulse type. In such a case, it can be said that the quality of the moving image is improved.

In the luminance measurement region, the image quality can be improved when the typical amount of change in luminance (relative luminance) of the image with respect to time changes is in the following range. As the relative luminance, for example, the larger one for each of the first region 180804 and the second region 180805, the second region 180805 and the third region 180806, and the first region 180804 and the third region 180806, respectively. It can be the ratio of the smaller luminance to the luminance. That is, when the change amount of the typical luminance of the image with respect to the change of time is 0, the relative luminance is 100%. If the relative luminance is 80% or less, the quality of the moving image can be improved. In particular, if the relative luminance is 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 10% or more, power consumption can be reduced and flicker can be suppressed. In particular, the relative luminance is 2
If it is 0% or more, power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced. That is,
If the relative luminance is 10% or more and 80% or less, the quality of moving images can be improved, and power consumption and flicker can be reduced. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 20% or more and 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved, and the power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced.

FIG. 42B shows an example of a method of measuring the luminance of the area divided into tiles and setting the average value as the representative luminance of the image. The period Tin is the period of the input image data, and the image 1808
11 is the p-th image, image 180812 is the (p + 1) -th image, and image 180813 is the (p + 1) -th image.
+2) image, the first region 180814 is the luminance measurement region in the p-th image 180811, the second region 180815 is the luminance measurement region in the (p + 1) -th image 180812, and the third region 180816 is the (p + 2) -th image. The luminance measurement areas in the image 180813 are respectively shown. Here, the first to third regions may be substantially the same as the spatial position in the apparatus. That is, by measuring the representative luminance of the image in the first to third regions, it is possible to obtain the temporal change in the representative luminance of the image.

By measuring the representative luminance of the image, it can be determined whether or not the display is pseudo-impulse type. For example, if Lc is an average value in all areas of luminance measured in the first area 180814 and Lc is an average value in all areas of luminance measured in the second area 180815, then Lc <L. In other words, it can be said that the display is a pseudo impulse type. In such a case, it can be said that the quality of the moving image is improved.

In the luminance measurement region, the image quality can be improved when the typical amount of change in luminance (relative luminance) of the image with respect to time changes is in the following range. As the relative luminance, for example, the larger one of the first region 180814 and the second region 180815, the second region 180815 and the third region 180816, and the first region 180814 and the third region 180816, respectively. It can be the ratio of the smaller luminance to the luminance. That is, when the change amount of the typical luminance of the image with respect to the change of time is 0, the relative luminance is 100%. If the relative luminance is 80% or less, the quality of the moving image can be improved. In particular, if the relative luminance is 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 10% or more, power consumption can be reduced and flicker can be suppressed. In particular, the relative luminance is 2
If it is 0% or more, power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced. That is,
If the relative luminance is 10% or more and 80% or less, the quality of moving images can be improved, and power consumption and flicker can be reduced. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 20% or more and 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved, and the power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced.

FIG. 42C illustrates an example of a method in which the luminance of the central region of the image is measured and the average value is used as the representative luminance of the image. The period Tin is the period of the input image data, the image 180821 is the pth image, the image 180822 is the (p + 1) th image, the image 180823 is the (p + 2) image, and the first region 180824 is the luminance in the pth image 180821. The measurement area, the second area 180825 represents the luminance measurement area in the (p + 1) -th image 180822, and the third area 180826 represents the luminance measurement area in the (p + 2) -th image 180823, respectively.

By measuring the representative luminance of the image, it can be determined whether or not the display is pseudo-impulse type. For example, the luminance measured in the first region 180824 is L,
When the luminance measured in the second region 180825 is Lc, if Lc <L, the display can be said to be a pseudo impulse type. In such a case, it can be said that the quality of the moving image is improved.

In the luminance measurement region, the image quality can be improved when the typical amount of change in luminance (relative luminance) of the image with respect to time changes is in the following range. As the relative luminance, for example, the larger one for each of the first region 180824 and the second region 180825, the second region 180825 and the third region 180826, and the first region 180824 and the third region 180826, respectively. It can be the ratio of the smaller luminance to the luminance. That is, when the change amount of the typical luminance of the image with respect to the change of time is 0, the relative luminance is 100%. If the relative luminance is 80% or less, the quality of the moving image can be improved. In particular, if the relative luminance is 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 10% or more, power consumption can be reduced and flicker can be suppressed. In particular, the relative luminance is 2
If it is 0% or more, power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced. That is,
If the relative luminance is 10% or more and 80% or less, the quality of moving images can be improved, and power consumption and flicker can be reduced. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 20% or more and 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved, and the power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced.

FIG. 42D illustrates an example of a method in which the luminance of a plurality of points sampled from the entire image is measured and the average value is used as the representative luminance of the image. The period Tin is the cycle of the input image data,
An image 180831 is a pth image, an image 180832 is a (p + 1) th image, an image 1808
33 is the (p + 2) -th image, the first region 180834 is the luminance measurement region in the p-th image 180831, the second region 180835 is the luminance measurement region in the (p + 1) -th image 180832, and the third region 180836 is the first region. The luminance measurement regions in the (p + 2) image 180833 are respectively shown.

By measuring the representative luminance of the image, it can be determined whether or not the display is pseudo-impulse type. For example, if Lc is an average value in all regions of luminance measured in the first region 180834 and Lc is an average value in all regions of luminance measured in the second region 180835, Lc <L. In other words, it can be said that the display is a pseudo impulse type. In such a case, it can be said that the quality of the moving image is improved.

In the luminance measurement region, the image quality can be improved when the typical amount of change in luminance (relative luminance) of the image with respect to time changes is in the following range. As the relative luminance, for example, the larger one for each of the first region 180834 and the second region 180835, the second region 180835 and the third region 180836, and the first region 180834 and the third region 180836. It can be the ratio of the smaller luminance to the luminance. That is, when the change amount of the typical luminance of the image with respect to the change of time is 0, the relative luminance is 100%. If the relative luminance is 80% or less, the quality of the moving image can be improved. In particular, if the relative luminance is 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 10% or more, power consumption can be reduced and flicker can be suppressed. In particular, the relative luminance is 2
If it is 0% or more, power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced. That is,
If the relative luminance is 10% or more and 80% or less, the quality of moving images can be improved, and power consumption and flicker can be reduced. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 20% or more and 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved, and the power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced.

FIG. 42E is a diagram illustrating a measurement method in the luminance measurement region in the diagrams illustrated in FIGS. A region 180841 is a luminance measurement region of interest, and a point 180842 is a luminance measurement point in the region 180841. Since the measurement target range of a luminance measuring device with high temporal resolution may be small, when the region 180841 is large, the entire region is not measured, but the region 180841 is pointed as shown in FIG. The brightness of the region 180841 may be obtained by measuring at a plurality of points without unevenness in the shape, and calculating the average value.

When the image has a combination of the three primary colors R, G, and B, the measured luminance is R, G
, B may be combined, R and G combined, G and B combined, B and R combined, and each of R, G, B It may be brightness.

Next, a method of detecting the movement of the image included in the input image data and creating an intermediate state image,
A method for controlling the driving method according to the movement of the image included in the input image data will be described.

With reference to FIG. 43, an example of a method for detecting the motion of an image included in input image data and creating an intermediate state image will be described. FIG. 43A shows a case where the display frame rate is twice the input frame rate (conversion ratio is 2). FIG. 43A schematically shows a method of detecting the motion of an image using the horizontal axis as time. The period Tin is the cycle of the input image data, the image 180901 is the pth image, and the image 180902 is the (p + 1) th
And image 180903 represent the (p + 2) -th image, respectively. In the image, a first region 180904, a second region 180905, and a third region 180906 are provided as time-independent regions.

First, in the (p + 2) -th image 180903, the image is divided into a plurality of tile-shaped areas, and attention is paid to the image data in the third area 180906, which is one of the areas.

Next, in the p-th image 180901, attention is focused on a range larger than the third region 180906 centered on the third region 180906. Here, a range larger than the third region 180906 centering on the third region 180906 is a data search range. The data search range is 180907 for the range in the horizontal direction (X direction) and 1809 for the range in the vertical direction (Y direction).
08. Note that the horizontal range 180907 and the vertical range 180908 of the data search range may be ranges in which the horizontal range and the vertical range of the third region 180906 are respectively expanded by about 15 pixels.

Then, an area having image data most similar to the image data in the third area 180906 is searched within the data search range. As a search method, a least square method or the like can be used. As a result of the search, it is assumed that the first region 180904 is derived as the region having the most similar image data.

Next, a vector 180909 is derived as an amount representing a difference in position between the derived first region 180904 and the third region 180906. The vector 180909 is referred to as a motion vector.

In the (p + 1) th image 180902, the vector obtained from the motion vector 180909, the image data in the third region 180906 in the (p + 2) image 180903, and the first region in the pth image 180901 are displayed. A second region 180905 is formed based on the image data in 180904.

Here, a vector obtained from the motion vector 180909 is referred to as a displacement vector 180910. The displacement vector 180910 has a role of determining a position where the second region 180905 is formed. The second region 180905 is formed at a position separated from the third region 180906 by a displacement vector 180910. The displacement vector 180910 may be an amount obtained by multiplying the motion vector 180909 by a coefficient (1/2).

The image data in the second area 180905 in the (p + 1) -th image 180902 is the image data in the third area 180906 in the (p + 2) -th image 180903, and the pth
The image data in the first area 180904 in the image 180901 may be determined. For example, the second region 1809 in the (p + 1) th image 180902
The image data in 05 is the third region 18090 in the (p + 2) -th image 180903.
6 and the average value of the image data in the first region 180904 in the p-th image 180901.

In this way, the second region 180905 in the (p + 1) th image 180902 corresponding to the third region 180906 in the (p + 2) th image 180903 can be formed. The above processing is also performed on other regions in the (p + 2) -th image 180903, so that the (p + 1) -th image 180902 is in an intermediate state between the (p + 2) -th image 180903 and the p-th image 180901. Can be formed.

FIG. 43B shows the case where the display frame rate is three times the input frame rate (conversion ratio is 3). FIG. 43B schematically shows a method of detecting the motion of an image with the horizontal axis as time. The period Tin is the cycle of the input image data, and the image 1809
11 is the p-th image, image 180912 is the (p + 1) -th image, and image 180913 is the (p-th) image.
The (+2) image and the image 180914 represent the (p + 3) th image, respectively. Also,
The first area 180915 and the second area 1809 are areas that do not depend on time in the image.
16, a third area 180917 and a fourth area 180918 are provided.

First, in the (p + 3) -th image 180914, the image is divided into a plurality of tile-shaped areas, and attention is paid to the image data in the fourth area 180918 which is one of the areas.

Next, in the p-th image 180911, attention is focused on a range larger than the fourth region 180918 centered on the fourth region 180918. Here, a range larger than the fourth area 180918 around the fourth area 180918 is a data search range. The data search range is 180919 in the horizontal direction (X direction) and 1809 in the vertical direction (Y direction).
20 The horizontal range 180919 and the vertical range 180920 of the data search range may be ranges obtained by enlarging the horizontal range and the vertical range of the fourth region 180918 by about 15 pixels, respectively.

Then, an area having image data most similar to the image data in the fourth area 180918 is searched within the data search range. As a search method, a least square method or the like can be used. As a result of the search, it is assumed that the first region 180915 is derived as the region having the most similar image data.

Next, a vector is derived as an amount representing a difference in position between the derived first region 180915 and the fourth region 180918. Note that this vector is referred to as motion vector 180921.
I will call it.

Then, in the (p + 1) th image 180912 and the (p + 2) th image 180913, the first vector and the second vector obtained from the motion vector 180921,
Based on the image data in the fourth area 180918 in the (p + 3) -th image 180914 and the image data in the first area 180915 in the p-th image 180911, the second area 180916 and the third area 180913 are Form.

Here, the first vector obtained from the motion vector 180921 is the first displacement vector 18.
It will be called 0922. The second vector is referred to as a second displacement vector 180923. The first displacement vector 180922 has a role of determining a position where the second region 180916 is formed. The second region 180916 is formed at a position separated from the fourth region 180918 by the first displacement vector 180922. Note that the first displacement vector 180922 may be an amount obtained by multiplying the motion vector 180921 by (1/3). In addition, the second displacement vector 180923 has a role of determining a position where the third region 180917 is formed. The third region 1800917 is formed at a position separated from the fourth region 180918 by the second displacement vector 180923. The second displacement vector 180923
May be an amount obtained by multiplying the motion vector 180921 by (2/3).

The image data in the second area 180916 in the (p + 1) -th image 180912 includes the image data in the fourth area 180918 in the (p + 3) -th image 180914, and the p-th image data.
It may be determined by the image data in the first region 180915 in the image 180911. For example, the second region 1809 in the (p + 1) th image 180912
16 is the fourth area 18091 in the (p + 3) -th image 180914.
8 and the average value of the image data in the first region 180915 in the p-th image 180911.

The image data in the third area 180913 in the (p + 2) -th image 180913 includes the image data in the fourth area 180918 in the (p + 3) -th image 180914 and the p-th image.
It may be determined by the image data in the first region 180915 in the image 180911. For example, the third region 1809 in the (p + 2) -th image 180913
The image data in 17 is the fourth area 18091 in the (p + 3) -th image 180914.
8 and the average value of the image data in the first region 180915 in the p-th image 180911.

In this way, the second region 180916 in the (p + 1) th image 180902 corresponding to the fourth region 180918 in the (p + 3) th image 180914, and the (
A third region 180917 in the image 180913 of p + 2) can be formed.
The above processing is also performed on other regions in the (p + 3) -th image 180914, so that an intermediate state between the (p + 3) -th image 180914 and the p-th image 180911 is obtained.
A (p + 1) th image 180912 and a (p + 2) th image 180913 can be formed.

Next, an example of a circuit that detects the movement of an image included in input image data and creates an image in an intermediate state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44A illustrates a connection relationship between a peripheral driver circuit including a source driver and a gate driver for displaying an image in a display area, and a control circuit that controls the peripheral driver circuit. FIG. 44B is a diagram illustrating an example of a detailed circuit configuration of the control circuit. FIG. 44C is a diagram illustrating an example of a detailed circuit configuration of the image processing circuit included in the control circuit. FIG. 44D is a diagram illustrating another example of the detailed circuit configuration of the image processing circuit included in the control circuit.

As shown in FIG. 44A, the device in this embodiment may include a control circuit 181011, a source driver 181012, a gate driver 181013, and a display region 181014.

Note that the control circuit 181011, the source driver 181012, and the gate driver 181
013 may be formed on the same substrate as the substrate on which the display region 181014 is formed.

Note that the control circuit 181011, the source driver 181012, and the gate driver 181
013 is partly formed on the same substrate as the substrate on which the display region 181014 is formed, and other circuits are formed on a substrate different from the substrate on which the display region 181014 is formed. It may be. For example, the source driver 181012 and the gate driver 181013 may be formed over the same substrate as the substrate over which the display region 181014 is formed, and the control circuit 181101 may be formed as an external IC over a different substrate. Similarly, the gate driver 181013 may be formed over the same substrate as the substrate over which the display region 181014 is formed, and other circuits may be formed as external ICs over different substrates. Similarly, part of the source driver 181012, the gate driver 181013, and the control circuit 181101 is formed over the same substrate as the substrate over which the display region 181014 is formed, and the other circuits are formed as external ICs over different substrates. May be.

The control circuit 181101 includes an external image signal 181000, a horizontal synchronization signal 181001,
The vertical synchronization signal 181002 is input, the image signal 181003, the source start pulse 181004, the source clock 181005, and the gate start pulse 18100.
6 and the gate clock 181007 may be output.

The source driver 181012, the image signal 181003 and the source start pulse 181
004 and the source clock 181005 may be input, and a voltage or current in accordance with the image signal 181003 may be output to the display area 181014.

The gate driver 181013 may have a configuration in which a gate start pulse 181006 and a gate clock 181007 are input, and a signal that specifies a timing for writing a signal output from the source driver 181012 in the display region 181014 is output.

When the frequency of the external image signal 181000 and the frequency of the image signal 181003 are different, the signals for controlling the timing for driving the source driver 181012 and the gate driver 181013 are also input to the horizontal synchronization signal 181001 and the vertical synchronization signal 1810.
It will have a frequency different from 02. Therefore, in addition to the processing of the image signal 181003, it is necessary to process a signal for controlling the timing for driving the source driver 181012 and the gate driver 181013. The control circuit 181101 may be a circuit having a function for that purpose. For example, when the frequency of the image signal 181003 is twice the frequency of the external image signal 181000, the control circuit 181011 may
An image signal included in 1000 is interpolated to generate an image signal 181003 having a double frequency, and a signal for timing control is also controlled to be a double frequency.

The control circuit 181101 includes an image processing circuit 181015 as shown in FIG.
And a timing generation circuit 181016.

The image processing circuit 181015 includes an external image signal 181000 and a frequency control signal 18100.
8 may be input and the image signal 181003 may be output.

The timing generation circuit 181016 includes a horizontal synchronization signal 181001 and a vertical synchronization signal 181.
002, a source start pulse 181004, and a source clock 1810
05, a gate start pulse 181006, a gate clock 181007, and a frequency control signal 181008 may be output. Note that the timing generation circuit 181016 may include a memory or a register that holds data for designating the state of the frequency control signal 181008. In addition, the timing generation circuit 181016 may be configured to receive a signal that specifies the state of the frequency control signal 181008 from the outside.

As shown in FIG. 44C, the image processing circuit 181015 includes a motion detection circuit 181020, a first memory 181021, a second memory 181022, a third memory 181023, a luminance control circuit 181024, and a high-speed processing. And a circuit 181025.

The motion detection circuit 181020 may be configured to receive a plurality of image data, detect a motion of the image, and output image data that is an intermediate state between the plurality of image data.

The first memory 181021 receives an external image signal 181000 and receives the external image signal 18.
While holding 1000 for a certain period, the motion detection circuit 181020 and the second memory 181022
Alternatively, the external image signal 181000 may be output.

The second memory 181022 receives the image data output from the first memory 181021, and holds the image data for a certain period, while the motion detection circuit 181020 and the high-speed processing circuit 1
The image data may be output to 81025.

The third memory 181023 may be configured to receive the image data output from the motion detection circuit 181020 and output the image data to the luminance control circuit 181024 while holding the image data for a certain period.

The high-speed processing circuit 181025 includes image data output from the second memory 181022,
The image data output from the luminance control circuit 181024 and the frequency control signal 181008 may be input, and the image data may be output as the image signal 181003.

When the frequency of the external image signal 181000 and the frequency of the image signal 181003 are different, the image signal included in the external image signal 181000 may be interpolated by the image processing circuit 181015 to generate the image signal 181003. Input external image signal 18100
0 is once held in the first memory 181021. At that time, the second memory 18102
2 holds image data input in the previous frame. Motion detection circuit 18
1020 appropriately reads the image data held in the first memory 181021 and the second memory 181022, detects a motion vector from the difference between the two image data,
Intermediate state image data may be generated. The generated intermediate state image data is held by the third memory 181023.

When the motion detection circuit 181020 is generating intermediate state image data, the high speed processing circuit 1
81025 converts the image data held in the second memory 181022 into the image signal 18.
1003 is output. Thereafter, the image data held in the third memory 181023 is output as the image signal 181003 through the luminance control circuit 181024. At this time, the frequency at which the second memory 181022 and the third memory 181023 are updated is the same as the frequency of the external image signal 181000, but the frequency of the image signal 181003 output through the high-speed processing circuit 181025 is the same as that of the external image signal 181000. It may be different from the frequency. Specifically, for example, the frequency of the image signal 181003 is the external image signal 181000.
1.5 times, 2 times, and 3 times the frequency. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various frequencies can be used. Note that the frequency of the image signal 181003 may be specified by the frequency control signal 181008.

The configuration of the image processing circuit 181015 illustrated in FIG. 44D is obtained by adding a fourth memory 181026 to the configuration of the image processing circuit 181015 illustrated in FIG. In this way, the image data output from the first memory 181021 and the second memory 181022
In addition to the image data output from, the image data output from the fourth memory 181026 is also output to the motion detection circuit 181020, so that the motion of the image can be accurately detected.

If the input image data already contains a motion vector for data compression or the like, for example, MPEG (Moving Picture Expert Gr
In the case of image data based on the (up) standard, an intermediate state image may be generated as an interpolated image using the image data. At this time, a part for generating a motion vector included in the motion detection circuit 181020 is not necessary. In addition, since the encoding and decoding processes related to the image signal 181003 are simplified, power consumption can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 9)
In the present embodiment, the peripheral portion of the liquid crystal panel will be described.

FIG. 45 shows a backlight unit 20101 called an edge light type and the liquid crystal panel 2
An example of a liquid crystal display device having 0107 is shown. The edge light type is a method in which a light source is arranged at the end of the backlight unit and the fluorescence of the light source is emitted from the entire light emitting surface.
The edge-light type backlight unit is thin and can save power.

The backlight unit 20101 includes a diffusion plate 20102, a light guide plate 20103, and a reflection plate 20.
104, a lamp reflector 20105 and a light source 20106.

The light source 20106 has a function of emitting light as necessary. For example, as the light source 20106, a cold cathode tube, a hot cathode tube, a light emitting diode, an inorganic EL, an organic EL, or the like is used. The lamp reflector 20105 has a function of efficiently guiding the fluorescence from the light source 20106 to the light guide plate 20103. The light guide plate 20103 has a function of totally reflecting fluorescence and guiding light to the entire surface. The diffuser plate 20102 has a function of reducing unevenness in brightness. The reflector 20104 is
It has a function of reflecting and reusing light leaked downward from the light guide plate 20103 (the direction opposite to the liquid crystal panel 20107).

Note that a control circuit for adjusting the luminance of the light source 20106 is connected to the backlight unit 20101. With this control circuit, the luminance of the light source 20106 can be adjusted.

FIGS. 46A, 46B, 46C, and 46D are diagrams showing a detailed configuration of an edge light type backlight unit. Note that description of the diffusion plate, the light guide plate, and the reflection plate is omitted.

A backlight unit 20201 shown in FIG. 46A has a cold cathode tube 20203 as a light source.
It is the structure using. And in order to reflect the light from the cold cathode tube 20203 efficiently,
A ramp reflector 20202 is provided. Such a configuration is often used for a large display device because of the intensity of luminance from the cold cathode fluorescent lamp.

A backlight unit 20211 illustrated in FIG. 46B includes a light-emitting diode (L
ED) 20213 is used. For example, white light emitting diode (LED)
20213 are arranged at a predetermined interval. In order to efficiently reflect light from the light emitting diode (LED) 20213, a lamp reflector 20212 is provided.

Since the luminance of the light emitting diode is high, a structure using the light emitting diode is suitable for a large display device. Since the light emitting diode is excellent in color reproducibility, an image closer to the real object can be displayed. Since the LED has a small chip, the arrangement area can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frame of the display device.

Note that in the case where the light-emitting diode is mounted on a large display device, the light-emitting diode can be disposed on the back surface of the substrate. The light emitting diodes maintain a predetermined interval, and the light emitting diodes of each color are arranged in order. The color reproducibility can be improved by the arrangement of the light emitting diodes.

A backlight unit 20221 illustrated in FIG. 46C includes a light-emitting diode (LED) 20223, a light-emitting diode (LED) 20224, and a light-emitting diode (LED) 20225 for each color RGB as a light source. RGB light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20
223, the light emitting diode (LED) 20224, and the light emitting diode (LED) 20225 are arranged at predetermined intervals. Light emitting diode (LED) 20223 for each color RGB
By using the light emitting diode (LED) 20224 and the light emitting diode (LED) 20225, color reproducibility can be improved. A lamp reflector 20222 is provided to efficiently reflect light from the light emitting diode.

Since the luminance of the light emitting diode is high, a configuration using light emitting diodes of each color RGB as a light source is suitable for a large display device. Since the light emitting diode is excellent in color reproducibility, an image closer to the real object can be displayed. Since the LED has a small chip, the arrangement area can be reduced.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frame of the display device.

Note that color display can be performed by sequentially lighting the RGB light emitting diodes according to time. This is the so-called field sequential mode.

In addition, the light emitting diode which emits white, and the light emitting diode (LED) 2022 of each color RGB
3. A light emitting diode (LED) 20224 and a light emitting diode (LED) 20225 can be combined.

Note that in the case where the light-emitting diode is mounted on a large display device, the light-emitting diode can be disposed on the back surface of the substrate. The light emitting diodes maintain a predetermined interval, and the light emitting diodes of each color are arranged in order. The color reproducibility can be improved by the arrangement of the light emitting diodes.

A backlight unit 20231 illustrated in FIG. 47D includes a light-emitting diode (LED) 20233, a light-emitting diode (LED) 20234, and a light-emitting diode (LED) 20235 for each color RGB as a light source. For example, each color RGB light emitting diode (LE
D) 20233, light emitting diode (LED) 20234, light emitting diode (LED) 20
A plurality of colors (for example, green) having low emission intensity among 235 are arranged. By using the light emitting diode (LED) 20233, the light emitting diode (LED) 20234, and the light emitting diode (LED) 20235 for each color RGB, color reproducibility can be improved. A lamp reflector 20232 is provided to efficiently reflect light from the light emitting diode.

Since the luminance of the light emitting diode is high, a configuration using light emitting diodes of each color RGB as a light source is suitable for a large display device. Since the light emitting diode is excellent in color reproducibility, an image closer to the real object can be displayed. Since the LED has a small chip, the arrangement area can be reduced.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frame of the display device.

Note that color display can be performed by sequentially lighting the RGB light emitting diodes according to time. This is the so-called field sequential mode.

In addition, the light emitting diode which emits white, and the light emitting diode (LED) 2023 of each color RGB
3. A light emitting diode (LED) 20234 and a light emitting diode (LED) 20235 can be combined.

Note that in the case where the light-emitting diode is mounted on a large display device, the light-emitting diode can be disposed on the back surface of the substrate. The light emitting diodes maintain a predetermined interval, and the light emitting diodes of each color are arranged in order. The color reproducibility can be improved by the arrangement of the light emitting diodes.

FIG. 49A illustrates an example of a liquid crystal display device including a backlight unit called a direct type and a liquid crystal panel. The direct type is a method in which a light source is arranged directly under a light emitting surface to emit fluorescence of the light source from the entire light emitting surface. The direct type backlight unit can efficiently use the amount of emitted light.

The backlight unit 20500 includes a diffusion plate 20501, a light shielding plate 20502, a lamp reflector 20503, and a light source 20504.

Light emitted from the light source 20504 is collected on one surface of the backlight unit 20500 by the lamp reflector 20503. That is, the backlight unit 2050
0 has a surface that emits light strongly and a surface that emits little light. At this time, the liquid crystal panel 20505 is arranged on the side of the backlight unit 20500 that strongly emits light, whereby the light emitted from the light source 20504 can be efficiently applied to the liquid crystal panel 20505.

The light source 20504 has a function of emitting light as necessary. For example, as the light source 20504, a cold cathode tube, a hot cathode tube, a light emitting diode, an inorganic EL, an organic EL, or the like is used. The lamp reflector 20503 has a function of efficiently guiding the fluorescence of the light source 20504 to the diffusion plate 20501 and the light shielding plate 20502. The light shielding plate 20502 has a function of reducing unevenness in brightness by increasing the light shielding as the light is stronger in accordance with the arrangement of the light sources 20504. The diffusion plate 20501 further has a function of reducing brightness unevenness.

Note that a control circuit for adjusting the luminance of the light source 20504 is connected to the backlight unit 20500. With this control circuit, the luminance of the light source 20504 can be adjusted.

FIG. 49B illustrates an example of a liquid crystal display device including a backlight unit called a direct type and a liquid crystal panel. The direct type is a method in which a light source is arranged directly under a light emitting surface to emit fluorescence of the light source from the entire light emitting surface. The direct type backlight unit can efficiently use the amount of emitted light.

The backlight unit 20510 includes a diffusion plate 20511, a light shielding plate 20512, a lamp reflector 20513, RGB light sources (R) 20514a, light sources (G) 20514b, and light sources (B) 20514c.

Light emitted from the light source (R) 20514a, the light source (G) 20514b, and the light source (B) 20514c is collected on one surface of the backlight unit 20510 by the lamp reflector 20513. That is, the backlight unit 20510 has a surface that emits light strongly and a surface that emits little light. At this time, the backlight unit 20510
By disposing the liquid crystal panel 20515 on the side that strongly emits light, the light source (R) 205
14a, the light source (G) 20514b, and the light emitted from the light source (B) 20514c can be efficiently applied to the liquid crystal panel 20515.

Light source (R) 20514a, light source (G) 20514b, and light source (B) 2051 for each color RGB
4c has a function of emitting light as necessary. For example, a light source (R) 20514a, a light source (
As the G) 20514b and the light source (B) 20514c, a cold cathode tube, a hot cathode tube, a light emitting diode, an inorganic EL, an organic EL, or the like is used. The lamp reflector 20513 has a function of efficiently guiding the fluorescence of the light source 20514 to the diffusion plate 20511 and the light shielding plate 20512. The light-shielding plate 20512 has a function of reducing unevenness in brightness by increasing the light-shielding as the light is stronger in accordance with the arrangement of the light sources 20514. The diffusion plate 20511 further has a function of reducing brightness unevenness.

Note that a control circuit for adjusting the luminance of the light source (R) 20514a, the light source (G) 20514b, and the light source (B) 20514c of each color RGB is connected to the backlight unit 20510. By this control circuit, each color RGB light source (R) 20514a, light source (G
) 20514b and the light source (B) 20514c can be adjusted.

FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a polarizing plate (also referred to as a polarizing film).

Polarizing film 20300 is protective film 20301, substrate film 20302, PVA
A polarizing film 20303, a substrate film 20304, an adhesive layer 20305, and a release film 20306 are included.

The PVA polarizing film 20303 has a function of generating light only in a certain vibration direction (linearly polarized light). Specifically, the PVA polarizing film 20303 includes molecules (polarizers) whose electron densities are greatly different from each other vertically and horizontally. The PVA polarizing film 20303 can produce linearly polarized light by aligning the directions of molecules in which the electron density is greatly different in the vertical and horizontal directions.

As an example, the PVA polarizing film 20303 is made of polyvinyl alcohol (Poly V).
Inyl Alcohol) is doped with an iodine compound, and the PVA film is pulled in a certain direction, whereby a film in which iodine molecules are arranged in a certain direction can be obtained. And the light parallel to the long axis of an iodine molecule is absorbed by the iodine molecule. In addition, a dichroic dye may be used instead of iodine for high durability use and high heat resistance use. The dye is preferably used in a liquid crystal display device that requires durability and heat resistance, such as an in-vehicle LCD or a projector LCD.

The PVA polarizing film 20303 is a film (substrate film 20302 that serves as a base material on both sides).
And the substrate film 20304), the reliability can be increased. PVA
The polarizing film 20303 may be sandwiched between highly transparent and highly durable triacetylrose (TAC) films. In addition, a board | substrate film and a TAC film function as a protective layer of the polarizer which the PVA polarizing film 20303 has.

One substrate film (substrate film 20304) has an adhesive layer 20305 attached to a glass substrate of a liquid crystal panel. Note that the adhesive layer 20305 is formed by applying an adhesive to a substrate film (substrate film 20304) on one side. Adhesive layer 203
In 05, a release film 20306 (separate film) is provided.

The other substrate film (substrate film 20302) is provided with a protective film 20301.

Note that a hard coat scattering layer (anti-glare layer) may be provided on the surface of the polarizing film 20300. The hard coat scattering layer has fine irregularities formed on the surface by AG treatment, and has an antiglare function for scattering external light, so that reflection of external light on the liquid crystal panel can be prevented. Surface reflection can be prevented.

Note that a plurality of optical thin film layers having different refractive indexes may be formed on the surface of the polarizing film 20300 (also referred to as anti-reflection treatment or AR treatment). The multilayered optical thin film layer having a plurality of refractive indexes can reduce the reflectance of the surface due to the light interference effect.

FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an example of a system block of the liquid crystal display device.

In the pixel portion 20405, a signal line 20412 is extended from the signal line driver circuit 20403. In the pixel portion 20405, a scanning line 20410 is extended from the scanning line driver circuit 20404. A plurality of pixels are arranged in a matrix in the intersection region between the signal line 20412 and the scanning line 20410. Note that each of the plurality of pixels has a switching element. Therefore, a voltage for controlling the tilt of the liquid crystal molecules can be independently input to each of the plurality of pixels. A structure in which switching elements are provided in each intersection region in this way is called an active type. However, it is not limited to such an active type, and may be a passive type configuration. Since the passive type has no switching element in each pixel, the process is simple.

The driver circuit portion 20408 includes a control circuit 20402, a signal line driver circuit 20403, and a scan line driver circuit 20404. A video signal 20401 is input to the control circuit 20402. In response to the video signal 20401, the control circuit 20402 receives a signal line driver circuit 2040.
3 and the scanning line driving circuit 20404 are controlled. Therefore, the video signal 20401 is input to the signal line driver circuit 20403 and the scan line driver circuit 20404, respectively. In response to this control signal, the signal line driver circuit 20403 sends the video signal to the signal line 2041.
2, the scan line driver circuit 20404 inputs a scan signal to the scan line 20410. Then, a switching element included in the pixel is selected according to the scanning signal, and a video signal is input to the pixel electrode of the pixel.

Note that the control circuit 20402 also controls the power supply 20407 in accordance with the video signal 20401. The power supply 20407 has means for supplying power to the lighting means 20406. As the lighting unit 20406, an edge light type backlight unit or a direct type backlight unit can be used. However, a front light may be used as the illumination means 20406. The front light is a plate-like light unit that is mounted on the front side of the pixel portion and is configured by a light emitter and a light guide that illuminate the whole. By such illumination means,
The pixel portion can be illuminated uniformly with low power consumption.

As shown in FIG. 48B, the scan line driver circuit 20404 includes circuits that function as a shift register 20441, a level shifter 20442, and a buffer 20443. Signals such as a gate start pulse (GSP) and a gate clock signal (GCK) are input to the shift register 20441.

As shown in FIG. 48C, the signal line driver circuit 20403 includes a shift register 20431, a first latch 20432, a second latch 20433, a level shifter 20434, and a buffer 2.
A circuit functioning as 0435 is included. The circuit functioning as the buffer 20435 is a circuit having a function of amplifying a weak signal and includes an operational amplifier and the like. Level shifter 20
A signal such as a start pulse (SSP) is input to 434, and data (DATA) such as a video signal is input to the first latch 20432. The second latch 20433 has a latch (LAT
) Signals can be temporarily stored and input to the pixel portion 20405 all at once. This is called line sequential driving. Therefore, the second latch can be omitted if the pixel performs dot sequential driving instead of line sequential driving.

Note that in this embodiment, a known liquid crystal panel can be used. For example, a configuration in which a liquid crystal layer is sealed between two substrates can be used as the liquid crystal panel.
On one substrate, a transistor, a capacitor, a pixel electrode, an alignment film, or the like is formed. Note that a polarizing plate, a retardation plate, or a prism sheet may be disposed on the side opposite to the upper surface of one of the substrates. On the other substrate, a color filter, a black matrix, a counter electrode, an alignment film, or the like is formed. Note that a polarizing plate or a retardation plate may be disposed on the side opposite to the upper surface of the other substrate. Note that the color filter and the black matrix may be formed on the upper surface of one of the substrates. In addition, a slit (on the upper surface side of one substrate or the opposite side (
By arranging (grid), three-dimensional display can be performed.

In addition, it is possible to arrange | position a polarizing plate, a phase difference plate, and a prism sheet between two board | substrates, respectively. Alternatively, it can be integrated with either of the two substrates.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 10)
In this embodiment, a structure and operation of a pixel which can be applied to a liquid crystal display device will be described.

In this embodiment, TN (Twisted Nem) is used as the operation mode of the liquid crystal.
atic) mode, IPS (In-Plane-Switching) mode, FFS (
Fringe Field Switching (MVA) mode, MVA (Multi-dom)
ain Vertical Alignment) mode, PVA (Patterned)
Vertical Alignment), ASM (Axial Symmetric)
ic aligned Micro-cell) mode, OCB (Optical Co)
mpensated birefringence) mode, FLC (Ferroele)
cttric Liquid Crystal) mode, AFLC (Anti Ferroe)
electric Liquid Crystal) or the like can be used.

FIG. 50A illustrates an example of a pixel structure which can be applied to the liquid crystal display device.

A pixel 40100 includes a transistor 40101, a liquid crystal element 40102, and a capacitor 4010.
3. A gate of the transistor 40101 is connected to the wiring 40105.
A first terminal of the transistor 40101 is connected to the wiring 40104. Transistor 4
The second terminal of 0101 is connected to the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40102 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40103. The second electrode of the liquid crystal element 40102 corresponds to the counter electrode 40107. A second electrode of the capacitor 40103 is connected to the wiring 40106.

The wiring 40104 functions as a signal line. The wiring 40105 functions as a scanning line. The wiring 40106 functions as a capacitor line. The transistor 40101 functions as a switch. The capacitor 40103 functions as a storage capacitor.

The transistor 40101 only needs to function as a switch. The polarity of the transistor 40101 may be a P-channel type or an N-channel type.

Note that a video signal is input to the wiring 40104. A scan signal is input to the wiring 40105. A certain potential is supplied to the wiring 40106. The scanning signal is an H level or L level digital voltage signal. In the case where the transistor 40101 is an n-channel transistor, the H level of the scanning signal is a potential at which the transistor 40101 can be turned on, and the L level of the scanning signal is a potential at which the transistor 40101 can be turned off. Alternatively, transistor 4
When 0101 is a P-channel type, the H level of the scanning signal is a potential at which the transistor 40101 can be turned off, and the L level of the scanning signal is a potential at which the transistor 40101 can be turned on. The video signal is an analog voltage. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the video signal may be a digital voltage. Alternatively, the video signal may be a current. The current of the video signal may be analog or digital. The video signal has a potential lower than the H level of the scanning signal and higher than the L level of the scanning signal. Note that the constant potential supplied to the wiring 40106 is preferably equal to the potential of the counter electrode 40107.

The operation of the pixel 40100 will be described separately for the case where the transistor 40101 is on and the case where the transistor 40101 is off.

In the case where the transistor 40101 is on, the wiring 40104 and the liquid crystal element 40102
The first electrode (pixel electrode) and the first electrode of the capacitor 40103 are electrically connected. Accordingly, the video signal is input from the wiring 40104 to the first electrode (pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40102 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40103 through the transistor 40101.
The capacitor 40103 holds a potential difference between the video signal and the potential supplied to the wiring 40106.

In the case where the transistor 40101 is off, the wiring 40104 and the liquid crystal element 40102
The first electrode (pixel electrode) and the first electrode of the capacitor 40103 are electrically disconnected. Accordingly, the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40102 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40103 are in a floating state. Since the capacitor 40103 holds a potential difference between the video signal and the potential supplied to the wiring 40106, the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40102 and the first of the capacitor 40103 are used.
The electrode maintains the same (corresponding) potential as the video signal. Note that the liquid crystal element 40102 includes:
The transmittance corresponds to the video signal.

FIG. 50B illustrates an example of a pixel structure which can be applied to the liquid crystal display device. In particular, FIG.
0B is a diagram illustrating an example of a pixel configuration which can be applied to a liquid crystal display device suitable for a horizontal electric field mode (including an IPS mode and an FFS mode).

The pixel 40110 includes a transistor 40111, a liquid crystal element 40112, and a capacitor 4011.
3. A gate of the transistor 40111 is connected to the wiring 40115.
A first terminal of the transistor 40111 is connected to the wiring 40114. Transistor 4
The second terminal of 0111 is connected to the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40112 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40113. A second electrode of the liquid crystal element 40112 is connected to the wiring 40116. A second electrode of the capacitor 40113 is connected to the wiring 40116.

The wiring 40114 functions as a signal line. The wiring 40115 functions as a scan line. The wiring 40116 functions as a capacitor line. The transistor 40111 functions as a switch. The capacitor 40113 functions as a storage capacitor.

The transistor 40111 only needs to function as a switch. The polarity of the transistor 40111 may be a P-channel type or an N-channel type.

Note that a video signal is input to the wiring 40114. A scan signal is input to the wiring 40115. A certain potential is supplied to the wiring 40116. The scanning signal is an H level or L level digital voltage signal. In the case where the transistor 40111 is an n-channel transistor, the H level of the scanning signal is a potential at which the transistor 40111 can be turned on, and the L level of the scanning signal is a potential at which the transistor 40111 can be turned off. Alternatively, transistor 4
When 0111 is a P-channel type, the H level of the scanning signal is a potential at which the transistor 40111 can be turned off, and the L level of the scanning signal is a potential at which the transistor 40111 can be turned on. The video signal is an analog voltage. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the video signal may be a digital voltage. Alternatively, the video signal may be a current. The current of the video signal may be analog or digital. The video signal has a potential lower than the H level of the scanning signal and higher than the L level of the scanning signal.

The operation of the pixel 40110 will be described separately for the case where the transistor 40111 is on and the case where the transistor 40111 is off.

In the case where the transistor 40111 is on, the wiring 40114 and the liquid crystal element 40112
The first electrode (pixel electrode) and the first electrode of the capacitor 40113 are electrically connected. Therefore, the video signal is input from the wiring 40114 to the first electrode (pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40112 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40113 through the transistor 40111.
The capacitor 40113 holds a potential difference between the video signal and the potential supplied to the wiring 40116.

In the case where the transistor 40111 is off, the wiring 40114 and the liquid crystal element 40112
The first electrode (pixel electrode) and the first electrode of the capacitor 40113 are electrically disconnected. Accordingly, the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40112 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40113 are in a floating state. Since the capacitor 40113 holds a potential difference between the video signal and the potential supplied to the wiring 40116, the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40112 and the first of the capacitor 40113 are used.
The electrode maintains the same (corresponding) potential as the video signal. Note that the liquid crystal element 40112 includes
The transmittance corresponds to the video signal.

FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pixel configuration applicable to a liquid crystal display device. In particular, FIG.
This is an example of a pixel configuration that can increase the aperture ratio of the pixel by reducing the number of wirings.

FIG. 51 shows two pixels (pixel 40200 and pixel 40210) arranged in the same column direction. For example, when the pixel 40200 is arranged in the Nth row, the pixel 40210 is N + 1.
Located on the line.

The pixel 40200 includes a transistor 40201, a liquid crystal element 40202, and a capacitor 4020.
3. A gate of the transistor 40201 is connected to the wiring 40205.
A first terminal of the transistor 40201 is connected to the wiring 40204. Transistor 4
A second terminal 0201 is connected to the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40202 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40203. The second electrode of the liquid crystal element 40202 corresponds to the counter electrode 40207. A second electrode of the capacitor 40203 is connected to the same wiring as the gate of the transistor in the previous row.

A pixel 40210 includes a transistor 40211, a liquid crystal element 40212, and a capacitor 4021.
3. A gate of the transistor 40211 is connected to the wiring 40215.
A first terminal of the transistor 40211 is connected to the wiring 40204. Transistor 4
The second terminal of 0211 is connected to the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40212 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40213. A second electrode of the liquid crystal element 40212 corresponds to the counter electrode 40217. The second electrode of the capacitor 40213 has the same wiring (wiring 40205) as the gate of the transistor in the previous row.
It is connected to the.

The wiring 40204 functions as a signal line. The wiring 40205 functions as an N-th scanning line. The wiring 40206 functions as a capacitor line in the Nth row. The transistor 40201 functions as a switch. The capacitor 40203 functions as a storage capacitor.

The wiring 40214 functions as a signal line. The wiring 40215 functions as a scan line of the (N + 1) th row. The wiring 40216 functions as a capacitor line in the (N + 1) th row. Transistor 4021
1 functions as a switch. The capacitor 40213 functions as a storage capacitor.

The transistor 40201 and the transistor 40211 may function as switches,
The polarity of the transistor 40201 and the polarity of the transistor 40211 may be a P-channel type or an N-channel type.

Note that a video signal is input to the wiring 40204. The wiring 40205 has a scanning signal (
(Nth line) is input. A scanning signal (N + 1th row) is input to the wiring 40215.

The scanning signal is an H level or L level digital voltage signal. Transistor 40201 (
In the case where the transistor 40211) is an n-channel transistor, the H level of the scanning signal is a potential at which the transistor 40201 (or the transistor 40211) can be turned on, and the L level of the scanning signal is a potential at which the transistor 40201 (or the transistor 40211) can be turned off. Alternatively, in the case where the transistor 40201 (or the transistor 40211) is a P-channel type,
The H level of the scanning signal is a potential at which the transistor 40201 (or the transistor 40211) can be turned off, and the L level of the scanning signal is the transistor 40201 (or the transistor 40211).
). The video signal is an analog voltage. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the video signal may be a digital voltage. Alternatively, the video signal may be a current.
The current of the video signal may be analog or digital. The video signal has a potential lower than the H level of the scanning signal and higher than the L level of the scanning signal.

The operation of the pixel 40200 will be described separately for the case where the transistor 40201 is on and the case where the transistor 40201 is off.

In the case where the transistor 40201 is on, the wiring 40204 and the liquid crystal element 40202
The first electrode (pixel electrode) and the first electrode of the capacitor 40203 are electrically connected. Accordingly, the video signal is input from the wiring 40204 to the first electrode (pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40202 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40203 through the transistor 40201.
The capacitor 40203 holds a potential difference between the video signal and the potential supplied to the same wiring as the gate of the transistor in the previous row.

In the case where the transistor 40201 is off, the wiring 40204 and the liquid crystal element 40202 are displayed.
The first electrode (pixel electrode) and the first electrode of the capacitor 40203 are electrically disconnected. Accordingly, the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40202 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40203 are in a floating state. Since the capacitor 40203 holds a potential difference between the video signal and the potential supplied to the same wiring as the gate of the transistor in the previous row, the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40202 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40203 Maintain the same (corresponding) potential as the signal. In addition,
The liquid crystal element 40202 has a transmittance corresponding to the video signal.

The operation of the pixel 40210 will be described separately for the case where the transistor 40211 is on and the case where the transistor 40211 is off.

In the case where the transistor 40211 is on, the wiring 40204 and the liquid crystal element 40212
The first electrode (pixel electrode) and the first electrode of the capacitor 40213 are electrically connected. Accordingly, the video signal is input from the wiring 40204 to the first electrode (pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40212 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40213 through the transistor 40211.
The capacitor 40213 holds a potential difference between the video signal and the potential supplied to the same wiring (wiring 40205) as the gate of the transistor in the previous row.

In the case where the transistor 40211 is off, the wiring 40204 and the liquid crystal element 40212
The first electrode (pixel electrode) and the first electrode of the capacitor 40213 are electrically disconnected. Accordingly, the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40212 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40213 are in a floating state. Since the capacitor 40213 holds a potential difference between the video signal and the potential supplied to the same wiring (wiring 40205) as the gate of the transistor in the previous row, the liquid crystal element 4021 is maintained.
The second first electrode and the first electrode of the capacitor 40213 maintain the same (corresponding) potential as the video signal. Note that the liquid crystal element 40212 has transmittance in accordance with the video signal.

FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pixel configuration applicable to the liquid crystal display device. In particular, FIG.
It is an example of the pixel structure which can improve a viewing angle by using a sub pixel.

The pixel 40320 includes a sub-pixel 40300 and a sub-pixel 40310. Pixel 403
Although the case where 20 has two sub-pixels will be described, the pixel 40320 may have three or more sub-pixels.

The sub-pixel 40300 includes a transistor 40301, a liquid crystal element 40302, and a capacitor element 40.
303. A gate of the transistor 40301 is connected to the wiring 40305. A first terminal of the transistor 40301 is connected to the wiring 40304. A second terminal of the transistor 40301 is a first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40302 and a first terminal of the capacitor 40303.
Connected to the electrode. A second electrode of the liquid crystal element 40302 corresponds to the counter electrode 40307. A second electrode of the capacitor 40303 is connected to the wiring 40306.

The sub-pixel 40310 includes a transistor 40311, a liquid crystal element 40312, and a capacitor 40.
313. A gate of the transistor 40311 is connected to the wiring 40315. A first terminal of the transistor 40301 is connected to the wiring 40304. The second terminal of the transistor 40311 is a first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40312 and a first terminal of the capacitor 40313.
Connected to the electrode. A second electrode of the liquid crystal element 40312 corresponds to the counter electrode 40317. A second electrode of the capacitor 40313 is connected to the wiring 40306.

The wiring 40304 functions as a signal line. The wiring 40305 functions as a scanning line. The wiring 40315 functions as a signal line. The wiring 40306 functions as a capacitor line. The transistor 40301 functions as a switch. The transistor 40311 functions as a switch. The capacitor 40303 functions as a storage capacitor. The capacitor 40313 functions as a storage capacitor.

The transistor 40301 only needs to function as a switch. The polarity of the transistor 40301 may be a P-channel type or an N-channel type. The transistor 40311 only needs to function as a switch, and the transistor 40311 may have a P-channel polarity or N
It may be a channel type.

Note that a video signal is input to the wiring 40304. A scan signal is input to the wiring 40305. A scan signal is input to the wiring 40315. A certain potential is supplied to the wiring 40306.

The scanning signal is an H level or L level digital voltage signal. Transistor 403
When 01 (or the transistor 40311) is an N-channel type, the H level of the scanning signal is a potential at which the transistor 40301 (or the transistor 40311) can be turned on, and the L level of the scanning signal is a potential at which the transistor 40301 (or the transistor 40311) can be turned off. . Alternatively, when the transistor 40301 (or the transistor 40311) is a p-channel transistor, the H level of the scanning signal is a potential at which the transistor 40301 (or the transistor 40311) can be turned off, and the L level of the scanning signal is the transistor 40301 (or the transistor 40).
311) is a potential that can be turned on. The video signal is an analog voltage. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the video signal may be a digital voltage. Alternatively, the video signal may be a current. The current of the video signal may be analog or digital. The video signal has a potential lower than the H level of the scanning signal and higher than the L level of the scanning signal. Wiring 4
The constant potential supplied to 0306 is the potential of the counter electrode 40307 or the counter electrode 4031.
It is preferable that the potential is equal to 7.

Regarding the operation of the pixel 40320, the transistor 40301 is turned on and the transistor 4031 is turned on.
1 is turned off, the transistor 40301 is turned off and the transistor 40311 is turned on, and the transistor 40301 and the transistor 40311 are turned off.

In the case where the transistor 40301 is on and the transistor 40311 is off, in the subpixel 40300, the wiring 40304 and the first electrode (pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40302
And the first electrode of the capacitor 40303 is electrically connected. Accordingly, the video signal is input from the wiring 40304 to the first electrode (pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40302 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40303 through the transistor 40301. Then, the capacitive element 403
03 holds the potential difference between the video signal and the potential supplied to the wiring 40306. At this time, in the subpixel 40310, the wiring 40304 and the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40312 (
The pixel electrode) and the first electrode of the capacitor 40313 are electrically disconnected. Accordingly, the video signal is not input to the sub-pixel 40310.

In the case where the transistor 40301 is off and the transistor 40311 is on, the wiring 40304 is electrically disconnected from the first electrode (pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40302 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40303 in the subpixel 40300. Is done. Therefore, the liquid crystal element 4
The first electrode of 0302 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40303 are in a floating state. Capacitance element 40
Since 303 holds the potential difference between the video signal and the potential supplied to the wiring 40306, the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40302 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40303 have the same (corresponding) potential as the video signal. maintain. At this time, in the sub-pixel 40310, the wiring 403
04 and the first electrode (pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40312 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40313 are electrically connected. Therefore, the video signal is supplied from the wiring 40304 to the first electrode (pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40312 and the capacitor 4031 through the transistor 40311.
3 is input to the first electrode. The capacitor 40313 includes a video signal and a wiring 40316.
The potential difference from the potential supplied to is maintained.

When the transistor 40301 and the transistor 40311 are off, the subpixel 4
At 0300, the wiring 40304 is electrically disconnected from the first electrode (pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40302 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40303. Therefore, the liquid crystal element 4030
The second first electrode and the first electrode of the capacitor 40303 are in a floating state. Capacitance element 40303
Holds the potential difference between the video signal and the potential supplied to the wiring 40306, the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40302 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40303 are the same as the video signal (
(Corresponding) maintain the potential. Note that the liquid crystal element 40302 has a transmittance according to the video signal. At this time, in the sub pixel 40310, the wiring 40304, the first electrode (pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40312, and the first electrode of the capacitor 40313 are electrically cut off. Accordingly, the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40312 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40313 are in a floating state. Since the capacitor 40313 holds a potential difference between the video signal and the potential supplied to the wiring 40306, the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40312 and the capacitor 403
Thirteen first electrodes maintain the same (corresponding) potential as the video signal. The liquid crystal element 40
Reference numeral 312 denotes a transmittance corresponding to the video signal.

The video signal input to the sub-pixel 40300 may have a value different from the video signal input to the sub-pixel 40310. In this case, the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules of the liquid crystal element 40302 is changed to the liquid crystal element 4
Since the orientation of the liquid crystal molecules can be different from that of 0312, the viewing angle can be widened.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 11)
In this embodiment, a method for driving a display device will be described. In particular, a method for driving a liquid crystal display device will be described.

A liquid crystal panel that can be used in the liquid crystal display device described in this embodiment has a structure in which a liquid crystal material is sandwiched between two substrates. Each of the two substrates includes an electrode for controlling an electric field applied to the liquid crystal material. A liquid crystal material is a material whose optical and electrical properties are changed by an electric field applied from the outside. Therefore, the liquid crystal panel
It is a device that can obtain desired optical and electrical properties by controlling a voltage applied to a liquid crystal material using an electrode of a substrate. A liquid crystal panel capable of displaying a fine image can be obtained by arranging a large number of electrodes side by side to form a pixel and individually controlling the voltage applied to the pixel.

Here, the response time of the liquid crystal material to the change in electric field is the distance between two substrates (cell gap).
Although it depends on the type of liquid crystal material, it is generally several milliseconds to several tens of milliseconds. Furthermore, when the change amount of the electric field is small, the response time of the liquid crystal material is further increased. This property causes obstacles in image display such as afterimages, tailing, and contrast reduction when displaying moving images on a liquid crystal panel, especially when changing from halftone to another halftone (change in electric field). Is small), the above-mentioned degree of failure becomes significant.

On the other hand, a problem peculiar to a liquid crystal panel using an active matrix is a change in write voltage due to constant charge driving. Hereinafter, constant charge driving in the present embodiment will be described.

A pixel circuit in the active matrix includes a switch for controlling writing and a capacitor for holding charge. The driving method of the pixel circuit in the active matrix is that the switch is turned on and a predetermined voltage is written in the pixel circuit, and then the switch is turned off and the charge in the pixel circuit is held (hold state). In the hold state, no charge is exchanged between the inside and outside of the pixel circuit (constant charge). Usually, the period in which the switch is off is several hundred times (the number of scanning lines) times longer than the period in which the switch is on. Therefore, it can be considered that the switch of the pixel circuit is almost off.
From the above, it is assumed that the constant charge driving in the present embodiment is a driving method in which the pixel circuit is in a hold state in most periods when the liquid crystal panel is driven.

Next, electrical characteristics of the liquid crystal material will be described. In the liquid crystal material, when the electric field applied from the outside changes, the optical properties change and the dielectric constant also changes. That is, when each pixel of the liquid crystal panel is considered as a capacitive element (liquid crystal element) sandwiched between two electrodes, the capacitive element is a capacitive element whose capacitance changes according to an applied voltage. This phenomenon is called dynamic capacitance.

As described above, when the capacitive element whose capacitance is changed by the applied voltage is driven by the above-described constant charge driving, the following problem occurs. That is, there is a problem that when the capacitance of the liquid crystal element changes in the hold state where no charge is transferred, the applied voltage also changes. This can be understood from the fact that the charge amount is constant in the relational expression (charge amount) = (capacitance) × (applied voltage).

For the above reasons, in the liquid crystal panel using the active matrix, the voltage in the hold state changes from the voltage in the writing state due to the constant charge driving. As a result, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is different from the change in the driving method that does not take the hold state. This is shown in FIG. FIG. 56A shows a control example of the voltage written in the pixel circuit, with time on the horizontal axis and absolute value of voltage on the vertical axis. FIG. 56B shows a control example of the voltage written to the pixel circuit when the horizontal axis represents time and the vertical axis represents voltage. In FIG. 56C, time is plotted on the horizontal axis and transmittance of the liquid crystal element is plotted on the vertical axis.
56 shows a change over time in the transmittance of the liquid crystal element when the voltage shown in FIG. 56A or FIG. 56B is written in the pixel circuit. 56A to 56C, a period F represents a voltage rewriting cycle, and the time for voltage rewriting is t ₁ , t ₂ , t ₃ , t ₄ ,.
・ I will explain as.

Here, the write voltage corresponding to the image data input to the liquid crystal display device is | V ₁ | for rewriting at time 0, and | for rewriting at times t ₁ , t ₂ , t ₃ , t ₄ ,.
Assume that V ₂ |. (See FIG. 56 (A))

Note that the polarity of the writing voltage corresponding to the image data input to the liquid crystal display device may be periodically switched. (Inversion driving: see FIG. 56B) By this method, it is possible to prevent a direct current voltage from being applied to the liquid crystal as much as possible, so that burn-in due to deterioration of the liquid crystal element can be prevented. Note that the polarity switching period (inversion period) may be the same as the voltage rewriting period. In this case, since the inversion cycle is short, occurrence of flicker due to inversion driving can be reduced. Further, the inversion cycle may be a cycle that is an integral multiple of the voltage rewrite cycle. In this case, since the inversion period is long and the frequency of writing the voltage by changing the polarity can be reduced, the power consumption can be reduced.

FIG. 56C shows a change over time in the transmittance of the liquid crystal element when a voltage as illustrated in FIG. 56A or FIG. 56B is applied to the liquid crystal element. Here, the voltage | V ₁ is applied to the liquid crystal element.
| Is applied, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element after enough time passes corresponds to TR _1. Similarly, the transmissivity of the liquid crystal element after the voltage | V ₂ | is applied to the liquid crystal element and a sufficient time has elapsed is defined as TR ₂ . When the voltage applied to the liquid crystal element changes from | V ₁ | to | V ₂ | at time t ₁ , the transmittance of the liquid crystal element does not immediately become TR ₂ as indicated by a broken line 30401, It changes slowly. For example, the rewriting period of the voltage, when the same as the frame period of the image signal of 60 Hz (16.7 msec), until the transmittance is changed to TR _2, it is necessary to time of several frames.

However, the smooth transmittance change with time as indicated by a broken line 30401 is obtained when the voltage | V ₂ | is accurately applied to the liquid crystal element. In an actual liquid crystal panel, for example, a liquid crystal panel using an active matrix, the voltage in the hold state changes from the voltage in the writing state due to constant charge driving. Instead of the time change as shown in FIG. 2, instead of the time change as shown by the solid line 30402. This is because the voltage changes due to the constant charge driving, and the target voltage cannot be reached by one writing. As a result, the response time of the transmissivity of the liquid crystal element is apparently longer than the original response time (broken line 30401), and there are noticeable obstacles in image display such as afterimage, tailing, and contrast reduction. It will cause.

By using the overdrive drive, it is possible to simultaneously solve the phenomenon that the original response time of the liquid crystal element and the apparent response time due to insufficient writing due to dynamic capacitance and constant charge drive become even longer. This is shown in FIG. FIG. 57A shows a control example of the voltage written in the pixel circuit, with the horizontal axis representing time and the vertical axis representing the absolute value of the voltage. FIG. 57B illustrates a control example of the voltage written to the pixel circuit in the case where time is plotted on the horizontal axis and voltage is plotted on the vertical axis. FIG. 57C shows time when the horizontal axis represents time, the vertical axis represents the transmittance of the liquid crystal element, and the voltage represented by FIG. 57A or 57B is written in the pixel circuit. It shows the change in transmittance over time. 57A to 57C, a period F represents a voltage rewrite cycle, and the time for voltage rewriting is described as t ₁ , t ₂ , t ₃ , t ₄ ,...

Here, the writing voltage corresponding to the image data input to the liquid crystal display device is | V ₁ | for rewriting at time 0, | V ₃ | for rewriting at time t ₁ , and times t ₂ , t ₃ , t.
₄ ,... Are assumed to be | V ₂ |. (Refer to FIG. 57 (A))

Note that the polarity of the writing voltage corresponding to the image data input to the liquid crystal display device may be periodically switched. (Inversion driving: see FIG. 57B) By this method, it is possible to prevent a direct current voltage from being applied to the liquid crystal as much as possible, so that burn-in due to deterioration of the liquid crystal element can be prevented. Note that the polarity switching period (inversion period) may be the same as the voltage rewriting period. In this case, since the inversion cycle is short, occurrence of flicker due to inversion driving can be reduced. Further, the inversion cycle may be a cycle that is an integral multiple of the voltage rewrite cycle. In this case, since the inversion period is long and the frequency of writing the voltage by changing the polarity can be reduced, the power consumption can be reduced.

FIG. 57C shows a change over time in the transmittance of the liquid crystal element when a voltage as illustrated in FIG. 57A or FIG. 57B is applied to the liquid crystal element. Here, the voltage | V ₁ is applied to the liquid crystal element.
| Is applied, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element after enough time passes corresponds to TR _1. Similarly, the transmissivity of the liquid crystal element after the voltage | V ₂ | is applied to the liquid crystal element and a sufficient time has elapsed is defined as TR ₂ . Similarly, the voltage | V ₃ | is applied to the liquid crystal element, and the transmittance of the liquid crystal element after a sufficient time has elapsed is defined as TR ₃ . At time t ₁ , the voltage applied to the liquid crystal element changes from | V ₁ | to | V
_When it changes to ₃ |, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element tends to change to TR ₃ over several frames as indicated by a broken line 30501. However, the voltage | _{V 3} | applied at the end at time _{t 2,} later than time _{t 2,} the voltage | _{V 2} | is applied. Therefore, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is not as indicated by the broken line 30501 but as indicated by the solid line 30502. here,
It is preferable to set the value of the voltage | V ₃ | so that the transmittance is approximately TR ₂ at the time t ₂ . Here, the voltage | V ₃ | is also referred to as an overdrive voltage.

That is, by changing the overdrive voltage | V ₃ |, the response time of the liquid crystal element can be controlled to some extent. This is because the response time of the liquid crystal changes depending on the strength of the electric field. Specifically, the stronger the electric field, the shorter the response time of the liquid crystal element, and the weaker the electric field, the longer the response time of the liquid crystal element.

The overdrive voltage | V ₃ | is preferably changed according to the amount of voltage change, that is, the voltages | V ₁ | and | V ₂ | that give the desired transmittances TR ₁ and TR _2. . This is because even if the response time of the liquid crystal element changes depending on the amount of change in voltage, the optimum response time can always be obtained by changing the overdrive voltage | V ₃ | accordingly. is there.

The overdrive voltage | V ₃ | is preferably changed according to the mode of the liquid crystal such as TN, VA, IPS, and OCB. This is because even if the response speed of the liquid crystal varies depending on the mode of the liquid crystal, an optimal response time can always be obtained by changing the overdrive voltage | V ₃ | accordingly.

Note that the voltage rewrite cycle F may be the same as the frame cycle of the input signal. In this case, since the peripheral drive circuit of the liquid crystal display device can be simplified, a liquid crystal display device with low manufacturing cost can be obtained.

Note that the voltage rewrite cycle F may be shorter than the frame cycle of the input signal. For example,
The voltage rewriting period F may be 1/2 times the frame period of the input signal, may be 1/3 times, or may be less than that. This method is effective when used in combination with measures for reducing the quality of moving images caused by hold driving of liquid crystal display devices, such as black insertion driving, backlight blinking, backlight scanning, and intermediate image insertion driving by motion compensation. is there. That is, since the response time of the required liquid crystal element is short because the countermeasure method for the deterioration of the moving image quality caused by the hold driving of the liquid crystal display device is relatively easy by using the overdrive driving method described in this embodiment. In addition, the response time of the liquid crystal element can be shortened. Although the response time of the liquid crystal element can be essentially shortened by the cell gap, the liquid crystal material, the liquid crystal mode, and the like, it is technically difficult. Therefore, it is very important to use a method of shortening the response time of the liquid crystal element from the driving method such as overdrive.

Note that the voltage rewriting period F may be longer than the frame period of the input signal. For example,
The voltage rewrite period F may be twice, three times, or more than the frame period of the input signal. This method is effective when used in combination with means (circuit) for determining whether or not voltage rewriting is not performed for a long period of time. That is, when the voltage is not rewritten for a long time, the operation of the circuit can be stopped during the period by not performing the voltage rewriting operation itself, so that a liquid crystal display device with low power consumption is obtained. Can do.

Next, a specific method for changing the overdrive voltage | V ₃ | according to the voltages | V ₁ | and | V ₂ | that give the desired transmittances TR ₁ and TR ₂ will be described.

The overdrive circuit is a circuit for appropriately controlling the overdrive voltage | V ₃ | according to the voltages | V ₁ | and | V ₂ | that give the desired transmittances TR ₁ and TR _2. The signal input to the drive circuit is a voltage | V that gives the transmittance TR _1
1 | and a signal related to the voltage | V ₂ | giving the transmittance TR ₂ , and a signal output from the overdrive circuit is a signal related to the overdrive voltage | V ₃ |. Here, as these signals, voltages applied to the liquid crystal element (| V ₁ |, | V ₂ |
, | V ₃ |) or a digital signal for applying a voltage to be applied to the liquid crystal element. Here, it is assumed that the signal related to the overdrive circuit is a digital signal.

First, an overall configuration of the overdrive circuit will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the input image signal 301 is used as a signal for controlling the overdrive voltage.
01a and 30101b are used. As a result of processing these signals, an output image signal 30104 is output as a signal for giving an overdrive voltage.

Here, voltages | V ₁ | and | V ₂ | that give the desired transmittances TR ₁ and TR ₂ are:
Since the image signals are in frames adjacent to each other, the input image signals 30101a and 30101b are also preferably image signals in frames adjacent to each other. In order to obtain such a signal, the input image signal 30101a is input to the delay circuit 30102 in FIG. 53A, and the signal output as a result is input to the input image signal 3010.
1b. An example of the delay circuit 30102 is a memory. That is, in order to delay the input image signal 30101a by one frame, the input image signal 30101a is stored in the memory, and at the same time, the signal stored in the previous frame is stored in the memory as the input image signal 30101b. The input image signal 30101a and the input image signal 30101b are input to the correction circuit 30103 at the same time, so that image signals in adjacent frames can be handled. Then, by inputting image signals in adjacent frames to the correction circuit 30103, an output image signal 30104 can be obtained. Note that when a memory is used as the delay circuit 30102, a memory having a capacity capable of storing an image signal for one frame (that is, a frame memory) can be used in order to delay by one frame. By doing so, it is possible to have a function as a delay circuit without excessive or insufficient memory capacity.

Next, a delay circuit 30102 configured mainly for the purpose of reducing the memory capacity will be described. By using such a circuit as the delay circuit 30102, the memory capacity can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

As the delay circuit 30102 having such characteristics, specifically, a delay circuit as shown in FIG. 53B can be used. A delay circuit 30102 illustrated in FIG. 53B includes an encoder 30105, a memory 30106, and a decoder 30107.

The operation of the delay circuit 30102 shown in FIG. 53 (B) is as follows. First, before storing the input image signal 30101a in the memory 30106, the encoder 3010
5 is used to perform compression processing. As a result, the size of data to be stored in the memory 30106 can be reduced. As a result, since the memory capacity can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Then, the compressed image signal is sent to the decoder 30107 where the decompression process is performed. As a result, the encoder 30105
It is possible to restore the previous signal that has been compressed. Here, the encoder 3010
5 and the decoder 30107 may be a reversible process. In this way, since the image signal is not deteriorated even after the compression / decompression process, the memory capacity can be reduced without degrading the quality of the image finally displayed on the apparatus. Further, the compression / decompression process performed by the encoder 30105 and the decoder 30107 may be an irreversible process. By doing so, the data size of the image signal after compression can be made very small, so that the memory capacity can be greatly reduced.

As a method for reducing the capacity of the memory, various methods can be used in addition to the methods listed above. Rather than compressing the image with an encoder, the color information of the image signal is reduced (for example, the color is reduced from 260,000 colors to 65,000 colors) or the number of data is reduced (the resolution is reduced). The method can be used.

Next, a specific example of the correction circuit 30103 will be described with reference to FIGS. The correction circuit 30103 is a circuit for outputting an output image signal having a certain value from two input image signals. Here, when the relationship between the two input image signals and the output image signal is non-linear and it is difficult to obtain by a simple calculation, a lookup table (LUT) may be used as the correction circuit 30103. Since the relationship between the two input image signals and the output image signal is obtained in advance in the LUT by measurement, the output image signals corresponding to the two input image signals can be obtained only by referring to the LUT. (See FIG. 53C.) By using the LUT 30108 as the correction circuit 30103, the correction circuit 30103 can be realized without performing complicated circuit design or the like.

Here, since the LUT is one of the memories, it is preferable to reduce the memory capacity as much as possible in order to reduce the manufacturing cost. As an example of the correction circuit 30103 for realizing this, a circuit shown in FIG. 53D can be considered. Correction circuit 30103 shown in FIG.
Includes an LUT 30109 and an adder 30110. The LUT 30109 stores difference data between the input image signal 30101a and the output image signal 30104 to be output. That is, corresponding difference data is extracted from the LUT 30109 from the input image signal 30101a and the input image signal 30101b, and the extracted difference data and the input image signal 30 are extracted.
The output image signal 30104 can be obtained by adding 101a by the adder 30110. Note that the data stored in the LUT 30109 is the difference data, so that L
Reduction of the memory capacity of the UT can be realized. This is because the output image signal 30104 as it is.
This is because the data size of the difference data is smaller than that of the differential data, so that the memory capacity required for the LUT 30109 can be reduced.

Further, if the output image signal can be obtained by a simple operation such as four arithmetic operations of two input image signals, it can be realized by a combination of simple circuits such as an adder, a subtracter, and a multiplier.
As a result, it is not necessary to use an LUT, and the manufacturing cost can be greatly reduced.
As such a circuit, a circuit shown in FIG. 53E can be given. 53 (
E) includes a subtractor 30111, a multiplier 30112, and an adder 3
0113. First, a subtracter 30111 obtains a difference between the input image signal 30101a and the input image signal 30101b. Thereafter, the multiplier 30112 multiplies the difference value by an appropriate coefficient. Then, an output image signal 30104 can be obtained by adding a difference value obtained by multiplying the input image signal 30101a by an appropriate coefficient by the adder 30113. By using such a circuit, it is not necessary to use an LUT, and the manufacturing cost can be greatly reduced.

Note that by using the correction circuit 30103 illustrated in FIG. 53E under certain conditions, output of an inappropriate output image signal 30104 can be prevented. The conditions include an output image signal 30104 that gives an overdrive voltage and an input image signal 30101.
The difference value between a and the input image signal 30101b is linear. Then, the linearity gradient is used as a coefficient multiplied by the multiplier 30112. That is, it is preferable to use a correction circuit 30103 shown in FIG. 53E for a liquid crystal element having such properties. As a liquid crystal element having such properties, an IPS mode liquid crystal element in which the response speed is small in gradation dependency can be given. In this manner, for example, by using the correction circuit 30103 shown in FIG. 53E for the IPS mode liquid crystal element, the manufacturing cost can be significantly reduced.
In addition, it is possible to obtain an overdrive circuit that can prevent an inappropriate output image signal 30104 from being output.

Note that the same function as the circuits shown in FIGS. 53A to 53E may be realized by software processing. As for the memory used for the delay circuit, other memory included in the liquid crystal display device, memory included in a device that sends an image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device (for example, a video card included in a personal computer or a similar device, etc.) Can be diverted. By doing so, not only can the manufacturing cost be reduced, but also the user can select the strength of overdrive, the situation of use, etc. according to his / her preference.

Next, driving for manipulating the potential of the common line will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (
A) shows a plurality of pixel circuits when one common line is arranged for one scanning line in a display device using a capacitive display element such as a liquid crystal element. FIG. A pixel circuit illustrated in FIG. 54A includes a transistor 30201, an auxiliary capacitor 30202, a display element 30203, a video signal line 30204, a scanning line 30205, and a common line 30206.

The gate electrode of the transistor 30201 is electrically connected to the scan line 30205, one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 30201 is electrically connected to the video signal line 30204, and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 30201 Are electrically connected to one electrode of the auxiliary capacitor 30202 and one electrode of the display element 30203.
The other electrode of the auxiliary capacitor 30202 is electrically connected to the common line 30206.

First, in the pixel selected by the scanning line 30205, the transistor 30201 is turned on, so that the display element 30203 and the auxiliary capacitor 3 are connected through the video signal line 30204, respectively.
A voltage corresponding to the video signal is applied to 0202. At this time, the video signal is the common line 30.
When the lowest gradation is displayed for all the pixels connected to 206, or when the highest gradation is displayed for all the pixels connected to the common line 30206, the pixel It is not necessary to write a video signal via the video signal line 30204 respectively.
Instead of writing a video signal through the video signal line 30204, the voltage applied to the display element 30203 can be changed by moving the potential of the common line 30206.

Next, FIG. 54B shows a display device using a display element having a capacitive property such as a liquid crystal element when two common lines are arranged for one scanning line. It is a figure showing a plurality of pixel circuits. The pixel circuit shown in FIG. 54B includes a transistor 30211, an auxiliary capacitor 30212, a display element 30213, a video signal line 30214, a scanning line 30215, a first common line 30216, and a second common line 30217. .

The gate electrode of the transistor 30211 is electrically connected to the scan line 30215, one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 30211 is electrically connected to the video signal line 30214, and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 30211 Is electrically connected to one electrode of the auxiliary capacitor 30212 and one electrode of the display element 30213.
In addition, the other electrode of the auxiliary capacitor 30212 is electrically connected to the first common line 30216.
In the pixel adjacent to the pixel, the other electrode of the auxiliary capacitor 30212 is electrically connected to the second common line 30217.

The pixel circuit illustrated in FIG. 54B has a small number of pixels electrically connected to one common line; therefore, instead of writing a video signal through the video signal line 30214, the first common line 30216 is used. Alternatively, the frequency with which the voltage applied to the display element 30213 can be changed by moving the potential of the second common line 30217 is significantly increased. Further, source inversion driving or dot inversion driving is possible. By source inversion driving or dot inversion driving, flicker can be suppressed while improving element reliability.

Next, the scanning backlight will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55A shows a scanning backlight in which cold cathode tubes are juxtaposed. The scanning backlight shown in FIG. 55A includes a diffusion plate 30301 and N cold cathode tubes 30302-1 to 30302 -N. N cold cathode tubes 30302-1 to 30302 -N are juxtaposed behind the diffuser plate 30301, so that the N cold cathode tubes 30302-1 to 30302 -N scan with varying luminance. Can do.

A change in luminance of each cold cathode tube during scanning will be described with reference to FIG. First, the luminance of the cold cathode fluorescent lamp 30302-1 is changed for a certain time. Then, after that, the cold cathode tube 30
The luminance of the cold cathode fluorescent lamp 30302-2 arranged next to 302-1 is changed for the same time. In this way, the luminance is changed in order from the cold cathode fluorescent lamps 30302-1 to 30302-N. In FIG. 55C, the luminance to be changed for a certain period of time is smaller than the original luminance, but may be larger than the original luminance. Also, cold cathode fluorescent lamps 30302-1 to 3030
Although scanning up to 2-N is performed, scanning from cold cathode fluorescent lamps 30302-N to 30302-1 may be performed in the reverse direction.

By driving as shown in FIG. 55, the average luminance of the backlight can be reduced. Therefore, the power consumption of the backlight, which accounts for most of the power consumption of the liquid crystal display device, can be reduced.

An LED may be used as the light source of the scanning backlight. The scanning backlight in that case is as shown in FIG. The scanning backlight shown in FIG. 55B includes a diffusion plate 30311 and light sources 30312-1 to 30312 -N in which LEDs are juxtaposed. When the LED is used as the light source of the scanning backlight, the backlight is thin,
There is an advantage that can be lightened. Further, there is an advantage that the color reproduction range can be expanded. Further, LEs juxtaposed on each of the light sources 30312-1 to 30312 -N juxtaposed with LEDs.
Since D can also be scanned in the same manner, it can also be a dot scanning backlight.
If the point scanning type is adopted, the image quality of the moving image can be further improved.

Note that even when an LED is used as the light source of the backlight, it can be driven with varying luminance as shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 12)
In this embodiment, various liquid crystal modes will be described.

First, various liquid crystal modes will be described with reference to cross-sectional views.

58A and 58B are schematic views of cross sections of a TN mode.

A liquid crystal layer 50100 is sandwiched between a first substrate 50101 and a second substrate 50102 which are arranged to face each other. A first electrode 501 is provided on an upper surface of the first substrate 50101.
05 is formed. A second electrode 50106 is formed on the top surface of the second substrate 50102. A first polarizing plate 50103 is provided on the side of the first substrate 50101 opposite to the liquid crystal layer. A second polarizing plate 50104 is disposed on the opposite side of the second substrate 50102 from the liquid crystal layer. Note that the first polarizing plate 50103 and the second polarizing plate 50104 are arranged to be crossed Nicols.

The first polarizing plate 50103 may be disposed on the upper surface of the first substrate 50101. The second polarizing plate 50104 may be disposed on the upper surface of the second substrate 50102.

It is sufficient that at least one (or both) of the first electrode 50105 and the second electrode 50106 has a light-transmitting property (a transmission type or a reflection type). Or both electrodes may have translucency and a part of one electrode may have reflectivity (semi-transmissive type).

FIG. 58A is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is applied to the first electrode 50105 and the second electrode 50106 (referred to as a vertical electric field mode). Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged vertically,
The light from the backlight is not affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. And the 1st polarizing plate 50
Since 103 and the second polarizing plate 50104 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight cannot pass through the substrate. Therefore, black display is performed.

Note that by controlling voltage applied to the first electrode 50105 and the second electrode 50106, the state of liquid crystal molecules can be controlled. Therefore, since the amount of light from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, a predetermined video display can be performed.

FIG. 58B is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is not applied to the first electrode 50105 and the second electrode 50106. Since the liquid crystal molecules are aligned horizontally and rotated in a plane, the light from the backlight is affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 50103 and the second polarizing plate 50104 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight passes through the substrate. Therefore, white display is performed. This is a so-called normally white mode.

The liquid crystal display device having the structure illustrated in FIGS. 58A and 58B can perform full-color display by being provided with a color filter. The color filter can be provided on the first substrate 50101 side or the second substrate 50102 side.

A known liquid crystal material may be used for the TN mode.

59A and 59B are schematic views of cross sections of the VA mode. The VA mode is a mode in which liquid crystal molecules are aligned so as to be perpendicular to the substrate when there is no electric field.

A liquid crystal layer 50200 is sandwiched between a first substrate 50201 and a second substrate 50202 which are arranged to face each other. On the top surface of the first substrate 50201, the first electrode 502 is provided.
05 is formed. A second electrode 50206 is formed on the top surface of the second substrate 50202. A first polarizing plate 50203 is provided on the side of the first substrate 50201 opposite to the liquid crystal layer. A second polarizing plate 50204 is provided on the opposite side of the second substrate 50202 from the liquid crystal layer. Note that the first polarizing plate 50203 and the second polarizing plate 50204 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.

The first polarizing plate 50203 may be disposed on the upper surface of the first substrate 50201. The second polarizing plate 50204 may be disposed on the upper surface of the second substrate 50202.

It is sufficient that at least one (or both) of the first electrode 50205 and the second electrode 50206 has a light-transmitting property (a transmission type or a reflection type). Or both electrodes may have translucency and a part of one electrode may have reflectivity (semi-transmissive type).

FIG. 59A is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is applied to the first electrode 50205 and the second electrode 50206 (referred to as a vertical electric field mode). Since the liquid crystal molecules are aligned horizontally,
Light from the backlight is affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Then, the first polarizing plate 502
Since 03 and the second polarizing plate 50204 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, the light from the backlight passes through the substrate. Therefore, white display is performed.

Note that the state of liquid crystal molecules can be controlled by controlling the voltage applied to the first electrode 50205 and the second electrode 50206. Therefore, since the amount of light from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, a predetermined video display can be performed.

FIG. 59B is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is not applied to the first electrode 50205 and the second electrode 50206. Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged vertically, the light from the backlight is not affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 50203 and the second polarizing plate 50204 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight does not pass through the substrate. Therefore, black display is performed. This is a so-called normally black mode.

A liquid crystal display device having the structure illustrated in FIGS. 59A and 59B can perform full-color display by being provided with a color filter. The color filter can be provided on the first substrate 50201 side or the second substrate 50202 side.

As the liquid crystal material used for the VA mode, a known material may be used.

FIGS. 59C and 59D are schematic views of cross sections of the MVA mode. The MVA mode is a method for mutually compensating the viewing angle dependency of each part.

A liquid crystal layer 50210 is sandwiched between a first substrate 50211 and a second substrate 50212 which are arranged to face each other. A first electrode 50211 is provided on an upper surface of the first substrate 50211.
15 is formed. A second electrode 50216 is formed on the top surface of the second substrate 50212. On the first electrode 50215, a first protrusion 502117 is formed for alignment control. A second protrusion 502118 is formed over the second electrode 50216 for alignment control. On the side opposite to the liquid crystal layer of the first substrate 50211, a first polarizing plate 50213 is provided.
Is arranged. On the side opposite to the liquid crystal layer of the second substrate 50212, a second polarizing plate 5021 is provided.
4 is arranged. Note that the first polarizing plate 50213 and the second polarizing plate 50214 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.

The first polarizing plate 50213 may be disposed on the top surface of the first substrate 50211. The second polarizing plate 50214 may be disposed on the upper surface of the second substrate 50212.

It is only necessary that at least one (or both) of the first electrode 50215 and the second electrode 50216 have a light-transmitting property (a transmission type or a reflection type). Or both electrodes may have translucency and a part of one electrode may have reflectivity (semi-transmissive type).

FIG. 59C is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is applied to the first electrode 50215 and the second electrode 50216 (referred to as a vertical electric field mode). Since the liquid crystal molecules are tilted and arranged with respect to the first protrusions 502117 and the second protrusions 502118, the light from the backlight is affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 50213 and the second polarizing plate 50214 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight passes through the substrate. Therefore, white display is performed.

Note that by controlling voltage applied to the first electrode 50215 and the second electrode 50216, the state of liquid crystal molecules can be controlled. Therefore, since the amount of light from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, a predetermined video display can be performed.

FIG. 59D is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is not applied to the first electrode 50215 and the second electrode 50216. Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged vertically, the light from the backlight is not affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 50213 and the second polarizing plate 50214 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight does not pass through the substrate. Therefore, black display is performed. This is a so-called normally black mode.

A liquid crystal display device having a structure illustrated in FIGS. 59C and 59D can perform full-color display by being provided with a color filter. The color filter can be provided on the first substrate 50211 side or the second substrate 50212 side.

As the liquid crystal material used for the MVA mode, a known material may be used.

60A and 60B are schematic views of cross sections of the OCB mode. In the OCB mode, the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules forms an optically compensated state in the liquid crystal layer, and thus the viewing angle dependency is small. This state of the liquid crystal molecules is called bend alignment.

A liquid crystal layer 50300 is sandwiched between a first substrate 50301 and a second substrate 50302 which are arranged to face each other. A first electrode 503 is provided on an upper surface of the first substrate 50301.
05 is formed. A second electrode 50306 is formed on the top surface of the second substrate 50302. A first polarizing plate 50303 is provided on the opposite side of the first substrate 50301 from the liquid crystal layer. On the opposite side of the second substrate 50302 from the liquid crystal layer, a second polarizing plate 50304 is provided. Note that the first polarizing plate 50303 and the second polarizing plate 50304 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.

The first polarizing plate 50303 may be disposed on the upper surface of the first substrate 50301. The second polarizing plate 50304 may be disposed on the upper surface of the second substrate 50302.

It is sufficient that at least one (or both) of the first electrode 50305 and the second electrode 50306 has a light-transmitting property (a transmission type or a reflection type). Or both electrodes may have translucency and a part of one electrode may have reflectivity (semi-transmissive type).

FIG. 60A is a schematic view of a cross section in the case where voltage is applied to the first electrode 50305 and the second electrode 50306 (referred to as a vertical electric field mode). Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged vertically,
The light from the backlight is not affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. And the 1st polarizing plate 50
Since 303 and the second polarizing plate 50304 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight does not pass through the substrate. Therefore, black display is performed.

Note that the state of liquid crystal molecules can be controlled by controlling the voltage applied to the first electrode 50305 and the second electrode 50306. Therefore, since the amount of light from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, a predetermined video display can be performed.

FIG. 60B is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is not applied to the first electrode 50305 and the second electrode 50306. Since the liquid crystal molecules are in a bend alignment state, the light from the backlight is affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 50303 and the second polarizing plate 50304 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight passes through the substrate. Therefore, white display is performed. This is a so-called normally white mode.

The liquid crystal display device having the structure illustrated in FIGS. 60A and 60B can perform full-color display by being provided with a color filter. The color filter can be provided on the first substrate 50301 side or the second substrate 50302 side.

A known material may be used as the liquid crystal material used in the OCB mode.

60C and 60D are schematic views of cross sections of the FLC mode or the AFLC mode.

A liquid crystal layer 50310 is sandwiched between a first substrate 50311 and a second substrate 50312 which are arranged to face each other. On the top surface of the first substrate 50311, the first electrode 503 is provided.
15 is formed. A second electrode 50316 is formed on the top surface of the second substrate 5031. A first polarizing plate 50313 is provided on the opposite side of the first substrate 50311 from the liquid crystal layer. A second polarizing plate 50314 is disposed on the opposite side of the second substrate 50312 from the liquid crystal layer. Note that the first polarizing plate 50313 and the second polarizing plate 50314 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.

The first polarizing plate 50313 may be disposed on the upper surface of the first substrate 50311. The second polarizing plate 50314 may be disposed on the upper surface of the second substrate 5031.

It is only necessary that at least one (or both) of the first electrode 50315 and the second electrode 50316 have a light-transmitting property (transmission type or reflection type). Or both electrodes may have translucency and a part of one electrode may have reflectivity (semi-transmissive type).

FIG. 60C is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is applied to the first electrode 50315 and the second electrode 50316 (referred to as a vertical electric field mode). Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side in a direction shifted from the rubbing direction, the light from the backlight is affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. And since the 1st polarizing plate 50313 and the 2nd polarizing plate 50314 are arrange | positioned so that it may become crossed Nicols, the light from a backlight passes a board | substrate. Therefore, white display is performed.

Note that the state of liquid crystal molecules can be controlled by controlling voltage applied to the first electrode 50315 and the second electrode 50316. Therefore, since the amount of light from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, a predetermined video display can be performed.

FIG. 60D is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is not applied to the first electrode 50315 and the second electrode 50316. Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side along the rubbing direction, the light from the backlight is not affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. And since the 1st polarizing plate 50313 and the 2nd polarizing plate 50314 are arrange | positioned so that it may become crossed Nicols, the light from a backlight does not pass a board | substrate. Therefore, black display is performed. This is a so-called normally black mode.

The liquid crystal display device having the structure illustrated in FIGS. 60C and 60D can perform full-color display by being provided with a color filter. The color filter can be provided on the first substrate 50311 side or the second substrate 50312 side.

As the liquid crystal material used in the FLC mode or AFLC mode, a known material may be used.

61A and 61B are schematic views of cross sections of the IPS mode. The IPS mode is a mode in which the alignment of liquid crystal molecules forms an optically compensated state in the liquid crystal layer, so that the liquid crystal molecules are always rotated in a plane with respect to the substrate, and the electrode is only on one substrate side. The provided horizontal electric field method is adopted.

A liquid crystal layer 50400 is sandwiched between a first substrate 50401 and a second substrate 50402 which are arranged to face each other. A first electrode 504 is provided on an upper surface of the first substrate 50401.
05 and the second electrode 50406 are formed. A first polarizing plate 50403 is provided on the side of the first substrate 50401 opposite to the liquid crystal layer. A second polarizing plate 50404 is provided on the opposite side of the second substrate 50402 from the liquid crystal layer. Note that the first polarizing plate 50403 and the second polarizing plate 50404 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.

The first polarizing plate 50403 may be disposed on the upper surface of the first substrate 50401. The second polarizing plate 50404 may be disposed on the upper surface of the second substrate 50402.

It is sufficient that at least one (or both) of the first electrode 50405 and the second electrode 50406 has a light-transmitting property (a transmission type or a reflection type). Or both electrodes may have translucency and a part of one electrode may have reflectivity (semi-transmissive type).

FIG. 61A is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is applied to the first electrode 50405 and the second electrode 50406 (referred to as a vertical electric field mode). Since the liquid crystal molecules are aligned along the lines of electric force deviated from the rubbing direction, the light from the backlight is affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 50403 and the second polarizing plate 50404 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight passes through the substrate. Therefore, white display is performed.

Note that the state of liquid crystal molecules can be controlled by controlling the voltage applied to the first electrode 50405 and the second electrode 50406. Therefore, since the amount of light from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, a predetermined video display can be performed.

FIG. 61B is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is not applied to the first electrode 50405 and the second electrode 50406. Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side along the rubbing direction, the light from the backlight is not affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 50403 and the second polarizing plate 50404 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight does not pass through the substrate. Therefore, black display is performed. This is a so-called normally black mode.

A liquid crystal display device having the structure shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B can perform full-color display by being provided with a color filter. The color filter can be provided on the first substrate 50401 side or the second substrate 50402 side.

As the liquid crystal material used for the IPS mode, a known material may be used.

61C and 61D are schematic views of cross sections of the FFS mode. The FFS mode is a mode in which the alignment of liquid crystal molecules forms an optically compensated state in the liquid crystal layer, so that the liquid crystal molecules are always rotated in a plane with respect to the substrate, and the electrode is only on one substrate side. The provided horizontal electric field method is adopted.

A liquid crystal layer 50410 is sandwiched between a first substrate 50411 and a second substrate 50412 which are arranged to face each other. A second electrode 504 is provided on the upper surface of the first substrate 50411.
16 is formed. An insulating film 50417 is formed on the top surface of the second electrode 50416. A second electrode 50416 is formed over the insulating film 50417. A first polarizing plate 50413 is provided on the side of the first substrate 50411 opposite to the liquid crystal layer. On the opposite side of the second substrate 50412 from the liquid crystal layer, a second polarizing plate 50414 is provided. In addition,
The first polarizing plate 50413 and the second polarizing plate 50414 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.

The first polarizing plate 50413 may be disposed on the top surface of the first substrate 50411. The second polarizing plate 50414 may be disposed on the upper surface of the second substrate 50412.

It is only necessary that at least one (or both) of the first electrode 50415 and the second electrode 50416 have a light-transmitting property (a transmission type or a reflection type). Or both electrodes may have translucency and a part of one electrode may have reflectivity (semi-transmissive type).

FIG. 61C is a schematic view of a cross section in the case where voltage is applied to the first electrode 50415 and the second electrode 50416 (referred to as a vertical electric field mode). Since the liquid crystal molecules are aligned along the lines of electric force deviated from the rubbing direction, the light from the backlight is affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 50413 and the second polarizing plate 50414 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight passes through the substrate. Therefore, white display is performed.

Note that the state of liquid crystal molecules can be controlled by controlling voltage applied to the first electrode 50415 and the second electrode 50416. Therefore, since the amount of light from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, a predetermined video display can be performed.

FIG. 61D is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is not applied to the first electrode 50415 and the second electrode 50416. Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side along the rubbing direction, the light from the backlight is not affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 50413 and the second polarizing plate 50414 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight does not pass through the substrate. Therefore, black display is performed. This is a so-called normally black mode.

A liquid crystal display device having the structure shown in FIGS. 61C and 61D can perform full-color display by being provided with a color filter. The color filter can be provided on the first substrate 50411 side or the second substrate 50412 side.

As the liquid crystal material used for the FFS mode, a known material may be used.

Next, various liquid crystal modes will be described with reference to top views.

FIG. 62 is a top view of a pixel portion to which the MVA mode is applied. The MVA mode is a method for mutually compensating the viewing angle dependency of each part.

62 shows a first pixel electrode 50501, a second pixel electrode (50502a, 50502b,
50502c) and protrusions 50503. The first pixel electrode 50501 is formed on the entire surface of the counter substrate. The second pixel electrode (505) so that the shape is a square shape.
02a, 50502b, 50502c) are formed. The shape of the second pixel electrode (50
502a, 50502b, 50502c) corresponding to the first pixel electrode 50501.
Second pixel electrodes (50502a, 50502b, 50502c) are formed thereon.

The opening of the second pixel electrode (50502a, 50502b, 50502c) functions like a protrusion.

The first pixel electrode 50501 and the second pixel electrode (50502a, 50502b, 5050
When a voltage is applied to 2c) (referred to as a vertical electric field method), the liquid crystal molecules are transferred to the second pixel electrode (50
502a, 50502b, 50502c) and the protrusion 50503 are in a state of being tilted and arranged. When the pair of polarizing plates are arranged to be crossed Nicols,
Since the light from the backlight passes through the substrate, white display is performed.

Note that the first pixel electrode 50501 and the second pixel electrode (50502a, 50502b, 5
By controlling the voltage applied to 0502c), the state of the liquid crystal molecules can be controlled. Therefore, since the amount of light from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, a predetermined video display can be performed.

The first pixel electrode 50501 and the second pixel electrode (50502a, 50502b, 5050
When no voltage is applied to 2c), the liquid crystal molecules are aligned vertically. When the pair of polarizing plates are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight does not pass through the panel, so that black display is performed. This is a so-called normally black mode.

As the liquid crystal material used for the MVA mode, a known material may be used.

63A, 63B, 63C, and 63D are top views of a pixel portion to which the IPS mode is applied. The IPS mode is a mode in which the alignment of liquid crystal molecules forms an optically compensated state in the liquid crystal layer, so that the liquid crystal molecules are always rotated in a plane with respect to the substrate, and the electrode is only on one substrate side. The provided horizontal electric field method is adopted.

In the IPS mode, the pair of electrodes are formed to have different shapes.

FIG. 63A illustrates a first pixel electrode 50601 and a second pixel electrode 50602. The first pixel electrode 50601 and the second pixel electrode 50602 have a wave shape.

FIG. 63B illustrates a first pixel electrode 50611 and a second pixel electrode 50612. The first pixel electrode 50611 and the second pixel electrode 50612 have a shape having concentric openings.

FIG. 63C illustrates a first pixel electrode 50631 and a second pixel electrode 50632. The first pixel electrode 50631 and the second pixel electrode 50632 have a comb-like shape and are partially overlapped with each other.

FIG. 63D illustrates a first pixel electrode 50641 and a second pixel electrode 50642. The first pixel electrode 50641 and the second pixel electrode 50642 are comb-like and have a shape in which the electrodes are engaged with each other.

The first electrode (50601, 50611, 50621, 50631) and the second electrode (50
602, 50612, 50622, and 50632) are applied with a voltage (referred to as a vertical electric field method), the liquid crystal molecules are aligned along the lines of electric force deviated from the rubbing direction. When the pair of polarizing plates are arranged so as to be in crossed Nicols, white light is displayed because light from the backlight passes through the substrate.

Note that the state of liquid crystal molecules can be controlled by controlling the voltage applied to the first electrode (50601, 50611, 50621, 50631) and the second electrode (50602, 50612, 50622, 50632). is there. Therefore, since the amount of light from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, a predetermined video display can be performed.

The first electrode (50601, 50611, 50621, 50631) and the second electrode (50
When no voltage is applied to 602, 50612, 50622, 50632), the liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side along the rubbing direction. When the pair of polarizing plates are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight does not pass through the substrate, so that black display is performed. It is a so-called normally black mode.

As the liquid crystal material used for the IPS mode, a known material may be used.

64A, 64B, 64C, and 64D are top views of a pixel portion to which the FFS mode is applied. The FFS mode is a mode in which the alignment of liquid crystal molecules forms an optically compensated state in the liquid crystal layer, so that the liquid crystal molecules are always rotated in a plane with respect to the substrate, and the electrode is only on one substrate side. The provided horizontal electric field method is adopted.

In the FFS mode, the first electrode is formed on the upper surface of the second electrode so as to have various shapes.

FIG. 64A shows a first pixel electrode 50701 and a second pixel electrode 50702. The first pixel electrode 50701 has a dogleg shape. Second pixel electrode 50702
The pattern may not be formed.

FIG. 64B shows a first pixel electrode 50711 and a second pixel electrode 50712. The first pixel electrode 50711 has a concentric shape. The second pixel electrode 50712 is
The pattern may not be formed.

FIG. 64C illustrates a first pixel electrode 50731 and a second pixel electrode 50732. The first pixel electrode 50731 is comb-shaped and has a shape such that the electrodes mesh with each other. The second pixel electrode 50732 may not be patterned.

FIG. 64D illustrates a first pixel electrode 50741 and a second pixel electrode 50742. The first pixel electrode 50741 has a comb-like shape. The second pixel electrode 50742 may not be patterned.

The first electrode (50701, 50711, 50721, 50731) and the second electrode (50
702, 50712, 50722, and 50732) (referred to as a vertical electric field method), the liquid crystal molecules are aligned along the lines of electric force deviated from the rubbing direction. When the pair of polarizing plates are arranged so as to be in crossed Nicols, white light is displayed because light from the backlight passes through the substrate.

Note that the state of liquid crystal molecules can be controlled by controlling the voltage applied to the first electrode (50701, 50711, 50721, 50731) and the second electrode (50702, 50712, 50722, 50732). is there. Therefore, since the amount of light from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, a predetermined video display can be performed.

The first electrode (50701, 50711, 50721, 50731) and the second electrode (50
702, 50712, 50722, and 50732), liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side along the rubbing direction. When the pair of polarizing plates are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight does not pass through the substrate, so that black display is performed. It is a so-called normally black mode.

As the liquid crystal material used for the IPS mode, a known material may be used.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 13)
In this embodiment mode, a pixel structure of a display device is described. In particular, a pixel structure of a liquid crystal display device will be described.

A pixel structure in which each liquid crystal mode and a transistor are combined will be described with reference to a cross-sectional view of the pixel.

Note that as the transistor, a thin film transistor (TFT) including a non-single-crystal semiconductor layer typified by amorphous silicon, polycrystalline silicon, microcrystalline (also referred to as semi-amorphous) silicon, or the like can be used.

Note that a top gate type, a bottom gate type, or the like can be used as a structure of the transistor. Note that as the bottom-gate transistor, a channel etch type, a channel protection type, or the like can be used.

FIG. 65 is an example of a cross-sectional view of a pixel in the case where a TN mode and a transistor are combined.
By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 65 to a liquid crystal display device, the liquid crystal display device can be manufactured at low cost.

Features of the pixel structure shown in FIG. 65 will be described. The liquid crystal molecules 10118 shown in FIG.
It is a long and narrow molecule with a major axis and a minor axis. In order to indicate the direction of the liquid crystal molecules 10118, the length is expressed in FIG. That is, the liquid crystal molecules 1011 expressed in a long way
8, the direction of the major axis is parallel to the paper surface, and the shorter the liquid crystal molecule 10118 expressed, the closer the major axis direction is to the normal direction of the paper surface. That is, the liquid crystal molecules 10118 shown in FIG. 65 have a major axis direction different by 90 degrees between the one close to the first substrate 10101 and the one close to the second substrate 10116, and is positioned in the middle of these. Liquid crystal molecules 101
The direction of the 18 major axes is a direction that smoothly connects them. In other words, the liquid crystal molecules 10118 illustrated in FIG. 65 are aligned between the first substrate 10101 and the second substrate 10116.
The orientation is twisted.

Note that a case where a bottom-gate transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as a transistor is described. In the case of using a transistor including an amorphous semiconductor, a liquid crystal display device can be manufactured at low cost using a large-area substrate.

The liquid crystal display device has a basic part that displays an image, called a liquid crystal panel. The liquid crystal panel is bonded with two processed substrates with a gap of several micrometers,
It is manufactured by injecting a liquid crystal material between two substrates. In FIG. 65, the two substrates are
The first substrate 10101 and the second substrate 10116. Transistors and pixel electrodes are formed on the first substrate. The second substrate includes a light shielding film 10114 and a color filter 101.
15, a fourth conductive layer 10113, a spacer 10117, and a second alignment film 10112 are formed.

Note that the light-blocking film 10114 is not necessarily formed over the second substrate 10116. Shading film 1
In the case where 0114 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, the light shielding film 1011
When 4 is formed, a display device with little light leakage during black display can be obtained.

Note that the color filter 10115 is not necessarily formed over the second substrate 10116.
In the case where the color filter 10115 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. However, even when the color filter 10115 is not formed, a display device capable of color display by field sequential driving can be obtained. On the other hand, the color filter 1011
When forming 5, a display device capable of color display can be obtained.

Note that spherical spacers may be dispersed instead of the spacers 10117. When the spherical spacers are dispersed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, in the case where the spacer 10117 is formed, the position of the spacer does not vary, so that the distance between the two substrates can be made uniform, and a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained.

Processing performed on the first substrate 10101 will be described.

First, the first insulating film 10102 is formed over the first substrate 10101 by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. Note that the first insulating film 10102 is not necessarily formed. The first insulating film 10102 has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the characteristics of the transistor.

Next, a first conductive layer 10103 is formed over the first insulating film 10102 by a photolithography method,
It is formed by a laser direct drawing method or an ink jet method.

Next, a second insulating film 10104 is formed on the entire surface by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. In the second insulating film 10104, impurities from the substrate affect the semiconductor layer,
It has a function of preventing changes in characteristics of the transistor.

Next, a first semiconductor layer 10105 and a second semiconductor layer 10106 are formed. Note that the first semiconductor layer 10105 and the second semiconductor layer 10106 are successively formed, and the shapes thereof are processed at the same time.

Next, the second conductive layer 10107 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Note that dry etching is preferable as an etching method performed when the shape of the second conductive layer 10107 is processed. In addition,
As the second conductive layer 10107, a transparent material or a reflective material may be used.

Next, a channel region of the transistor is formed. An example of the process will be described. The second semiconductor layer 10106 is etched using the second conductive layer 10107 as a mask. Alternatively, etching is performed using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 10107. Then, the first conductive layer 10103 where the second semiconductor layer 10106 is removed serves as a transistor and a channel region. By doing so, the number of masks can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, a third insulating film 10108 is formed, and contact holes are selectively formed in the third insulating film 10108. Note that a contact hole may be formed in the second insulating film 10104 at the same time as a contact hole is formed in the third insulating film 10108. In addition,
The surface of the third insulating film 10108 is preferably as flat as possible. This is because the alignment of liquid crystal molecules is affected by the unevenness of the surface in contact with the liquid crystal.

Next, the third conductive layer 10109 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like.

Next, a first alignment film 10110 is formed. Note that after the first alignment film 10110 is formed,
In order to control the alignment of liquid crystal molecules, rubbing may be performed. The rubbing is a process of streaking the alignment film by rubbing the alignment film with a cloth. By performing rubbing, the alignment film can be provided with orientation.

The first substrate 10101 manufactured as described above, the light-shielding film 10114, and the color filter 10
115, the fourth conductive layer 10113, the spacer 10117, and the second substrate 10116 provided with the second alignment film 10112 are attached to each other with a gap of several micrometers by a sealant. Then, a liquid crystal material is injected between the two substrates. Note that in the TN mode, the fourth conductive layer 10113 is formed over the entire surface of the second substrate 10116.

FIG. 66 (A) shows MVA (Multi-domain Vertical Alignnm).
ent) is an example of a cross-sectional view of a pixel when a method and a transistor are combined. FIG.
By applying the pixel structure shown in (A) to a liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device with a large viewing angle, a high response speed, and a high contrast can be obtained.

Features of the pixel structure illustrated in FIG. 66A are described. The characteristics of the pixel structure of the MVA liquid crystal panel will be described. A liquid crystal molecule 10218 illustrated in FIG. 66A is an elongated molecule having a major axis and a minor axis. In order to show the direction of the liquid crystal molecules 10218, the length is expressed in FIG. That is, the long expressed liquid crystal molecule 10218 is
It is assumed that the direction of the major axis is parallel to the paper surface, and the shorter the liquid crystal molecules 10218 expressed, the closer the major axis direction is to the normal direction of the paper surface. In other words, the liquid crystal molecules 10218 illustrated in FIG. 66A are aligned so that the direction of the long axis faces the normal direction of the alignment film. Therefore, the liquid crystal molecules 10218 in the portion where the alignment control protrusion 10219 is located are aligned with the alignment control protrusion 102
It is oriented radially around 19. In this state, a liquid crystal display device with a large viewing angle can be obtained.

Note that a case where a bottom-gate transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as a transistor is described. In the case of using a transistor including an amorphous semiconductor, a liquid crystal display device can be manufactured at low cost using a large-area substrate.

The liquid crystal display device has a basic part that displays an image, called a liquid crystal panel. The liquid crystal panel is bonded with two processed substrates with a gap of several micrometers,
It is manufactured by injecting a liquid crystal material between two substrates. In FIG. 66A, the two substrates are a first substrate 10201 and a second substrate 10216. Transistors and pixel electrodes are formed on the first substrate. The second substrate includes a light-blocking film 10214, a color filter 10215, a fourth conductive layer 10213, a spacer 10217, and a second alignment film 1021.
2 and an alignment control protrusion 10219 are formed.

Note that the light-blocking film 10214 is not necessarily formed over the second substrate 10216. Shading film 1
In the case where 0214 is not formed, the manufacturing cost can be reduced because the number of steps is reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, the light shielding film 1021
When 4 is formed, a display device with little light leakage during black display can be obtained.

Note that the color filter 10215 is not necessarily formed over the second substrate 10216.
In the case where the color filter 10215 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. However, even when the color filter 10215 is not manufactured, a display device capable of color display by field sequential driving can be obtained. On the other hand, the color filter 1021
When forming 5, a display device capable of color display can be obtained.

Note that spherical spacers may be dispersed over the second substrate 10216 instead of the spacers 10217. When the spherical spacers are dispersed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. on the other hand,
In the case where the spacer 10217 is formed, the position of the spacer does not vary, so that the distance between the two substrates can be made uniform, and a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained.

Processing performed on the first substrate 10201 is described.

First, the first insulating film 10202 is formed over the first substrate 10201 by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. Note that the first insulating film 10202 is not necessarily formed. The first insulating film 10202 has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the characteristics of the transistor.

Next, a first conductive layer 10203 is formed over the first insulating film 10202 by a photolithography method.
It is formed by a laser direct drawing method or an ink jet method.

Next, a second insulating film 10204 is formed over the entire surface by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. In the second insulating film 10204, impurities from the substrate affect the semiconductor layer,
It has a function of preventing changes in characteristics of the transistor.

Next, a first semiconductor layer 10205 and a second semiconductor layer 10206 are formed. Note that the first semiconductor layer 10205 and the second semiconductor layer 10206 are successively formed, and the shapes thereof are processed at the same time.

Next, the second conductive layer 10207 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Note that dry etching is preferable as an etching method performed when the shape of the second conductive layer 10207 is processed. In addition,
As the second conductive layer 10207, a transparent material or a reflective material may be used.

Next, a channel region of the transistor is formed. An example of the process will be described. The second semiconductor layer 10206 is etched using the second conductive layer 10207 as a mask. Alternatively, etching is performed using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 10207. Then, the first conductive layer 10203 where the second semiconductor layer 10206 is removed serves as a transistor and a channel region. By doing so, the number of masks can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, a third insulating film 10208 is formed, and contact holes are selectively formed in the third insulating film 10208. Note that a contact hole may be formed in the second insulating film 10204 at the same time as a contact hole is formed in the third insulating film 10208.

Next, the third conductive layer 10209 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an ink jet method, or the like.

Next, a first alignment film 10210 is formed. Note that after the first alignment film 10210 is formed,
In order to control the alignment of liquid crystal molecules, rubbing may be performed. The rubbing is a process of streaking the alignment film by rubbing the alignment film with a cloth. By performing rubbing, the alignment film can be provided with orientation.

The first substrate 10201 manufactured as described above, the light shielding film 10214, and the color filter 10
215, the fourth conductive layer 10213, the spacer 10217, and the second substrate 10216 over which the second alignment film 10212 is formed are attached to each other with a gap of several micrometers by a sealant. Then, a liquid crystal material is injected between the two substrates. MVA
In the method, the fourth conductive layer 10213 is formed over the entire surface of the second substrate 10216.
Note that an alignment control protrusion 10219 is formed in contact with the fourth conductive layer 10213.
The shape of the orientation control protrusion 10219 is preferably a shape having a smooth curved surface.
By doing so, the alignment of the adjacent liquid crystal molecules 10218 becomes extremely close, so that alignment defects can be reduced. It is possible to reduce alignment film defects caused by alignment film disconnection.

FIG. 66 (B) shows a PVA (Patterned Vertical Alignment).
It is an example of a cross-sectional view of a pixel in the case where a method and a transistor are combined. By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 66B to a liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle, a high response speed, and a high contrast can be obtained.

Features of the pixel structure illustrated in FIG. 66B are described. Liquid crystal molecule 1 shown in FIG.
0248 is an elongated molecule having a major axis and a minor axis. In order to show the direction of the liquid crystal molecules 10248, the length is expressed in FIG. 66B. In other words, the liquid crystal molecule 10248 expressed in a long direction has a long axis direction parallel to the paper surface, and the liquid crystal molecule 10248 expressed in a short direction has a long axis direction closer to the normal direction of the paper surface. . That is, the liquid crystal molecules 10248 illustrated in FIG. 66B are aligned so that the direction of the long axis is the normal direction of the alignment film. Therefore, the liquid crystal molecules 10248 in a portion where the electrode notch 10249 is present.
Are radially oriented around the boundary between the electrode notch 10249 and the fourth conductive layer 10243. In this state, a liquid crystal display device with a large viewing angle can be obtained.

Note that a case where a bottom-gate transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as a transistor is described. In the case of using a transistor including an amorphous semiconductor, a liquid crystal display device can be manufactured at low cost using a large-area substrate.

The liquid crystal display device has a basic part that displays an image, called a liquid crystal panel. The liquid crystal panel is bonded with two processed substrates with a gap of several micrometers,
It is manufactured by injecting a liquid crystal material between two substrates. In FIG. 66B, the two substrates are a first substrate 10231 and a second substrate 10246. Transistors and pixel electrodes are formed on the first substrate. The second substrate includes a light shielding film 10244, a color filter 10245, a fourth conductive layer 10243, a spacer 10247, and the second alignment film 1.
0242 is formed.

Note that the light-blocking film 10244 is not necessarily formed over the second substrate 10246. Shading film 1
In the case where 0244 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. Meanwhile, the light shielding film 1024
When 4 is formed, a display device with little light leakage during black display can be obtained.

Note that the color filter 10245 is not necessarily formed over the second substrate 10246.
In the case where the color filter 10245 is not formed, the manufacturing cost can be reduced because the number of steps is reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. However, even when the color filter 10245 is not manufactured, a display device capable of color display by field sequential driving can be obtained. On the other hand, the color filter 1024
When forming 5, a display device capable of color display can be obtained.

Note that spherical spacers may be dispersed over the second substrate 10246 instead of the spacers 10247. When the spherical spacers are dispersed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. on the other hand,
In the case of forming the spacer 10247, since the position of the spacer does not vary, the distance between the two substrates can be made uniform, and a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained.

Processing performed on the first substrate 10231 will be described.

First, the first insulating film 10232 is formed over the first substrate 10231 by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. Note that the first insulating film 10232 is not necessarily formed. The first insulating film 10232 has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the characteristics of the transistor.

Next, a first conductive layer 10233 is formed over the first insulating film 10232 by a photolithography method,
It is formed by a laser direct drawing method or an ink jet method.

Next, a second insulating film 10234 is formed over the entire surface by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. In the second insulating film 10234, impurities from the substrate affect the semiconductor layer,
It has a function of preventing changes in characteristics of the transistor.

Next, a first semiconductor layer 10235 and a second semiconductor layer 10236 are formed. Note that the first semiconductor layer 10235 and the second semiconductor layer 10236 are successively formed, and the shapes thereof are processed at the same time.

Next, the second conductive layer 10237 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Note that dry etching is preferable as an etching method performed when the shape of the second conductive layer 10237 is processed. In addition,
As the second conductive layer 10237, a transparent material or a reflective material may be used.

Next, a channel region of the transistor is formed. An example of the process will be described. The second semiconductor layer 10236 is etched using the second conductive layer 10237 as a mask. Alternatively, etching is performed using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 10237. Then, the portion of the first conductive layer 10233 from which the second semiconductor layer 10236 is removed becomes a transistor and a channel region. By doing so, the number of masks can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, a third insulating film 10238 is formed, and contact holes are selectively formed in the third insulating film 10238. Note that a contact hole may be formed in the second insulating film 10234 at the same time as the contact hole is formed in the third insulating film 10238. In addition,
The surface of the third insulating film 10238 is preferably as flat as possible. This is because the alignment of liquid crystal molecules is affected by the unevenness of the surface in contact with the liquid crystal.

Next, the third conductive layer 10239 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like.

Next, a first alignment film 10240 is formed. Note that after the first alignment film 10240 is formed,
In order to control the alignment of liquid crystal molecules, rubbing may be performed. The rubbing is a process of streaking the alignment film by rubbing the alignment film with a cloth. By performing rubbing, the alignment film can be provided with orientation.

The first substrate 10231 manufactured as described above, the light-shielding film 10244, and the color filter 10
245, the fourth conductive layer 10243, the spacer 10247, and the second substrate 10246 on which the second alignment film 10242 is formed are attached to each other with a gap of several micrometers by a sealant. Then, a liquid crystal material is injected between the two substrates. PVA
In the method, pattern processing is performed on the fourth conductive layer 10243 and the electrode notch 10249 is formed.
Is formed. The shape of the electrode notch 10249 is not limited, but is preferably a shape in which a plurality of rectangles having different directions are combined. By doing so, a plurality of regions having different orientations can be formed, so that a liquid crystal display device with a large viewing angle can be obtained. Note that the fourth conductive layer 10 at the boundary between the electrode notch 10249 and the fourth conductive layer 10243 is used.
The shape of 243 is preferably a smooth curve. By doing so, the alignment of the adjacent liquid crystal molecules 10248 becomes very close, so that alignment defects are reduced. Second alignment film 10
It is possible to reduce defects in the alignment film caused by the step 242 being cut off by the electrode notch 10249.

FIG. 67A is an example of a cross-sectional view of a pixel in the case where an IPS (In-Plane-Switching) method and a transistor are combined. By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 67A to a liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device having a large viewing angle in principle and a small dependence of response speed on gray scale can be obtained.

Features of the pixel structure illustrated in FIG. 67A are described. Liquid crystal molecule 1 shown in FIG.
0318 is an elongated molecule having a major axis and a minor axis. In order to show the direction of the liquid crystal molecules 10318, the length is expressed in FIG. In other words, the liquid crystal molecule 10318 expressed in a long direction has a long axis direction parallel to the paper surface, and the liquid crystal molecule 10318 expressed in a short direction has a long axis direction closer to the normal direction of the paper surface. . That is, the liquid crystal molecules 10318 illustrated in FIG. 67A are aligned so that the direction of the long axis is always in the horizontal direction to the substrate. In FIG. 67 (A), the alignment is shown in the absence of an electric field. However, when an electric field is applied to the liquid crystal molecules 10318, the orientation of the major axis always remains horizontal with the substrate. Rotate with. In this state, a liquid crystal display device with a large viewing angle can be obtained.

Note that a case where a bottom-gate transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as a transistor is described. In the case of using a transistor including an amorphous semiconductor, a liquid crystal display device can be manufactured at low cost using a large-area substrate.

The liquid crystal display device has a basic part that displays an image, called a liquid crystal panel. The liquid crystal panel is bonded with two processed substrates with a gap of several micrometers,
It is manufactured by injecting a liquid crystal material between two substrates. In FIG. 67A, the two substrates are a first substrate 10301 and a second substrate 10316. Transistors and pixel electrodes are formed on the first substrate. A light-blocking film 10314, a color filter 10315, a spacer 10317, and a second alignment film 10312 are formed over the second substrate.

Note that the light-blocking film 10314 is not necessarily formed over the second substrate 10316. Shading film 1
When 0314 is not formed, the manufacturing cost can be reduced because the number of steps is reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, the light shielding film 1031
When 4 is formed, a display device with little light leakage during black display can be obtained.

Note that the color filter 10315 is not necessarily formed over the second substrate 10316.
In the case where the color filter 10315 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. However, even when the color filter 10315 is not formed, a display device capable of color display by field sequential driving can be obtained. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, the color filter 1031
When forming 5, a display device capable of color display can be obtained.

Note that spherical spacers may be dispersed over the second substrate 10316 instead of the spacers 10317. When the spherical spacers are dispersed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. on the other hand,
When the spacer 10317 is formed, the position of the spacer does not vary, so that the distance between the two substrates can be uniform, and a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained.

Processing performed on the first substrate 10301 is described.

First, the first insulating film 10302 is formed over the first substrate 10301 by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. Note that the first insulating film 10302 is not necessarily formed. The first insulating film 10302 has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the characteristics of the transistor.

Next, a first conductive layer 10303 is formed over the first insulating film 10302 by a photolithography method.
It is formed by a laser direct drawing method or an ink jet method.

Next, a second insulating film 10304 is formed over the entire surface by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. In the second insulating film 10304, impurities from the substrate affect the semiconductor layer,
It has a function of preventing changes in characteristics of the transistor.

Next, a first semiconductor layer 10305 and a second semiconductor layer 10306 are formed. Note that the first semiconductor layer 10305 and the second semiconductor layer 10306 are successively formed, and the shapes thereof are processed at the same time.

Next, the second conductive layer 10307 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Note that dry etching is preferable as an etching method performed when the shape of the second conductive layer 10307 is processed. In addition,
As the second conductive layer 10307, a transparent material or a reflective material may be used.

Next, a channel region of the transistor is formed. An example of the process will be described. The second semiconductor layer 10306 is etched using the second conductive layer 10307 as a mask. Alternatively, etching is performed using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 10307. Then, the first conductive layer 10303 where the second semiconductor layer 10306 is removed serves as a transistor and a channel region. By doing so, the number of masks can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, a third insulating film 10308 is formed, and contact holes are selectively formed in the third insulating film 10308. Note that a contact hole may be formed in the second insulating film 10304 at the same time as a contact hole is formed in the third insulating film 10308.

Next, the third conductive layer 10309 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Here, the shape of the third conductive layer 10309 is two comb teeth that are meshed with each other. One comb-like electrode is electrically connected to one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor, and the other comb-like electrode is electrically connected to the common electrode. By doing so, a horizontal electric field can be effectively applied to the liquid crystal molecules 10318.

Next, a first alignment film 10310 is formed. Note that after the first alignment film 10310 is formed,
In order to control the alignment of liquid crystal molecules, rubbing may be performed. The rubbing is a process of streaking the alignment film by rubbing the alignment film with a cloth. By performing rubbing, the alignment film can be provided with orientation.

The first substrate 10301 manufactured as described above, the light shielding film 10314, and the color filter 10
315, the spacer 10317, and the second alignment film 10312 are attached to each other with a gap of several micrometers by a sealant. Then, a liquid crystal material is injected between the two substrates.

FIG. 67B is an example of a cross-sectional view of a pixel in the case where an FFS (Fringe Field Switching) method and a transistor are combined. By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 67B to a liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device having a large viewing angle in principle and a small dependence of response speed on gray scale can be obtained.

Features of the pixel structure illustrated in FIG. 69B are described. Liquid crystal molecule 1 shown in FIG.
0348 is an elongated molecule having a major axis and a minor axis. In order to indicate the direction of the liquid crystal molecules 10348, the length is expressed in FIG. In other words, the liquid crystal molecule 10348 expressed in a long direction has a direction of the long axis parallel to the paper surface, and the liquid crystal molecule 10348 expressed in a short direction has a long axis direction closer to the normal direction of the paper surface. . That is, the liquid crystal molecules 10348 illustrated in FIG. 69B are aligned so that the direction of the long axis is always in the horizontal direction to the substrate. In FIG. 69 (B), the alignment is shown in the absence of an electric field. However, when an electric field is applied to the liquid crystal molecules 10348, the orientation of the major axis always remains horizontal with the substrate. Rotate with. In this state, a liquid crystal display device with a large viewing angle can be obtained.

Note that a case where a bottom-gate transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as a transistor is described. In the case of using a transistor including an amorphous semiconductor, a liquid crystal display device can be manufactured at low cost using a large-area substrate.

The liquid crystal display device has a basic part that displays an image, called a liquid crystal panel. The liquid crystal panel is bonded with two processed substrates with a gap of several micrometers,
It is manufactured by injecting a liquid crystal material between two substrates. In FIG. 69B, the two substrates are a first substrate 10331 and a second substrate 10346. Transistors and pixel electrodes are formed on the first substrate, and the light shielding film 10344 and the color filter 1 are formed on the second substrate.
0345, a spacer 10347, and a second alignment film 10342 are formed.

Note that the light-blocking film 10344 is not necessarily formed over the second substrate 10346. Shading film 1
In the case where 0344 is not formed, the manufacturing cost can be reduced because the number of steps is reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, the light shielding film 1034
When 4 is formed, a display device with little light leakage during black display can be obtained.

Note that the color filter 10345 is not necessarily formed over the second substrate 10346.
In the case where the color filter 10345 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. However, even when the color filter 10345 is not formed, a display device capable of color display by field sequential driving can be obtained. On the other hand, the color filter 1034
When forming 5, a display device capable of color display can be obtained.

Note that spherical spacers may be dispersed over the second substrate 10346 instead of the spacers 10347. When the spherical spacers are dispersed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. on the other hand,
In the case where the spacer 10347 is formed, since the position of the spacer does not vary, the distance between the two substrates can be made uniform, and a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained.

Processing performed on the first substrate 10331 will be described.

First, the first insulating film 10332 is formed over the first substrate 10331 by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. Note that the first insulating film 10332 is not necessarily formed. The first insulating film 10332 has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the characteristics of the transistor.

Next, a first conductive layer 10333 is formed over the first insulating film 10332 by a photolithography method.
It is formed by a laser direct drawing method or an ink jet method.

Next, a second insulating film 10334 is formed over the entire surface by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. In the second insulating film 10334, impurities from the substrate affect the semiconductor layer,
It has a function of preventing changes in characteristics of the transistor.

Next, a first semiconductor layer 10335 and a second semiconductor layer 10336 are formed. Note that the first semiconductor layer 10335 and the second semiconductor layer 10336 are successively formed, and the shapes thereof are processed at the same time.

Next, the second conductive layer 10337 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Note that as an etching method performed when the shape of the second conductive layer 10337 is processed, dry etching is preferable. In addition,
As the second conductive layer 10337, a transparent material or a reflective material may be used.

Next, a channel region of the transistor is formed. An example of the process will be described. The second semiconductor layer 10336 is etched using the second conductive layer 10337 as a mask. Alternatively, etching is performed using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 10337. Then, the first conductive layer 10333 where the second semiconductor layer 10336 is removed serves as a transistor and a channel region. By doing so, the number of masks can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, a third insulating film 10338 is formed, and contact holes are selectively formed in the third insulating film 10338.

Next, the fourth conductive layer 10343 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like.

Next, a fourth insulating film 10349 is formed, and contact holes are selectively formed in the fourth insulating film 10349. Note that the surface of the fourth insulating film 10349 is preferably as flat as possible. This is because the alignment of liquid crystal molecules is affected by the unevenness of the surface in contact with the liquid crystal.

Next, the third conductive layer 10339 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Here, the third conductive layer 10339 has a comb shape.

Next, a first alignment film 10340 is formed. Note that after the first alignment film 10340 is formed,
In order to control the alignment of liquid crystal molecules, rubbing may be performed. The rubbing is a process of streaking the alignment film by rubbing the alignment film with a cloth. By performing rubbing, the alignment film can be provided with orientation.

The first substrate 10331 manufactured as described above, the light shielding film 10344, and the color filter 10
A liquid crystal panel can be manufactured by bonding 345, the spacer 10347, and the second alignment film 10342 with a sealant with a gap of several micrometers and injecting a liquid crystal material between the two substrates.

Here, materials that can be used for each conductive layer or each insulating film will be described.

The first insulating film 10102 in FIG. 65, the first insulating film 10202 in FIG. 66A, and FIG.
), The first insulating film 10302 in FIG. 67A, and the first insulating film 10332 in FIG. 67B, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film ( An insulating film such as SiOxNy can be used. Alternatively, the first insulating film 101
For 02, an insulating film having a stacked structure in which two or more films of a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy), or the like are combined can be used.

The first conductive layer 10103 in FIG. 65, the first conductive layer 10203 in FIG. 66A, and FIG.
), The first conductive layer 10303 in FIG. 67A, the first conductive layer 10303 in FIG. 67A, and the first conductive layer 10333 in FIG. Mo, Ti
Al, Nd, Cr, or the like can be used. Alternatively, Mo, Ti, Al, Nd, C
A stacked structure in which two or more of r and the like are combined can also be used.

The second insulating film 10104 in FIG. 65, the second insulating film 10204 in FIG. 66A, and FIG.
), The second insulating film 10304 in FIG. 67A, and the second insulating film 10334 in FIG. 67B, a thermal oxide film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or an oxide film. A silicon nitride film or the like can be used. Alternatively, a stacked structure in which two or more of a thermal oxide film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film, and the like are combined can be used. Note that a silicon oxide film is preferable in a portion in contact with the semiconductor layer. This is because the trap level at the interface with the semiconductor layer is reduced when a silicon oxide film is used. Note that a silicon nitride film is preferable in a portion in contact with Mo.
This is because the silicon nitride film does not oxidize Mo.

The first semiconductor layer 10105 in FIG. 65, the first semiconductor layer 10205 in FIG. 66A, and FIG.
FIG. 67B shows the first semiconductor layer 10235 in FIG. 67B, the first semiconductor layer 10305 in FIG.
As the first semiconductor layer 10335 in (B), silicon or silicon germanium (Si
Ge) or the like can be used.

The second semiconductor layer 10106 in FIG. 65, the second semiconductor layer 10206 in FIG. 66A, and FIG.
The second semiconductor layer 10236 in (B), the second semiconductor layer 10306 in FIG. 67A, and FIG.
As the second semiconductor layer 10336 in (B), silicon containing phosphorus or the like can be used.

The second conductive layer 10107 and the third conductive layer 10109 in FIG. 65, the second conductive layer 10207 and the third conductive layer 10209 in FIG. 66A, the second conductive layer 10237 in FIG. The second conductive layer 10239, the second conductive layer 10307 in FIG. 67A, and the second conductive layer 1
As the material having transparency of the second conductive layer 10337, the second conductive layer 10339, and the fourth conductive layer 10343 in FIG. 67B, indium tin oxide in which tin oxide is mixed with indium oxide is used. (ITO) film, indium tin oxide (ITSO) film in which indium tin oxide (ITO) is mixed with silicon oxide, indium zinc oxide (IZO) film in which zinc oxide is mixed in zinc oxide, zinc oxide film or oxide A tin film or the like can be used. Note that IZO is a transparent conductive material formed by sputtering using a target in which 2 to 20 wt% zinc oxide (ZnO) is mixed with ITO.

The second conductive layer 10107 and the third conductive layer 10109 in FIG. 65, the second conductive layer 10207 and the third conductive layer 10209 in FIG. 66A, the second conductive layer 10237 in FIG. The second conductive layer 10239, the second conductive layer 10307 in FIG. 67A, and the second conductive layer 1
As the material having reflectivity for the second conductive layer 10337, the second conductive layer 10339, and the fourth conductive layer 10343 in FIG. 67B, Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W
Al or the like can be used. Alternatively, a two-layer structure in which Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, and Al are stacked, or a three-layer structure in which Al is sandwiched between metals such as Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, and W may be used.

65, the third insulating film 10208 in FIG. 66A, and the third insulating film 10208 in FIG.
) Third insulating film 10238, FIG. 66B third conductive layer 10239, FIG. 67A third insulating film 10308, FIG. 67B third insulating film 10338 and fourth Insulating film 10
As the material 349, an inorganic material (such as silicon oxide, silicon nitride, or silicon oxynitride) or a low dielectric constant organic compound material (such as a photosensitive or non-photosensitive organic resin material) can be used. Alternatively, a material containing siloxane can be used. Siloxane is a material in which a skeleton structure is formed by a bond of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O). As a substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (for example, an alkyl group or an aromatic hydrocarbon) is used. Alternatively, a fluoro group may be used as a substituent. Alternatively, an organic group containing at least hydrogen and a fluoro group may be used as a substituent.

The first alignment film 10110 in FIG. 65, the first alignment film 10210 in FIG. 66A, and FIG.
), The first alignment film 10310 in FIG. 66B, and the first alignment film 10340 in FIG. 67B can be a polymer film such as polyimide.

Next, a pixel structure in the case where each liquid crystal mode and a transistor are combined will be described with reference to a top view (layout diagram) of the pixel.

As the liquid crystal mode, TN (Twisted Nematic) mode, IPS (
In-Plane-Switching mode, FFS (Fringe Field)
Switching mode, MVA (Multi-domain Vertical)
Alignment mode, PVA (Patterned Vertical Ali)
gmnent), ASM (Axial Symmetric Aligned Mi)
cro-cell) mode, OCB (Optical Compensated Bir)
efficiency mode, FLC (Ferroelectric Liquid)
Crystal) mode, AFLC (Antiferroelectric Liquid)
d Crystal) or the like can be used.

Note that as the transistor, a thin film transistor (TFT) including a non-single-crystal semiconductor layer typified by amorphous silicon, polycrystalline silicon, microcrystalline (also referred to as semi-amorphous) silicon, or the like can be used.

Note that a top gate type, a bottom gate type, or the like can be used as a structure of the transistor. As the bottom-gate transistor, a channel etch type, a channel protection type, or the like can be used.

FIG. 68 is an example of a top view of a pixel in the case where a TN mode and a transistor are combined.
By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 68 to a liquid crystal display device, the liquid crystal display device can be manufactured at low cost.

68 includes a scanning line 10401, a video signal line 10402, and a capacitor line 10403.
A transistor 10404, a pixel electrode 10405, and a pixel capacitor 10406.

The scan line 10401 has a function of transmitting a signal (scan signal) to the pixel. Video signal line 10
Reference numeral 402 denotes a function for transmitting a signal (video signal) to a pixel. The scanning line 104
Since 01 and the video signal line 10402 are arranged in a matrix, they are formed of different conductive layers. Note that the scan line 10401. A semiconductor layer may be disposed at an intersection with the video signal line 10402. In this way, the scanning line 10401 is obtained. Video signal line 10
402 and the cross capacitance can be reduced.

The capacitor line 10403 is arranged in parallel with the pixel electrode 10405. A portion where the capacitor line 10403 and the pixel electrode 10405 overlap is a pixel capacitor 10406. Note that a part of the capacitor line 10403 extends along the video signal line 10402 so as to surround the video signal line 10402. By doing so, crosstalk can be reduced. Crosstalk is a phenomenon in which the potential of an electrode that should hold a potential changes with a change in potential of the video signal line 10402. Note that the capacitor line 10403 and the video signal line 1040
By disposing the semiconductor layer between the two, the cross capacitance can be reduced. In addition,
The capacitor line 10403 is formed using a material similar to that of the scan line 10401.

The transistor 10404 functions as a switch for electrically connecting the video signal line 10402 and the pixel electrode 10405. Note that one of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10404 is disposed so as to be surrounded by the other of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10404. Thus, the channel width of the transistor 10404 is increased, so that switching ability can be improved. Note that the transistor 10404
The gate electrode is disposed so as to surround the semiconductor layer.

The pixel electrode 10405 is electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 10404. The pixel electrode 10405 is an electrode for applying a signal voltage transmitted through the video signal line 10402 to the liquid crystal element. Note that the pixel electrode 10405 is rectangular. By doing so, the aperture ratio of the pixel can be increased. The pixel electrode 1040
As 5, a material having transparency or a material having reflectivity can be used. Alternatively, a material having transparency and a material having reflectivity may be combined and used for the pixel electrode 10405.

FIG. 69A is an example of a top view of a pixel in the case where an MVA method and a transistor are combined. By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 69A to a liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle, a high response speed, and a high contrast can be obtained.

69A includes a scan line 10501, a video signal line 10502, and a capacitor line 10.
503, a transistor 10504, a pixel electrode 10505, a pixel capacitor 10506,
An orientation control protrusion 10507.

The scan line 10501 has a function of transmitting a signal (scan signal) to the pixel. Video signal line 10
Reference numeral 502 denotes a function for transmitting a signal (video signal) to a pixel. Scan line 105
Since 01 and the video signal line 10502 are arranged in a matrix, they are formed of different conductive layers. Note that the scan line 10501. A semiconductor layer may be disposed at an intersection with the video signal line 10502. In this way, the scanning line 10501 is obtained. Video signal line 10
502 and cross capacitance can be reduced.

The capacitor line 10503 is arranged in parallel with the pixel electrode 10505. A portion where the capacitor line 10503 and the pixel electrode 10505 overlap with each other is a pixel capacitor 10506. Note that a part of the capacitor line 10503 extends along the video signal line 10502 so as to surround the video signal line 10502. By doing so, crosstalk can be reduced. Crosstalk is a phenomenon in which the potential of an electrode that should hold a potential changes with a change in potential of the video signal line 10502. Note that the capacitor line 10503 and the video signal line 1050
By disposing the semiconductor layer between the two, the cross capacitance can be reduced. In addition,
The capacitor line 10503 is formed using a material similar to that of the scan line 10501.

The transistor 10504 functions as a switch for electrically connecting the video signal line 10502 and the pixel electrode 10505. Note that one of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10504 is disposed so as to be surrounded by the other of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10504. Thus, the channel width of the transistor 10504 is increased, so that switching ability can be improved. Note that the transistor 10504
The gate electrode is disposed so as to surround the semiconductor layer.

The pixel electrode 10505 is electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 10504. The pixel electrode 10505 is an electrode for applying a signal voltage transmitted through the video signal line 10502 to the liquid crystal element. Note that the pixel electrode 10505 is rectangular. By doing so, the aperture ratio of the pixel can be increased. The pixel electrode 1050
As 5, a material having transparency or a material having reflectivity can be used. Alternatively, a material having transparency and a material having reflectivity may be combined and used for the pixel electrode 10505.

The orientation control protrusion 10507 is formed on the counter substrate. The alignment control protrusion 10507 has a function of radially aligning liquid crystal molecules. The shape of the alignment control protrusion 10507 is not limited. For example, the shape of the orientation control protrusion 10507 may be a dogleg shape. By doing so, it is possible to form a plurality of regions having different alignments of liquid crystal molecules. The viewing angle can be improved.

FIG. 69B is an example of a top view of a pixel in the case where a PVA mode and a transistor are combined. By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 69B to a liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle, a high response speed, and a high contrast can be obtained.

69B includes a scan line 10511, a video signal line 10512, and a capacitor line 10.
513, a transistor 10514, a pixel electrode 10515, a pixel capacitor 10516,
An electrode notch portion 10517.

The scan line 10511 has a function of transmitting a signal (scan signal) to the pixel. Video signal line 10
512 has a function for transmitting a signal (video signal) to a pixel. Scan line 105
11 and the video signal line 10512 are arranged in a matrix, and are formed of different conductive layers. Note that the scan line 10511 is used. A semiconductor layer may be disposed at an intersection with the video signal line 10512. In this way, the scanning line 10511 is obtained. Video signal line 10
512 and cross capacitance can be reduced.

The capacitor line 10513 is arranged in parallel with the pixel electrode 10515. A portion where the capacitor line 10513 and the pixel electrode 10515 overlap with each other is a pixel capacitor 10516. Note that a part of the capacitor line 10513 extends along the video signal line 10512 so as to surround the video signal line 10512. By doing so, crosstalk can be reduced. Crosstalk is a phenomenon in which the potential of an electrode that should hold a potential changes with a change in potential of the video signal line 10512. Note that the capacitor line 10513 and the video signal line 1051 are provided.
By disposing the semiconductor layer between the two, the cross capacitance can be reduced. In addition,
The capacitor line 10513 is formed using a material similar to that of the scan line 10511.

The transistor 10514 functions as a switch for electrically connecting the video signal line 10512 and the pixel electrode 10515. Note that one of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10514 is disposed so as to be surrounded by the other of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10514. Thus, the channel width of the transistor 10514 is increased, so that switching ability can be improved. Note that the transistor 10514
The gate electrode is disposed so as to surround the semiconductor layer.

The pixel electrode 10515 is electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 10514. The pixel electrode 10515 is an electrode for applying a signal voltage transmitted through the video signal line 10512 to the liquid crystal element. Note that the pixel electrode 10515 has a shape that matches the shape of the electrode notch 10517. Specifically, the electrode notch 10517
The shape is such that a portion in which the pixel electrode 10515 is not formed is formed in a portion without the mark. By doing so, it is possible to form a plurality of regions having different alignments of liquid crystal molecules. The viewing angle can be improved. Note that the pixel electrode 10515 can be formed using a transparent material or a reflective material. Alternatively, a material having transparency and a material having reflectivity may be combined and used for the pixel electrode 10515.

FIG. 70A is an example of a top view of a pixel in the case where an IPS mode and a transistor are combined. By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 70A to a liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device having a large viewing angle in principle and a small dependence of response speed on gray scale can be obtained.

A pixel illustrated in FIG. 70A includes a scanning line 10601, a video signal line 10602, and a common electrode 1.
0603, a transistor 10604, and a pixel electrode 10605.

The scan line 10601 has a function of transmitting a signal (scan signal) to the pixel. Video signal line 10
Reference numeral 602 denotes a function for transmitting a signal (video signal) to a pixel. Scan line 106
Since 01 and the video signal line 10602 are arranged in a matrix, they are formed of different conductive layers. Note that a semiconductor layer may be provided at an intersection between the scanning line 10601 and the video signal line 10602. In this way, the scanning line 10601 is obtained. Video signal line 106
02 and cross capacitance can be reduced. Note that the video signal line 10602 is connected to the pixel electrode 10.
It is formed in accordance with the shape of 605.

The common electrode 10603 is disposed in parallel with the pixel electrode 10605. Common electrode 1060
Reference numeral 3 denotes an electrode for generating a horizontal electric field. Note that the common electrode 10603 has a bent comb shape. Note that part of the common electrode 10603 extends along the video signal line 10602 so as to surround the video signal line 10602. By doing so, crosstalk can be reduced. Crosstalk is a phenomenon in which the potential of an electrode that should hold a potential changes with a change in potential of the video signal line 10602. Note that by disposing a semiconductor layer between the common electrode 10603 and the video signal line 10602, cross capacitance can be reduced. Note that a portion of the common electrode 10603 arranged in parallel with the scan line 10601 is formed using a material similar to that of the scan line 10601. Common electrode 106
The portion arranged in parallel with the pixel electrode 10605 of 03 is made of the same material as that of the pixel electrode 10605.

The transistor 10604 functions as a switch for electrically connecting the video signal line 10602 and the pixel electrode 10605. Note that one of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10604 is disposed so as to be surrounded by the other of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10604. Thus, the channel width of the transistor 10604 is increased, so that switching ability can be improved. Note that the transistor 10604
The gate electrode is disposed so as to surround the semiconductor layer.

The pixel electrode 10605 is electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 10604. The pixel electrode 10505 is an electrode for applying a signal voltage transmitted through the video signal line 10602 to the liquid crystal element. Note that the pixel electrode 10605 has a bent comb-like shape. By doing so, a transverse electric field can be applied to the liquid crystal molecules.
A plurality of regions having different alignment of liquid crystal molecules can be formed. The viewing angle can be improved. Note that the pixel electrode 10605 can be formed using a transparent material or a reflective material. Alternatively, a material having transparency and a material having reflectivity may be combined and used for the pixel electrode 10605.

Note that the comb-like portion of the common electrode 10603 and the pixel electrode 10605 may be formed of different conductive layers. For example, the comb-like portion of the common electrode 10603 is the scanning line 1
It may be formed of the same conductive layer as 0601 or the video signal line 10602. Similarly, the pixel electrode 10605 may be formed using the same conductive layer as the scan line 10601 or the video signal line 10602.

FIG. 70B is a top view of a pixel in the case where the FFS mode and a transistor are combined. By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 70B to a liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device with a large viewing angle in principle and a small dependence of response speed on gray scale can be obtained.

The pixel illustrated in FIG. 70B includes a scan line 10611, a video signal line 10612, and the common electrode 1.
0613, a transistor 10614, and a pixel electrode 10615 may be provided.

The scan line 10611 has a function of transmitting a signal (scan signal) to the pixel. Video signal line 10
Reference numeral 612 has a function of transmitting a signal (video signal) to the pixel. Scan line 106
11 and the video signal line 10612 are arranged in a matrix, and are formed of different conductive layers. Note that the scan line 10611. A semiconductor layer may be disposed at an intersection with the video signal line 10612. In this way, the scanning line 10611 is obtained. Video signal line 10
612 and the cross capacitance can be reduced. Note that the video signal line 10612 is connected to the pixel electrode 1.
It is formed to match the shape of 0615.

The common electrode 106016 is uniformly formed below the pixel electrode 10615 and below the pixel electrode 10615 and the pixel electrode 10615. Note that the common electrode 106033 can be formed using a transparent material or a reflective material. Alternatively, a material having transparency and a material having reflectivity may be combined and used for the common electrode 106001.

The transistor 10614 functions as a switch for electrically connecting the video signal line 10612 and the pixel electrode 10615. Note that one of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10604 is disposed so as to be surrounded by the other of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10614. Thus, the channel width of the transistor 10614 is increased, so that switching ability can be improved. Note that the transistor 10614
The gate electrode is disposed so as to surround the semiconductor layer.

The pixel electrode 10615 is electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 10614. The pixel electrode 10515 is an electrode for applying a signal voltage transmitted through the video signal line 10612 to the liquid crystal element. Note that the pixel electrode 10615 has a bent comb-like shape. By doing so, a transverse electric field can be applied to the liquid crystal molecules.
Note that the comb-like pixel electrode 10615 is disposed closer to the liquid crystal layer than the uniform portion of the common electrode 10613. A plurality of regions having different alignment of liquid crystal molecules can be formed.
The viewing angle can be improved. Note that the pixel electrode 10615 can be formed using a transparent material or a reflective material. Alternatively, a material having transparency and a material having reflectivity may be combined and used for the pixel electrode 10615.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 14)
In this embodiment, a manufacturing process of a liquid crystal cell (also referred to as a liquid crystal panel) is described.

FIG. 71 (a) shows a manufacturing process of a liquid crystal cell in the case of using a vacuum injection method as a liquid crystal filling method.
A description will be given with reference to A) to (E) and FIGS. 72 (A) to (C).

FIG. 72C is a cross-sectional view illustrating a liquid crystal cell. First substrate 70101 and second substrate 70
107 are attached to each other with a spacer 70106 and a sealant 70105 interposed therebetween.
A liquid crystal 70109 is provided between the first substrate 70101 and the second substrate 70107. Note that an alignment film 70102 is formed over the first substrate 70101 and the alignment film 701 is formed.
08 is formed over the second substrate 70107.

A plurality of pixels are formed in a matrix on the first substrate 70101. Each of the plurality of pixels may include a transistor. Note that the first substrate 70101 is T
It may be called an FT substrate, an array substrate, or a TFT array substrate. As the first substrate 70101, a single crystal substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a plastic substrate, a paper substrate, a cellophane substrate, a stone substrate, a wood substrate, a cloth substrate (natural fiber (silk, cotton, hemp), synthetic material) Using fibers (including nylon, polyurethane, polyester) or recycled fibers (including acetate, cupra, rayon, recycled polyester), leather substrates, rubber substrates, stainless steel substrates, substrates with stainless steel foil, etc. it can. Alternatively, the skin (skin surface, dermis) or subcutaneous tissue of an animal such as a human may be used as the substrate. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various things can be used.

A common electrode, a color filter, a black matrix, and the like are formed over the second substrate 70107. Note that the second substrate 70107 may be referred to as a counter substrate or a color filter substrate.

The alignment film 70102 has a function of aligning liquid crystal molecules in a certain direction. Alignment film 70102
For example, a polyimide resin can be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various things can be used. Note that the alignment film 70108 is similar to the alignment film 70102.

The sealant 70105 is formed on the first substrate 70101 and the second substrate so that the liquid crystal 70109 does not leak.
The substrate 70107 is bonded. That is, it functions as a sealing material.

The spacer 70106 has a function of keeping a space (a liquid crystal cell gap) between the first substrate 70101 and the second substrate 70107 constant. As the spacer 70106, a granular spacer or a columnar spacer can be used. As the granular spacer, there are a fiber type and a spherical type. The material of the granular spacer includes plastic or glass. A spherical spacer formed of plastic is called a plastic bead and is widely used. In addition, the fiber-shaped spacer formed with glass is called glass fiber, and is mixed with a sealing material and used.

FIG. 71A is a cross-sectional view illustrating the step of forming the alignment film 70102 over the first substrate 70101. The alignment film 70102 is formed over the first substrate 70101 by a roller coating method using a roller 70103. However, the alignment film 701 is formed over the first substrate 70101.
As a method for forming 02, in addition to the roller coating method, an offset printing method, a dip coating method, an air knife coating method, a curtain coating method, a wire bar coating method, a gravure coating method, an extrusion coating method, or the like may be used. it can. Thereafter, temporary baking and main baking are sequentially performed on the alignment film 70102.

FIG. 71B is a cross-sectional view illustrating a step of performing a rubbing process on the alignment film 70102. The rubbing treatment is performed by rubbing the alignment film 70102 by rotating a rubbing roller 70104 in which a cloth is wound around a drum. When this rubbing treatment is performed on the alignment film 70102, grooves for aligning liquid crystal molecules in a certain direction are formed in the alignment film 70102. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a groove may be formed in the alignment film using an ion beam. after that,
A water cleaning process is performed on the first substrate 70101. In this way, the first substrate 70101
It is possible to remove foreign matter or dirt on the surface of the surface.

Note that although not illustrated, an alignment film 70108 is formed over the second substrate 70107 as in the case of the first substrate 70101, and a rubbing process is performed on the alignment film 70108. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a groove may be formed in the alignment film using an ion beam.

FIG. 71C is a cross-sectional view illustrating a step of forming the sealing material 70105 over the alignment film 70102. The sealing material 70105 is applied by a drawing apparatus or screen printing to form a seal pattern. This seal pattern is formed along the outer periphery of the first substrate 70101, and a liquid crystal injection port is provided in a part of the seal pattern. And U for temporary fixing
V resin is spot-coated by a dispenser or the like outside the display area of the first substrate 70101.

Note that the sealant 70105 may be formed over the second substrate 70107.

FIG. 71D is a cross-sectional view illustrating a step of spraying the spacer 70106 over the first substrate 70101. The spacer 70106 is sprayed and sprayed from the nozzle together with the compressed gas (dry spraying). Alternatively, the spacer 70106 is mixed with a volatile liquid, and this liquid is sprayed so as to expose the jet path (wet spraying). By such dry spraying or wet spraying, the spacer 70106 can be uniformly sprayed on the first substrate 70101.

Here, the case where a spherical granular spacer is used as the spacer 70106 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and columnar spacers can also be used. The columnar spacer may be formed on the first substrate 70101 or may be formed on the second substrate 70107. Alternatively, part of the spacer may be formed over the first substrate 70101 and the rest may be formed over the second substrate 70107.

In addition, the spacer may be mixed in the sealing material. By doing so, the cell gap of the liquid crystal can be easily kept constant.

FIG. 71E is a cross-sectional view illustrating a step of bonding the first substrate 70101 and the second substrate 70107 together. The first substrate 70101 and the second substrate 70107 are attached to each other in the air. Then, both substrates are pressed so that the gap between the first substrate 70101 and the second substrate 70107 is constant. After that, ultraviolet irradiation or heat treatment is performed on the sealant 701.
By applying to 05, the sealing material 70105 is cured.

FIGS. 72A and 72B are top views showing a process of filling liquid crystal. First substrate 70
A cell (also referred to as an empty cell) in which 101 and the second substrate 70107 are attached to each other is placed in a vacuum chamber. Thereafter, after the inside of the vacuum chamber is depressurized, the liquid crystal inlet 70113 of the empty cell is immersed in the liquid crystal. When the inside of the vacuum chamber is opened to the atmosphere, the liquid crystal 70109 is filled into the empty cell by the differential pressure and capillary action.

When a necessary amount of liquid crystal 70109 is filled in the empty cell, the liquid crystal injection port is sealed with resin 70110. Then, the liquid crystal adhering excessively to the empty cell is washed. Thereafter, a realignment process is performed on the liquid crystal 70109 by an annealing process. Thus, the liquid crystal cell is completed.

Next, a manufacturing process of a liquid crystal cell when a dropping method is used as a liquid crystal filling method will be described with reference to FIG.
Description will be made with reference to (A) to (D) and FIGS. 74 (A) to (C).

FIG. 74C is a cross-sectional view illustrating the liquid crystal cell. First substrate 70301 and second substrate 70
307 are attached to each other with a spacer 70306 and a sealant 70305 interposed therebetween.
A liquid crystal 70309 is provided between the first substrate 70301 and the second substrate 70307. Note that an alignment film 70302 is formed over the first substrate 70301 and the alignment film 703 is formed.
08 is formed over the second substrate 70307.

A plurality of pixels are formed in a matrix over the first substrate 70301. Each of the plurality of pixels may include a transistor. Note that the first substrate 70301 is T
It may be called an FT substrate, an array substrate, or a TFT array substrate. As the first substrate 70301, a single crystal substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a plastic substrate, a paper substrate, a cellophane substrate, a stone substrate, a wood substrate, a cloth substrate (natural fiber (silk, cotton, hemp), synthetic material) Using fibers (including nylon, polyurethane, polyester) or recycled fibers (including acetate, cupra, rayon, recycled polyester), leather substrates, rubber substrates, stainless steel substrates, substrates with stainless steel foil, etc. it can. Alternatively, the skin (skin surface, dermis) or subcutaneous tissue of an animal such as a human may be used as the substrate. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various things can be used.

A common electrode, a color filter, a black matrix, and the like are formed over the second substrate 70307. Note that the second substrate 70307 may be referred to as a counter substrate or a color filter substrate.

The alignment film 70302 has a function of aligning liquid crystal molecules in a certain direction. Alignment film 70302
For example, a polyimide resin can be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various things can be used. Note that the alignment film 70308 is similar to the alignment film 70302.

The sealant 70305 is formed with the first substrate 70301 and the second substrate so that the liquid crystal 70309 does not leak.
The substrate 70307 is bonded. That is, it functions as a sealing material.

The spacer 70306 has a function of keeping a space (a liquid crystal cell gap) between the first substrate 70301 and the second substrate 70307 constant. As the spacer 70306, a granular spacer or a columnar spacer can be used. As the granular spacer, there are a fiber type and a spherical type. The material of the granular spacer includes plastic or glass. A spherical spacer formed of plastic is called a plastic bead and is widely used. In addition, the fiber-shaped spacer formed with glass is called glass fiber, and is mixed with a sealing material and used.

FIG. 73A is a cross-sectional view illustrating the step of forming the alignment film 70302 over the first substrate 70301. The alignment film 70302 is formed over the first substrate 70301 by a roller coating method using a roller 70303. However, the alignment film 703 is formed over the first substrate 70301.
As a method for forming 02, in addition to the roller coating method, an offset printing method, a dip coating method, an air knife coating method, a curtain coating method, a wire bar coating method, a gravure coating method, an extrusion coating method, or the like may be used. it can. Thereafter, temporary baking and main baking are sequentially performed on the alignment film 70302.

FIG. 73B is a cross-sectional view illustrating a step of performing a rubbing process on the alignment film 70302. The rubbing treatment is performed by rubbing the alignment film 70302 by rotating a rubbing roller 70304 in which a cloth is wound around a drum. When this rubbing treatment is performed on the alignment film 70302, a groove for aligning liquid crystal molecules in a certain direction is formed in the alignment film 70302. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a groove may be formed in the alignment film using an ion beam. after that,
A water cleaning process is performed on the first substrate 70301. In this way, the first substrate 70301
It is possible to remove foreign matter or dirt on the surface of the surface.

Note that although not illustrated, an alignment film 70308 is formed over the second substrate 70307 as in the case of the first substrate 70301, and a rubbing process is performed on the alignment film 70308. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a groove may be formed in the alignment film using an ion beam.

FIG. 73C is a cross-sectional view illustrating a step of forming the sealing material 70305 over the alignment film 70302. The sealing material 70305 is applied by a drawing apparatus or screen printing to form a seal pattern. This seal pattern is formed along the outer periphery of the first substrate 70301. Here, the sealing material 70305 is a radical type UV resin or a cationic type U resin.
V resin is used. Then, the conductive resin is spot-coated with a dispenser.

Note that the sealant 70305 may be formed over the second substrate 70307.

FIG. 73D is a cross-sectional view illustrating a step of spraying the spacer 70306 over the first substrate 70301. The spacer 70306 is sprayed and sprayed from the nozzle together with the compressed gas (dry spraying). Alternatively, the spacer 70306 is mixed with a volatile liquid, and this liquid is sprayed so as to expose the jet path (wet spraying). By such dry spraying or wet spraying, the spacer 70306 can be uniformly sprayed on the first substrate 70301.

Here, the case where a spherical granular spacer is used as the spacer 70306 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and columnar spacers can also be used. The columnar spacer may be formed on the first substrate 70301 or may be formed on the second substrate 70307. Alternatively, part of the spacer may be formed over the first substrate 70301 and the rest may be formed over the second substrate 70307.

In addition, the spacer may be mixed in the sealing material. By doing so, the cell gap of the liquid crystal can be easily kept constant.

FIG. 74A is a cross-sectional view illustrating the step of dropping the liquid crystal 70309. After the defoaming process is performed on the liquid crystal 70309, the liquid crystal 70309 is dropped inside the sealant 70305.

Note that FIG. 74B is a top view after the liquid crystal 70309 is dropped. Sealing material 7030
5 is formed along the outer periphery of the first substrate 70301, the liquid crystal 70309 does not leak.

FIG. 74C is a cross-sectional view illustrating a step of bonding the first substrate 70301 and the second substrate 70307 together. The first substrate 70301 and the second substrate 70307 are attached to each other in a vacuum chamber. Then, both the substrates are pressed so that the gap between the first substrate 70301 and the second substrate 70307 is constant. After that, the sealing material 70305 is cured by being irradiated with ultraviolet rays. Here, it is desirable to cover the display portion with a mask and to irradiate the sealing material 70305 with ultraviolet rays. This is because the liquid crystal 70309 can be prevented from being deteriorated by ultraviolet rays. Then, by annealing treatment
A realignment process is performed on the liquid crystal 70309. Thus, the liquid crystal cell is completed.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 15)
In this embodiment mode, a structure and operation of a pixel of a display device are described.

75A and 75B are timing charts showing an example of digital time gray scale driving. The timing chart in FIG. 75A shows a driving method in the case where a signal writing period (address period) to a pixel and a light emission period (sustain period) are separated.

Note that a period for completely displaying an image for one display area is referred to as one frame period. One frame period has a plurality of subframe periods, and one subframe period has an address period and a sustain period. The address periods Ta1 to Ta4 indicate the time required for signal writing to pixels for all rows, and the periods Tb1 to Tb4 indicate the time required for signal writing to pixels for one row (or for one pixel). The sustain periods Ts1 to Ts4 indicate the time during which the lighting or non-lighting state is maintained according to the video signal written to the pixels, and the ratio of the lengths is expressed as Ts.
1: Ts2: Ts3: Ts4 = 2 ³ : 2 ² : 2 ¹ : 2 ⁰ = 8: 4: 2: 1. The gradation is expressed by the sustain period during which light is emitted.

The operation will be described. First, in the address period Ta1, pixel selection signals are input to the scanning lines in order from the first row, and pixels are selected. When a pixel is selected, a video signal is input from the signal line to the pixel. When a video signal is written to the pixel, the pixel holds the signal until the signal is input again. Lighting and non-lighting of each pixel in the sustain period Ts1 are controlled by the written video signal. Similarly, video signals are input to the pixels in the address periods Ta2, Ta3, and Ta4, and lighting and non-lighting of each pixel in the sustain periods Ts2, Ts3, and Ts4 are controlled by the video signals. In each subframe period, the pixel is not lit during the address period, and after the address period ends, the sustain period starts, and the pixel in which a signal for lighting is written is lit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 75B, description will be made focusing on the i-th pixel row. First, in the address period Ta1, pixel selection signals are sequentially input to the scanning lines from the first row, and the address period T
The pixel in the i-th row is selected in the period Tb1 (i) among a1. Then, when the i-th row pixel is selected, a video signal is input from the signal line to the i-th row pixel. And
When a video signal is written to the i-th row pixel, the i-th row pixel holds the signal until the signal is input again. Lighting and non-lighting of the i-th row pixel in the sustain period Ts1 are controlled by the written video signal. Similarly, address periods Ta2, Ta3, T
In a4, a video signal is input to the pixel in the i-th row, and lighting and non-lighting of the pixel in the i-th row in the sustain periods Ts2, Ts3, and Ts4 are controlled by the video signal. In each subframe period, the pixel is not lit during the address period, and after the address period ends, the sustain period starts, and the pixel in which a signal for lighting is written is lit.

Although the case where a 4-bit gradation is expressed has been described here, the number of bits and the number of gradations are not limited thereto. Note that the order of lighting does not have to be Ts1, Ts2, Ts3, and Ts4, and may be random or may be divided into a plurality of light sources. Ts1, Ts2
, Ts3 and Ts4 do not need to be a power of 2, but may be the same length of lighting time or may be slightly shifted from a power of 2.

Next, a driving method in the case where the signal writing period (address period) to the pixel and the light emission period (sustain period) are not separated will be described. That is, the pixel in the row where the video signal writing operation is completed holds the signal until the signal is written (or erased) to the pixel next time. A period from writing operation to next signal writing to this pixel is referred to as data holding time. During this data retention time, the pixel is turned on or off according to the video signal written to the pixel. The same operation is performed up to the last line, and the address period ends. Then, the signal writing operation in the next subframe period is started in order from the row where the data holding time has ended.

As described above, when the signal writing operation is completed and the data holding time is reached, in the driving method in which the pixel is turned on or off in accordance with the video signal written to the pixel immediately, the data holding time is attempted to be shorter than the address period. However, since signals cannot be input to two rows at the same time, it is necessary to prevent the address periods from overlapping, and therefore the data holding time cannot be shortened. As a result, it becomes difficult to perform high gradation display.

Therefore, a data holding time shorter than the address period is set by providing an erasing period. A driving method in the case where an erasing period is provided and a data holding time shorter than the address period is set will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in the address period Ta1, pixel scanning signals are input to the scanning lines in order from the first row,
A pixel is selected. When a pixel is selected, a video signal is input from the signal line to the pixel. When a video signal is written to the pixel, the pixel holds the signal until the signal is input again. The sustain period Ts1 is determined by the written video signal.
The lighting and non-lighting of each pixel in are controlled. In the row where the video signal writing operation is completed, the pixels are turned on or off in accordance with the video signal written immediately. The same operation is performed up to the last row, and the address period Ta1 ends. Then, the signal writing operation in the next subframe period is started in order from the row where the data holding time has ended. Similarly, video signals are input to the pixels in the address periods Ta2, Ta3, and Ta4, and lighting and non-lighting of each pixel in the sustain periods Ts2, Ts3, and Ts4 are controlled by the video signals. The end of the sustain period TS4 is set by the start of the erase operation. This is because if the signal written to the pixel is erased at the erase time Te of each row, the signal is forced regardless of the video signal written to the pixel in the address period until the signal is written to the next pixel. This is because the light is not turned on. That is, the data holding time ends from the pixel in the row where the erasing time Te has started.

Here, the i-th pixel row will be described with reference to FIG. In the i-th pixel row, in the address period Ta1, pixel scanning signals are sequentially input to the scanning lines from the first row, and pixels are selected. Then, when the i-th row pixel is selected in the period Tb1 (i), a video signal is input to the i-th row pixel. When a video signal is written to the i-th row pixel, the i-th row pixel holds the signal until the signal is input again. By the written video signal, lighting and non-lighting of the pixel in the i-th row in the sustain period Ts1 (i) are controlled. That is, when the video signal writing operation is completed in the i-th row,
In accordance with the video signal immediately written, the pixels in the i-th row are turned on or off. Similarly, a video signal is input to the i-th row pixel in the address periods Ta2, Ta3, and Ta4, and lighting and non-lighting of the i-th row pixel in the sustain periods Ts2, Ts3, and Ts4 are controlled by the video signal. The end of the sustain period Ts4 (i) is set by starting the erase operation. This is because the light is forcibly turned off regardless of the video signal written to the pixel in the i-th row during the erasing time Ts (i) in the i-th row. That is, when the erasing time Te (i) starts, the data holding time of the pixel in the i-th row ends.

Therefore, it is possible to provide a display device with a high gradation and a high duty ratio (ratio of lighting period in one frame period) shorter than the address period without separating the address period and the sustain period. Since the instantaneous luminance can be lowered, the reliability of the display element can be improved.

Although the case where a 4-bit gradation is expressed has been described here, the number of bits and the number of gradations are not limited thereto. Further, the lighting order need not be Ts1, Ts2, Ts3, and Ts4, and may be random or may be divided into a plurality of light emission. Ts1, Ts2,
The lighting times of Ts3 and Ts4 do not need to be a power of 2, but may be the same lighting time, or may be slightly shifted from the power of 2.

A structure and operation of a pixel to which digital time gray scale driving can be applied will be described.

FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pixel configuration to which digital time gray scale driving can be applied.

The pixel 80300 includes a switching transistor 80301 and a driving transistor 803.
02, a light emitting element 80304 and a capacitor 80303 are provided. The switching transistor 80301 has a gate connected to the scanning line 80306, a first electrode (one of the source electrode and the drain electrode) connected to the signal line 80305, and a second electrode (the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode) connected to the driving transistor. It is connected to the gate of 80302. The driving transistor 80302 has a gate connected to the power supply line 80307 through the capacitor 80303, a first electrode connected to the power supply line 80307, and a second electrode connected to the first electrode of the light emitting element 80304 (
Pixel electrode). The second electrode of the light emitting element 80304 corresponds to the common electrode 80308.

Note that a low power supply potential is set for the second electrode (the common electrode 80308) of the light-emitting element 80304. Note that the low power supply potential is a potential that satisfies the low power supply potential <the high power supply potential with reference to the high power supply potential set in the power supply line 80307. For example, GND, 0V, or the like is set as the low power supply potential. Also good. The potential difference between the high power supply potential and the low power supply potential is expressed as the light emitting element 8030.
4, current is passed through the light emitting element 80304 to cause the light emitting element 80304 to emit light, so that the potential difference between the high power supply potential and the low power supply potential is equal to or higher than the forward threshold voltage of the light emitting element 80304. Set the potential.

Note that the capacitor 80303 can be omitted by using the gate capacitance of the driving transistor 80302 instead. With respect to the gate capacitance of the driving transistor 80302, the capacitance may be formed in a region where the source electrode, the drain region, the LDD region, or the like overlaps with the gate electrode, or the channel region and the gate electrode. A capacitance may be formed between the two.

When a pixel is selected by the scanning line 80306, that is, the switching transistor 80
When 301 is on, a video signal is input from the signal line 80305 to the pixel.
Then, charge for a voltage corresponding to the video signal is accumulated in the capacitor 80303, and the capacitor 80303 holds the voltage. This voltage is a voltage between the gate of the driving transistor 80302 and the first electrode, and corresponds to a gate-source voltage Vgs of the driving transistor 80302.

In general, the operation region of a transistor can be divided into a linear region and a saturation region. The boundary is when (Vgs−Vth) = Vds, where Vds is the drain-source voltage, Vgs is the gate-source voltage, and Vth is the threshold voltage. (Vgs−Vth)> Vds
Is a linear region, and the current value is determined by the magnitudes of Vds and Vgs. on the other hand,(
When Vgs−Vth) <Vds, the saturation region is reached. Ideally, even if Vds changes,
The current value hardly changes. That is, the current value is determined only by the magnitude of Vgs.

Here, in the case of the voltage input voltage driving method, a video signal is input to the gate of the driving transistor 80302 so that the driving transistor 80302 is sufficiently turned on or off. That is, the driving transistor 80302 is operated in a linear region.

Therefore, in the case of a video signal in which the driving transistor 80302 is turned on, ideally, the power supply potential VDD set to the power supply line 80307 is set to the first electrode of the light emitting element 80304 as it is.

That is, ideally, the voltage applied to the light emitting element 80304 is made constant, and the light emitting element 80304 is used.
The luminance obtained from is made constant. A plurality of subframe periods are provided within one frame period, video signals are written to the pixels for each subframe period, and lighting or non-lighting of the pixels is controlled for each subframe period. Depending on the total subframe period,
Express gradation.

Note that when a video signal that causes the driving transistor 80302 to operate in a saturation region is input, a current can flow through the light-emitting element 80304. If the light-emitting element 80304 is an element that determines luminance in accordance with current, reduction in luminance due to deterioration of the light-emitting element 80304 can be suppressed. Further, by making the video signal analog, a light emitting element 8030 is obtained.
4 can be supplied with a current corresponding to the video signal. In this case, analog gradation driving can be performed.

FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pixel configuration to which digital time gray scale driving can be applied.

The pixel 80400 includes a switching transistor 80401 and a driving transistor 804.
02, a capacitor 80403, a light emitting element 80404, and a rectifying element 80409.
The switching transistor 80401 has a gate connected to the second scan line 80406,
The first electrode (one of the source electrode and the drain electrode) is connected to the signal line 80405, and the second electrode (the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode) is connected to the gate of the driving transistor 80402. The driving transistor 80402 has a gate connected to the power supply line 80407 through the capacitor 80403, and a gate connected to the second scanning line 804 through the rectifier 80309.
10, the first electrode is connected to the power supply line 80407, and the second electrode is the light emitting element 8040.
4 first electrodes (pixel electrodes). The second electrode of the light emitting element 80404 corresponds to the common electrode 80408.

Note that a low power supply potential is set for the second electrode (the common electrode 80408) of the light-emitting element 80404. Note that the low power supply potential is a potential that satisfies the low power supply potential <high power supply potential with reference to the high power supply potential set in the power supply line 80407. For example, GND, 0V, or the like is set as the low power supply potential. Also good. The potential difference between the high power supply potential and the low power supply potential is expressed as the light emitting element 8040.
4, current is passed through the light emitting element 80404 to cause the light emitting element 80404 to emit light, so that the potential difference between the high power supply potential and the low power supply potential is equal to or higher than the forward threshold voltage of the light emitting element 80404. Set the potential.

Note that the capacitor 80403 can be omitted by using the gate capacitor of the driving transistor 80402 instead. As for the gate capacitance of the driving transistor 80402, the capacitance may be formed in a region where the source electrode, the drain region, the LDD region, or the like overlaps with the gate electrode, or the channel region and the gate electrode. A capacitance may be formed between the two.

Note that a diode-connected transistor can be used as the rectifying element 80409. Besides a diode-connected transistor, a PN junction diode, a PIN junction diode, a Schottky diode, or a diode formed of carbon nanotubes may be used. The polarity of the diode-connected transistor may be an N-channel type or a P-channel type.

A pixel 80400 includes a rectifier element 80409 and a second scan line 8041 in addition to the pixel shown in FIG.
0 is added. Therefore, the switching transistor 80401 shown in FIG.
, Driving transistor 80402, capacitor element 80403, light emitting element 80404, signal line 8
Reference numeral 0405, the first scan line 80406, the power supply line 80407, and the common electrode 80408 are the switching transistor 80301 and the driving transistor 803 shown in FIG. 77, respectively.
02, a capacitor element 80303, a light emitting element 80304, a signal line 80305, a scanning line 80306
, Corresponding to the power supply line 80307 and the common electrode 80308. Therefore, the writing operation and the light emitting operation in FIG. 78 are the same as the writing operation and the light emitting operation described with reference to FIG.

The erase operation will be described. At the time of erasing operation, an H level signal is input to the second scan line 80410. Then, current flows through the rectifying element 80409, and the gate potential of the driving transistor 80402 held by the capacitor 80403 can be set to a certain potential. In other words, the gate potential of the driving transistor 80402 can be set to a certain potential, and the driving transistor 80402 can be forcibly turned off regardless of the video signal written to the pixel.

Note that the L-level signal input to the second scan line 80410 is set to a potential such that no current flows through the rectifier element 80409 when a non-lighting video signal is written to the pixel.
The H level signal input to the second scan line 80410 is set to a potential at which the gate transistor 80402 can be turned off regardless of the video signal written to the pixel.

Note that a diode-connected transistor can be used as the rectifying element 80409. In addition to a diode-connected transistor, a PN junction diode, P
An IN junction diode, a Schottky diode, a diode formed of carbon nanotubes, or the like may be used. The polarity of the diode-connected transistor may be an N-channel type or a P-channel type.

FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pixel configuration to which digital time gray scale driving can be applied.

The pixel 80500 includes a switching transistor 80501 and a driving transistor 805.
02, a capacitor 80503, a light emitting element 80504, and an erasing transistor 80509. The switching transistor 80501 has a gate connected to the second scan line 80506, a first electrode (one of the source electrode and the drain electrode) connected to the signal line 80505, and a second electrode (the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode) The gate of the driving transistor 80502 is connected. The driving transistor 80502 has a gate that has a capacitor 8050.
3 is connected to the power supply line 80507 through the first gate of the erasing transistor 80509.
The first electrode is connected to the power supply line 80507, and the second electrode is connected to the light emitting element 8050.
4 first electrodes (pixel electrodes). The erasing transistor has a gate connected to the second scan line 80510 and a second electrode connected to the power supply line 80507. Light emitting element 8
The second electrode 0504 corresponds to the common electrode 80508.

Note that a low power supply potential is set for the second electrode (the common electrode 80508) of the light-emitting element 80504. Note that the low power supply potential is a potential that satisfies the low power supply potential <high power supply potential with reference to the high power supply potential set in the power supply line 80507. For example, GND, 0V, or the like is set as the low power supply potential. Also good. The potential difference between the high power supply potential and the low power supply potential is expressed as the light emitting element 8050.
4, current is passed through the light emitting element 80504 to cause the light emitting element 80504 to emit light, so that the potential difference between the high power supply potential and the low power supply potential is equal to or higher than the forward threshold voltage of the light emitting element 80504. Set the potential.

Note that the capacitor 80503 can be omitted by using the gate capacitor of the driving transistor 80502 instead. As for the gate capacitance of the driving transistor 80502, the capacitance may be formed in a region where the source electrode, the drain region, the LDD region, or the like overlaps with the gate electrode, or the channel region and the gate electrode. A capacitance may be formed between the two.

A pixel 80500 is obtained by adding an erasing transistor 80509 and a second scanning line 80510 to the pixel shown in FIG. Accordingly, the switching transistor 80501, the driving transistor 80502, the capacitor 80503, and the light-emitting element 80504 illustrated in FIG.
, Signal line 80505, first scan line 80506, power supply line 80507, and common electrode 8050
8 corresponds to the switching transistor 80301, the driving transistor 80302, the capacitor 80303, the light emitting element 80304, the signal line 80305, the scanning line 80306, the power supply line 80307, and the common electrode 80308 shown in FIG. 77, respectively. Therefore, FIG.
Since the writing operation and the light emitting operation are the same as the writing operation and the light emitting operation described with reference to FIG. 77, the description thereof is omitted.

The erase operation will be described. At the time of erasing operation, an H level signal is input to the second scan line 80510. Then, the erasing transistor 80509 is turned on, so that the gate of the driving transistor and the first electrode can be set to the same potential. That is, the driving transistor 80502
Vgs can be set to 0V. Thus, the driving transistor 80502 can be forcibly turned off.

A configuration and operation of a pixel called a threshold voltage correction type will be described. The threshold voltage correction type pixel can be applied to digital time gray scale driving and analog gray scale driving.

FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pixel configuration called a threshold voltage correction type.

The pixel shown in FIG. 80 includes a driving transistor 80600, a first switch 80601, a second switch
Switch 80602, third switch 80603, first capacitor element 80604, second capacitor element 80605, and light-emitting element 80620. Driving transistor 8060
The 0 gate is connected to the signal line 80611 through the first capacitor 80604 and the first switch 80601 in this order. A gate of the driving transistor 80600 is connected to the power supply line 80612 through the second capacitor element 80605. Driving transistor 80
The first electrode 600 is connected to the power supply line 80612. Driving transistor 8060
The second electrode of 0 is connected to the first electrode of the light emitting element 80620 through the third switch 80603. The second electrode of the driving transistor 80600 is connected to the second switch 8060.
2 is connected to the gate of the driving transistor 80600 through 2. Light emitting element 8062
The second electrode of 0 corresponds to the common electrode 80621.

A low power supply potential is set for the second electrode of the light-emitting element 80620. Note that the low power supply potential is a potential that satisfies the low power supply potential <the high power supply potential with reference to the high power supply potential set in the power supply line 80612. For example, GND, 0V, or the like is set as the low power supply potential. Also good.
A potential difference between the high power supply potential and the low power supply potential is applied to the light emitting element 80620, so that the light emitting element 80
In order to cause the light-emitting element 80620 to emit light by passing a current through 620, each potential is set so that the potential difference between the high power supply potential and the low power supply potential is equal to or higher than the forward threshold voltage of the light-emitting element 80620. Note that the second capacitor element 80605 can be omitted instead of the gate capacitor of the driving transistor 80600. As for the gate capacitance of the driving transistor 80600, the capacitance may be formed in a region where the source electrode, the drain region, the LDD region, or the like overlaps with the gate electrode, or the channel region and the gate electrode. A capacitance may be formed between the two. Note that the first switch 80601, the second switch 80602, and the third switch 80603 are controlled to be turned on and off by a first scan line 80613, a second scan line 80614, and a third scan line 80614, respectively. .

The pixel driving method illustrated in FIG. 80 is described by dividing the operation period into an initialization period, a data writing period, a threshold value acquisition period, and a light emission period.

In the initialization period, the second switch 80602 and the third switch 80603 are turned on.
Then, the gate potential of the driving transistor 80600 is at least lower than the potential of the power supply line 80612. At this time, the first switch 80601 may be on or off. Note that the initialization period is not necessarily required.

In the threshold acquisition period, a pixel is selected by the first scan line 80613. That is, the first switch 80601 is turned on and a certain voltage is input from the signal line 80611. At this time, the second switch 80602 is turned on and the third switch 80603 is turned off. Accordingly, the driving transistor 80600 is diode-connected, and the second electrode and the gate of the driving transistor 80600 are in a floating state (floating state). And
The gate potential of the driving transistor 80600 is a value obtained by subtracting the threshold voltage of the driving transistor 80600 from the potential of the power supply line 80612. Therefore, the first capacitor element 806
04 holds the threshold voltage of the driving transistor 80600. Second capacitive element 8
In 0605, a potential difference between the gate potential of the driving transistor 80600 and a constant voltage input from the signal line 80611 is held.

In the data writing period, a video signal (voltage) is input from the signal line 80611. At this time, the first switch 80601 remains on, the second switch 80602 turns off, and the third switch 80603 remains off. Then, the driving transistor 806
Since the gate of 00 is in a floating state (floating state), the gate potential of the driving transistor 80600 is a constant voltage input to the signal line 80611 in the threshold value acquisition period and the signal line 80611 input in the data writing period. It changes according to the potential difference with the video signal. For example, the capacitance value of the first capacitor element 80604 << the second capacitor element 8
If the capacitance value is 0605, the driving transistor 80600 in the data writing period
The threshold potential of the driving transistor 80600 is determined from the potential of the signal line 80611 in the threshold acquisition period and the potential and potential difference (change amount) of the signal line 80611 in the data writing period and the potential of the power supply line 80612. Is approximately equal to the sum of the value minus.
That is, the potential of the gate of the driving transistor 80600 is equal to that of the driving transistor 8060.
A potential obtained by correcting the threshold voltage of 0 is obtained.

In the light emission period, the potential difference between the gate of the driving transistor 80600 and the power supply line 80612 (
A current corresponding to Vgs) flows to the light emitting element 80620. At this time, the first switch 806
01 turns off, the second switch 80602 remains off, and the third switch 8060
3 turns on. Note that a current flowing through the light-emitting element 80620 is a driving transistor 8060.
It is constant regardless of the threshold voltage of 0.

Note that the pixel structure illustrated in FIG. 80 is not limited thereto. For example, a switch, a resistor, a capacitor, a transistor, a logic circuit, or the like may be newly added to the pixel illustrated in FIG. For example, the second switch 80602 includes a P-channel transistor or an N-channel transistor, the third switch 80603 includes a transistor having a polarity different from that of the second switch 80602, and the second switch 80602 and The third switch 80603 may be controlled by the same scanning line.

A structure and operation of a pixel called a current input type will be described. The current input positive type pixel can be applied to digital gradation driving and analog gradation driving.

FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a pixel called a current input type.

A pixel shown in FIG. 81 includes a driving transistor 80700, a first switch 80701, a second switch
Switch 80702, third switch 80703, capacitor 80704, and light-emitting element 8
0730. The gate of the driving transistor 80700 is connected to the second switch 80
702 and a first switch 80701 are sequentially connected to a signal line 80711.
The gate of the driving transistor 80700 is connected to the power supply line 8071 through the capacitor 80704.
2 is connected. A first electrode of the driving transistor 80700 is connected to the power supply line 80712. The second electrode of the driving transistor 80700 is connected to the first switch 8070.
1 to the power supply line 80712. The second electrode of the driving transistor 80700 is connected to the first electrode of the light-emitting element 80730 through the third switch 80703. The second electrode of the light-emitting element 80730 corresponds to the common electrode 80731.

A low power supply potential is set for the second electrode of the light-emitting element 80730. Note that the low power supply potential is a potential that satisfies a low power supply potential <high power supply potential with reference to the high power supply potential set in the power supply line 80712. For example, GND, 0V, or the like is set as the low power supply potential. Also good.
A potential difference between the high power supply potential and the low power supply potential is applied to the light emitting element 80730, so that the light emitting element 80
In order to cause the light-emitting element 80730 to emit light by causing a current to flow through 730, each potential is set so that the potential difference between the high power supply potential and the low power supply potential is equal to or higher than the forward threshold voltage of the light-emitting element 80730. Note that the capacitor 80704 can be omitted instead of the gate capacitance of the driving transistor 80700. Regarding the gate capacitance of the driving transistor 80700, the capacitance may be formed in a region where the source electrode, the drain region, the LDD region, or the like overlaps with the gate electrode, or the channel region and the gate electrode. A capacitance may be formed between the two. Note that the first switch 80701, the second switch 80702, and the third switch 80703 are controlled to be turned on and off by a first scan line 80713, a second scan line 80714, and a third scan line 80734, respectively. .

The pixel driving method illustrated in FIG. 81 is described by dividing the operation period into a data writing period and a light emission period.

In the data writing period, a pixel is selected by the first scan line 80713. In other words,
The first switch 80701 is turned on, and a current is input as a video signal from the signal line 80711. At this time, the second switch 80702 is turned on and the third switch 80703 is turned off. Accordingly, the potential of the gate of the driving transistor 80700 becomes a potential corresponding to the video signal. That is, the capacitor 80704 holds a voltage between the gate electrode and the source electrode of the driving transistor 80700 that causes the driving transistor 80700 to pass the same current as the video signal.

Next, in the light emission period, the first switch 80701 and the second switch 80702 are turned off, and the third switch 80703 is turned on. Accordingly, a current having the same value as the video signal flows through the light emitting element 80730.

Note that the pixel structure illustrated in FIG. 81 is not limited thereto. For example, a switch, a resistor, a capacitor, a transistor, a logic circuit, or the like may be newly added to the pixel illustrated in FIG. For example, the first switch 80701 is a P-channel transistor or an N-channel transistor, the second switch 80702 is a transistor having the same polarity as the first switch 80701, and the first switch 80701 and the second switch 80701 The switch 80702 may be controlled by the same scanning line. The second switch 80702 may be disposed between the gate of the driving transistor 80700 and the signal line 80711.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 16)
In this embodiment, a pixel structure of a display device will be described. In particular, a pixel structure of a display device using an organic EL element will be described.

FIG. 82A is an example of a top view (layout diagram) of a pixel having two transistors in one pixel. FIG. 82B is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line XX ′ illustrated in FIG.

FIG. 82A illustrates a first transistor 60105, a first wiring 60106, and a second wiring 6
0107, the second transistor 60108, the third wiring 60111, the counter electrode 60112
, Capacitor 60113, pixel electrode 60115, partition wall 60116, organic conductor film 6011
7 shows an organic thin film 60118 and a substrate 60119. The first transistor 6
0105 is a switching transistor, the first wiring 60106 is a gate signal line, the second wiring 60107 is a source signal line, the second transistor 60108 is a driving transistor, and the third wiring 60111 is a current supply line. Are preferably used respectively.

The gate electrode of the first transistor 60105 is electrically connected to the first wiring 60106, one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the first transistor 60105 is electrically connected to the second wiring 60107, and The other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of one transistor 60105 is a gate electrode of the second transistor 60108 and a capacitor 60113
Is electrically connected to one of the electrodes. Note that the gate electrode of the first transistor 60105 includes a plurality of gate electrodes. Thus, leakage current in the off state of the first transistor 60105 can be reduced.

One of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the second transistor 60108 is connected to the third wiring 60.
111, and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the second transistor 60108 is electrically connected to the pixel electrode 60115. Accordingly, the current flowing through the pixel electrode 60115 can be controlled by the second transistor 60108.

An organic conductor film 60117 is provided on the pixel electrode 60115, and the organic thin film 601 is further provided.
18 (organic compound layer) is provided. On the organic thin film 60118 (organic compound layer),
A counter electrode 60112 is provided. Note that the counter electrode 60112 may be formed on one surface so as to be commonly connected to all pixels, or may be patterned using a shadow mask or the like.

Light emitted from the organic thin film 60118 (organic compound layer) is transmitted through either the pixel electrode 60115 or the counter electrode 60112.

In FIG. 82B, the case where light is emitted to the pixel electrode side, that is, the side where a transistor or the like is formed is called bottom emission, and the case where light is emitted to the counter electrode side is called top emission.

In the case of bottom emission, the pixel electrode 60115 is preferably formed using a transparent conductive film.
Conversely, in the case of top emission, the counter electrode 60112 is preferably formed using a transparent conductive film.

In a light emitting device for color display, EL elements having emission colors of R, G, and B may be applied separately, or a single color EL element is applied on one side, and R, G, and B light emission is obtained by a color filter. You may do it.

Note that the configuration illustrated in FIG. 82 is merely an example, and various configurations other than the configuration illustrated in FIG. 82 can be taken with respect to the pixel layout, the cross-sectional configuration, the stacking order of the electrodes of the EL element, and the like. For the light emitting layer, various elements such as a crystalline element such as an LED and an element composed of an inorganic thin film can be used in addition to the element composed of the illustrated organic thin film.

FIG. 83A is an example of a top view (layout diagram) of a pixel having three transistors in one pixel. FIG. 83B is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line XX ′ shown in FIG.

FIG. 83A illustrates a substrate 60200, a first wiring 60201, a second wiring 60202, a third wiring
Wiring 60203, fourth wiring 60204, first transistor 60205, second transistor 60206, third transistor 60207, pixel electrode 60208, partition 602
11 shows an organic conductor film 60212, an organic thin film 60213, and a counter electrode 60214. Note that the first wiring 60201 is a source signal line, the second wiring 60202 is a writing gate signal line, the third wiring 60203 is an erasing gate signal line, and a fourth wiring 6020 is used.
4 is used as a current supply line, the first transistor 60205 is used as a switching transistor, the second transistor 60206 is used as an erasing transistor, and the third transistor 60207 is preferably used as a driving transistor.

The gate electrode of the first transistor 60205 is electrically connected to the second wiring 60202, and one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the first transistor 60205 is electrically connected to the first wiring 60201, and The other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of one transistor 60205 is electrically connected to the gate electrode of the third transistor 60207. Note that the gate electrode of the first transistor 60205 includes a plurality of gate electrodes. Thus, leakage current in the off state of the first transistor 60205 can be reduced.

The gate electrode of the second transistor 60206 is electrically connected to the third wiring 60203, and one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the second transistor 60206 is electrically connected to the fourth wiring 60204, and The other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the second transistor 60206 is electrically connected to the gate electrode of the third transistor 60207. Note that the gate electrode of the second transistor 60206 includes a plurality of gate electrodes. Thus, leakage current in the off state of the second transistor 60206 can be reduced.

One of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the third transistor 60207 is connected to the fourth wiring 60.
204, and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the third transistor 60207 is electrically connected to the pixel electrode 60208. Thus, the current flowing through the pixel electrode 60208 can be controlled by the third transistor 60207.

An organic conductor film 60212 is provided on the pixel electrode 60208, and an organic thin film 602 is further provided.
13 (organic compound layer) is provided. On the organic thin film 60213 (organic compound layer),
A counter electrode 60214 is provided. Note that the counter electrode 60214 may be formed on one surface so as to be commonly connected to all the pixels, or may be patterned using a shadow mask or the like.

Light emitted from the organic thin film 60213 (organic compound layer) is transmitted through either the pixel electrode 60208 or the counter electrode 60214.

In FIG. 83B, the case where light is emitted to the pixel electrode side, that is, the side where a transistor or the like is formed is called bottom emission, and the case where light is emitted to the counter electrode side is called top emission.

In the case of bottom emission, the pixel electrode 60208 is preferably formed using a transparent conductive film.
Conversely, in the case of top emission, the counter electrode 60214 is preferably formed using a transparent conductive film.

In a light emitting device for color display, EL elements having emission colors of R, G, and B may be applied separately, or a single color EL element is applied on one side, and R, G, and B light emission is obtained by a color filter. You may do it.

Note that the structure illustrated in FIG. 83 is merely an example, and various structures other than the structure illustrated in FIG. 83 can be employed with respect to the pixel layout, the cross-sectional structure, the stacking order of the electrodes of the EL element, and the like. For the light emitting layer, various elements such as a crystalline element such as an LED and an element composed of an inorganic thin film can be used in addition to the element composed of the illustrated organic thin film.

FIG. 84A is an example of a top view (layout diagram) of a pixel having four transistors in one pixel. FIG. 84 (B) is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line XX ′ shown in FIG. 84 (A).

FIG. 84A illustrates a substrate 60300, a first wiring 60301, a second wiring 60302, a third wiring
Wiring 60303, fourth wiring 60304, first transistor 60305, second transistor 60306, third transistor 60307, fourth transistor 60308,
Pixel electrode 60309, fifth wiring 60311, sixth wiring 60312, partition wall 60321,
An organic conductor film 60322, an organic thin film 60323, and a counter electrode 60324 are shown. Note that the first wiring 60301 is a source signal line, the second wiring 60302 is a writing gate signal line, the third wiring 60303 is an erasing gate signal line, and a fourth wiring 6030 is used.
4 is a reverse bias signal line, the first transistor 60305 is a switching transistor, the second transistor 60306 is an erasing transistor, the third transistor 60307 is a driving transistor, and the fourth transistor 60308 is reverse. As the direction bias transistor, the fifth wiring 60311 is used as a current supply line.
The wirings 60312 are preferably used as power supply lines for reverse bias.

The gate electrode of the first transistor 60305 is electrically connected to the second wiring 60302, and one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the first transistor 60305 is electrically connected to the first wiring 60301, and The other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of one transistor 60305 is electrically connected to the gate electrode of the third transistor 60307. Note that the gate electrode of the first transistor 60305 includes a plurality of gate electrodes. Thus, leakage current in the off state of the first transistor 60305 can be reduced.

The gate electrode of the second transistor 60306 is electrically connected to the third wiring 60303. One of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the second transistor 60306 is electrically connected to the fifth wiring 60311. The other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the second transistor 60306 is electrically connected to the gate electrode of the third transistor 60307. Note that the gate electrode of the second transistor 60306 includes a plurality of gate electrodes. Thus, leakage current in the off state of the second transistor 60306 can be reduced.

One of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the third transistor 60307 is connected to the fifth wiring 60.
The other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the third transistor 60307 is electrically connected to the pixel electrode 60309. Thus, the current flowing through the pixel electrode 60309 can be controlled by the third transistor 60307.

A gate electrode of the fourth transistor 60308 is electrically connected to the fourth wiring 60304. One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the fourth transistor 60308 is electrically connected to the sixth wiring 60312, and The other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the fourth transistor 60308 is electrically connected to the pixel electrode 60309. In this manner, the potential of the pixel electrode 60309 can be controlled by the fourth transistor 60308, and thus a reverse bias can be applied to the organic conductor film 60322 and the organic thin film 60323. By applying a reverse bias to a light-emitting element including the organic conductor film 60322, the organic thin film 60323, and the like, the reliability of the light-emitting element can be greatly improved.

An organic conductor film 60322 is provided on the pixel electrode 60309, and an organic thin film 603 is further provided.
23 (organic compound layer) is provided. On the organic thin film 60323 (organic compound layer),
A counter electrode 60324 is provided. Note that the counter electrode 60324 may be formed on one surface so as to be commonly connected to all pixels, or may be patterned using a shadow mask or the like.

Light emitted from the organic thin film 60323 (organic compound layer) is transmitted through either the pixel electrode 60309 or the counter electrode 60324.

In FIG. 84B, the case where light is emitted to the pixel electrode side, that is, the side where a transistor or the like is formed is called bottom emission, and the case where light is emitted to the counter electrode side is called top emission.

In the case of bottom emission, the pixel electrode 60309 is preferably formed using a transparent conductive film.
On the other hand, in the case of top emission, the counter electrode 60324 is preferably formed using a transparent conductive film.

In a light emitting device for color display, EL elements having emission colors of R, G, and B may be applied separately, or a single color EL element is applied on one side, and R, G, and B light emission is obtained by a color filter. You may do it.

Note that the configuration illustrated in FIG. 84 is merely an example, and various configurations other than the configuration illustrated in FIG. 84 can be taken with respect to the pixel layout, the cross-sectional configuration, the stacking order of the electrodes of the EL element, and the like. For the light emitting layer, various elements such as a crystalline element such as an LED and an element composed of an inorganic thin film can be used in addition to the element composed of the illustrated organic thin film.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 17)
In this embodiment, the structure of an EL element will be described. In particular, the structure of the organic EL element will be described.

The structure of the mixed junction type EL element will be described. For example, a hole injection layer made of a hole injection material, a hole transport layer made of a hole transport material, a light emitting layer made of a light emitting material, an electron transport layer made of an electron transport material, an electron injection layer made of an electron injection material Is a layered structure in which a plurality of materials are mixed among materials such as a hole injection material, a hole transport material, a light emitting material, an electron transport material, and an electron injection material. A structure having a mixed layer (hereinafter referred to as a mixed junction type EL element) will be described.

85A, 85B, 85C, and 85D are schematic views showing the structure of a mixed junction type EL element. Note that a layer sandwiched between the anode 190101 and the cathode 190102 corresponds to an EL layer.

FIG. 85A includes a hole transport region 190103 in which the EL layer is made of a hole transport material and an electron transport region 190104 made of an electron transport material, and the hole transport region 190103 is on the anode side with respect to the electron transport region 190104. And a mixed region 1901 including both a hole transporting material and an electron transporting material between the hole transporting region 190103 and the electron transporting region 190104.
The structure provided with 05 is shown.

Note that in the direction from the anode 190101 to the cathode 190102, the concentration of the hole transport material in the mixed region 190105 decreases and the concentration of the electron transport material in the mixed region 190105 increases.

The method of setting the concentration gradient can be freely set. For example, the hole transport region 190103 made only of the hole transport material does not exist, and the concentration ratio of each functional material changes inside the mixed region 190105 including both the hole transport material and the electron transport material (the concentration gradient is changed). It may have a configuration. Alternatively, the hole transport region 190 made of only the hole transport material 190
103 and the electron transport region 190104 consisting only of the electron transport material does not exist, and the ratio of the concentration of each functional material changes (has a concentration gradient) inside the mixed region 190105 including both the hole transport material and the electron transport material. It may be a configuration. Alternatively, the concentration ratio may be changed depending on the distance from the anode or the cathode. The change in the concentration ratio may be continuous.

In the mixed region 190105, a region 190106 to which a light-emitting material is added is provided. The emission color of the EL element can be controlled by the light emitting material. Carriers can be trapped by the light emitting material. As the light emitting material, various fluorescent dyes can be used in addition to a metal complex including a quinoline skeleton, a metal complex including a benzoxador skeleton, a metal complex including a benzothiazol skeleton, and the like. By adding these light emitting materials, the light emission color of the EL element can be controlled.

As the anode 190101, an electrode material having a high work function is preferably used in order to inject holes efficiently. For example, a transparent electrode such as tin-doped indium oxide (ITO), zinc-doped indium oxide (IZO), ZnO, SnO _2, or In ₂ O ₃ can be used. Alternatively, if it is not necessary to have a light-transmitting property, the anode 190101 may be an opaque metal material.

An aromatic amine compound or the like can be used as the hole transport material.

As an electron transport material, a quinoline derivative, a metal complex having 8-quinolinol or a derivative thereof as a ligand (particularly, tris (8-quinolinolite) aluminum (Alq ₃ )) or the like can be used.

As the cathode 190102, an electrode material having a low work function is preferably used in order to inject electrons efficiently. A single metal such as aluminum, indium, magnesium, silver, calcium, barium, or lithium can be used. Or the alloy of these metals may be sufficient and the alloy of these metals and another metal may be sufficient.

FIG. 85B shows a schematic diagram of an EL element having a structure different from that in FIG. Note that FIG.
The same parts as in A) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

In FIG. 85B, there is no region to which the light-emitting material is added. However, the electron transport region 190
As a material to be added to 104, a material having both an electron transporting property and a light emitting property (electron transporting light emitting material), for example, tris (8-quinolinolite) aluminum (Alq ₃ ) can be used for light emission.

Alternatively, as a material added to the hole-transport region 190103, a material having both hole-transport properties and light-emitting properties (hole-transport light-emitting material) may be used.

FIG. 85C shows a schematic diagram of an EL element having a structure different from those in FIGS. 85A and 85B. Note that the same portions as those in FIGS. 85A and 85B are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

In FIG. 85C, a hole blocking material having a larger energy difference between the highest occupied molecular orbital and the lowest occupied molecular orbital than the hole transporting material has a region 190107 added to the mixed region 190105. . A region 190107 to which a hole blocking material is added,
A cathode 190102 from a region 190106 to which a light emitting material is added in the mixed region 190105.
By disposing on the side, the carrier recombination rate can be increased and the luminous efficiency can be increased. The above-described configuration in which the region 190107 to which the hole blocking material is added is provided.
This is effective in an EL device using light emission (phosphorescence) by triple photoexcitons.

FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of an EL element having a structure different from those in FIGS. 85 (A), 85 (B), and 85 (C).
5 (D). Note that the same portions as those in FIGS. 85A, 85B, and 85C are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

In FIG. 85D, an electron blocking material having a larger energy difference between the highest occupied molecular orbital and the lowest occupied molecular orbital than the electron transporting material has a region 190108 added in the mixed region 190105. A region 190108 to which an electron blocking material is added,
The anode 190101 from the region 190106 to which the light emitting material is added in the mixed region 190105.
By disposing on the side, the carrier recombination rate can be increased and the luminous efficiency can be increased. The above-described configuration in which the region 190108 to which the electron blocking material is added is provided.
This is effective in an EL device using light emission (phosphorescence) by triple photoexcitons.

FIG. 85E is a schematic diagram illustrating a structure of a mixed-junction EL element different from those in FIGS. 85A, 85B, 85C, and 85D. FIG. 85E illustrates an example of a structure including a region 190109 to which a metal material is added in the portion of the EL layer that is in contact with the electrode of the EL element. In FIG. 85E, the same portions as those in FIGS. 85A to 85D are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. The structure illustrated in FIG. 85E is, for example, Mg as the cathode 190102.
A region 19010 in which Al (aluminum) alloy is added to a region in contact with the cathode 190102 in an electron transport region 190104 to which an electron transport material is added using Ag (Mg—Ag alloy)
9 may be used. With the above structure, oxidation of the cathode can be prevented and the efficiency of electron injection from the cathode can be increased. Thus, the life of the mixed junction type EL element can be extended. The driving voltage can also be lowered.

As a method of manufacturing the mixed junction type EL element, a co-evaporation method or the like can be used.

In the mixed junction type EL element as shown in FIGS. 85A to 85E, there is no clear layer interface, and charge accumulation can be reduced. In this way, the lifetime can be extended. The driving voltage can also be lowered.

Note that the structures illustrated in FIGS. 85A to 85E can be freely combined and implemented.

Note that the structure of the mixed junction EL element is not limited thereto. A known configuration can be used freely.

Note that the organic material constituting the EL layer of the EL element may be a low molecular material or a high molecular material. Alternatively, both of these materials may be used. When a low molecular material is used as the organic compound material, the film can be formed by an evaporation method. On the other hand, in the case of using a polymer material for the EL layer, the polymer material can be dissolved in a solvent and formed into a film by a spin coating method or an inkjet method.

The EL layer may be made of a medium molecular material. In the present specification, the medium molecular organic light-emitting material refers to an organic light-emitting material having no sublimation property and having a degree of polymerization of about 20 or less. In the case where a medium molecular material is used for the EL layer, it can be formed by an inkjet method or the like.

Note that a low molecular material, a high molecular material, and a medium molecular material may be used in combination.

The EL element may be either one that uses light emission (fluorescence) from singlet excitons or one that uses light emission (phosphorescence) from triplet excitons.

Next, a vapor deposition apparatus for manufacturing a display device will be described with reference to the drawings.

The display device may be manufactured by forming an EL layer. The EL layer is formed including at least part of a material that exhibits electroluminescence. The EL layer may be composed of a plurality of layers having different functions. In that case, the EL layer may be configured by combining layers having different functions called a hole injecting and transporting layer, a light emitting layer, and an electron injecting and transporting layer.

FIG. 86 shows a configuration of a vapor deposition apparatus for forming an EL layer on an element substrate over which a transistor is formed.
Shown in In this vapor deposition apparatus, a plurality of processing chambers are connected to transfer chambers 190260 and 190261. The treatment chamber includes a load chamber 190262 for supplying a substrate, an unload chamber 190263 for collecting the substrate, a heat treatment chamber 190268, a plasma treatment chamber 190272, a film formation treatment chamber 190269 to 190275 for depositing an EL material, and an EL element. As one electrode, a film formation treatment chamber 19027 for forming aluminum or a conductive film containing aluminum as a main component is formed.
6 is included. Gate valves 190277a to 190277 are provided between the transfer chamber and each processing chamber.
m is provided, and the pressure in each processing chamber can be controlled independently, thereby preventing cross-contamination between the processing chambers.

The substrate introduced into the transfer chamber 190260 from the load chamber 190262 is carried into a predetermined processing chamber by arm-type transfer means 190266 that is rotatably provided. The substrate is transferred from one processing chamber to another processing chamber by the transfer means 190266. The transfer chamber 190260 and the transfer chamber 190261 are connected by a film formation processing chamber 190270, and here, the transfer unit 19026 is connected.
6 and the transfer means 190267 deliver the substrate.

Each processing chamber connected to the transfer chamber 190260 and the transfer chamber 190261 is held in a reduced pressure state. Therefore, in this vapor deposition apparatus, the substrate is continuously subjected to film formation of the EL layer without being exposed to the atmosphere. Since the display panel after the EL layer deposition process may be deteriorated by water vapor or the like, in this vapor deposition apparatus, a sealing process for performing a sealing process before exposure to the atmosphere in order to maintain the quality. A chamber 190265 is connected to the transfer chamber 190261. Since the sealing treatment chamber 190265 is placed under atmospheric pressure or a reduced pressure close thereto, the transfer chamber 1902
An intermediate processing chamber 190264 is also provided between 61 and the sealing processing chamber 190265. The intermediate processing chamber 190264 is provided for transferring the substrate and buffering the pressure between the chambers.

The load chamber, the unload chamber, the transfer chamber, and the film forming chamber are provided with exhaust means for maintaining the chamber at a reduced pressure. As the exhaust means, various vacuum pumps such as a dry pump, a turbo molecular pump, and a diffusion pump can be used.

In the vapor deposition apparatus in FIG. 86, the number of treatment chambers connected to the transfer chamber 190260 and the transfer chamber 190261 and the structure thereof can be combined as appropriate depending on the stacked structure of the EL elements.
An example of the combination is shown below.

In the heat treatment chamber 190268, degassing treatment is performed by first heating the substrate on which the lower electrode, the insulating partition wall, or the like is formed. The plasma treatment chamber 190272 performs rare gas or oxygen plasma treatment on the surface of the base electrode. This plasma treatment is performed to clean the surface, stabilize the surface state, and stabilize the physical or chemical state (eg, work function) of the surface.

The film formation treatment chamber 190269 is a treatment chamber for forming an electrode buffer layer in contact with one electrode of the EL element. The electrode buffer layer has carrier injection properties (hole injection or electron injection),
It is a layer that suppresses the occurrence of short circuits or dark spot defects in EL elements. Typically, the electrode buffer layer is an organic-inorganic mixed material, and has a resistivity of 5 × 10 ⁴ to 1 × 10 ⁶ Ωcm, and 30 to 3
It is formed to a thickness of 00 nm. Note that the film formation chamber 190271 is a treatment chamber in which a hole transport layer is formed.

The structure of the light emitting layer in the EL element differs depending on whether the light emission is monochromatic or white. In the vapor deposition apparatus, it is preferable to arrange the film forming treatment chamber accordingly. For example,
When three types of EL elements having different emission colors are formed on the display panel, it is necessary to form a light emitting layer corresponding to each emission color. In this case, the film formation chamber 190270 is used for forming the first light-emitting layer, and the film formation chamber 190273 is used for forming the second light-emitting layer.
74 can be used for forming the third light-emitting layer. By separating the film formation chamber for each light emitting layer, mutual contamination by different light emitting materials can be prevented, and the throughput of the film formation process can be improved.

Note that three types of EL materials having different emission colors may be sequentially deposited in the film formation chamber 190270, the film formation chamber 190273, and the film formation chamber 190274. In this case, a shadow mask is used, and vapor deposition is performed by shifting the mask in accordance with the region to be vapor deposited.

In the case of forming an EL element that emits white light, light emitting layers having different light emission colors are stacked vertically. Also in that case, the element substrate can be sequentially moved through the film formation chamber to form a film for each light emitting layer. Alternatively, different light emitting layers can be successively formed in the same film formation chamber.

In the deposition treatment chamber 190276, an electrode is deposited over the EL layer. The electrode can be formed by an electron beam evaporation method or a sputtering method, but a resistance heating evaporation method is preferably used.

After the formation of the electrodes, the element substrate passes through the intermediate processing chamber 190264 and the sealing processing chamber 1902.
It is carried into 65. The sealing treatment chamber 190265 is filled with an inert gas such as helium, argon, neon, or nitrogen, and a sealing plate is attached to the element substrate on the side where the EL layer is formed and sealed. Stop. In a sealed state, an inert gas may be filled between the element substrate and the sealing plate, or a resin material may be filled. The sealing processing chamber 190265 includes a dispenser for drawing a sealing material, a mechanical element such as a fixed stage or an arm for fixing a sealing plate facing the element substrate, a dispenser for filling a resin material, or a spin coater. It has been.

FIG. 87 shows the internal structure of the film forming chamber. The film formation chamber is kept under reduced pressure. In FIG. 87, the inside between the top plate 190391 and the bottom plate 190392 is a room, and a room kept under a reduced pressure is shown.

One or a plurality of evaporation sources are provided in the processing chamber. This is because it is preferable to provide a plurality of evaporation sources when a plurality of layers having different compositions are formed or when different materials are co-evaporated. In FIG. 87, the evaporation sources 190381a, 190381b, and 190381c are attached to the evaporation source holder 190380. The evaporation source holder 190380 is an articulated arm 1
90383. The multi-joint arm 190383
The position of the evaporation source holder 190380 can be freely moved within the movable range. Alternatively, the evaporation source holder 190380 is provided with a distance sensor 190382, and the evaporation source 190381 is provided.
The distance between a to 190381c and the substrate 190389 may be monitored to control the optimum distance during vapor deposition. In that case, it is good also as an articulated arm which displaces to an articulated arm also in the up-down direction (Z direction).

A substrate stage 190386 and a substrate chuck 190387 are paired to form a substrate 190389.
To fix. The substrate stage 190386 may include a heater so that the substrate 190389 can be heated. The substrate 190389 is fixed to the substrate stage 190386 and carried in and out by the forcible relaxation of the substrate chuck 190387. In vapor deposition, a shadow mask 190390 having an opening corresponding to a vapor deposition pattern can be used as necessary. In that case, the shadow mask 190390 includes the substrate 190389 and the evaporation source 19.
It is arranged between 0381a and 190381c. Shadow mask 190390
Is fixed to the substrate 190389 in close contact with the mask chuck 190388 or at a fixed interval. When the shadow mask 190390 needs to be aligned, the camera is disposed in the processing chamber, and the mask chuck 190388 is provided with positioning means that finely moves in the XY-θ direction, thereby aligning the shadow mask 190390.

The evaporation source 190381 is provided with a deposition material supply means for continuously supplying a deposition material to the evaporation source. The vapor deposition material supply means includes material supply sources 190385a, 190385b, and 190385c arranged at positions distant from the evaporation source 190381, and a material supply pipe 190384 connecting the two. Typically, material sources 190385a, 190385b
, 190385c are provided corresponding to the evaporation source 190381. In the case of FIG. 87, the material supply source 190385a and the evaporation source 190381a correspond to each other. Material source 19038
The same applies to 5b and the evaporation source 190381b, and the material supply source 190385c and the evaporation source 190381c.

As an evaporation material supply method, an air current conveyance method, an aerosol method, or the like can be applied. In the air current conveyance method, fine powder of vapor deposition material is carried in an air current and is conveyed to the evaporation source 190381 using an inert gas or the like. The aerosol method is vapor deposition performed by conveying a raw material solution in which a vapor deposition material is dissolved or dispersed in a solvent, aerosolizing it with a sprayer, and vaporizing the solvent in the aerosol. In any case, the evaporation source 190381 is provided with a heating unit, and the conveyed evaporation material is evaporated to form a film on the substrate 190389. In the case of FIG. 87, the material supply pipe 190
384 is formed of a thin tube that can be flexibly bent and has rigidity sufficient to prevent deformation even under reduced pressure.

In the case of applying an air current conveyance method or an aerosol method, the film formation may be performed under a reduced pressure of 133 Pa to 13300 Pa in the film formation treatment chamber at atmospheric pressure or lower.
The film formation chamber can be filled with an inert gas such as helium, argon, neon, krypton, xenon, or nitrogen, or the pressure can be adjusted while supplying the gas (while exhausting simultaneously). Note that in the deposition treatment chamber in which the oxide film is formed, a gas such as oxygen or nitrous oxide may be introduced to form an oxidizing atmosphere. Alternatively, a reducing atmosphere may be provided by introducing a gas such as hydrogen into a film formation chamber in which an organic material is deposited.

As another vapor deposition material supply method, a screw may be provided in the material supply pipe 190384 to continuously extrude the vapor deposition material toward the evaporation source.

According to this vapor deposition apparatus, even a large-screen display panel can be continuously formed with good uniformity. Since it is not necessary to replenish the vapor deposition material each time the vapor deposition material runs out of the evaporation source, the throughput can be improved.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 18)
In this embodiment, the structure of an EL element will be described. In particular, the structure of the inorganic EL element will be described.

Inorganic EL elements are classified into a dispersion-type inorganic EL element and a thin-film inorganic EL element depending on the element structure. The former has an electroluminescent layer in which particles of a luminescent material are dispersed in a binder, and the latter has an electroluminescent layer made of a thin film of luminescent material, but is accelerated by a high electric field. This is common in that it requires more electrons. Note that the obtained light emission mechanism includes donor-acceptor recombination light emission using a donor level and an acceptor level, and localized light emission using inner-shell electron transition of a metal ion. Generally, in the dispersion type inorganic EL, a donor-
In many cases, acceptor recombination light emission and thin-film inorganic EL elements emit localized light.

The light-emitting material includes a base material and an impurity element serving as a light emission center. By changing the impurity element to be contained, light emission of various colors can be obtained. As a method for manufacturing the light-emitting material, various methods such as a solid phase method or a liquid phase method (coprecipitation method) can be used. Alternatively, a spray pyrolysis method, a metathesis method, a precursor thermal decomposition method, a reverse micelle method or a method combining these methods with high temperature firing, a liquid phase method such as a freeze drying method, or the like can also be used.

In the solid phase method, a base material and an impurity element or a compound containing an impurity element are weighed and mixed in a mortar.
This is a method in which an impurity element is contained in the base material by reacting by heating and baking in an electric furnace. The firing temperature is preferably 700 to 1500 ° C. This is because the solid phase reaction does not proceed when the temperature is too low, and the base material is decomposed when the temperature is too high. In addition, although baking may be performed in a powder state, it is preferable to perform baking in a pellet state. Although firing at a relatively high temperature is required, it is a simple method, so it has high productivity and is suitable for mass production.

The liquid phase method (coprecipitation method) is a method in which a base material or a compound containing the base material and an impurity element or a compound containing the impurity element are reacted in a solution, dried, and then fired. The particles of the luminescent material are uniformly distributed, and the reaction can proceed even at a low firing temperature with a small particle size.

As a base material used for the light-emitting material, sulfide, oxide, or nitride can be used. Examples of the sulfide include zinc sulfide (ZnS), cadmium sulfide (CdS), calcium sulfide (CaS), yttrium sulfide (Y ₂ S ₃ ), gallium sulfide (Ga ₂ S ₃ ), strontium sulfide (SrS), sulfide. Barium (BaS) or the like can be used. As the oxide, for example, zinc oxide (ZnO), yttrium oxide (Y ₂ O ₃ ), or the like can be used. Examples of the nitride include aluminum nitride (AlN), gallium nitride (GaN),
Indium nitride (InN) or the like can be used. Furthermore, zinc selenide (ZnSe)
, Zinc telluride (ZnTe) and the like can also be used, such as calcium sulfide-gallium (CaG
a ternary mixed crystal such as a ₂ S ₄ ), strontium sulfide-gallium sulfide (SrGa ₂ S ₄ ), or barium sulfide-gallium sulfide (BaGa ₂ S ₄ ) may be used.

As emission centers of localized emission, manganese (Mn), copper (Cu), samarium (Sm), terbium (Tb), erbium (Er), thulium (Tm), europium (Eu), cerium (Ce), praseodymium (Pr) or the like can be used. Note that a halogen element such as fluorine (F) or chlorine (Cl) may be added as charge compensation.

On the other hand, as a light emission center of donor-acceptor recombination light emission, a first donor level is formed.
And a light-emitting material including a second impurity element which forms an acceptor level. As the first impurity element, for example, fluorine (F), chlorine (Cl), aluminum (Al), or the like can be used. As the second impurity element, for example, copper (Cu),
Silver (Ag) or the like can be used.

In the case where a light-emitting material for donor-acceptor recombination light emission is synthesized using a solid-phase method, a base material, a first impurity element or a compound containing the first impurity element, a second impurity element, or a second impurity element
Each of the compounds containing the impurity element is weighed and mixed in a mortar, and then heated and fired in an electric furnace. As the base material, the above-described base material can be used, and examples of the first impurity element or the compound containing the first impurity element include fluorine (F), chlorine (Cl), and aluminum sulfide (Al ₂ S). ₃ ) or the like, and examples of the second impurity element or the compound containing the second impurity element include copper (Cu), silver (Ag), copper sulfide (Cu ₂ S), and silver sulfide (Ag). ₂ S) or the like can be used. The firing temperature is preferably 700 to 1500 ° C.
This is because the solid phase reaction does not proceed when the temperature is too low, and the base material is decomposed when the temperature is too high. In addition, although baking may be performed in a powder state, it is preferable to perform baking in a pellet state.

As an impurity element in the case of using a solid phase reaction, a compound composed of a first impurity element and a second impurity element may be used in combination. In this case, the impurity element is easily diffused,
Since the solid-phase reaction easily proceeds, a uniform luminescent material can be obtained. Further, since no extra impurity element is contained, a light-emitting material with high purity can be obtained. Examples of the compound composed of the first impurity element and the second impurity element include copper chloride (CuCl), silver chloride (
AgCl) or the like can be used.

Note that the concentration of these impurity elements may be 0.01 to 10 atom% with respect to the base material, and is preferably in the range of 0.05 to 5 atom%.

In the case of a thin film type inorganic EL, the electroluminescent layer is a layer containing the light emitting material,
Vacuum vapor deposition methods such as electron beam evaporation (EB vapor deposition), physical vapor deposition methods such as sputtering (
Chemical vapor deposition (CV) such as PVD), metal organic chemical vapor deposition, hydride transport low pressure CVD
D), an atomic layer epitaxy method (ALE) or the like.

88A to 88C illustrate an example of a thin-film inorganic EL element that can be used as a light-emitting element. 88A to 88C, the light-emitting element includes a first electrode layer 120100, an electroluminescent layer 120102, and a second electrode layer 120103.

88B and 88C has a structure in which an insulating film is provided between the electrode layer and the electroluminescent layer in the light-emitting element in FIG. 88A. The light-emitting element illustrated in FIG.
An insulating film 120104 is provided between the electrode layer 120100 and the electroluminescent layer 120102, and the light-emitting element illustrated in FIG. 88C includes an insulating film 120105 between the first electrode layer 120100 and the electroluminescent layer 120102, An insulating film 120106 is provided between the second electrode layer 120103 and the electroluminescent layer 120102. Thus, the insulating film may be provided only between one of the pair of electrode layers sandwiching the electroluminescent layer, or may be provided between both. The insulating film may be a single layer or a stacked layer having a plurality of layers.

In FIG. 88B, the insulating film 120104 is provided so as to be in contact with the first electrode layer 120100; however, the order of the insulating film and the electroluminescent layer is reversed so as to be in contact with the second electrode layer 120103. An insulating film 120104 may be provided.

In the case of a dispersion-type inorganic EL, a particulate luminescent material is dispersed in a binder to form a film-like electroluminescent layer. Process into particles. When particles having a desired size cannot be obtained sufficiently by the method for manufacturing a light emitting material, the particles may be processed into particles by pulverization or the like in a mortar or the like. What is a binder?
It is a substance for fixing a granular luminescent material in a dispersed state and maintaining the shape as an electroluminescent layer. The light emitting material is uniformly dispersed and fixed in the electroluminescent layer by the binder.

In the case of a dispersion-type inorganic EL, the electroluminescent layer can be formed by a droplet discharge method that can selectively form an electroluminescent layer, a printing method (such as screen printing or offset printing), a coating method such as a spin coating method, or dipping. It is also possible to use a method or a dispenser method. The film thickness is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 10 to 1000 nm. In the electroluminescent layer including the light emitting material and the binder, the ratio of the light emitting material may be 50 wt% or more and 80 wt% or less.

FIGS. 89A to 89C illustrate examples of a dispersion-type inorganic EL element that can be used as a light-emitting element. The light-emitting element in FIG. 89A includes the first electrode layer 120200 and the electroluminescent layer 12.
0202 and a light emitting material 120201 having a stacked structure of the second electrode layer 120203 and held in the electroluminescent layer 120202 by a binder.

An insulating material can be used for the binder. As the insulating material, an organic material or an inorganic material can be used. Alternatively, a mixed material of an organic material and an inorganic material may be used. As the organic insulating material, a polymer having a relatively high dielectric constant, such as cyanoethyl cellulose resin, polyethylene, polypropylene, polystyrene resin, silicone resin, epoxy resin, or vinylidene fluoride can be used. Alternatively, a heat-resistant polymer such as aromatic polyamide or polybenzimidazole, or a siloxane resin may be used. Note that the siloxane resin is Si-O-.
It corresponds to a resin containing Si bonds. Siloxane has a skeleton structure formed of a bond of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O). As a substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (for example, an alkyl group or an aromatic hydrocarbon) is used. A fluoro group may be used as a substituent. Alternatively, an organic group containing at least hydrogen and a fluoro group may be used as a substituent. Or
Resin materials such as vinyl resins such as polyvinyl alcohol and polyvinyl butyral, phenol resins, novolac resins, acrylic resins, melamine resins, urethane resins, and oxazole resins (polybenzoxazole) may be used. These resins include barium titanate (B
The dielectric constant can be adjusted by appropriately mixing fine particles having a high dielectric constant such as aTiO ₃ ) or strontium titanate (SrTiO ₃ ).

Examples of the inorganic insulating material contained in the binder include silicon oxide (SiOx) and silicon nitride (SiNx).
), Silicon containing oxygen and nitrogen, aluminum nitride (AlN), aluminum containing oxygen and nitrogen, aluminum oxide containing oxygen and nitrogen (Al ₂ O ₃ ), titanium oxide (TiO ₂ )
, BaTiO ₃ , SrTiO ₃ , lead titanate (PbTiO ₃ ), potassium niobate (KN)
bO ₃ ), lead niobate (PbNbO ₃ ), tantalum oxide (Ta ₂ O ₅ ), barium tantalate (BaTa ₂ O ₆ ), lithium tantalate (LiTaO ₃ ), yttrium oxide (Y
₂ O ₃ ), zirconium oxide (ZrO ₂ ), ZnS, and other materials including inorganic insulating materials. By including an inorganic material having a high dielectric constant in the organic material (by addition or the like), the dielectric constant of the electroluminescent layer made of the light emitting material and the binder can be further controlled, and the dielectric constant can be further increased. .

In the manufacturing process, the light-emitting material is dispersed in a solution containing a binder. As a solvent for the solution containing the binder, a method for forming the electroluminescent layer by dissolving the binder material (various wet processes) and a solvent capable of producing a solution having a viscosity suitable for a desired film thickness may be appropriately selected. . For example, an organic solvent or the like can be used as the solvent. When a siloxane resin is used as the binder, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (also referred to as PGMEA), 3-methoxy-3-methyl-1-butanol (also referred to as MMB), or the like can be used as a solvent.

The light-emitting element illustrated in FIGS. 89B and 89C has a structure in which an insulating film is provided between the electrode layer and the electroluminescent layer in the light-emitting element in FIG. 89A. The light-emitting element illustrated in FIG.
An insulating film 120204 is provided between the electrode layer 120200 and the electroluminescent layer 120202, and the light-emitting element illustrated in FIG. 89C includes an insulating film 120205 between the first electrode layer 120200 and the electroluminescent layer 120202. An insulating film 120206 is provided between the second electrode layer 120203 and the electroluminescent layer 120202. Thus, the insulating film may be provided only between one of the pair of electrode layers sandwiching the electroluminescent layer, or may be provided between both. The insulating film may be a single layer or a stacked layer including a plurality of layers.

In FIG. 89B, the insulating film 120204 is provided so as to be in contact with the first electrode layer 120200; however, the insulating film and the electroluminescent layer are reversed in order so as to be in contact with the second electrode layer 120203. A film 120204 may be provided.

A material that can be used for the insulating film such as the insulating film 120104 in FIG. 88 and the insulating film 120204 in FIG. 89 preferably has high insulation resistance and a dense film quality. Furthermore, it is preferable that the dielectric constant is high. For example, silicon oxide (SiO ₂ ), yttrium oxide (Y ₂ O ₃ ), titanium oxide (TiO ₂ ), aluminum oxide (Al ₂ O ₃ ), hafnium oxide (HfO ₂ ), tantalum oxide (Ta ₂ O ₅ ), Barium titanate (BaTiO ₃
), Strontium titanate (SrTiO ₃ ), lead titanate (PbTiO ₃ ), silicon nitride (Si ₃ N ₄ ), zirconium oxide (ZrO ₂ ), etc., or a mixed film or a laminate of two or more of them Can do. These insulating films are formed by sputtering, vapor deposition, C
The film can be formed by VD or the like. The insulating film may be formed by dispersing particles of these insulating materials in a binder. The binder material may be formed using the same material and method as the binder contained in the electroluminescent layer. The film thickness is not particularly limited, but preferably 10 to 10
The range is 00 nm.

Note that the light-emitting element can emit light by applying a voltage between a pair of electrode layers sandwiching the electroluminescent layer, but can operate in either DC driving or AC driving.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 19)
In this embodiment, an example of a display device, particularly a case where optical handling is performed will be described.

A rear projection display device 130100 shown in FIGS. 90A and 90B includes a projector unit 130111, a mirror 130112, and a screen panel 130101. In addition, a speaker 130102 and operation switches 130104 may be provided. The projector unit 130111 includes a housing 1301 of the rear projection display device 130100.
The projection light which is arrange | positioned in the lower part of 10 and projects an image | video based on an image signal is shown in mirror 130112.
Project toward. The rear projection display device 130100 is configured to display an image projected from the rear surface of the screen panel 130101.

On the other hand, FIG. 91 shows a front projection display device 130200. Front projection display device 1
30200 includes a projector unit 130111 and a projection optical system 130201. The projection optical system 130201 is configured to project an image on a screen or the like disposed on the front surface.

The rear projection display device 130100 shown in FIG. 90 and the front projection display device 130 shown in FIG.
The configuration of the projector unit 130111 applied to 200 will be described below.

FIG. 92 shows a configuration example of the projector unit 130111. The projector unit 130111 includes a light source unit 130301 and a modulation unit 130304. The light source unit 130301 includes a light source optical system 13 including lenses.
0303 and a light source lamp 130302. The light source lamp 130302 is housed in the housing so that stray light does not diffuse. As the light source lamp 130302, for example, a high-pressure mercury lamp or a xenon lamp that can emit a large amount of light is used. The light source optical system 130303 is configured by appropriately providing an optical lens, a film having a polarization function, a film for adjusting a phase difference, an IR film, and the like. The light source unit 130301 is disposed so that the emitted light is incident on the modulation unit 130304. Modulation unit 1
Reference numeral 30304 denotes a plurality of display panels 130308, a color filter, a dichroic mirror 130305, a total reflection mirror 130306, a prism 130309, and a projection optical system 130.
310 is provided. Light emitted from the light source unit 130301 is separated into a plurality of optical paths by the dichroic mirror 130305.

Each optical path is provided with a color filter that transmits light of a predetermined wavelength or wavelength band, and a display panel 130308. A transmissive display panel 130308 modulates transmitted light based on a video signal. The light of each color transmitted through the display panel 130308 is reflected by the prism 130.
An image is displayed on the screen through the projection optical system 130310. A Fresnel lens may be disposed between the mirror and the screen. The projection light projected by the projector unit 130111 and reflected by the mirror is converted into substantially parallel light by the Fresnel lens and projected onto the screen.

A projector unit 130111 shown in FIG. 93 includes a reflective display panel 130407, 1
The structure provided with 30408 and 130409 is shown.

A projector unit 130111 shown in FIG. 93 includes a light source unit 130301 and a modulation unit 130400. The light source unit 130301 may have the same configuration as that in FIG. The light from the light source unit 130301 is emitted from the dichroic mirror 13040.
1, 130402 and the total reflection mirror 130403 are divided into a plurality of optical paths and enter the polarization beam splitters 130404, 130405, and 130406. The polarizing beam splitters 130404, 130405, and 130406 are provided corresponding to the reflective display panels 130407, 130408, and 130409 corresponding to the respective colors. The reflective display panels 130407, 130408, and 130409 modulate reflected light based on the video signal. The light beams of the respective colors reflected by the reflective display panels 130407, 130408, and 130409 are combined by being incident on the prism 130309 and projected through the projection optical system 13041.

Light emitted from the light source unit 130301 is transmitted through the dichroic mirror 130401 only in the red wavelength region and reflects in the green and blue wavelength regions. Further, the dichroic mirror 130402 reflects only light in the green wavelength region. The light in the red wavelength region that has passed through the dichroic mirror 130401 is reflected by the total reflection mirror 130403,
Light enters the polarization beam splitter 130404, light in the blue wavelength region enters the polarization beam splitter 130405, and light in the green wavelength region enters the polarization beam splitter 130406. The polarization beam splitters 130404, 130405, and 130406 have a function of separating incident light into P-polarized light and S-polarized light, and have a function of transmitting only P-polarized light. The reflective display panels 130407, 130408, and 130409 polarize incident light based on the video signal.

Only S-polarized light corresponding to each color is incident on the reflective display panels 130407, 130408, and 130409 corresponding to the respective colors. Note that the reflective display panels 130407, 130408,
130409 may be a liquid crystal panel. At this time, the liquid crystal panel operates in an electric field controlled birefringence mode (ECB). The liquid crystal molecules are vertically aligned with a certain angle with respect to the substrate. Accordingly, the display molecules of the reflective display panels 130407, 130408, and 130409 are oriented so that they are reflected without changing the polarization state of incident light when the pixel is in the off state. When the pixel is in the on state, the orientation state of the display molecules changes and the polarization state of incident light changes.

A projector unit 130111 shown in FIG. 93 is a rear projection display device 1 shown in FIG.
30100 and the front projection display device 130200 shown in FIG.

The projector unit shown in FIG. 94 has a single-plate configuration. A projector unit 130111 shown in FIG. 94A includes a light source unit 130301 and a display panel 1305.
07, a projection optical system 130511, and a retardation plate 130504. Projection optical system 130
Reference numeral 511 includes one or a plurality of lenses. The display panel 130507 may be provided with a color filter.

FIG. 94B shows a projector unit 130 that operates in a field sequential manner.
111 shows the configuration. The field sequential method is a method in which light of each color such as red, green, and blue is temporally shifted and sequentially incident on a display panel to perform color display without a color filter. In particular, when combined with a display panel having a high response speed with respect to input signal changes, a high-definition image can be displayed. In FIG. 94B, the light source unit 130.
A rotary color filter plate 130505 provided with a plurality of color filters such as red, green, and blue is provided between 301 and the display panel 130508.

A projector unit 130111 shown in FIG. 94C shows a configuration of a color separation method using a macro lens as a color display method. In this method, a microlens array 130506 is provided on the light incident side of the display panel 130509, and color display is realized by illuminating light of each color from each direction. Since the projector unit 130111 adopting this method has little light loss due to the color filter, the light source unit 1
30301 has a feature that light from 30301 can be used effectively. FIG. 94 (C
Is provided with a dichroic mirror 130501, a dichroic mirror 130502, and a dichroic mirror for red light 130503 so as to illuminate the display panel 130509 with light of each color from the respective directions.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 20)
In this embodiment, an example of an electronic device will be described.

FIG. 95 shows a display panel module in which a display panel 900101 and a circuit board 900111 are combined. A display panel 900101 includes a pixel portion 900102, a scan line driver circuit 900103, and a signal line driver circuit 900104. On the circuit board 900111, for example, a control circuit 900112 and a signal dividing circuit 900113 are formed. The display panel 900101 and the circuit board 900111 are connected by a connection wiring 900114. An FPC or the like can be used for the connection wiring.

In the display panel 900101, a pixel portion 900102 and a part of peripheral driver circuits (a driver circuit having a low operating frequency among the plurality of driver circuits) are formed over a substrate using a transistor, and a part of the peripheral driver circuits (a plurality of peripheral driver circuits) A driver circuit having a high operating frequency) is formed on an IC chip, and the IC chip is formed on a display panel 9001 by COG (Chip On Glass) or the like.
You may implement in 01. Thus, the area of the circuit board 900111 can be reduced, and a small display device can be obtained. Alternatively, the IC chip is TAB (Tape Out).
o Bonding) or a printed circuit board, the display panel 900101 may be mounted. Thus, the area of the display panel 900101 can be reduced, so that a display device with a small frame size can be obtained.

For example, in order to reduce power consumption, a pixel portion is formed using a transistor on a glass substrate, all peripheral drive circuits are formed on an IC chip, and the IC chip is mounted on a display panel by COG or TAB. May be.

With the display panel module shown in FIG. 95, a television receiver can be completed. FIG. 96 is a block diagram illustrating a main configuration of a television receiver. Tuner 900201
Receives video and audio signals. The video signal includes a video signal amplifying circuit 900202, a video signal processing circuit 900203 for converting a signal output from the video signal amplifying circuit 900202 into a color signal corresponding to each color of red, green, and blue, and a driving circuit for the video signal. Is processed by a control circuit 900212 for conversion to the input specification of Control circuit 900212
Outputs signals to the scanning line side and the signal line side, respectively. In the case of digital driving, a signal dividing circuit 900213 may be provided on the signal line side, and an input digital signal may be divided into m pieces (m is a positive integer) and supplied.

Of the signals received by the tuner 900201, the audio signal is the audio signal amplifier circuit 900205.
The output is supplied to the speaker 900207 via the audio signal processing circuit 900206. The control circuit 900208 receives the receiving station (receiving frequency) and volume control information from the input unit 90.
0209 is received and a signal is transmitted to the tuner 900201 or the audio signal processing circuit 900206.

A television receiver incorporating a display panel module different from that shown in FIG.
Shown in A). In FIG. 97A, a display screen 9003 housed in a housing 900301.
02 is formed of a display panel module. Note that the speaker 900303, the operation switch 900304, the input means 900305, the sensor 900306 (force, displacement, position, speed,
Acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, sound, time, hardness, electric field,
A function including a function of measuring current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor, or infrared light), a microphone 930307, and the like may be provided as appropriate.

FIG. 97B illustrates a television receiver that can carry only a display wirelessly.
A housing and a signal receiver are housed in a housing 900312, and the battery includes a display portion 900313, a speaker portion 900317, and sensors (force, displacement, position, speed, acceleration,
Includes the ability to measure angular velocity, number of revolutions, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor or infrared 1) It drives 900319 and the microphone 900320. Battery is charger 90
In 0310, repeated charging is possible. The charger 900310 can transmit and receive a video signal, and can transmit the video signal to a signal receiver of the display. The device illustrated in FIG. 97B is controlled by an operation key 900316. Alternatively, FIG.
The device shown in (B) operates the operation key 900316 to thereby form a charger 90031.
It is possible to send a signal to zero. That is, it may be a video / audio bidirectional communication device. Alternatively, the device illustrated in FIG. 97B operates the operation key 900316 to transmit a signal to the charger 900310 and further cause the other electronic device to receive a signal that the charger 900310 can transmit. Communication control of electronic devices is also possible. That is, a general-purpose remote control device may be used. Note that input means 900318 and the like may be provided as appropriate. Note that the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment are displayed on the display portion 900313
Can be applied to.

FIG. 98A illustrates a module in which a display panel 900401 and a printed wiring board 900402 are combined. A display panel 900401 includes a pixel portion 900403 provided with a plurality of pixels, a first scan line driver circuit 900404, and a second scan line driver circuit 90040.
5 and a signal line driver circuit 900406 for supplying a video signal to a selected pixel.

A printed wiring board 900402 includes a controller 900407, a central processing unit (CPU
) 940408, memory 900409, power supply circuit 900410, audio processing circuit 90041
1 and a transmission / reception circuit 900412 and the like. The printed wiring board 900402 and the display panel 900401 are connected by a flexible wiring board (FPC) 900413. The flexible wiring board (FPC) 9000041 may be provided with a storage capacitor, a buffer circuit, and the like to prevent generation of noise in the power supply voltage or signal and increase in signal rise time. Note that the controller 9000040, the sound processing circuit 9000041, the memory 9000040, the central processing unit (CPU) 900408, the power supply circuit 900410,
The display panel 900401 can be mounted using a COG (Chip On Glass) method. The scale of the printed wiring board 900402 can be reduced by the COG method.

Interface (I / F) unit 900414 provided on the printed circuit board 900402
Various control signals are input and output via the. An antenna port 900415 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the antenna is provided on the printed wiring board 900402.

FIG. 98 (B) shows a block diagram of the module shown in FIG. 98 (A). This module includes a VRAM 900416, a DRAM 9000041, a flash memory 900418, and the like as the memory 900409. The VRAM 900416 stores image data to be displayed on the panel, the DRAM 900417 stores image data or audio data, and the flash memory stores various programs.

The power supply circuit 900410 supplies power for operating the display panel 900401, the controller 900407, the central processing unit (CPU) 9000040, the sound processing circuit 9000041, the memory 9000040, and the transmission / reception circuit 9000041. However, depending on the panel specifications, the power supply circuit 900410 may be provided with a current source.

A central processing unit (CPU) 9000040 includes a control signal generation circuit 900420 and a decoder 90.
0421, a register 900422, an arithmetic circuit 900423, a RAM 900394, an interface (I / F) unit 900419 for a central processing unit (CPU) 9000040, and the like. Central processing unit (CPU) via interface (I / F) unit 900419
Various signals input to 9000040 are temporarily stored in the register 9000042 and then input to the arithmetic circuit 9000042, the decoder 9000042, and the like. The arithmetic circuit 900423 performs an operation based on the input signal and designates a place to send various commands. On the other hand, the decoder 9
The signal input to 00421 is decoded and input to the control signal generation circuit 900420. The control signal generation circuit 900420 generates a signal including various instructions based on the input signal, and a location designated in the arithmetic circuit 9000042, specifically, a memory 9000040,
The data is sent to the transmission / reception circuit 900412, the audio processing circuit 900411, the controller 900407, and the like.

The memory 9000040, the transmission / reception circuit 9000041, the sound processing circuit 9000041, and the controller 900407 operate according to received commands. The operation will be briefly described below.

A signal input from the input unit 9000042 is input to an interface (I / F) unit 90041.
Central processing unit (CPU) 9004 mounted on a printed wiring board 900402 via 4
Sent to 08. The control signal generation circuit 900420 converts the image data stored in the VRAM 900416 into a predetermined format according to the signal sent from the input device 9000042 such as a pointing device or a keyboard, and sends it to the controller 900407.

The controller 900407 is a central processing unit (CPU) 9004 in accordance with the specifications of the panel.
Data processing is performed on a signal including image data sent from 08, and a display panel 90040 is processed.
1 is supplied. Based on the power supply voltage input from the power supply circuit 900410 or various signals input from the central processing unit (CPU) 9000040, the controller 900407
A sync signal, a Vsync signal, a clock signal CLK, an AC voltage (AC Cont), and a switching signal L / R are generated and supplied to the display panel 900401.

In the transmission / reception circuit 9000041, a signal transmitted / received as a radio wave in the antenna 9000042 is processed. Specifically, an isolator, a band pass filter, a VCO (Volt)
age Controlled Oscillator), LPF (Low Pass)
A high frequency circuit such as a filter), a coupler, or a balun may be included. Transmission / reception circuit 90
Of the signals transmitted and received in 0412, a signal including audio information is sent to the central processing unit (CPU).
) Is sent to the audio processing circuit 900411 according to the command from 900408.

A signal including audio information sent in accordance with an instruction from the central processing unit (CPU) 9000040 is demodulated into an audio signal by an audio processing circuit 9000041 and sent to a speaker 9000042. The audio signal sent from the microphone 9000042 is modulated in the audio processing circuit 9000041 and is transmitted and received in accordance with a command from the central processing unit (CPU) 9000040.
Sent to 00412.

Controller 9000040, central processing unit (CPU) 9000040, power supply circuit 90041
0, the audio processing circuit 900411 and the memory 9000040 can be mounted as a package of this embodiment.

Of course, the present embodiment is not limited to a television receiver, and is used for various applications as a display medium with a particularly large area such as a monitor of a personal computer, an information display board at a railway station or airport, and an advertisement display board in a street. Can be applied.

Next, a configuration example of a mobile phone will be described with reference to FIG.

The display panel 900501 is incorporated in a housing 900530 so as to be detachable. The shape or dimension of the housing 900530 can be changed as appropriate in accordance with the size of the display panel 900501. A housing 900530 to which the display panel 900501 is fixed is fitted into the printed circuit board 900531 and assembled as a module.

The display panel 900501 is connected to the printed circuit board 900531 through the FPC 900531. A printed circuit board 900531 includes a speaker 900532 and a microphone 900.
533, a signal processing circuit 900 including a transmission / reception circuit 900534, a CPU, a controller, and the like.
535 and sensor 900541 (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, voice, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, Including a function of measuring humidity, gradient, vibration, odor or infrared). Such a module is combined with the input means 900566 and the battery 900577 and stored in the housing 9000053. The pixel portion of the display panel 900501 is a housing 9000053.
It arrange | positions so that it can visually recognize from the opening window formed in.

In the display panel 900501, a pixel portion and some peripheral driver circuits (a driver circuit having a low operating frequency among a plurality of driver circuits) are formed over a substrate using transistors, and some peripheral driver circuits (a plurality of driver circuits) are formed. The driving circuit having a high operating frequency is formed on the IC chip, and the IC
The chip may be mounted on the display panel 900501 by COG (Chip On Glass). Alternatively, the IC chip may be connected to the glass substrate using TAB (Tape Auto Bonding) or a printed circuit board. With such a structure, the power consumption of the display device can be reduced, and the usage time by one charge of the mobile phone can be extended. Cost reduction of the mobile phone can be achieved.

The mobile phone shown in FIG. 99 has a function of displaying various information (still images, moving images, text images, and the like). It has a function of displaying a calendar, date or time on the display unit. It has a function of operating or editing information displayed on the display unit. It has a function of controlling processing by various software (programs). Has a wireless communication function. It has a function of making a call with another mobile phone, a fixed phone, or a voice communication device using a wireless communication function. It has a function of connecting to various computer networks using a wireless communication function. It has a function of transmitting or receiving various data using a wireless communication function. The vibrator operates in response to an incoming call, data reception, or alarm. It has a function to generate a sound in response to an incoming call, reception of data, or an alarm. Note that the function of the mobile phone shown in FIG. 99 is not limited to this,
It can have various functions.

A cellular phone shown in FIG. 100 includes operation switches 9000060 and a microphone 90060.
5 and the like (A) 900601, a display panel (A) 900068, a display panel (B) 900609, a speaker 9000060, and a sensor 90000601 (force, displacement, position, speed, acceleration, angular velocity, rotational speed, distance, Light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor or infrared, etc.), input means 900612, etc. (B) 9000060 provided with
Are connected by a hinge 900610 so as to be openable and closable. The display panel (A) 900608 and the display panel (B) 900609 are composed of a main body (B) 9000060 together with a circuit board 9000060.
Is housed in the casing 900603. Display panel (A) 900608 and display panel (
B) The pixel portion of 900609 is arranged so as to be visible from an opening window formed in the housing 900603.

The display panel (A) 900608 and the display panel (B) 900609
Specifications such as the number of pixels can be set as appropriate in accordance with the 0600 function. For example, the display panel (A) 900608 can be combined as a main screen and the display panel (B) 900609 can be combined as a sub-screen.

The mobile phone according to the present embodiment can be transformed into various modes depending on the function or application. For example, a mobile phone with a camera may be provided by incorporating an image sensor at the hinge 900610. Even when the operation switches 9000060, the display panel (A) 900068, and the display panel (B) 900609 are housed in one housing, the above-described effects can be obtained. Even if the configuration of the present embodiment is applied to an information display terminal having a plurality of display units, the same effect can be obtained.

The mobile phone shown in FIG. 100 has a function of displaying various information (still images, moving images, text images, and the like). It has a function of displaying a calendar, date or time on the display unit. It has a function of operating or editing information displayed on the display unit. Various software (programs)
Has a function of controlling the process. Has a wireless communication function. It has a function of making a call with another mobile phone, a fixed phone, or a voice communication device using a wireless communication function. It has a function of connecting to various computer networks using a wireless communication function. It has a function of transmitting or receiving various data using a wireless communication function. The vibrator operates in response to an incoming call, data reception, or alarm. It has a function to generate a sound in response to an incoming call, reception of data, or an alarm. Note that the function of the mobile phone illustrated in FIG. 100 is not limited thereto, and the mobile phone can have various functions.

The contents (or part of them) described in each drawing of this embodiment can be applied to various electronic devices. Specifically, it can be applied to a display portion of an electronic device. Such electronic devices include video cameras, digital cameras, goggles-type displays, navigation systems, sound playback devices (car audio, audio components, etc.), computers, game devices, portable information terminals (mobile computers, mobile phones, portable games) Machine or e-book)
, An image reproducing apparatus provided with a recording medium (specifically, Digital Versatile D
for example, a device provided with a display capable of reproducing a recording medium such as an isc (DVD) and displaying the image.

FIG. 101A shows a display, which includes a housing 900711, a support base 900712, a display portion 900713, input means 900714, sensors (force, displacement, position, speed, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism). Including functions for measuring temperature, chemistry, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor or infrared) 9
0071, microphone 900716, speaker 900717, operation key 90071
8, LED lamp 900719 and the like. The display illustrated in FIG. 101A has a function of displaying various information (still images, moving images, text images, and the like) on the display portion. Note that FIG.
The function of the display shown in 01 (A) is not limited to this, and the display can have various functions.

FIG. 101B shows a camera, which includes a main body 900731, a display portion 900732, and an image receiving portion 900.
733, operation keys 900734, external connection port 900735, shutter button 900
736, input means 900737, sensor 900738 (force, displacement, position, speed, acceleration,
Includes the ability to measure angular velocity, number of revolutions, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor or infrared Thing), microphone 9000073, speaker 900740, LED lamp 900741
Etc. The camera illustrated in FIG. 101B has a function of capturing a still image. Has a function to shoot movies. It has a function of automatically correcting captured images (still images, moving images). It has a function of storing captured images in a recording medium (externally or built in a digital camera). It has a function of displaying a photographed image on the display unit. Note that the function of the camera illustrated in FIG. 101B is not limited to this, and the camera can have a variety of functions.

FIG. 101C illustrates a computer, which includes a main body 900711, a housing 900752, and a display portion 9.
00753, keyboard 900754, external connection port 900755, pointing device 9000075, input means 900777, sensor (force, displacement, position, speed, acceleration,
Includes functions to measure angular velocity, number of rotations, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor or infrared 1980), a microphone 9000075, a speaker 900760, an LED lamp 900761, a reader / writer 900762, and the like. A computer illustrated in FIG. 101C has a function of displaying various information (a still image, a moving image, a text image, and the like) on a display portion. It has a function of controlling processing by various software (programs). It has a communication function such as wireless communication or wired communication. It has a function of connecting to various computer networks using a communication function. It has a function of transmitting or receiving various data using a communication function. Note that the function of the computer illustrated in FIG. 101C is not limited to this, and can have various functions.

FIG. 108A illustrates a mobile computer, which includes a main body 901411, a display portion 901412.
, Switch 901413, operation key 901414, infrared port 901415, input means 901416, sensor (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, voice, time, hardness , Including electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor or infrared measurement function) 901417, microphone 901418, speaker 901419, LED lamp 901420, and the like. FIG.
A mobile computer illustrated in FIG. 8A has a function of displaying various information (still images, moving images, text images, and the like) on a display portion. The display unit has a touch panel function. The display unit has a function of displaying a calendar, date or time. It has a function of controlling processing by various software (programs). Has a wireless communication function. It has a function of connecting to various computer networks using a wireless communication function. It has a function of transmitting or receiving various data using a wireless communication function. Note that the function of the mobile computer illustrated in FIG. 108A is not limited to this, and the mobile computer can have a variety of functions.

FIG. 108B shows a portable image reproducing device (for example, a DVD reproducing device) provided with a recording medium.
A main body 901431, a housing 901432, a display portion A901433, a display portion B901.
434, recording medium (DVD etc.) reading unit 901435, operation key 901436, speaker unit 901437, input means 901438, sensor 901439 (force, displacement, position, speed, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, Temperature, chemistry, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, smell, or infrared)), a microphone 901440, an LED lamp 901441, and the like. The display portion A 901433 can mainly display image information, and the display portion B 901434 can mainly display character information.

FIG. 108C illustrates a goggle type display, which includes a main body 901451 and a display portion 90145.
2, earphone 901453, support portion 901454, input means 901455, sensor (force,
Displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, voice,
(Including functions for measuring time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor, or infrared)) 901456, microphone 901457, speaker 901458, and the like. The goggle type display shown in FIG. 108C has a function of displaying an image (a still image, a moving image, a text image, or the like) acquired from the outside on a display portion. In addition,
The function of the goggles display shown in FIG. 108C is not limited to this, and can have various functions.

109A shows a portable game machine, which includes a housing 901511, a display portion 901512, a speaker portion 901513, operation keys 901514, a storage medium insertion portion 901515, and input means 90.
1516, sensor (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity , Including a function of measuring inclination, vibration, odor or infrared) 901517, a microphone 901518, an LED lamp 901519, and the like. A portable game machine shown in FIG. 109A has a function of reading a program or data recorded in a recording medium and displaying the program or data on a display portion. It has a function of sharing information by performing wireless communication with other portable game machines. Note that the function of the portable game machine illustrated in FIG. 109A is not limited to this, and the portable game machine can have a variety of functions.

FIG. 109B illustrates a digital camera with a television receiving function, which includes a main body 901531, a display portion 901532, operation keys 901533, a speaker 901534, and a shutter button 901.
535, image receiving portion 901536, antenna 901537, input means 901538, sensor (
Force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, rotational speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, voice, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration , Including odor or infrared measurement function) 901539, microphone 901540, LE
D lamp 901541 etc. are included. A digital camera with a television receiver shown in FIG. 109B has a function of shooting a still image. Has a function to shoot movies. It has a function to automatically correct a photographed image. It has a function of acquiring various information from the antenna. It has a function of storing captured images or information acquired from an antenna. It has a function of displaying a captured image or information acquired from an antenna on a display unit. Note that the function of the digital camera with a television set illustrated in FIG. 101H is not limited to this, and the digital camera can have a variety of functions.

110 shows a portable game machine, which includes a housing 901611, a first display portion 901612, a second display portion 901613, a speaker portion 901614, operation keys 901615, and a recording medium insertion portion 90.
1616, input means 901617, sensor (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, voice, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power,
(Including functions for measuring radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor or infrared)
618, a microphone 901619, an LED lamp 901620, and the like. The portable game machine shown in FIG. 110 has a function of reading a program or data recorded on a recording medium and displaying the program or data on a display portion. It has a function of sharing information by performing wireless communication with other portable game machines. Note that the functions of the portable game machine illustrated in FIG. 110 are not limited thereto, and the portable game machine can have various functions.

101 (A) to (C), 108 (A) to (C), 109 (A) to (C), and 110, an electronic device displays some information. It has a display part. The electronic device described in this embodiment includes a display portion for displaying some information. Such an electronic device can have a display portion with improved image quality. Specifically, the problem of moving image blur can be reduced. Furthermore, the problem of flicker can be reduced. Furthermore, an electronic device having a display portion with a large contrast ratio can be obtained. Furthermore, an electronic device having a display portion using liquid crystal in particular can have a display portion with an improved viewing angle. Furthermore, a display portion with improved response speed can be provided. Furthermore, since a display portion with reduced power consumption can be provided, an electronic device with reduced power consumption can be obtained. Furthermore, since a display portion with reduced manufacturing costs can be provided, an electronic device with reduced manufacturing costs can be obtained.

Next, application examples of the semiconductor device will be described.

FIG. 102 illustrates an example in which a semiconductor device is provided so as to be integrated with a building. FIG. 102 includes a housing 900810, a display portion 900811, a remote control device 900812 that is an operation portion, a speaker portion 9000081, and the like. The semiconductor device is integrated with the building as a wall-hanging type, and can be installed without requiring a large installation space.

FIG. 103 shows another example in which a semiconductor device is provided integrally with a building in the building.
The display panel 900901 is integrally attached to the unit bath 900902, so that the bather can view the display panel 900901. The display panel 900901 has a function of displaying information when operated by a bather. It has a function that can be used as an advertising or entertainment means.

Note that the semiconductor device is not limited to the side wall of the unit bus 900902 shown in FIG.
It can be installed in various places. For example, a part of the mirror surface or the bathtub itself may be integrated. At this time, the shape of the display panel 900901 may be adapted to the shape of the mirror surface or the bathtub.

FIG. 104 illustrates another example in which the semiconductor device is provided so as to be integrated with a building. The display panel 901002 is attached so as to be curved according to the curved surface of the columnar body 901001.
Here, the columnar body 901001 is described as a utility pole.

A display panel 901002 shown in FIG. 104 is provided at a position higher than the human viewpoint.
By installing the display panel 901002 on a building that is repeatedly forested outdoors such as an electric pole, an advertisement can be made to an unspecified number of viewers. Here, the display panel 90100
Since it is easy to display the same image and to switch the image instantaneously by the control from the outside, No. 2 can expect extremely efficient information display and advertisement effect. By providing a self-luminous display element in the display panel 901002, it can be said that the display panel 901002 is useful as a display medium with high visibility even at night. By installing it on the utility pole, it is easy to secure the power supply means of the display panel 901002. In the event of an emergency such as a disaster, it can also be a means of quickly and accurately communicating information to the victims.

Note that as the display panel 901002, for example, a display panel which displays an image by providing a switching element such as an organic transistor on a film-like substrate and driving the display element can be used.

Note that in this embodiment, a wall, a columnar body, and a unit bus are taken as examples of buildings, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and semiconductor devices can be installed in various buildings.

Next, an example in which the semiconductor device is provided integrally with the moving body is described.

FIG. 105 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a semiconductor device is provided integrally with an automobile. The display panel 901102 is attached integrally with the vehicle body 901101 of the automobile, and can display the operation of the vehicle body or information input from inside and outside the vehicle body on demand. Note that a navigation function may be provided.

Note that the semiconductor device can be installed not only in the vehicle body 901101 shown in FIG. For example, it may be integrated with a glass window, a door, a handle, a shift lever, a seat, a room mirror, and the like. At this time, the shape of the display panel 901102 may be adapted to the shape of the object to be installed.

FIG. 106 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a semiconductor device is provided integrally with a train car.

FIG. 106A is a diagram showing an example in which a display panel 901202 is provided on the glass of a door 901201 of a train car. Compared to conventional paper advertisements, there is an advantage that labor costs required for advertisement switching are not incurred. Since the display panel 901202 can instantaneously switch the image displayed on the display unit in response to an external signal, for example, the display panel image is switched every time period when the customer base of the passengers on the train changes. More effective advertising effect can be expected.

FIG. 106B shows a glass window 901203 in addition to the glass of the door 901201 of the train car.
FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a display panel 901202 is provided on a ceiling 901204.
As described above, since the semiconductor device can be easily installed in a place where it has been difficult to install in the past, an effective advertising effect can be obtained. Since the semiconductor device can instantaneously switch the image displayed on the display unit by an external signal, the cost and time at the time of advertisement switching can be reduced, and more flexible advertisement operation and information transmission can be achieved. It becomes possible.

Note that the semiconductor device can be installed not only in the door 901201, the glass window 901203, and the ceiling 901204 shown in FIG. For example, it may be integrated with a strap, a seat, a rail, a floor or the like. At this time, the shape of the display panel 901202 may be matched with the shape of the display panel.

FIG. 107 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a semiconductor device is provided integrally with a passenger airplane.

FIG. 107 (a) shows a display panel 90130 on a ceiling 901301 above the seat of a passenger airplane.
It is the figure shown about the shape at the time of use when 2 was provided. The display panel 901302 is
A ceiling 901301 and a hinge part 901303 are attached integrally, and the passenger can view the display panel 901302 by the expansion and contraction of the hinge part 901303. A display panel 901302 has a function of displaying information when operated by a passenger. It has a function that can be used as an advertising or entertainment means. As shown in FIG. 107 (b), it is possible to consider safety during takeoff and landing by folding the hinge portion and storing it in the ceiling 901301. In addition,
By turning on the display element of the display panel in an emergency, it can be used as an information transmission means and a guide light.

Note that the semiconductor device can be installed not only in the ceiling 901301 illustrated in FIG. 107 but also in various places. For example, it may be integrated with a seat seat, a seat table, an armrest, a window and the like. A large display panel that can be viewed simultaneously by a large number of people may be installed on the wall of the aircraft. At this time, the shape of the display panel 901302 may be adapted to the shape of the object to be installed.

In the present embodiment, the moving body is exemplified as a train car body, an automobile body, and an airplane body, but is not limited to this. A motorcycle, an automobile (including an automobile, a bus, etc.),
It can be installed on various things such as trains (including monorails, railways, etc.) and ships. Since the semiconductor device can instantly switch the display of the display panel in the moving body by an external signal, installing the semiconductor device in the moving body targets a large number of unspecified customers. It can be used for applications such as advertisement display boards and information display boards in the event of a disaster.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

1700 SOI substrate 1701 Semiconductor substrate 1702 Semiconductor substrate 1703 Ion doping layer 1704 Ion 1710 Base substrate 1720 Insulating layer 1722 Joining layer 1722 Joining layer 1724 Nitrogen-containing insulating layer 1726 Silicon oxide layer 1730 SOI layer 1750 Insulating layer 1752 Barrier layer 1754 Joining layer 100506 Impurity Region 110111 Substrate 110112 Insulating film 110113 Semiconductor layer 110114 Semiconductor layer 110115 Semiconductor layer 110116 Insulating film 110117 Gate electrode 110118 Insulating film 110119 Insulating film 110121 Side wall 110122 Mask 110123 Conductive film 110201 Substrate 110202 Insulating film 110203 Conductive layer 110204 Conductive layer 110205 Conductive layer 110206 Semiconductor layer 110207 Semiconductor layer 1 Semiconductor layer 110209 Insulating film (insulating film 110210 Insulating film 110211 Conductive layer 110212 Conductive layer 110220 Transistor 110221 Capacitor 110301 Substrate 110302 Insulating film 110303 Conductive layer 110304 Conductive layer 110306 Semiconductor layer 110307 Semiconductor layer 110308 Semiconductor layer 110309 Conductive layer 110310 Conductive layer 1103111 Conductive layer 110312 Conductive layer 110320 Transistor 110321 Capacitor element 110401 Substrate 110402 Insulating film 110403 Conductive layer 110404 Conductive layer 110406 Semiconductor layer 110407 Semiconductor layer 110408 Semiconductor layer 110409 Conductive layer 110410 Conductive layer 110411 Conductive layer 110412 Insulating film 110420 Transistor 110421 Capacitor element 110501 Substrate 110502 Insulating film 110503 Conductive layer 110504 Conductive layer 110505 Impurity region 110506 Impurity region 110507 Impurity region 110508 LDD region 110509 LDD region 110510 Channel formation region 110511 Insulating film 110512 Conductive layer 110513 Conductive layer 110520 Transistor 110521 Capacitor element 110600 Semiconductor substrate 110602 Insulating film 110602 Region 110606 region 110607 p-well 110632 insulating film 110636 conductive film 110638 conductive film 110640 gate electrode 110642 gate electrode 110648 resist mask 110650 channel formation region 110665 impurity region 110666 resist formation region 110670 channel formation region 110670 impurity region 11067 2 Insulating film 110684 Wiring 110800 Substrate 110802 Insulating film 110804 Insulating film 110806 Resist mask 110808 Recess 110810 Insulating film 11081 Insulating film 110812 Region 110831 Region 110815 P well 110082 Insulating film 110834 Insulating film 110836 Conductive film 110840 Conductive film 11084 Conductive film 11084 Side wall 110856 Channel formation region 110858 Impurity region 110860 Low concentration impurity region 110862 Channel formation region 110864 Impurity region 110866 Low concentration impurity region 110877 Insulating film 110878 Opening 110880 Conductive film 110882a Conductive film 107320 FPC
107321 IC chip 170100 Substrate 170101 Pixel portion 170102 Pixel 170103 Scan line side input terminal 170104 Signal line side input terminal 170105 Scan line driver circuit 170106 Signal line driver circuit 170200 FPC
170201 IC chip 170300 Substrate 170301 Pixel portion 170303 Signal line driver circuit 170310 Substrate 170320 FPC
170321 Sealing material 170401 IC chip 170302a Scan line driver circuit 170302b Scan line driver circuit 170501a IC chip 170501b IC chip 180100 Display device 180101 Pixel portion 180102 Pixel 180103 Signal line driver circuit 180104 Scan line driver circuit 180701 Image 180702 Image 180703 Image 180704 Image 180705 Image 180711 image 180712 image 180713 image 180714 image 180715 image 180716 image 180717 image 180721 image 180722 image 180723 image 180724 image 180725 image 180801 image 180802 image 180803 image 180804 area 180805 area 180806 area 18080811 image 180 12 image 180813 image 180814 area 180815 area 180816 area 180821 image 180822 image 180823 image 180824 area 180825 area 180826 area 180831 image 180832 image 180833 image 180834 area 180835 area 180836 area 180484 area 180842 area 18090 area 1809090 image 18090 area 18090 image 18090 area 18090 image 18090 area 18090 image 180907 range 180908 range 180909 vector 180910 displacement vector 180911 image 180912 image 180913 image 180914 image 180915 region 180916 region 180913 region 180918 region 180919 range 180920 range 180921 Vector 180922 displacement vector 180923 displacement vector 181000 external image signal 181001 horizontal synchronization signal 181002 vertical synchronization signal 181003 image signal 181004 source start pulse 181005 source clock 181006 gate start pulse 181007 gate clock 181008 frequency control signal 181011 control circuit 181012 source driver 181013 gate driver 181014 Display area 181015 Image processing circuit 181016 Timing generation circuit 181020 Detection circuit 181021 First memory 181022 Second memory 181023 Third memory 181023 Image signal 181024 Brightness control circuit 181025 High-speed processing circuit 181026 Memory 20101 Backlight unit 2 102 diffusing plate 20103 light guide plate 20104 reflector 20105 lamp reflector 20106 source 20107 LCD panel 20201 backlight unit 20202 lamp reflector 20203 CCFL 20211 backlight unit 20212 lamp reflector 20213 emitting diode (LED)
20213W Light emitting diode 20221 Backlight unit 20222 Lamp reflector 20223 Light emitting diode (LED)
20224 Light Emitting Diode (LED)
20225 Light emitting diode (LED)
20231 Backlight unit 20232 Lamp reflector 20233 Light emitting diode (LED)
20234 Light Emitting Diode (LED)
20235 Light Emitting Diode (LED)
20300 Polarizing film 20301 Protective film 20302 Substrate film 20303 PVA polarizing film 20304 Substrate film 20305 Adhesive layer 20306 Release film 20401 Video signal 20402 Control circuit 20403 Signal line driver circuit 20404 Scan line driver circuit 20405 Pixel unit 20406 Illumination means 20407 Power source 20408 Drive Circuit unit 20410 Scan line 20412 Signal line 20431 Shift register 20432 Latch 20433 Latch 20434 Level shifter 20435 Buffer 20441 Shift register 20442 Level shifter 20443 Buffer 20500 Backlight unit 20501 Diffuser 20502 Light shield 20503 Lamp reflector 20504 Light source 20505 Liquid crystal panel 20510 Backlight Knit 20511 diffuser 20512 shielding plate 20513 lamp reflector 20514 source 20515 LCD panel 20514a source (R)
20514b Light source (G)
20514c Light source (B)
40100 pixel 40101 transistor 40102 liquid crystal element 40103 capacitor element 40104 wiring 40105 wiring 40106 wiring 40107 counter electrode 40110 pixel 40111 transistor 40112 liquid crystal element 40113 capacitor element 40114 wiring 40115 wiring 40116 wiring 40200 pixel (pixel 40200 pixel 40201 transistor 40202 liquid crystal element 40203 capacitor element 40204 Wiring 40205 Wiring 40206 Wiring 40207 Counter electrode 40210 Pixel 40211 Transistor 40212 Liquid crystal element 40213 Capacitor element 40214 Wiring 40215 Wiring 40216 Wiring 40217 Counter electrode 40300 Subpixel 40301 Transistor 40302 Liquid crystal element 40303 Capacitance element 40304 Wiring 40305 Wiring 403 6 wiring 40307 counter electrode 40310 subpixel 40311 transistor 40312 crystal 40313 capacitance element 40315 wiring 40316 wiring 40317 counter electrode 40320 pixel 30102 delay circuit 30103 correction circuit 30104 output image signal 30105 encoder 30106 memory 30107 decoder 30108 LUT
30109 LUT
30110 Adder 30111 Subtracter 30112 Multiplier 30113 Adder 30201 Transistor 30202 Auxiliary capacitor 30203 Display element 30204 Video signal line 30205 Scan line 30206 Common line 30211 Transistor 30212 Auxiliary capacitor 30213 Display element 30214 Video signal line 30215 Scan line 30216 Common line 30217 Common Line 30301 Diffusion plate 30302 Cold cathode tube 30311 Diffusion plate 30312 Light source 30401 Broken line 30402 Solid line 30501 Broken line 30502 Solid line 30101a Input image signal 30101b Input image signal 50100 Liquid crystal layer 50101 Substrate 50102 Substrate 50103 Polarizing plate 50104 Polarizing plate 50105 Electrode 50106 Electrode 50200 Liquid crystal layer 50201 Substrate 50202 Substrate 50203 Polarizing plate 5 204 Polarizer 50205 Electrode 50206 Electrode 50210 Liquid crystal layer 50211 Substrate 50212 Substrate 50213 Polarizer 50214 Polarizer 50215 Electrode 50216 Electrode 50300 Liquid crystal layer 50301 Substrate 50302 Substrate 50303 Polarizer 50304 Polarizer 50305 Electrode 50306 Electrode 50310 Liquid crystal layer 50311 Substrate 50312 Substrate 50313 Polarization Plate 50314 Polarizing plate 50315 Electrode 50316 Electrode 50400 Liquid crystal layer 50401 Substrate 50402 Substrate 50402 Polarizing plate 50404 Polarizing plate 50405 Electrode 50406 Electrode 50410 Liquid crystal layer 50411 Substrate 50412 Substrate 50413 Polarizing plate 50414 Polarizing plate 50415 Electrode 50416 Electrode 50417 Insulating film 50503 Pixel electrode 50503 Object 50601 Pixel electrode 50602 Pixel electrode 50611 Pixel electrode 50612 Pixel electrode 50631 Pixel electrode 50632 Pixel electrode 50641 Pixel electrode 50642 Pixel electrode 50701 Pixel electrode 50702 Pixel electrode 50711 Pixel electrode 50712 Pixel electrode 50731 Pixel electrode 50732 Pixel electrode 50741 Pixel electrode 50742 Projection 502 118 Projection 10101 substrate 10102 insulating film 10103 conductive layer 10104 insulating film 10105 semiconductor layer 10106 semiconductor layer 10107 conductive layer 10108 insulating film 10109 conductive layer 10110 alignment film 10112 alignment film 10113 conductive layer 10114 light shielding film 10115 color filter 10116 substrate 10117 spacer 10118 liquid crystal molecule 10201 substrate 10202 Insulating film 10203 Conductive layer 10204 Insulating 10205 Semiconductor layer 10206 Semiconductor layer 10207 Conductive layer 10208 Insulating film 10209 Conductive layer 10210 Aligned film 10212 Aligned film 10213 Conductive layer 10214 Light-shielding film 10215 Color filter 10216 Substrate 10217 Spacer 10218 Liquid crystal molecule 10219 Alignment control projection 10231 Substrate 10232 Insulating film 10233 Conductive layer 10234 Insulating film 10235 Semiconductor layer 10236 Semiconductor layer 10237 Conductive layer 10238 Insulating film 10239 Conductive layer 10240 Aligned film 10242 Aligned film 10243 Conductive layer 10244 Light shielding film 10245 Color filter 10246 Substrate 10247 Spacer 10248 Liquid crystal molecule 10249 Part 10301 Substrate 10302 Insulating film 10303 Conductive layer 10304 Insulating film 10305 Semiconductor layer 10306 Semiconductor layer 0307 conductive layer 10308 insulating film 10309 conductive layer 10310 alignment film 10312 alignment film 10314 light blocking film 10315 color filter 10316 substrate 10317 spacer 10318 liquid crystal molecule 10331 substrate 10332 insulating film 10333 conductive layer 10334 insulating film 10335 semiconductor layer 10336 semiconductor layer 10337 conductive layer 10338 insulating Film 10339 Conductive layer 10340 Alignment film 10342 Alignment film 10343 Conductive layer 10344 Light-shielding film 10345 Color filter 10346 Substrate 10347 Spacer 10348 Liquid crystal molecule 10349 Insulation film 10401 Video signal line 10403 Capacitance line 10404 Transistor 10405 Pixel electrode 10406 Pixel capacity 10501 Scan line 10502 Video signal line 10503 Capacitance line 10504 Transistor 10505 Pixel electrode 10506 Pixel capacitor 10507 Orientation control protrusion 10511 Scan line 10512 Video signal line 10513 Capacitor line 10514 Transistor 10515 Pixel electrode 10516 Pixel capacitor 10517 Unit 10601 Scan line 10602 Video signal line 10603 Common electrode 10604 Transistor 10605 Pixel electrode 10611 Scan line 10612 Video signal line 10613 Common electrode 10614 Transistor 10615 Pixel electrode 106013 Common electrode 70101 Substrate 70102 Alignment film 70103 Roller 70104 Rubbing roller 70105 Sealing material 70106 Spacer 70107 Substrate 70108 Alignment film 70109 Liquid crystal 70110 Resin 70113 Liquid crystal inlet 70301 Substrate 70302 Alignment film 70303 Roller 7030 Rubbing roller 70305 Sealing material 70306 Spacer 70307 Substrate 70308 Alignment film 70309 Liquid crystal 80300 Pixel 80301 Switching transistor 80302 Driving transistor 80303 Capacitance element 80304 Light emitting element 80305 Signal line 80306 Scanning line 80307 Power supply line 80308 Common electrode 80309 Rectifying element 80400 Pixel 80401 Switching Transistor 80402 driving transistor 80403 capacitor 80404 light emitting element 80405 signal line 80406 scanning line 80407 power line 80408 common electrode 80409 rectifying element 80410 scanning line 80500 pixel 80501 switching transistor 80502 driving transistor 80503 capacitor 80504 light emitting element 80505 signal line 805 06 Scan line 80507 Power line 80508 Common electrode 80509 Erasing transistor 80510 Scan line 80600 Drive transistor 80601 Switch 80602 Switch 80603 Switch 80604 Capacitor element 80605 Capacitor element 80611 Signal line 80612 Power line 80613 Scan line 80614 Scan line 80620 Light-emitting element 80621 Common electrode 80700 Driving transistor 80701 Switch 80702 Switch 80703 Switch 80704 Capacitance element 80711 Signal line 80712 Power line 80713 Scan line 80714 Scan line 80730 Light emitting element 80731 Common electrode 80734 Scan line 60105 Transistor 60106 Wiring 60107 Wiring 60108 Transistor 60111 Wiring 60112 Counter electrode 60113 Conde Substrate 60115 Pixel electrode 60116 Partition 60117 Organic conductive film 60118 Organic thin film 60119 Substrate 60200 Substrate 60201 Wiring 60202 Wiring 60203 Wiring 60204 Wiring 60205 Transistor 60206 Transistor 60207 Transistor 60208 Pixel electrode 60211 Barrier 60212 Organic conductor film 60213 Organic thin film 60214 Counter electrode 60300 Substrate 60301 wiring 60302 wiring 60303 wiring 60304 wiring 60305 transistor 60306 transistor 60307 transistor 60308 transistor 60309 pixel electrode 60311 wiring 60312 wiring 60321 partition 60322 organic conductor film 60323 organic thin film 60324 counter electrode 190101 anode 190102 cathode 190103 hole transport Region 190104 electron transport region 190105 mixing region 190106 region 190107 region 190108 region 190109 region 190260 transport chamber 190261 transport chamber 190262 load chamber 190263 unload chamber 190264 intermediate processing chamber 190265 sealing processing chamber 190266 transport means 190267 transport means 190268 heating processing chamber 190269 formation Film processing chamber 190270 Film forming chamber 190271 Film forming chamber 190272 Plasma processing chamber 190273 Film forming chamber 190274 Film forming chamber 190276 Film forming chamber 190380 Evaporation source holder 190381 Evaporation source 190382 Distance sensor 190383 Articulated arm 190384 Material supply pipe 190386 Substrate stage 190387 Substrate chuck 190388 Mask chuck 190 89 Substrate 190390 Shadow mask 190391 Top plate 190392 Bottom plate 190277a Gate valve 190381a Evaporation source 190381b Evaporation source 190381c Evaporation source 190385a Material supply source 190385b Material supply source 190385c Material supply source 120100 Electrode layer 120102 Electroluminescent layer 120103 Electrode layer 120104 Insulating film 120104 120106 Insulating film 120200 Electrode layer 120201 Light emitting material 120202 Electroluminescent layer 120203 Electrode layer 120204 Insulating film 120205 Insulating film 120206 Insulating film 130100 Rear projection display device 130101 Screen panel 130102 Speaker 130104 Operation switches 130110 Housing 130111 Projector unit 130112 Mirror 130 00 Front projection display device 130201 Projection optical system 130301 Light source unit 130302 Light source lamp 130303 Light source optical system 130304 Modulation unit 130305 Dichroic mirror 130306 Total reflection mirror 130308 Display panel 130309 Prism 130310 Projection optical system 130400 Modulation unit 130401 Dichroic mirror 130402 Dichroic mirror 130403 Reflective mirror 130404 Polarized beam splitter 130405 Polarized beam splitter 130406 Polarized beam splitter 130407 Reflective display panel 130411 Projection optical system 130501 Dichroic mirror 130502 Dichroic mirror 130503 Red light dichroic mirror 130504 Phase plate 130505 Color filter plate 130506 Micro lens array 130507 Display panel 130508 Display panel 130509 Display panel 130511 Projection optical system 900101 Display panel 900102 Pixel unit 900103 Scan line driver circuit 900104 Signal line driver circuit 900111 Circuit board 900112 Control circuit 900113 Signal divider circuit 900114 Connection wiring 900201 Tuner 900202 video signal amplification circuit 900203 video signal processing circuit 900205 audio signal amplification circuit 900206 audio signal processing circuit 900207 speaker 900208 control circuit 9000020 input unit 900212 control circuit 900213 signal division circuit 900301 housing 900302 display screen 900303 speaker 900304 operation switch 90 0305 Input unit 900306 Sensor 900307 Microphone 900310 Charger 900312 Case 900313 Display unit 900316 Operation key 900317 Speaker unit 900318 Input unit 900319)
900320 Macrophone 900401 Display panel 900402 Printed wiring board 900403 Pixel unit 900404 Scanning line driving circuit 900405 Scanning line driving circuit 900406 Signal line driving circuit 9000040 Controller 9000040 Central processing unit (CPU)
9004009 Memory 900410 Power supply circuit 900411 Audio processing circuit 900412 Transmission / reception circuit 900413 Flexible printed circuit board (FPC)
900414 Interface (I / F) section 900415 Antenna port 900416 VRAM
900417 DRAM
900418 Flash memory 900419 Interface (I / F) unit 900420 Control signal generation circuit 900411 Decoder 900421 Decoder 900422 Register 900423 Arithmetic circuit 9000042 RAM
9000042 Input means 9000042 Microphone 9000042 Speaker 9000042 Antenna 9000050 Display panel 900533 FPC
900530 Housing 900531 Printed circuit board 900532 Speaker 900533 Microphone 900534 Transmission / reception circuit 90000535 Signal processing circuit 90000536 Input means 90000537 Battery 90000539 Case 900541 Sensor 900600 Mobile phone 90000601 Main body (A)
900602 body (B)
90063 Housing 9000060 Operation switches 9000060 Microphone 900706 Speaker 9000060 Circuit board 9000060 Display panel (A)
900609 Display panel (B)
900610 Hinge 900611 Sensor 900612 Input unit 900711 Housing 900712 Support base 900713 Display unit 900714 Input unit 900715 Sensor 9000071 Microphone 900717 Speaker 900718 Operation key 900719 LED lamp 900731 Main unit 900732 Display unit 900733 Image receiving unit 900734 Operation button 900736 External shutter button 900737 Input unit 900782 Sensor 9000073 Microphone 900740 Speaker 900741 LED lamp 900751 Main body 900752 Case 900753 Display unit 900754 Keyboard 900755 External connection port 9000075 Input device 9000075 Input unit 900758 Sensor 9007 59 Microphone 900760 Speaker 9000761 LED lamp 9000076 Reader / writer 900810 Case 90081 Display unit 900812 Remote control unit 9000081 Speaker unit 900901 Display panel 900901 Unit bus 901001 Column body 901002 Display panel 901101 Car body 901102 Display panel 901201 Door 901202 Display panel 901203 Display panel 901203 901301 Ceiling 901302 Display panel 901303 Hinge part 901411 Main body 901412 Display part 901413 Switch 901414 Operation key 901415 Infrared port 901416 Sensor 901418 Microphone 901419 Speaker 901420 LED lamp 901431 901,432 housing 901,433 display section A
901434 Display unit B
901435 part 901436 Operation key 901437 Speaker part 901438 Input means 901439 Sensor 901440 Microphone 901441 LED lamp 901451 Main body 901442 Display part 901453 Earphone 901454 Support part 901455 Input means 901456 Sensor 901457 Microphone 901458 Speaker 90151590 Display part 90151513 Display part 90151513 Storage medium insertion unit 901516 Input unit 901517 Sensor 901518 Microphone 901519 LED lamp 901531 Main unit 901532 Display unit 901533 Operation key 901534 Speaker 901535 Shutter button 901536 Image receiving unit 901537 Antenna 901538 On It means 901,539 sensor 901540 microphone 901 541 LED lamp 901611 housing 901,612 display unit 901613 display unit 901,614 speaker portion 901615 operation keys 901616 recording medium insertion portion 901,617 input means 901618 sensor 901619 microphone 901620 LED lamp

Claims (2)

A backlight and a display panel;
The backlight has a plurality of unit regions,
The display panel is a liquid crystal display device having a number of pixels larger than the number of the plurality of unit regions,
A function of individually controlling the light emission state in the plurality of unit regions;
And a function of controlling the light emission state at a cycle longer or shorter than a display cycle of an image displayed on the display panel. In claim 1,
4. The liquid crystal display device according to claim 1, wherein the brightness setting steps in each of the plurality of unit regions are four or more steps.

Images